JP7798528B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing games.

Among gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that manage various random numbers using hardware random numbers and software random numbers (see, for example, Patent Document 1). There are also machines that variably display multiple types of decorative identification information (decorative patterns) in response to the variably displayed specific identification information (special patterns) (see, for example, Patent Document 2).

Patent No. 6124313 JP 2017-86392 A

However, there was room for improving the marketability of gaming machines with the functions and configurations described in Patent Documents 1 and 2.

This invention was made in consideration of the above situation, and aims to provide a gaming machine with improved marketability.

The gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises:
A gaming machine that can variably display identification information including first identification information and second identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
The display of the identification information can be variably performed based on a plurality of types of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern,
In a presentation mode including a first presentation mode and a second presentation mode , a plurality of types of background images including a first background image and a second background image can be switched and displayed;
In the first presentation mode, when the background image is switched from the first background image corresponding to the first presentation mode to the second background image corresponding to the first presentation mode , a background fade-out display is executed in which the transparency of the first background image corresponding to the first presentation mode is gradually increased, and a background fade-in display is executed in which the transparency of the second background image corresponding to the first presentation mode is gradually decreased,
In the second presentation mode, when the background image is switched from the first background image corresponding to the second presentation mode to the second background image corresponding to the second presentation mode, a background fade-out display is executed in which the transparency of the first background image corresponding to the second presentation mode is gradually increased, and a background fade-in display is executed in which the transparency of the second background image corresponding to the second presentation mode is gradually decreased,
In the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode,
the region in which the identification information is variably displayed includes at least a first region and a second region;
when starting the variable display of the identification information, starting the variable display of the first identification information in the first area and starting the variable display of the second identification information in the second area;
a first identification information fade-out display can be performed by gradually increasing the transparency of the first identification information in the first area when variable display of the first identification information is started, and a second identification information fade-out display can be performed by gradually increasing the transparency of the second identification information in the second area when variable display of the second identification information is started,
When terminating the variable display of the identification information, the variable display of the first identification information is slowed down in the first area, and the variable display of the second identification information is slowed down in the second area;
a first identification information fade-in display can be performed in which the transparency of the first identification information is gradually decreased in the first area when the variable display of the first identification information is slowed down, and a second identification information fade-in display can be performed in which the transparency of the second identification information is gradually decreased in the second area when the variable display of the second identification information is slowed down,
At least one of the fade-in display of the first identification information in the first presentation mode or the fade-in display of the second identification information in the first presentation mode and the fade-in display of the background in the first presentation mode can be executed at a specific timing ,
At least one of the fade-in display of the first identification information in the second presentation mode or the fade-in display of the second identification information in the second presentation mode and the fade-in display of the background in the second presentation mode can be executed at a predetermined timing,
The length of the execution period of the fade-in display of the first identification information in the first presentation mode and the length of the execution period of the fade-in display of the second identification information in the first presentation mode are the same,
The length of the execution period of the fade-in display of the first identification information in the second presentation mode and the length of the execution period of the fade-in display of the second identification information in the second presentation mode are the same,
a duration of the background fade-in display in the first presentation mode is longer than a duration of the first identification information fade-in display in the first presentation mode and a duration of the second identification information fade-in display in the first presentation mode;
a duration of the background fade-in display in the second presentation mode is longer than a duration of the first identification information fade-in display in the second presentation mode and a duration of the second identification information fade-in display in the second presentation mode;
When the specific identification information is variably displayed in the predetermined variable display pattern, the fade-out display of the first identification information in the first presentation mode and the fade-out display of the second identification information in the first presentation mode can be executed over a first execution period,
When the specific identification information is variably displayed in the predetermined variable display pattern, the fade-out display of the first identification information in the second presentation mode and the fade-out display of the second identification information in the second presentation mode can be executed over a second execution period different from the first execution period,
A predetermined number of pending displays corresponding to variable displays that have not yet started can be updated and displayed up to the upper limit.
the identification information includes a character representation,
As the variable display of the identification information, a scroll action and a pre-start action in which the character display moves before the start of the scroll action can be executed,
The pre-start action is executed after the pending display is updated.
It is characterized by the following.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a random number for gaming. 10 is a flowchart showing a main process for game control. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a special symbol process. A diagram showing an example of the configuration of a special pattern process jump table. 10 is a flowchart showing a main process for performance control. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a game control microcomputer. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of an address map. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating examples of main setting of addresses included in a function setting register area. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating examples of main setting of addresses included in a function control register area. A diagram for explaining an example of settings for gaming random numbers. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a random number update period. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power supply start response process. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a function setting register stored value table. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of an RWM access protection register. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power-off process. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of use of a data configuration. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a random number update process. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of use of a data configuration. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an initial value change random number update process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an initial value determination random number update process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a start port switch passing process. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of use of a data configuration. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal special symbol processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of use of a data configuration. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol determination process. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of use of a data configuration. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol information setting process. A flowchart showing an example of a jackpot information data selection process. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of use of a data configuration. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of use of a data configuration. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process. This is a flowchart showing an example of a winning fluctuation pattern type table selection process. This is a flowchart showing an example of a process for selecting a fluctuation pattern type table when a winning combination is lost. A diagram for explaining an example of the configuration of a fluctuation pattern type allocation table. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a fluctuation pattern allocation table. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a fluctuation pattern allocation table. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a fluctuation pattern allocation table. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol process processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of use of a data configuration. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a gate switch passing process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of normal processing for normal symbols. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of use of a data configuration. FIG. 1 is a front view showing a gaming machine according to a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance control command. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of jackpot types. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a game control data storage area. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the data holding area for performance control, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the command buffer received at the time of starting winning. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a special symbol process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a start winning determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal special symbol processing. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variable display start setting process. This is a diagram for explaining decorative patterns and small patterns. (A1) and (A2) are figures showing the first presentation mode, (B1) and (B2) are figures showing the second presentation mode, (C1) and (C2) are figures showing the third presentation mode, and (D1) and (D2) are figures showing the fourth presentation mode. (A1) and (A2) are diagrams showing the relationship between the variable display area and the decorative pattern in the first presentation mode, and (B1) and (B2) are diagrams showing the relationship between the variable display area and the decorative pattern in the second presentation mode. (C1) and (C2) are diagrams showing the relationship between the variable display area and the decorative symbols in the third presentation mode, (D1) and (D2) are diagrams showing the relationship between the variable display area and the decorative symbols in the fourth presentation mode, and (E) is a diagram for explaining the manner in which the decorative symbols and the small symbols are displayed. 1A is a diagram showing the decorative pattern change start action, (B) is a change stop action, and (C) is a loop action. FIG. 10A is a diagram comparing various decorative pattern actions with the duration of lamp light emission control, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an example of loop lamp light emission control. (A1) to (A4) and (B1) to (B4) are diagrams illustrating examples of the operation of the hold display. A diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns in the first presentation mode. This is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns following Figure 36. A diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns in the second presentation mode. This is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns following Figure 38. A diagram showing details of the flow of variable display of decorative patterns in Figure 38. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns as modified example 1. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns following FIG. 41. A diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns in the third presentation mode. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining how the decorative pattern appears. A diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns in the fourth presentation mode. A diagram showing the flow of the stopped display of decorative patterns in the first presentation mode (second presentation mode). This figure shows the flow of decorative pattern stop display following Figure 46. (A) to (G) are diagrams showing the flow of decorative pattern stop displays when the number of reserved memories is three in the first presentation mode (second presentation mode). (A) and (B) are diagrams showing the flow of the stopped display of decorative patterns in the fourth presentation mode (third presentation mode). (A1) is a diagram showing a first background image, (A2) is a diagram showing a first predetermined background image, and (B) is a diagram explaining a change in background. A diagram showing the flow of background changes in the first presentation mode. This is a timing chart showing the flow of each part of the variable display in the first presentation mode. This is a timing chart showing the flow of each part of the variable display in the second presentation mode. This is a timing chart showing the flow of each part of the variable display in the third and fourth presentation modes. (A) is a timing chart showing the state of each part at the start of variable display in the first presentation mode, (B) is the second presentation mode, and (C) is the third and fourth presentation modes. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of a customer waiting demo performance. This figure shows an example of operation when a start winning occurs during a customer waiting demo performance. A diagram showing the flow of pseudo-consecutive announcements. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the pseudo consecutive number of times displayed and the pattern color, (B) is a diagram showing the types of pseudo consecutive number of times displayed and the pattern color, and (C) is a diagram showing the pseudo consecutive number of times displayed color determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the flow of reach effects. A diagram showing the flow of reach effects following Figure 60. 10A to 10C are diagrams showing examples of the operation of each part in reach performance. A diagram showing the flow of SP reach presentation. This is a diagram showing the flow of the SP reach presentation following Figure 63. A diagram showing an example of the operation of each part in the SP reach performance. (A1) to (A7) are diagrams showing a second modification of the present invention. 10A to 10D are diagrams showing a third modified example of the present invention.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is broadly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that forms the gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A gaming area is formed on the gaming board 2, and gaming balls, which serve as gaming media, are launched into this gaming area by a predetermined ball launching device.

A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at predetermined positions on the gaming board 2. In the example shown in Figure 1, they are provided on the right side of the gaming area. The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B can each variably display special symbols as multiple types of special identification information. Special symbols are also called "special symbols." The variably displayed special symbols are also called "special symbol games." Both the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are configured using 7-segment LEDs or the like. Special symbols are represented by numbers "0" to "9," symbols indicating "-," or any other lighting pattern. Special symbols may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of special symbols refers to, for example, the variable display of multiple types of special symbols. For other symbols, such as performance symbols, small symbols, and regular symbols, "variable display" also refers to the variable display of multiple types of symbols. Performance symbols are also called decorative symbols or ornamental symbols. Variable display is also called variable display, or simply "variation." Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling multiple symbols, and deforming, enlarging, or reducing one or more symbols. Variations may also include flashing a symbol. In the variable display of special symbols or regular symbols, multiple types of special or regular symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the variable display of performance symbols, multiple types of performance symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more performance symbols are deformed, enlarged, or reduced. In the variable display of any symbol, a predetermined symbol is ultimately displayed as a static display. The static display is also called a derived display, or simply "derivation." The symbol that finally stops and is displayed in a variable display is also called the final stop symbol or the confirmed symbol. The symbol that finally stops in a special symbol game is also called the confirmed special symbol. The display result of the variable display includes the display result of the special symbol, and is also called the variable display result. The display result of the special symbol is also called the special symbol display result. The execution time of the variable display includes the special symbol change time, which is the time during which the special symbol changes, and is also called the variable display time. The special symbol change time can be set to a different time depending on the change pattern of the special symbol, of which multiple patterns are prepared in advance.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern." The special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game." A special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays special patterns.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2. In the example shown in Figure 1, it is provided on the left side of the game area. The normal symbol display 20 can variably display normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. Normal symbols are also called "normal symbols." The variable display of normal symbols is also called a "normal symbol game." The normal symbol display 20 is constructed using 7-segment LEDs, etc. Normal symbols are represented by numbers "0" to "9," symbols indicating "-," or other arbitrary lighting patterns. Normal symbols may include patterns in which some or all of the multiple LEDs are lit, or patterns in which all of the multiple LEDs are turned off. The final stopping symbol in a normal symbol game is also called a confirmed normal symbol. The display result of the normal symbol is also called a normal symbol display result. The execution time during which the normal symbol is variably displayed in a normal symbol game is also called a normal symbol fluctuation time. The normal symbol variation time can be set to a different time depending on the normal symbol variation pattern, of which multiple patterns are prepared in advance.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 may be configured using a mechanism capable of forming any image, such as an LCD (liquid crystal display), organic EL (electroluminescence), dot matrix LED, projector and screen, 3D image projection device, or any other device. The image display device 5 is capable of displaying various types of effect images. Furthermore, the image display device 5 is not limited to effect images, and can also display any control-related image, such as an inspection image or a setting image.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, variable display of effect symbols can be performed in synchronization with the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. The effect symbols are display symbols that show numbers or the like, and are multiple types of decorative identification information different from special symbols and normal symbols. On the screen of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 1, there are provided effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R for "left," "center," and "right," respectively. Variable display of effect symbols is performed, for example, by scrolling or updating the effect symbols vertically in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game. Synchronization of the variable display may be achieved as long as the timing at which the symbol change begins and the timing at which the change ends and the symbol is finally displayed stationary are common for different types of symbols. The final stopped symbol in the variable display of effect symbols is also referred to as the confirmed effect symbol, confirmed decorative symbol, or confirmed decorative symbol. The variable display of the effect symbols is synchronized with the first and second special symbol games, so the variable display time of the effect symbols is the same as the special symbol variation time.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area capable of displaying effect images corresponding to pending displays and active displays. A pending display is a display corresponding to a variable display that has not yet been executed and is on hold. An active display is a display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display-compatible displays that correspond to variable displays. A display area that displays a pending display is also referred to as a pending display area. A display area that displays an active display is also referred to as an active display area. The number of pending variable displays is also referred to as the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. The sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

Above the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B shown in Figure 1, there are provided a first reserve indicator 25A and a second reserve indicator 25B, each composed of a plurality of LEDs. The first reserve indicator 25A displays the first reserve memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second reserve indicator 25B displays the second reserve memory number by the number of lit LEDs. Above the normal symbol display device 20 shown in Figure 1, there is provided a normal symbol reserve indicator 25C, composed of a plurality of LEDs. The normal symbol reserve indicator 25C displays the normal symbol reserve number by the number of lit LEDs. The normal symbol reserve number is the reserve memory number corresponding to the normal symbol game.

Below the image display device 5 are provided a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B. The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state, allowing game balls to enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. The variable winning ball device 6B forms a second starting winning opening that can be switched between a closed state and an open state by a normal electric device solenoid 81 shown in Figure 2 as a normal electric device. The variable winning ball device 6B is equipped with, for example, an electric tulip-type device with a pair of movable wings. When the normal electric device solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wings are in a vertical position, causing the second starting winning opening to be in a closed state that prevents game balls from entering, or in a normal open state that makes it difficult for game balls to enter. When the normal electric device solenoid 81 is on, the variable winning ball device 6B tilts the movable wing piece to an open state where the second starting winning port can be entered by game balls, or to an expanded open state where the second starting winning port can be easily entered by game balls. The open state where the second starting winning port can be entered by game balls or the expanded open state where it can be easily entered by game balls is also referred to as the first variable state. The closed state where the second starting winning port cannot be entered by game balls or the normal open state where it is difficult for game balls to enter is also referred to as the second variable state. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to devices equipped with an electric tulip-type device, as long as it can be changed between the first variable state and the second variable state.

The entry of a gaming ball into the first start entry port formed by the winning ball device 6A is also referred to as a first start entry. The entry of a gaming ball into the second start entry port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is also referred to as a second start entry. A gaming ball that enters the first start entry port is detected by the first start entry port switch 22A shown in FIG. 2. A gaming ball that enters the second start entry port is detected by the second start entry port switch 22B shown in FIG. 2. Upon the occurrence of a first start entry, a predetermined number of prize balls, for example, three, are paid out, and the first reserved memory count can be updated to increment by one. However, if the first reserved memory count has reached its upper limit, the first reserved memory count will not be updated even if a first start entry occurs. When the first reserved memory count is incremented by one, the first start condition is met, and a first special symbol game in which special symbols are variably displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A becomes playable. When a second start win occurs, a predetermined number of prize balls, such as three, are paid out, and the second reserved memory count can be updated to increment by one. However, if the second reserved memory count has reached its upper limit, the second reserved memory count will not be updated even if a second start win occurs. When the second reserved memory count is incremented by one, the second start condition is met, and a second special symbol game can be played in which special symbols are variably displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B.

General winning openings 10 are provided at predetermined positions on the gaming board 2, and are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In the example shown in Figure 1, general winning openings 10 are provided in two locations on the lower left of the gaming area. When a gaming ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of prize balls, such as 10, are paid out.

In the play area formed by the playboard 2, a first path and a second path are provided as paths along which game balls flow down. The first path is mainly provided in the area to the left of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front. The second path is mainly provided in the area to the right of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front. The area to the left of the image display device 5 is also referred to as the left play area or left play area. The area to the right of the image display device 5 is also referred to as the right play area or right play area. The left play area and the right play area may be separated, for example, by the end face of the image display device 5 in the play area or the arrangement of the game pegs. Firing a game ball toward the left play area to cause it to flow down the first path is also referred to as a left hit. Firing a game ball toward the right play area to cause it to flow down the second path is also referred to as a right hit. The first path is also referred to as the left hit path. The second path is also referred to as the right hit path. The first path and the second path may be separate paths, or may be paths that are partially shared.

In response to operation of a ball operating handle provided on the ball launching device, a gaming ball is launched from the ball launching device and launched into the gaming area. When a gaming ball launched into the gaming area is guided to the left gaming area and flows down the first path, it is guided, for example, along the arrangement of gaming pins, making it impossible or difficult to guide it to the second path in the right gaming area. When a gaming ball launched into the gaming area is guided to the right gaming area and flows down the second path, it is guided, for example, along the arrangement of gaming pins, making it impossible or difficult to guide it to the first path in the left gaming area.

The winning ball device 6A is provided on the first path in the left-side play area, allowing game balls flowing down the first path to enter. The variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the second path in the right-side play area, allowing game balls flowing down the second path to enter. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may also be able to accept game balls flowing down the first path in the left-side play area. The variable winning ball device 6B may also be positioned so that game balls flowing down the second path in the right-side play area have an easier time entering than game balls flowing down the first path in the left-side play area.

The second path in the right-side game area is provided with a passing gate 41 and a special variable winning ball device 50. The passing gate 41 forms a passing area through which game balls can pass. Game balls that pass through the passing gate 41 are detected by the gate switch 21 shown in Figure 2. Based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41, the number of normal reserved memories can be added or updated, and variable display of normal symbols by the normal symbol display device 20 can be executed as a normal symbol game. The passing gate 41 can be configured as a normal symbol activation port through which game balls can enter. In this case, the gate switch 21 can be configured as a normal symbol activation port switch that can detect game balls that have entered the normal symbol activation port.

The special variable prize ball device 50 is a special electric device that forms a large prize opening that can be switched between a closed and an open state by a large prize opening solenoid 82. The upper part of the special variable prize ball device 50 has a guide passageway that is wide enough in the front-to-back direction to allow game balls to pass through. This guide path slopes downward from right to left, with walls provided on both the front and back sides of the extended passageway. A device entrance that serves as the large prize opening is formed in the center of the guide passageway. In the special variable prize ball device 50, a movable member 52 that can move in the front-to-back direction is provided as a large prize opening opening/closing member at a position where the large prize opening can be opened and closed. In the special variable prize ball device 50, a fixed member 53 that forms a fixed passageway is provided in the portion of the guide passage where the large prize opening is not formed.

The movable member 52 is driven by the large prize opening solenoid 82 and can move back and forth to open and close the special device entrance, which serves as the large prize opening. In the special variable prize ball device 50, game balls that enter the device through the large prize opening are detected by the count switch 23. Inside the special variable prize ball device 50, a V prize area 51, which serves as a specific area and serves as a prize area through which game balls can pass, is provided. Also, inside the special variable prize ball device 50, a normal area different from the V prize area 51 is provided. Above the V prize area 51, a plate-shaped distribution member is provided as a V prize opening opening/closing member that can switch the V prize area 51 between an open state and a closed state. The distribution member is driven by the specific area solenoid 83 and can move back and forth to open and close the V prize area 51. When the V prize area 51 is in the open state, game balls can pass through it, and when it is in the closed state, game balls cannot pass through it. Gaming balls that pass through the V winning area 51 are detected by the specific area switch 24. Gaming balls that do not pass through the V winning area 51 pass through the normal area. Gaming balls that pass through the V winning area 51 and gaming balls that do not pass through the V winning area 51 but pass through the normal area are both detected by the outlet switch 26 and then discharged outside the special variable winning ball device 50.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the gaming board 2 is equipped with a windmill that changes the direction and speed of the gaming balls as they flow down, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area is an outlet that takes in gaming balls that do not enter any of the winning holes. Speakers 8L and 8R are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3 to play and output sound effects, and gaming effect lamps 9 are provided around the periphery of the gaming area to light up the effects. The gaming effect lamps 9 are composed of LEDs. A movable body 32 that operates according to the effects is provided at a predetermined position on the gaming board 2.

A ball operation handle is provided at the lower right of the gaming machine frame 3, which is operated by the player to launch gaming balls toward the playing area using the ball launching device. The ball operation handle is also called an operation knob. A ball supply tray is provided at a specified position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, which holds gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned from a specified ball lending machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. The ball supply tray is also called the upper tray. Below the upper tray is a prize ball storage tray into which prize balls dispensed when the upper tray is full flow down and are stored. The prize ball storage tray is also called the lower tray.

A stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided at predetermined positions on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A can be held and tilted by the player, and is equipped with a trigger button that the player can push and pull. Operation of the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A shown in FIG. 2. The push button 31B can be pressed by the player. Operation of the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B shown in FIG. 2. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and push button 31B are used as detection means for detecting player operations and other actions, but other detection means may also be used.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player's rotation of the ball-hitting control handle provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, a normal game is initiated by the normal symbol display device 20. Note that, if the previous normal game is still being played, the normal game based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41 cannot be immediately played. Therefore, the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit, such as "4." In the normal game, if a specific normal symbol, such as a normal winning symbol, is displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol is "normal winning." In contrast, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol, such as a normal losing symbol, is displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol is "normal losing." In the case of a "normal winning," opening control is performed to place the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state or an expanded open state for a predetermined period of time. At this time, the second starting winning port is in an open state or an enlarged open state.

When a gaming ball passes through and enters the first start entry opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game can be initiated by the first special symbol display device 4A. When a gaming ball passes through and enters the second start entry opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game can be initiated by the second special symbol display device 4B. Note that even if a gaming ball enters the start entry opening and a start entry occurs during a period when a special symbol game is being played or during a period when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state or a small jackpot game state, the special symbol game based on the start entry cannot be immediately executed. Therefore, the special symbol game based on the start entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit, such as "4." In a special symbol game, when a specific special symbol, such as a jackpot symbol, is displayed as a fixed special symbol, the display result of the special symbol is "jackpot." In contrast, when a predetermined special pattern different from a jackpot pattern, such as a small win pattern, is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special pattern, the display result of the special pattern will be "small win." Also, when a special pattern different from a jackpot pattern or a small win pattern, such as a loss pattern, is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special pattern, the display result of the special pattern will be "loss." Furthermore, when a special pattern different from a jackpot pattern, small win pattern, or loss pattern, such as a time-saving pattern, is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special pattern, the display result of the special pattern may be "time-saving." Special patterns may not include time-saving patterns. In other words, the display result of the special pattern may not include "time-saving."

In a special game, once the special symbol display results in a "jackpot," the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, which is advantageous to the player. In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed in the special variable prize ball device 50 can be opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time, such as 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds, has elapsed, or until the number of game balls entering the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number, whichever occurs first. The predetermined period during which the large prize opening can be controlled to be open is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, also referred to as the maximum opening period. In the jackpot game state, one cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round or round play. In the jackpot game state, such rounds can be repeated until a predetermined maximum number of times is reached, such as 15 or 2 times. In the jackpot game state, the player can win prize balls by entering game balls into the large prize opening. Therefore, a jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds played in a jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit unlock period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

When the display result of a special symbol is a "jackpot," this includes multiple jackpot types. For example, the opening mode of the jackpot slot, such as the number of rounds or maximum opening period, and the game state after the jackpot game state ends, such as normal state, time-saving state, or probability variable state, can be set to multiple different types, and a jackpot type is specified corresponding to each setting. The multiple jackpot types may include some or all of the jackpot types with many prize balls, jackpot types with few prize balls, or jackpot types with almost no prize balls, or they may include jackpot types with similar numbers of prize balls that can be obtained. Controlling to a jackpot game state based on the display result of a special symbol being a "jackpot" is also called a pattern jackpot, a special symbol jackpot, a variable display jackpot, or a direct hit jackpot.

In a special game, after the display result of the special symbol indicates a "small win," the game is controlled to a small win game state. In the small win game state, the large prize opening formed in the special variable prize ball device 50 can be opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small win game state, the large prize opening may be opened in the same opening mode as the large prize opening in the large win game state for certain large win types. The large prize opening may be opened in the same opening mode by sharing the same number of openings and opening period. Alternatively, in the small win game state, the large prize opening may be opened in a different opening mode from the large win game state. As with the large win type, when the display result of the special symbol indicates a "small win," multiple small win types may be included. The large win type and small win type are also collectively referred to as the win type. The operation of opening and closing the large prize opening in the small win game state is also referred to as the start operation. When in the small win gaming state, the special variable winning ball device 50's role entrance, which serves as the large winning opening, is opened and the gaming ball passes through the V winning area 51 and is detected by the specific area switch 24, the conditions for a big win are met and control to the big win gaming state is possible. When in the small win gaming state the gaming ball passes through the V winning area 51, causing a V winning, and the game is controlled to the big win gaming state, this is also called a small win via big win.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game state can be controlled to a time-saving state or a probability variable state depending on the type of jackpot. Also, in a special symbol game, after the display result of the special symbol becomes "time-saving," the game state is controlled to the time-saving state instead of being controlled to the jackpot game state. The time-saving state is a game state in which the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is more likely to be executed than in the normal state. A game state in which the second special symbol game is more likely to be executed than in the normal state is a game state in which the game ball is more likely to pass through and enter the second start winning hole than in the normal state. Control of whether or not the game ball is more likely to pass through the second start winning hole is also referred to as base control. Base control in the normal state is also referred to as normal base control or low base control. Base control in the time-saving state includes high base control. In addition to high base control, the time-saving state may also include medium base control. Medium base control is a base control that makes it easier for the game ball to pass through the second start winning port than low base control, but makes it harder for the game ball to pass through the second start winning port than high base control. A game state in which medium base control is performed is also called a medium base state. A game state in which high base control is performed is also called a high base state. High base control is also called high opening control.

In the normal state, medium base state, and high base state, it is possible for a time-saving symbol to be displayed as a static result of the display of a special symbol. However, in the medium base state and high base state, even if a time-saving symbol is displayed as a static result of the display of a special symbol, base control based on the time-saving symbol is not performed, and new control to transition to the medium base state or high base state is not initiated. In the time-saving state, it is possible to perform time-saving control that shortens the average variable display time more than in the normal state. For this reason, the time-saving state is also called the time-shortening state.

The time-saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols, especially the second special symbol, is improved, and therefore is included in special states that are advantageous to players and different from jackpot gaming states. When the gaming state is a probability variable state, in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is possible, which increases the probability that the display result of the special symbol will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. As a result, the probability variable state is also referred to as a probability variable state. The probability variable state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols is improved and a "jackpot" is more likely to occur, and therefore is included in special states that are advantageous to players and different from jackpot gaming states. The time-saving state and probability variable state continue until one of the predetermined termination conditions is met first, such as the execution of a predetermined number of special symbol games or control to the next jackpot gaming state. The termination condition is the execution of a predetermined number of special symbol games, and is also referred to as a count-cut state. A count-cut time-saving state is also referred to as a count-cut time-cut state. A count-cut probability variable state is also referred to as a count-cut probability variable state.

The normal game state is a game state that is not included in advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that are advantageous to the player, predetermined states such as a small jackpot game state, or special states such as a time-saving state or a probability variable state. The normal state is a game state in which the probability that the display result in a normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in a special game will be a "jackpot" are controlled to be the same as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1. The initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 is the control state after the initial setting process is performed without executing the specified recovery process after power is turned on, such as when a system reset is performed.

A state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and a state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and a state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. A high probability state and a low base state are also called a high probability low base state. Note that the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not include a probability variable state as a gaming state.

After the small win gaming state ends, there are cases where the game state is controlled to a big win gaming state based on the occurrence of a V win, and cases where a V win does not occur and the gaming state before the small win gaming state is entered remains unchanged. However, if the display result of the special symbol game is a "small win" and the specified number of special symbol games have been played in the count limit, control of the time-saving state and the probability variable state may end and the game state may return to normal. Note that the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not include a small win gaming state as a gaming state. In other words, the display result of the special symbol may not include a "small win."

When a time-saving condition based on the number of times the variable display is executed is met, the game state may be controlled to a time-saving state. Such a time-saving state is also called a rescue time-saving state. The time-saving condition may be a condition that can be met when, after the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, after a jackpot occurs, or after the display result of the special game shows "time-saving," a new jackpot game state or control to a time-saving state is not performed even if the variable display is executed a specific number of times.

(Progression of the production, etc.)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute various effects in accordance with the progress of the game. These effects include effects that notify the progress of the game and effects that add excitement to the game. These effects include displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, outputting sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R, turning on the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, vibrating the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B, or a combination of some or all of these, and may be executed using any effect device.

Effects that can be executed in accordance with the progress of the game include variable display of effect symbols. In response to the start of the first or second special symbol game, variable display of effect symbols begins in the "left," "center," and "right" effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5. When the determined special symbol that will be the display result in the first or second special symbol game is displayed as a stopped symbol, the determined effect symbol that will be the display result is displayed as a stopped symbol in the variable display of effect symbols. The determined effect symbol is composed of a combination of three effect symbols corresponding to the "left," "center," and "right" effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. During the period from the start to the end of the variable display of effect symbols, the display mode in the variable display of effect symbols may become a reach mode. A reach mode is a mode in which, when the effect symbols that have stopped on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination, the effect symbols that have not yet stopped continue to change. When the display mode of the variable display of the performance symbols becomes a reach mode, it is also said that a reach has been achieved.

A reach effect can be executed in response to the variable display of the effect symbol reaching a reach state. The pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute multiple types of reach effects so that the probability that the display result of the variable display will be a "jackpot" varies depending on the effect state. The "jackpot" probability corresponding to the effect state is also referred to as the jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation. Reach effects include, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than normal reach. Additionally, depending on the execution time of the reach effect, it may also include short reach and long reach, which has a longer execution time than short reach.

When the display result of the special symbol is a "jackpot," a fixed effect symbol that forms a predetermined jackpot combination is displayed as a static display result on the screen of the image display device 5. As an example, identical effect symbols, such as a symbol showing the number "7," are displayed statically on a predetermined valid line in the "left," "center," and "right" effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the jackpot gaming state ends, odd-numbered effect symbols, such as a symbol showing the number "7," may be displayed statically. In the case of a "non-probability jackpot" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the jackpot gaming state ends, even-numbered effect symbols, such as a symbol showing the number "6," may be displayed statically. A "non-probability jackpot" is also called a "normal jackpot." In this case, odd-numbered effect symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols. Even-numbered symbols are also called non-variable symbols or normal symbols. After a non-variable symbol reaches a reach state, an upgraded symbol may be executed, ultimately resulting in a "variable jackpot."

When the display result of the special pattern is a "small win," a fixed effect pattern that is a predetermined small win combination is displayed as a stopped effect pattern display result on the screen of the image display device 5. As an example, the same effect pattern, such as an effect pattern showing a number other than "7," may be displayed stopped on a predetermined valid line in the "left," "center," and "right" effect pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. A common fixed effect pattern may be displayed when the display result of the special pattern is a "big win" and a "small win."

When the display result of the special pattern is a "miss," the display result may be a static display without the variable display of the effect pattern becoming a reach state. In this case, the display result of the effect pattern is a static display of the confirmed effect pattern of the non-reach combination. A display result in which the confirmed effect pattern of the non-reach combination is displayed without becoming a reach state is also called a non-reach miss. When the display result of the special pattern is a "miss," the variable display of the effect pattern may become a reach state, and the display result may be a static display after the reach effect is executed. In this case, the display result of the effect pattern is a static display of the confirmed effect pattern of the reach combination that is not a big hit combination or a small hit combination. A display result in which the confirmed effect pattern of the reach combination is displayed after becoming a reach state is also called a reach miss.

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include variable display compatible displays such as hold displays and active displays. In addition, for example, preview effects that predict the reliability of a jackpot can be executed while the display symbols are variable. Preview effects may include variable preview effects that predict the reliability of a jackpot corresponding to the currently executing variable display, and pre-read preview effects that predict the reliability of a jackpot corresponding to the variable display before execution, whose execution is on hold. Pre-read preview effects may be capable of executing change effects that change the display mode of variable display compatible displays such as hold displays and active displays to a mode that is different from normal.

On the screen of the image display device 5, it may be possible to temporarily stop the effect symbols while they are being displayed in a variable manner, and then resume the variable display, thereby executing a pseudo consecutive effect that makes a single variable display appear as if it were multiple variable displays. The pseudo consecutive effect may be set so that the reliability of a jackpot is higher when the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and then the variable display is resumed a large number of times, compared to when the number of times the variable display is reduced. The variable display of the effect symbols may include cases where the pseudo consecutive effect is executed before the reach state is reached, and cases where the pseudo consecutive effect is executed after the reach state is reached. Additionally, the pseudo consecutive effect may be executed at multiple times when the variable display of the effect symbols is displayed in a variable manner.

While controlling the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to execute a jackpot effect that notifies the player of the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot effect may include an effect that notifies the number of rounds and an advancement effect that suggests or notifies that the advantage of the jackpot gaming state is improving. While controlling the small jackpot gaming state, it is possible to execute a small jackpot effect that notifies the player of the small jackpot gaming state. By executing a common effect during control of the jackpot gaming state and during control of the small jackpot gaming state, it may be possible to make it impossible or difficult for the player to recognize whether the current gaming state is a jackpot gaming state or a small jackpot gaming state.

In a non-playing state where no special game or the like is being played and no game is in progress, a demonstration effect image can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. A demonstration effect image is also called a demo image. The display of a demo image is also called a demo display. The effect produced by a demo display is also called a customer waiting demo effect.

(Board configuration)
2, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, a power supply board 17, etc. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a firing control board are arranged on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is the main control board and has the ability to control the progress of play in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The progress of play includes the execution of various games and transitions between game states, such as the execution of special games involving reserved ball management, the execution of regular games involving reserved ball management, jackpot game states, small jackpot game states, time-saving states, and probability variable states. The main board 11 is equipped with a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, and a solenoid circuit 111.

The game control microcomputer 100 provided on the main board 11 is, for example, a single-chip microcomputer and can be configured with a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105. Some or all of the ROM 101, RAM 102, and random number circuit 104 may be external to the game control microcomputer 100, or may be built into the game control microcomputer 100. The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches used for game ball detection and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The various switches used for game ball detection include, for example, a gate switch 21, start port switches such as a first start port switch 22A and a second start port switch 22B, a count switch 23, a specific area switch 24, and an outlet switch 26. The detection signal indicates that a game ball has passed or entered and turned on a switch. Transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered. The solenoid circuit 111 can supply solenoid drive signals from the game control microcomputer 100 to the normal electric role solenoid 81, the big prize opening solenoid 82, and the specific area solenoid 83. The solenoid drive signal may be any signal that turns on each solenoid.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 is a non-volatile storage device that stores computer programs and data used for game control. The data stored in ROM 101 includes table data constituting tables used for variation patterns, presentation control commands, and various other settings, judgments, and decisions. The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 is a temporary storage device that provides a work area used for game control and a stack for saving data. RAM 102 may serve as backup RAM that stores the contents of some or all of the memory area so that they can be restored within a specified period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is interrupted. RAM 102 is also referred to as RWM (Read/Write Memory). The work area of RAM 102 includes memory areas capable of storing various data used for game control, such as counters, timers, buffers, and storage areas for various codes and numerical values. The CPU 103 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 can control the progress of games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by executing processes corresponding to the programs stored in the ROM 101.

The random number circuit 104 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values used when controlling the progress of a game. The random numbers used when controlling the progress of a game are also called game random numbers. Some or all of the game random numbers may be updated by hardware using a dedicated circuit, or they may be updated by software such as a computer program executed by the CPU 103.

Figure 3 shows an example of a gaming random number. The gaming random numbers include a random number MR1-1 for determining special symbols, a random number MR1-2 for winning symbols, a random number MR1-3 that serves as the initial value for winning symbols, a random number MR2-1 for winning normal symbols, a random number MR2-2 that serves as the initial value for winning normal symbols, a random number MR3-1 for normal symbol variation patterns, a random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing effect, a random number MR3-3 for selecting the variation pattern type, and a random number MR3-4 for the variation pattern.

The random number MR1-1 for determining special symbols is used to determine the display result of a special symbol, such as whether the display result of a special symbol is a "jackpot" or a "small hit." The random number MR1-2 for winning symbols is used to select a confirmed special symbol from multiple special symbols, such as a jackpot symbol when the display result of a special symbol is a "jackpot," or a small hit symbol when the display result of a special symbol is a "small hit." The random number MR1-3, which serves as the initial value for the winning symbol, is used to set the initial value of the random number MR1-2. The random number MR2-1 for the winning normal symbol is used to select a confirmed normal symbol from multiple normal symbols to be displayed when the display result of the variable display of normal symbols is a "normal hit." The random number MR2-2, which serves as the initial value for the winning normal symbol, is used to set the initial value of the random number MR2-1. The random number MR3-1 for normal symbol variation patterns is used to determine the normal symbol variation pattern as one of several pre-prepared patterns. The random number MR3-2 for selecting a miss effect is used to select whether or not the variable display of the effect patterns will be in a reach state when the display result of the special symbol is a "miss." The random number MR3-3 for selecting a variation pattern type is used to select the type of variation pattern for the special symbol. The variation pattern type for special symbols is a group that pre-classifies the variation patterns of special symbols based on, for example, the presentation state during the variable display of the effect patterns, and may be configured to include one or more variation patterns. The random number MR3-4 for a variation pattern is used to select the variation pattern for the special symbol.

When making various judgments and decisions based on random number values, such as numerical data indicating the value of a gaming random number, the CPU 103 reads and references various tables from ROM 101. Even when random number values are not used, the necessary tables may be read and referenced from ROM 101 to make various judgments, decisions, settings, etc.

The I/O 105 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 includes an input port into which various signals are input and an output port from which various signals are output. The various signals input to the input port of the I/O 105 may include detection signals from various switches transmitted via the switch circuit 110. The various signals output from the output port of the I/O 105 may include signals for controlling the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal hold indicator 25C, etc., and solenoid drive signals for driving the normal electric gimmick solenoid 81, the large prize opening solenoid 82, the specific area solenoid 83, etc.

The main board 11 transmits presentation control commands corresponding to the progress of the game to the presentation control board 12 as part of the operation of controlling the progress of the game using the game control microcomputer 100. Presentation control commands are commands that specify or notify the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. Presentation control commands may include commands that specify various determination results on the main board 11, such as the display results of the special game, the type of win, and the variation pattern; commands that specify the status of the game, such as the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the big prize slot, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, and the game status; and commands that specify the occurrence of an error, etc.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving effect control commands and controlling the effects based on the received effect control commands. The effects that can be controlled by the effect control board 12 include various effects that correspond to the progress of the game, such as driving the movable body 32, as well as various notifications such as error notifications and notifications when power is restored. The effect control board 12 comprises a effect control CPU 120, ROM 121, RAM 122, display control unit 123, random number circuit 124, and I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes programs stored in ROM 121 to perform processing to control the execution of effects together with the display control unit 123. This processing is for realizing the various functions of the effect control board 12, and includes determining the effects to be executed. The effect control CPU 120 uses various data stored in ROM 121, such as data from various tables, and also uses RAM 122 as its main memory. The effect control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute effects based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and push sensor 35B. The detection signal here is a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected, and may be a signal that appropriately indicates the content of the operation.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and controls the execution of mainly display-related effects based on instructions to execute effects from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 displays effect images on the screen of the image display device 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed to the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 also supplies a sound designation signal to the audio control board 13 and a lamp signal to the lamp control board 14. The sound designation signal designates the sound to be output from speakers 8L and 8R. The lamp signal designates the on/off state of the game effect lamp 9. The supply of the sound designation signal and lamp signal enables sound output from speakers 8L and 8R and the turning on or off of the game effect lamp 9 in synchronization with the display of the effect image. The display control unit 123 may be capable of supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the motor or solenoid of the movable body 32, or to a driver circuit that drives the movable body 32. A driver board for driving the movable body 32 may be provided separately from the performance control board 12.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values used when controlling the execution of various performances. Random numbers used when controlling the execution of performances are also called performance random numbers. Performance random numbers may be updated by software such as a computer program executed by the performance control CPU 120. When making various judgments and decisions based on random number values, such as numerical data indicating the values of performance random numbers, the performance control CPU 120 reads and references various tables from ROM 121. Even when random number values are not used, the performance control CPU 120 may read and reference the necessary tables from ROM 121 to make various judgments, decisions, settings, etc.

The I/O 125 includes an input port for receiving, for example, performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals. The input port of the I/O 125 may include an input terminal for a detection signal supplied from the controller sensor unit 35A and an input terminal for a detection signal supplied from the push sensor 35B. The output port of the I/O 125 may include an output terminal for a video signal supplied to the image display device 5, an output terminal for a sound designation signal supplied to the audio control board 13, and an output terminal for a lamp signal supplied to the lamp control board 14.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on a sound designation signal from the display control unit 123, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal. The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on a lamp signal from the display control unit 123, turning the game effect lamp 9 on or off in the manner designated by the lamp signal. In this way, the audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the turning on and off of the game effect lamp 9 can be controlled based on signals from the display control unit 123. Note that the performance control CPU 120 may perform some or all of the control of audio output and lamp on and off, such as supplying sound designation signals and lamp signals, and the control of the movable body 32, such as supplying signals to operate the movable body 32. Boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, audio control board 13, and lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As in the configuration example shown in Figure 2, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or, unlike the configuration example shown in Figure 2, one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

The power supply board 17 can supply power from an AC power source, such as an external power source like a commercial power supply, such as 100V AC, to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting AC to DC, and a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (e.g., 12V DC or 5V DC). The pachinko gaming machine 1 can switch between power-on and power-off by operating the power switch 91. The switch circuit 110 of the main board 11 receives a reset signal, power-off signal, and clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal that stops operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer IC, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal turns off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and turns on when the specified power supply voltage remains below the specified value for a period of time that exceeds the power-off reference time. The clear signal turns on, for example, in response to pressing the clear switch 92 on the power supply board 17.

(operation)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main board 11)
First, we will explain the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts, the game control microcomputer 100 starts up, and the CPU 103 executes main processing for game control.

Figure 4 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing P_MAIN executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11. When the game control main processing P_MAIN shown in Figure 4 starts, the CPU 103 executes the power supply start response processing P_POWER_ON (step S1), followed by the RWM check processing P_RWM_CHK (step S2). The power supply start response processing P_POWER_ON in step S1 can execute initial settings of the game control microcomputer 100 in response to the start of power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1. The initial settings of the game control microcomputer 100 may include initialization of output ports, setting interrupt vectors, setting internal device registers, and setting specific registers. The RWM check processing P_RWM_CHK in step S2 includes a checksum calculation process, which compares the checksum data obtained as a result of the process with the data stored in the checksum buffer. If the two data match, it is determined that the contents stored in the RAM 102 are correct.

Next, it is determined whether a predetermined recovery condition is met (step S3). The recovery condition can be met when the clear signal corresponding to the operation of the clear switch 92 is in the OFF state, the checksum buffer contains normal stored data, and the stored contents of the RAM 102 (which serves as backup RAM) are normal. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, if the clear switch 92, for example, located on the power supply board 17, is pressed, an ON clear signal is input to the gaming control microcomputer 100. If such an ON clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not met. The checksum buffer stores the checksum data calculated in the checksum calculation process when the backup monitoring timer measures the backup judgment time during the previous power outage. If the time value of the backup monitoring timer does not match the specific value corresponding to the backup judgment time, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not met. The backup data may be data stored in the gaming work area of the RAM 102 (which serves as backup RAM for gaming control). In step S3, it is determined whether the recovery conditions can be met based on the results of checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and data errors using the RWM check process P_RWM_CHK in step S2.

If the recovery conditions are met (Step S3: Yes), the backup setting process P_BACKUP_SET is executed (Step S4). The backup setting process P_BACKUP_SET uses the backup command transmission table to enable the performance control commands corresponding to the backup time to be sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The backup setting process P_BACKUP_SET also clears the process codes, timers, counters, and flags specified in the backup setting table, enabling them to be initialized.

If the recovery condition is not met (Step S3: No), the initialization setting process P_INIT_SET is executed (Step S5). The initialization setting process P_INIT_SET enables the transfer of clear data to the game work area, which serves as a working area in RAM 102. This initializes the game work area in RAM 102. The initialization setting process P_INIT_SET then uses the initialization command transmission table to enable the transmission of corresponding performance control commands from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 at the time of initialization. The initialization setting process P_INIT_SET also clears the buffers, timers, pointers, and counters specified in the initialization setting table, enabling them to be initialized.

Then, the control start setting process P_STACON is executed (step S6). The control start setting process P_STACON may include a wait process. The wait process executes a loop process and waits until a set waiting time has elapsed, ensuring that sub-boards such as the performance control board 12 can be started. The control start setting process P_STACON may also include a specific count command transmission process or a command transmission process for individual chip number information. The specific count command transmission process enables a performance control command specifying the count value of a specific count counter to be transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the power is turned on. The specific count counter is located at a specified address in RAM 102 and is sufficient as long as it can count the remaining number of times until the number of executions of the variable display reaches the specific number corresponding to the time-saving condition. The command transmission process for individual chip number information enables a performance control command specifying the stored value of a chip individual number register to be transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The chip individual number register is included in the built-in register of the game control microcomputer 100, and is capable of storing a different value assigned to each chip as the chip individual number.

The control start setting process P_STACON may include startup out-of-area processing. The startup out-of-area processing is executed by reading a program stored in the non-game program area of ROM 101 in response to startup due to the start of power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1. The startup out-of-area processing may be, for example, performance display RWM initial value setting processing. The performance display RWM initial value setting processing makes it possible to set initial values for initial display using the 7-segment LEDs that make up the performance display monitor. The performance display monitor may be mounted, for example, on the main board 11, and may be capable of displaying content related to setting values and content related to the base. The setting value can be changed to one of multiple levels, such as six levels, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a setting change state in which the settings can be changed, making it possible to set the probability that the display result of the special pattern will be a "jackpot." The base is calculated by dividing the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball passes through each prize slot, such as the start prize slot, general prize slot, or special prize slot, by the number of game balls launched into the game area.

After the control start setting process P_STACON in step S6, a timer interrupt counter is set (step S7). In step S7, the PTC counter output value is set so that a periodic timer interrupt occurs every predetermined time, such as every 4 ms (milliseconds). The game control main process P_MAIN then enters a loop. In this loop, interrupts are disabled (step S8), the initial value determination random number update process P_TFINIT is executed (step S9), the loop out-of-area process P_REGOUT is executed (step S10), interrupts are enabled (step S11), and the process returns to step S8. Then, whenever an interrupt request signal is input from the PTC to the CPU 103 while the interrupt is enabled, the CPU 103 is enabled to execute timer interrupt processing. This allows the CPU 103 to execute timer interrupt processing every time a predetermined time, such as every 4 ms, has elapsed.

Figure 5 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing P_PCT for game control. In the timer interrupt processing P_PCT shown in Figure 5, power-off processing P_POWER_OFF is executed (step S51). Next, it is determined whether the fraudulent activity monitoring flag is "0" (step S52). The fraudulent activity monitoring flag is set to "1", which corresponds to the ON state, when magnetism is detected by the magnet sensor or when radio waves are detected by the frame radio wave sensor. In all other cases, the fraudulent activity monitoring flag is set to "0", which corresponds to the OFF state.

If the fraud monitoring flag is "1" (Step S52: No), the game stop process P_GAME_STOP is executed (Step S53). The game stop process P_GAME_STOP simply initializes the output port and turns off the output of the connection confirmation signal. The connection confirmation signal is transmitted from the main board 11 to the payout control board, and if it is turned off, the execution of the payout process on the payout control board is stopped.

If the fraud monitoring flag is "0" (Step S52; Yes), switch processing P_SW is executed (Step S54), switch error notification processing P_CON_CHK is executed (Step S55), random number update processing P_RANDOM is executed (Step S56), and initial value determination random number update processing P_TFINIT is executed (Step S57). Also, special symbol process processing P_TPROC is executed (Step S58), normal symbol process processing P_FPROC is executed (Step S59), information output processing P_JYOUHOU is executed (Step S60), prize ball processing P_PAY is executed (Step S61), and display processing P_HYOUZI is executed (Step S62). Furthermore, other timer interrupt response processing is executed (Step S63). After that, interrupt permission is set (Step S64), and timer interrupt processing P_PCT ends.

The power-off process P_POWER_OFF in step S51 judges the power confirmation signal transmitted from the power supply board 17, enabling checksum calculation processes and other processes to be executed when power is off. The switch process P_SW in step S54 judges the status of the input port, enabling updates to the switch-on buffer and other processes. The switch error notification process P_CON_CHK in step S55 can update the count value of a sensor-on counter specified, for example, by a switch error notification judgment table, and can display an error notification when the count value reaches a sensor abnormality error judgment value. The random number update process P_RANDOM in step S56 enables software random numbers among the game random numbers to be updated by software. The random number update process P_TFINIT for initial value determination in step S57 enables software to update game random numbers used as random number initial values.

The special symbol process P_TPROC in step S58 includes processing related to the variable display of special symbols and game states, such as managing the execution and reservation of special symbol games, controlling the jackpot and small jackpot game states, and controlling the game state. The normal symbol process P_FPROC in step S59 includes processing related to the variable display of normal symbols and controlling the state of the second start winning slot, such as managing the execution and reservation of normal symbol games based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 and controlling the opening and closing of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol win." The information output process P_JYOUHOU in step S60 sets the information output signal. The information output signal is a signal corresponding to information such as jackpot information, start information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to, for example, a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Jackpot information indicates the number of jackpots that have occurred. Start information indicates the number of start wins. Probability fluctuation information indicates the number of times the probability variable state has occurred. The prize ball processing P_PAY in step S61 includes a prize ball command output counter increment process and a prize ball control process. The prize ball command output counter increment process uses a prize ball number table to determine whether a switch is on, and when on is detected, updates the prize ball command output counter and the winning information output counter. The prize ball control process selects the process corresponding to the prize ball process code and controls the payout of prize balls based on the detection of game balls. The display process P_HYOUZI in step S62 sets the display for the first reserve indicator 25A, second reserve indicator 25B, regular reserve indicator 25C, and various other status indicator lights.

Figure 6 is a flowchart showing an example of processing that can be executed in step S58 of Figure 5 as the special symbol process P_TPROC. In the special symbol process P_TPROC, the CPU 103 sets a first start winning corresponding flag (step S101). The first start winning corresponding flag is set by executing a logical operation instruction or the like to reflect the state of the first start winning port switch 22A contained in the switch-on buffer in the flag register of the CPU 103. At this time, a zero flag in the flag register being in the on state indicates that the first start winning corresponding flag is in the off state. Conversely, a zero flag being in the off state indicates that the first start winning corresponding flag is in the on state. Next, a transfer instruction for setting the table pointer is issued to set the first start winning corresponding table (step S102). Then, it is determined whether the first start winning corresponding flag is on (step S103). If the first start winning flag is on (step S103; Yes), the start port switch passing process P_TZU_ON is executed (step S104).

If the first start winning corresponding flag is off in response to step S103 (step S103; No), or after the start winning switch passing process P_TZU_ON in step S104, the second start winning corresponding flag is set (step S105). The second start winning corresponding flag is set by executing a logical operation instruction or the like to reflect the state of the second start winning switch 22B contained in the switch-on buffer in the flag register of the CPU 103. At this time, a zero flag in the flag register being on indicates that the second start winning corresponding flag is off. Conversely, a zero flag being off indicates that the second start winning corresponding flag is on. Next, a transfer instruction for setting the table pointer is issued to set the second start winning corresponding table (step S106). After that, it is determined whether the second start winning corresponding flag is on (step S107). If the second start winning flag is on (step S107; Yes), the start port switch passing process P_TZU_ON is executed (step S108).

The start port switch passing process P_TZU_ON in step S104 uses the first start port winning table set in step S102 to update the first reserved memory count and total reserved memory count by incrementing them by 1 if the first reserved memory count is less than the upper limit, extracts a random number MR1-1 for determining a special symbol, a random number MR3-2 for selecting a miss effect, a random number MR3-3 for selecting a variation pattern type, and a random number MR3-4 for a variation pattern, stores these in their respective random number buffers, and then transfers them to the first special symbol reserved buffer. Additionally, the first reserved memory information designation command transmission table is used to enable a first reserved memory information designation command that specifies the first reserved memory count to be sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A value indicating "1" is then stored in the start port winning buffer as the start port winning designation value.

The start port switch passing process P_TZU_ON in step S108 uses the second start port winning table set in step S106 to update the second reserved memory count and total reserved memory count by incrementing them by 1 if the second reserved memory count is less than the upper limit, extracts the random number MR1-1 for determining the special symbol, the random number MR3-2 for selecting a miss effect, the random number MR3-3 for selecting the variation pattern type, and the random number MR3-4 for the variation pattern, stores these in their respective random number buffers, and then transfers them to the second special symbol reserved buffer. Additionally, the second reserved memory information designation command transmission table is used to enable the second reserved memory information designation command, which specifies the second reserved memory count, to be sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A value indicating "2" is then stored in the start port winning buffer as the start port winning designation value.

A common start port switch passing process P_TZU_ON can be executed in steps S104 and S108. Meanwhile, the start port switch passing process P_TZU_ON in step S104 uses the first start port winning table set in step S102, while the start port switch passing process P_TZU_ON in step S108 uses the second start port winning table set in step S106. In this way, the common start port switch passing process P_TZU_ON is executed using different start port winning tables. Therefore, different data settings and controls are possible when the gaming ball enters the first start port and when it enters the second start port, using common processing. The start port switch passing process P_TZU_ON may also include winning performance processing using the extracted gaming random number.

If the second start winning flag is off in step S107 (step S107; No), or after the start gate switch passing process P_TZU_ON in step S108, a transfer command that sets a pointer sets the special symbol process processing jump table (step S109). The special symbol process processing jump table is an address management table that selects and executes the process corresponding to the read value of the special symbol process code. The special symbol process code can be updated to any of 00 [H] to 0B [H] in accordance with the progress of game control in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and is also called the special symbol process code. Here, [H] indicates a hexadecimal number. Note that [B] can also be used to indicate a binary number.

Following step S109, a transfer command to read stored data is used to load the special symbol process code (step S110). Next, the 2-byte data selection process P_ABXEXEC is executed (step S111) to obtain the address of the process selected in accordance with the special symbol process code. The address obtained at this time is set in a pointer. After this, a subroutine call command is issued to execute the process pointed to by the pointer (step S112), making the process selected in accordance with the special symbol process code executable. When the selected process is completed and a return command is issued to return to the special symbol process process P_TPROC, this special symbol process process P_TPROC also ends, and a return command is issued to return to the game control timer interrupt process P_PCT.

Figure 7 shows an example configuration TT01 of the special symbol process processing jump table used in the special symbol process processing P_TPROC. The special symbol process processing jump table is configured to include table data that can be set in an internal register of the CPU 103 used as a pointer to the address of the process selected corresponding to the special symbol process code. The special symbol process processing jump table of example configuration TT01 includes special symbol normal processing P_TNORMAL when the special symbol process code is 00 [H], special symbol change processing P_TSTART when the special symbol process code is 01 [H], special symbol stop processing P_TSTOP when the special symbol process code is 02 [H], pre-small win opening processing P_TLFAN when the special symbol process code is 03 [H], small win opening processing P_TLOPEN when the special symbol process code is 04 [H], post-small win opening processing P_TLCLSF when the special symbol process code is 05 [H], and .... It includes table data that allows the pointer to be set to an address value corresponding to: small win ejection ball waiting process P_TLOUT when the other symbol process code is 06 [H]; small win end process P_TLEND when the special symbol process code is 07 [H]; pre-large prize opening process P_TINT when the special symbol process code is 08 [H]; large prize opening opening process P_TOPEN when the special symbol process code is 09 [H]; post-large prize opening process P_TCLSF when the special symbol process code is 0A [H]; and big win end process P_TEND when the special symbol process code is 0B [H].

The normal special symbol processing P_TNORMAL determines whether to start a special symbol game based on the presence or absence of stored reserved information, determines the special symbol display result using the random number MR1-1 for determining the special symbol, determines the confirmed special symbol to be displayed in a static state in the variable special symbol display, and determines the special symbol variation pattern. The special symbol display result includes "jackpot," "minor hit," "miss," etc., and if it is determined to be a "jackpot," it is determined that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player. Furthermore, if the special symbol display result is a "jackpot," it is determined which of several jackpot game states with different degrees of advantage to the player the game will be controlled to, depending on the jackpot symbol that becomes the confirmed special symbol. Therefore, by executing the special symbol normal processing P_TNORMAL, the CPU 103 can determine whether to control the state to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and can decide which of several advantageous states with different degrees of advantage to the player to control to. Furthermore, by executing the special symbol normal processing P_TNORMAL, the CPU 103 can decide on one of several types of variation patterns.

The special pattern change processing P_TSTART measures the time elapsed since the special pattern began to change on the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B, making it possible to determine whether the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern has elapsed. The special pattern stop processing P_TSTOP measures the time elapsed since the special pattern stopped changing on the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B, making it possible to determine whether the pattern stop time has elapsed. The pattern stop time can be set as the time for which the special pattern is stopped and displayed when it is determined in the special pattern change processing P_TSTART that the special pattern change time has elapsed. When the pattern stop time has elapsed, the special pattern process code is updated and various settings are made according to the special pattern display result. For example, if the special symbol display result is a "big hit," the special symbol process code can be updated to 08 [H]; if the special symbol display result is a "small hit," the special symbol process code can be updated to 03 [H]; and if the special symbol display result is a "miss," the special symbol process code can be updated to 00 [H].

Processing before small win opening P_TLFAN, processing during small win opening P_TLOPEN, processing after small win opening P_TLCLSF, waiting for small win balls to be discharged P_TLOUT, and processing after small win end P_TLEND are processes for controlling the progress of play in the small win game state. Processing before large win opening P_TINT, processing during large win opening P_TOPEN, processing after large win opening P_TCLSF, and processing after big win end P_TEND are processes for controlling the progress of play in the big win game state.

(Major operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, we will explain the main operations of the performance control board 12. When the performance control board 12 receives a supply of power voltage from the power supply board 17 or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process.

Figure 8 is a flowchart showing the main processing for performance control S_MAIN executed by the performance control CPU 120 on the performance control board 12. When the main processing for performance control S_MAIN shown in Figure 8 starts, the performance control CPU 120 executes the performance control initialization processing S_INIT (step S71). The performance control initialization processing S_INIT includes clearing RAM 122, setting various initial values, and setting registers for the timer circuit mounted on the performance control board 12. Next, the initial operation control processing S_SYOKI is executed (step S72). The initial operation control processing S_SYOKI enables control of the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as driving the movable body 32 to return it to its initial position and performing predetermined operation checks. Then, it determines whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time, such as 2 ms (milliseconds), elapses based on the register settings for the timer circuit. If the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), step S73 is repeated and the system waits.

When the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step S74), command analysis processing S_COMMAND is executed (step S75), performance control process processing S_CPROC is executed (step S76), performance random number update processing S_RANDOM is executed (step S77), and performance output processing S_OUT is executed (step S78). Then, other timer interrupt response processing is executed (step S79), and the process returns to step S73.

The command analysis process S_COMMAND in step S75 enables the reading of the effect control commands stored in the effect control command receiving buffer and the setting and control corresponding to the read effect control commands. By executing the command analysis process S_COMMAND, the effect control CPU 120 can update stored data indicating the status of flags, stored data in registers, and other stored data in the working area of RAM 122 in response to the effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11. The effect control process process S_CPROC in step S76 enables control of the execution of effects using various effect devices, including, for example, the display of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting or extinguishing of decorative light sources such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, and drive control of the movable body 32. The control content of effects using various effect devices can be determined, decided, and set based on the effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11 and the results of processing by the effect control CPU 120. The performance random number update process S_RANDOM in step S77 enables at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 to be updated by executing a software program.

Figure 9 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of processing that can be executed in step S76 shown in Figure 8 as the performance control process processing S_CPROC. The performance control CPU 120 executes the look-ahead performance setting processing S_SAKI_SET in the performance control process processing (step S151). The look-ahead performance setting processing S_SAKI_SET enables judgment, determination, and setting regarding the execution of a look-ahead preview performance, for example, based on the performance control command sent from the main board 11 at the time of the initial winning. The look-ahead performance setting processing S_SAKI_SET also makes it possible to update the hold display based on the number of hold memories specified from the performance control command.

After the pre-read effect setting process S_SAKI_SET in step S151, a transfer command that sets a pointer sets the effect control process jump table (step S152). The effect control process jump table is an address management table that selects and executes the process corresponding to the read value of the effect control process code. The effect control process code can be updated to any value between 00 [H] and 0A [H] depending on the progress of effect control in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and is also referred to as the effect process code. The effect control process code is loaded using a transfer command to read stored data (step S153). The address of the process selected corresponding to the effect control process code thus obtained is set in the effect control pointer (step S154). Therefore, by executing the process pointed to by the effect control pointer (step S115), the process selected corresponding to the effect control process code becomes executable.

Figure 9 (B) shows an example configuration TT02 of the performance control process jump table used in the performance control process processing S_CPROC. The performance control process jump table is composed of table data that can set the address of the process selected corresponding to the performance control process code in a register used as a performance control pointer. The effect control process processing jump table of configuration example TT02 includes table data that can set address values in the effect control pointer corresponding to: waiting for a change pattern command when the effect control process code is 00 [H]; start of effect pattern change processing when the effect control process code is 01 [H]; processing during effect pattern change when the effect control process code is 02 [H]; stop of effect pattern change processing when the effect control process code is 03 [H]; small win display processing when the effect control process code is 04 [H]; small win open processing when the effect control process code is 05 [H]; small win end effect processing when the effect control process code is 06 [H]; big win display processing when the effect control process code is 07 [H]; processing during a round when the effect control process code is 08 [H]; post-round processing when the effect control process code is 09 [H]; and big win end effect processing when the effect control process code is 0A [H].

The variation pattern command reception waiting process makes it possible to determine whether a variation pattern designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11 has been received. If it is determined that a variation pattern designation command has been received, the presentation control process code is updated to 01 [H], which corresponds to the presentation pattern variation start process. If it is determined that a variation pattern designation command has not been received, the demo display can be controlled. The presentation pattern variation start process makes it possible to start a variation-time presentation corresponding to a special game. For example, in response to a variation pattern command transmitted from the main board 11, it makes it possible to select a presentation pattern to use to control the variation-time presentation and start updating the presentation process timer that measures the presentation execution time. The presentation pattern variation in progress process makes it possible to control the switching timing of each presentation element that makes up the presentation pattern and to determine whether the presentation execution time has elapsed based on the timing value of the presentation process timer. If it is determined that the presentation execution time has elapsed, the presentation control process code is updated to 03 [H], which corresponds to the presentation pattern variation stop process. The effect pattern change stop process enables control of the end of the effect during change and control of the display of the effect result corresponding to the confirmed special pattern based on the establishment of the end condition for the effect during change, such as the elapse of the effect execution time or the receipt of a effect pattern confirmation command. At this time, the effect control process code is updated and various settings are made in accordance with the display result of the variable display. For example, if the display result of the variable display is a "big hit," the effect control process code can be updated to 07 [H]; if the display result of the variable display is a "small hit," the effect control process code can be updated to 04 [H]; and if the display result of the variable display is a "miss," the effect control process code can be updated to 00 [H].

The small hit display process, small hit opening process, and small hit end presentation process are processes for controlling the progression of presentations corresponding to the small hit game state. The big hit display process, round process, post-round process, and big hit end presentation process are processes for controlling the progression of presentations corresponding to the big hit game state.

(Variations of the basic explanation, etc.)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to the configuration, functions, processing, and operation described in the basic description and other explanations, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not need to have all of the technical features described in the embodiments, but may have some of the configurations described in the embodiments so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. When a subordinate concept is described in the embodiments, an invention of a generic concept using homologous or similar matters, or an invention of a generic concept using common properties, is included in the present invention, and may have some of the structure or characteristics described in the embodiments so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art.

Pachinko gaming machine 1 may be a payout gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, or it may be an enclosed gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

During the variable display of the special symbol, only one type of symbol, such as a "-" symbol, may be displayed, and this symbol may be displayed and extinguished repeatedly. One type of symbol may be displayed during the variable display, and this symbol may not be displayed when the variable display stops. For example, the display result may not be a "-" symbol, and a non-display state may be displayed in which no special symbol is displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to change the probability of winning a jackpot and the payout rate in response to multiple setting values. For example, in the normal special symbol processing of the special symbol process, the probability of winning a jackpot and the payout rate may be changed by using a different jackpot determination value for each setting value. As a specific example, the setting values are divided into six levels, from 1 to 6, with 6 representing the highest probability of winning a jackpot, and the probability of winning a jackpot decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In this case, setting 6 as the setting value provides the highest advantage to the player, and the advantage gradually decreases as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. If the probability of winning a jackpot changes depending on the setting value, the payout rate may also change depending on the setting value. While the probability of winning a jackpot remains constant regardless of the setting value, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change depending on the setting value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set one of a plurality of setting values that differ in the degree of advantage to the player. The setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be notified by a setting value designation command being sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. While the variable display is being executed, a setting suggestion effect may be executed at a predetermined rate, suggesting the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The suggestion regarding the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to suggesting the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and may, for example, suggest whether the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. The setting suggestion effect may suggest the likelihood of a jackpot through any effect, and may also be able to provide suggestions regarding the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In place of some or all of the suggestions regarding control of the jackpot gaming state, or in addition to some or all of the suggestions regarding control of the jackpot gaming state, suggestions regarding control of a state that is advantageous to the player and different from the jackpot gaming state may be made. For example, suggestions regarding a special state that is controlled after the jackpot gaming state ends may be made. In addition, suggestions regarding whether or not a state in which any gaming value that is advantageous to the player is awarded as an advantageous state may be made, depending on whether or not it is controlled.

The invention relating to gaming machines is not limited to pachinko gaming machines 1, but can also be applied to slot machines as appropriate. A slot machine can execute a game in which medals are inserted, a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of a control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of a stop button, a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player if a specific combination of symbols is formed. In a slot machine, advantageous states that are advantageous to the player may include, for example, one or more of so-called bonuses, such as a big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ.

Programs and data for implementing various controls, including game progress and performance effects, may be distributed and provided to a computer device included in a gaming machine such as pachinko machine 1 via a removable recording medium, or may be distributed and provided by being pre-installed on a storage device of the computer device. Furthermore, the machine may be equipped with a communications processing unit that can connect to an external device on a network via a communications line or the like, and may distribute and provide programs and data by downloading them from the external device. Games and performance effects may also be executed by inserting a removable recording medium, or by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communications line or the like in internal memory or the like, or by directly using hardware resources in an external device on a network connected via a communications line or the like, or by exchanging data with other computers or the like via a network.

When comparing various percentages, such as the decision percentage of processing or data, or the execution percentage of a performance, expressions such as "high," "low," and "different" may include cases where one is a "0%" or "100%" percentage. For example, for one decision result or execution content, this may include a "0%" percentage where there is no decision or execution, or a "100%" percentage where there is always a decision or execution.

(Explanation of characteristic part 01AK)
FIG. 10-1 shows an example of the configuration of a game control microcomputer 100 with respect to feature section 01AK. In addition to ROM 101, RAM 102, and CPU 103, the game control microcomputer 100 includes an external bus interface 131, a clock circuit 132, a unique information storage circuit 133, a reset controller 134, an interrupt controller 135, a timer circuit 136, an address decode circuit 137, a free-running counter 138, and a serial communication circuit 139. The random number circuit 104 shown in FIG. 2 includes a 16-bit random number circuit 104A and an 8-bit random number circuit 104B. The I/O 105 shown in FIG. 2 includes a PIP (Parallel Input Port) 105A and a POP (Parallel Output Port) 105B.

The external bus interface 131 is a bus interface that has functions such as interfacing between the external bus and internal bus of the chips that make up the game control microcomputer 100, and directional control functions for the address bus, data bus, and various control signals. For example, the external bus interface 131 may be connected to an external memory or external input/output device attached to the game control microcomputer 100, and may be capable of sending and receiving address signals, data signals, various control signals, and the like, to and from these external devices. The external bus interface 131 may also include an internal resource access control circuit that controls access from external devices to the game control microcomputer 100's internal data.

The clock circuit 132 can generate an internal system clock SCLK using an oscillation signal input to the external control clock terminal EXC. A control clock generated by a control clock generation circuit provided in the game control microcomputer 100 may be input to the external control clock terminal EXC. The internal system clock SCLK generated by the clock circuit 132 can be supplied to various circuits in the game control microcomputer 100, such as the CPU 103, the 16-bit random number circuit 104A, and the 8-bit random number circuit 104B. The internal system clock SCLK can also be output from the system clock output terminal CLKO to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. Alternatively, the internal system clock SCLK can be restricted from being output to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100, making it difficult to externally identify the operating state of the game control microcomputer 100.

The unique information storage circuit 133 can store multiple types of unique information that become internal information of the game control microcomputer 100, for example. For example, the unique information storage circuit 133 may store a ROM code, an individual chip number, and an ID number as unique information that differs for each chip of the game control microcomputer 100. The ROM code is numerical data that can be generated from data stored in a specified area of ROM 101. The individual chip number and ID number are numbers assigned to the game control microcomputer 100 when it is manufactured, and represent different values for each chip. The individual chip number can be read by a user program such as a game program, while the ID number can be set so that it cannot be read by a user program. The unique information storage circuit 133 may be included in a specified area of ROM 101, or may be included in an internal register of the game control microcomputer 100.

The reset controller 134 can control various resets that occur inside or outside the game control microcomputer 100. Resets that can be controlled by the reset controller 134 include system resets and user resets. A system reset occurs when the input signal to the external system reset terminal XSRST remains low for a certain period of time. A user reset occurs due to certain factors, such as the generation of a timeout signal from the watchdog timer 134A or the occurrence of an IAT (Independent Autonomous Travel Away) alarm. The reset controller 134 includes a watchdog timer 134A. The watchdog timer 134A can set a timer value corresponding to the monitoring time and can count down by periodically decrementing the timer value by one. When the timer value reaches "0" and a timeout occurs, the watchdog timer 134A can output a timeout signal to reset the game control microcomputer 100 and restart it. This allows the watchdog timer 134A to measure the monitoring time and reset the game control microcomputer 100 when it determines that the monitoring time has elapsed. The watchdog timer 134A can be set to enable or disable operation, for example, according to the game program.

The interrupt controller 135 can control various interrupt requests generated inside and outside the game control microcomputer 100. Interrupts that can be controlled by the interrupt controller 135 include the non-maskable interrupt NMI and the maskable interrupt INT. The non-maskable interrupt NMI is an interrupt that can be accepted unconditionally even when the CPU 103 is in an interrupt-disabled state, and is generated when the input signal to the external non-maskable interrupt terminal XNMI (also used as input port PI6) is at a low level for a certain period of time. The maskable interrupt INT is an interrupt that can allow or prohibit the acceptance of interrupt requests by a setting command from the CPU 103, and multiple interrupts can be executed by setting priority levels. The maskable interrupt INT can be caused by any or all of the multiple types of interrupt causes, including the input signal to the external maskable interrupt terminal XINT (also used as input port PI5) being low for a certain period of time, a timeout occurring in the timer circuit 136, or numeric data indicating a random number value being stored in the random number value register by the 16-bit random number circuit 104A or 8-bit random number circuit 104B.

The timer circuit 136 is configured to include a PTC (Programmable Timer Counter) that serves as a timer counter corresponding to three channels PTC0 to PTC2, enabling real-time interrupt generation and time measurement. Each channel PTC0 to PTC2 of the timer circuit 136 uses a count clock generated based on the internal system clock SCLK, and is only required to be able to update the timer value in response to signal changes in the count clock, such as the falling edge when the clock signal changes from high to low.

The address decode circuit 137 can decode various signals obtained from each functional block within the game control microcomputer 100, and can output a chip select signal, which is a decoded signal for external devices. The chip select signal selectively enables the internal circuits of the game control microcomputer 100 or external devices that serve as peripheral devices, allowing them to be accessed by the CPU 103. The output terminals that the address decode circuit 137 can use are multi-function terminals that can selectively output a parallel output signal from POP 105B, a serial transmission signal from the serial communication circuit 139, a clock output signal from the clock circuit 132, and the chip select signal generated by the address decode circuit 137.

The free-running counter 138 is configured to include counter circuits corresponding to four channels FRC0 to FRC3, and can update its count value independently of the operation of the CPU 103. Each channel FRC0 to FRC3 of the free-running counter 138 can be activated by an independent update clock, and its operation can be stopped or changed, for example, according to a gaming program. The count value of the free-running counter 138 can be stored in a hard latch register in response to a latch signal transmitted from an input terminal that serves as a latch signal input terminal in the PIP 105A. The count value stored in the hard latch register can be read by the CPU 103 and used when executing a gaming program, etc.

The serial communication circuit 139 is configured to include serial communication units corresponding to three channels, SCU0, SCU1, and STU2, enabling communication with external devices via serial communication. Each channel, SCU0, SCU1, and STU2, of the serial communication circuit 139, can process communication data in, for example, full-duplex, asynchronous, or standard NRZ (Non Return to Zero) format. Channels SCU0 and SCU1 of the serial communication circuit 139 are included in a first channel transmitting/receiving circuit capable of transmitting and receiving serial data bidirectionally with an external circuit. Channel STU2 of the serial communication circuit 139 is included in a second channel transmitting circuit capable of only transmitting serial data unidirectionally with an external circuit. For example, channel SCU0 of the serial communication circuit 139 is used for data communication with the payout control board. Channel SCU1 of the serial communication circuit 139 is used for data communication with the performance control board 12. Instead of channel SCU1 of serial communication circuit 139, channel STU2 of serial communication circuit 139 may be used for data communication with the performance control board 12.

The 16-bit random number circuit 104A is composed of random number generation units corresponding to four channels RL0-RL3, each of which operates independently to generate random numbers ranging from 0 to 65535 using numerical data representing 16-bit pseudo-random numbers. The maximum value of the random numbers generated by each channel RL0-RL3 in the 16-bit random number circuit 104A can be set to any value between 256 and 65535. Setting such a maximum value allows for initial setup to select a random number startup method so that the numerical data representing the random number value begins updating. Alternatively, each channel RL0-RL3 in the 16-bit random number circuit 104A can be initially setup to select a random number startup method so that it is automatically started when the gaming control microcomputer 100's operating mode transitions from security mode to user mode. The 16-bit random number circuit 104A can update the random number MR1-1 used to determine special symbols using channel RL0, and can update the random number MR3-2 used to select losing effects using channel RL2.

The 8-bit random number circuit 104B is configured with random number generation units corresponding to four channels RS0 to RS3, each of which operates independently to generate random numbers ranging from 0 to 255 using numerical data representing 8-bit pseudo-random numbers. The maximum value of the random numbers generated by each channel RS0 to RS3 in the 8-bit random number circuit 104B can be set to any value between 16 and 255. Setting such a maximum value allows for initial setup to select a random number startup method so that the numerical data representing the random number value begins to be updated. Alternatively, each channel RS0 to RS3 in the 8-bit random number circuit 104B may be initially set to select a random number startup method so that it is automatically started when the operating mode of the game control microcomputer 100 transitions from security mode to user mode. The 8-bit random number circuit 104B can update the random number MR3-3 for selecting the variation pattern type using channel RS1, the random number MR3-4 for the variation pattern using channel RS2, and the random number MR3-1 for the normal symbol variation pattern using channel RS3.

PIP105A incorporates, for example, an 8-bit wide input-only port, allowing various signals to be input from outside the game control microcomputer 100. PIP105A can use input terminals corresponding to input ports PI0 to PI7. Input port PI5 uses a multi-function terminal that can also be used as the external maskable interrupt terminal XINT. Input port PI6 uses a multi-function terminal that can also be used as the external non-maskable interrupt terminal XNMI. Input port PI7 uses a multi-function terminal that can also be used as the receiving terminal for channel SCU0 in the serial communication circuit 139. POP105B incorporates, for example, an 11-bit wide output-only port, allowing various signals to be output outside the game control microcomputer 100. POP105B can supply parallel output signals corresponding to output ports PO0 to PO7 and PO10 to PO12 to the address decode circuit 137.

Figure 10-2 shows an example of an address map in the game control microcomputer 100. In the example shown in Figure 10-2, the area from addresses 0000 [H] to 3FFF [H] is allocated to ROM 101 and includes a game program area, game data area, non-game program area, non-game data area, ROM comment area, program management area, and other unused areas. The area from addresses F000 [H] to F3FF [H] is allocated to RAM 102 and includes a game work area, game stack area, non-game work area, non-game stack area, and other unused areas. The area from addresses FE00 [H] to FEBF [H] is a function setting register area allocated to the built-in registers of the game control microcomputer 100. The area from addresses FF00 [H] to FFFF [H] is a function control register area allocated to the built-in registers of the game control microcomputer 100.

In ROM 101, the game program area can store game programs, which are computer programs related to the progress of games. The game data area can store game data used by game programs. The non-game program area can store non-game programs, which are computer programs related to control and processing other than the progress of games. The non-game data area can store non-game data used by non-game programs. These programs and data stored in ROM 101 were designed and created in advance by the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1, who is the user of the game control microcomputer 100. Therefore, game programs and non-game programs are included in user programs. Game data and non-game data are included in user data.

ROM 101's storage area is divided into a game program area capable of storing game programs related to game progress, and a non-game program area for control and processing unrelated to game progress. The area before the non-game program area, which is assigned a later address, is an unused area with a storage area equal to or greater than the boundary byte number, such as 16 bytes. This makes it easy to identify the game program area capable of storing game programs related to game progress, and the non-game program area capable of storing non-game programs related to control and processing unrelated to game progress, facilitating the design and management of programs and data stored in ROM 101.

The memory area of ROM 101 is provided with a separate game program area capable of storing game programs related to game progress, and a game data area capable of storing game data used by the game programs. Of the game program area and game data area, the area before the game data area assigned a later address is an unused area with a memory area equal to or larger than the boundary byte number, for example, 16 bytes. This makes it easy to identify the game program area capable of storing game programs related to game progress, and the game data area capable of storing game data used by the game programs, facilitating the design and management of the programs and data stored in ROM 101.

The memory area of ROM 101 is provided with adjacent non-game program areas capable of storing non-game programs related to control and processing unrelated to game progress, and non-game data areas capable of storing non-game data used by non-game programs. Of the non-game program area and non-game data area, the area behind the non-game program area assigned an earlier address is the non-game data area, and the area before the non-game data area assigned a later address is the non-game program area. This allows the non-game program area capable of storing non-game programs related to control and processing unrelated to game progress and the non-game data area capable of storing non-game data used by the non-game program to be located in memory areas assigned consecutive addresses, thereby enhancing integration and facilitating the design and management of programs and data stored in ROM 101. An unused area of memory space equal to or greater than the boundary byte count may be provided between the non-game program area and the non-game data area to make it easier to identify the non-game program area and the non-game data area.

In the memory areas of ROM 101, unused memory areas may store data indicating a value of "0" in all areas. This makes it easy to distinguish between game program areas and game data areas, non-game program areas and non-game data areas, and unused areas. Furthermore, if invalid data is stored in an unused area, this data can be easily discovered. Note that unused memory areas may store data indicating a value of "1" in all areas. In other words, unused memory areas can simply have data indicating the same value stored in all areas. This makes it easy to distinguish between multiple types of memory areas, and to easily discover invalid stored data.

In RAM 102, the gaming work area can be used as a work area when CPU 103 executes a gaming program. The gaming stack area can be used as a stack area when CPU 103 executes a gaming program. The non-gaming work area can be used as a work area when CPU 103 executes a non-gaming program. The non-gaming stack area can be used as a stack area when CPU 103 executes a non-gaming program.

The game program area and game data area provided in the memory area of ROM 101, and the game work area and game stack area provided in the memory area of RAM 102 are included in the memory area for game control. The non-game program and non-game data area provided in the memory area of ROM 101, and the non-game work area and non-game stack area provided in the memory area of RAM 102 are included in the memory area for non-game control.

The ROM comment area provided in the storage area of ROM 101 stores data indicating arbitrary program-specific information, such as the program title and version. The program management area provided in the storage area of ROM 101 can store setting information necessary for the internal settings of the game control microcomputer 100 so that the CPU 103 can execute game programs and non-game programs.

Figure 10-3 shows a main setting example AKA01 of addresses included in the function setting register area among the addresses assigned to the built-in registers of the game control microcomputer 100. The function setting register area is the first area for setting functions using various circuits included in the game control microcomputer 100, such as the watchdog timer 134A of the reset controller 134, the interrupt controller 135, the timer circuit 136, and the serial communication circuit 139.

In setting example AKA01, the setting values of the WDT start register at address FE1A [H] and the WDT clear register at addresses FE1B [H] to FE1C [H] are invalid values corresponding to unused status. As a result, the monitoring time measurement function using the watchdog timer 134A of the reset controller 134 is set to an unused state. Because the setting value of the interrupt mask register at address FE00 [H] is 7E [H], the interrupt control function using the interrupt controller 135 is set to an enabled state for maskable interrupt IR0. Because the setting values of the registers related to channel PTC0 of the timer circuit 136 at addresses FE01 [H] to FE03 [H] are valid values, the time measurement function using channel PTC0 of the timer circuit 136 is set to an enabled state. Because the register settings for channels PTC1 and PTC2 of timer circuit 136 at addresses FE04[H] to FE09[H] are invalid values corresponding to unused channels, the timing function using channels PTC1 and PTC2 of timer circuit 136 is set to an unused state.

Since the register setting values for channels SCU0 and SCU1 of serial communication circuit 139 at addresses FE0A[H] to FE11[H] are valid, the serial communication function using channels SCU0 and SCU1 of serial communication circuit 139 is set to an available state. Since the register setting values for channel STU2 of serial communication circuit 139 at addresses FE12[H] to FE14[H] are invalid, corresponding to unused status, the serial communication function using channel STU2 of serial communication circuit 139 is set to an unused state.

When the register settings for the input ports of PIP 105A at addresses FE2C[H] to FE2E[H] are valid, the signal input function using each input port is enabled. When the register settings for the random number circuit 104 at addresses FE36[H] to FE4A[H] include valid and invalid values, the random number generation function using the random number circuit 104 is enabled for channels corresponding to valid values and set to unused for channels corresponding to invalid values. For example, of the four channels RL0 to RL3 in the 16-bit random number circuit 104A, channels RL0 and RL2, whose corresponding maximum value setting registers are valid, have their random number generation function enabled, while channels RL1 and RL3, whose corresponding maximum value setting registers are invalid, have their random number generation function set to unused. Furthermore, of the four channels RS0 to RS3 in the 8-bit random number circuit 104B, channels RS1 to RS3 whose corresponding maximum value setting registers have valid settings have their random number generation function set to an enabled state, while channel RS0 whose corresponding maximum value setting register has an invalid setting has its random number generation function set to an unused state.

In this way, the various circuits included in the game control microcomputer 100 only need to be able to set the various functions using each circuit to either an enabled state or an unused state, corresponding to the setting value in the function setting register area. The function setting register area is not limited to the various circuits included in the game control microcomputer 100, and may also be a first area for setting any function.

Figure 10-4 shows an example of the main address setting, AKA02, included in the function control register area among the addresses assigned to the built-in registers of the game control microcomputer 100. The function control register area is a second area for function control using various circuits included in the game control microcomputer 100, such as the RAM 102, random number circuit 104, PIP 105A, and serial communication circuit 139.

In setting example AKA02, the RWM access protect register at address FF00[H] corresponds to a setting value of 00[H] or 01[H], enabling function control to prohibit or allow access to the RWM RAM 102. The internal information register at address FF01[H] is set to an invalid value corresponding to unused status, and function control using the corresponding circuit is in an unused state. The internal information register can store data indicating internal information such as abnormal random number update status, abnormal random number update clock frequency, system reset occurrence, WDT timeout occurrence, and IAT occurrence, but in this embodiment it is not used in an unused state.

Each register at addresses FF25[H] to FF28[H] can store a setting value used to control the serial communication function when the serial communication function using channel SCU0 of serial communication circuit 139 is enabled. Each register at addresses FF29[H] to FF2C[H] can store a setting value used to control the serial communication function when the serial communication function using channel SCU1 of serial communication circuit 139 is enabled.

Each register at addresses FF60[H] to FF67[H] can store random numbers that can be obtained using the soft-latch random number acquisition function of the 16-bit random number circuit 104A. Of these, the RL0 soft-latch random number register at addresses FF60[H] to FF61[H] can store random numbers that can be generated by channel RL0 of the 16-bit random number circuit 104A when numerical data indicating that value is acquired by the soft latch. The RL1 soft-latch random number register at addresses FF62[H] to FF63[H] can store random numbers that can be generated by channel RL1 of the 16-bit random number circuit 104A when numerical data indicating that value is acquired by the soft latch. The RL2 soft latch random number register at addresses FF64[H] to FF65[H] can store random numbers that can be generated by channel RL2 of the 16-bit random number circuit 104A when numeric data indicating that value is acquired by the soft latch. The RL3 soft latch random number register at addresses FF66[H] to FF67[H] can store random numbers that can be generated by channel RL3 of the 16-bit random number circuit 104A when numeric data indicating that value is acquired by the soft latch.

Each register at addresses FF68[H] through FF6B[H] can store random numbers that can be obtained using the soft-latch random number acquisition function of the 8-bit random number circuit 104B. Of these, the RS0 soft-latch random number register at address FF68[H] can store random numbers that can be generated by channel RS0 of the 8-bit random number circuit 104B when numerical data indicating that value is acquired by the soft-latch. The RS1 soft-latch random number register at address FF69[H] can store random numbers that can be generated by channel RS1 of the 8-bit random number circuit 104B when numerical data indicating that value is acquired by the soft-latch. The RS2 soft-latch random number register at address FF6A[H] can store random numbers that can be generated by channel RS2 of the 8-bit random number circuit 104B when numerical data indicating that value is acquired by the soft-latch. The RS3 soft latch random number register at address FF6B[H] can store the random numbers that can be generated by channel RS3 of the 8-bit random number circuit 104B when numerical data indicating the value is obtained by the soft latch.

RL0 hard latch random number register number "0" at addresses FF88[H] to FF89[H] and RL0 hard latch random number register number "1" at addresses FF98[H] to FF99[H] can store random numbers generated by channel RL0 of the 16-bit random number circuit 104A when numerical data indicating the value of the random number is acquired by the hard latch. Here, the RL0 hard latch random number register includes multiple storage areas corresponding to multiple register numbers, and different hard latch conditions can be set corresponding to the storage areas of different register numbers. For example, the RL0 hard latch random number register number "0," which is the RL0 hard latch random number register corresponding to register number "0," can establish a hard latch condition when the game ball detection signal from the first start switch 22A is in the ON state. In contrast, RL0 hard latch random number register number "1", which is the RL0 hard latch random number register corresponding to register number "1", can satisfy the hard latch condition when the game ball detection signal from second start switch 22B is in the ON state. As a result, RL0 hard latch random number register number "0" can store numerical data indicating the value of random number MR1-1 for determining a special symbol, which is obtained in response to the occurrence of a first start winning, when the hard latch acquires that value. RL0 hard latch random number register number "1" can store numerical data indicating the value of random number MR1-1 for determining a special symbol, which is obtained in response to the occurrence of a second start winning, when the hard latch acquires that value.

Each register with addresses FFF0[H] to FFF2[H] and FF35[H] can store the signal value input at each input port, corresponding to the enabled state of the signal input function using the input port of PIP 105A. Of these, the input port number "0" register with address FFF0[H] can store the signal value input for the input port with port number "0" provided in PIP 105A. The input port number "1" register with address FFF1[H] can store the signal value input for the input port with port number "1" provided in PIP 105A. The input port number "2" register with address FFF2[H] can store the signal value input for the input port with port number "2" provided in PIP 105A. The input port number "3" register with address FF35[H] can store the signal value input for the input port with port number "3" provided in PIP 105A.

In this way, the various circuits included in the game control microcomputer 100 only need to be able to control their respective operating states in response to the values stored in the function control register area. Furthermore, the various circuits included in the game control microcomputer 100 may also be able to update the values stored in the function control register area in response to their respective operating states. The function control register area is not limited to the various circuits included in the game control microcomputer 100, but may also be a second area for controlling any function.

Figure 10-5 is a diagram illustrating an example of the settings in this embodiment for the gaming random numbers shown in Figure 3. The gaming random numbers shown in Figure 3 can be classified into random numbers used to determine the display results in the variable display of special symbols, random numbers used to determine the display results in the variable display of normal symbols, and random numbers used to determine the display mode in the variable display of special symbols and normal symbols, depending on their respective uses.

Figure 10-5 (A) shows a setting example AKA11 of gaming random numbers used to determine the display result in the variable display of special symbols. The gaming random numbers in setting example AKA11 include a random number MR1-1 for determining special symbols, a random number MR1-2 for winning symbols, and a random number MR1-3 that serves as the initial value for the winning symbol. For example, the random number MR1-1 for determining special symbols can be used to determine whether the special symbol display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." The random number MR1-2 for winning symbols can be used to determine the designated big hit symbol value or small hit symbol value corresponding to the confirmed special symbol when the special symbol display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." The random number MR1-3 that serves as the initial value for the winning symbol can be used to set the initial value of the random number MR1-2.

The range of random number MR1-1 is the range of values within which random number MR1-1 can be updated, from 0 to 65535. The magnitude of random number MR1-1 is the total number of random values included in the update range of random number MR1-1, and is 65536, corresponding to the range of 0 to 65535 for random number MR1-1. Because the magnitude of random number MR1-1 is 65536, the total number of random values included in the update range is not a prime number. The number of bytes of numeric data used to update the value of random number MR1-1 is 2. The maximum value of random number MR1-1 is set by initializing a register associated with the 16-bit random number circuit 104A. The random number MR1-1 is updated by hardware updating using the 16-bit random number circuit 104A. The update condition for random number MR1-1 is the system clock input to the 16-bit random number circuit 104A. The conditions for obtaining the random number MR1-1 include a hard latch corresponding to the start winning and software reading into the random number buffer corresponding to that start winning. The period of the random number MR1-1 is 4.369 ms.

The range of random number MR1-2 is the range of values within which random number MR1-2 can be updated, from 0 to 199. The magnitude of random number MR1-2 is the total number of random values included in the update range of random number MR1-2, and is 200, which corresponds to the range of 0 to 199 for random number MR1-2. Because the magnitude of random number MR1-2 is 200, the total number of random values included in the update range is not a prime number. The number of bytes of numerical data used to update the value of random number MR1-2 is 1. The maximum value of random number MR1-2 is set by setting an immediate value in the program code. The method for updating random number MR1-2 is software update SA1. The update condition for random number MR1-2 is a timer interrupt after a specified time has elapsed. The acquisition condition for random number MR1-2 is reading it by software corresponding to the start winning. The period of the random numbers MR1-2 is 800 ms.

The range of random number MR1-3 is the range of values within which random number MR1-3 can be updated, and is the same as random number MR1-2, from "0" to "199." The magnitude of random number MR1-3 is the total number of random values included in the update range of random number MR1-3, and is the same as random number MR1-2, "200," corresponding to the range of random number MR1-3, which is "0" to "199." Because random number MR1-3 has a magnitude of "200," the total number of random values included in the update range is not a prime number. For random number MR1-3, the number of bytes of numeric data used to update its value is "1." The maximum value of random number MR1-3 is set by setting an immediate value in the program code. The method for updating random number MR1-3 is software update SA2. The update conditions for random numbers MR1-3 include a timer interrupt due to the passage of a predetermined time, and the presence of a loop process that serves as standby processing within the main game control process P_MAIN. The acquisition condition for random numbers MR1-3 is when random numbers MR1-2 have completed one cycle. The period for random numbers MR1-3 is indefinite due to the update conditions.

Figure 10-5 (B) shows setting example AKA12 of the gaming random numbers used to determine the display result in the variable display of normal symbols. The gaming random numbers in setting example AKA12 include random number MR2-1 for the symbol per normal symbol and random number MR2-2, which serves as the initial value for the symbol per normal symbol. For example, random number MR2-1 for the symbol per normal symbol can be used to determine the normal symbol designation value corresponding to the confirmed normal symbol as the display result of the normal symbol. Random number MR2-2, which serves as the initial value for the symbol per normal symbol, can be used when setting the initial value of random number MR1-2.

The range of random number MR2-1 is the range of values within which random number MR2-1 can be updated, from 0 to 198. The magnitude of random number MR2-1 is the total number of random numbers included in the update range of random number MR2-1, and is 199, corresponding to the range of 0 to 198 for random number MR2-1. Because the magnitude of random number MR2-1 is 199, the total number of random numbers included in the update range is a prime number. The number of bytes of numerical data used to update the value of random number MR2-1 is 1. The maximum value of random number MR2-1 is set by immediate value setting in the program code. The method for updating random number MR2-1 is software update SA1. The update condition for random number MR2-1 is a timer interrupt upon the passage of a predetermined time. The acquisition condition for random number MR2-1 is a software readout in response to a gaming ball passing through pass gate 41, which can be configured as a normal symbol activation port. The period of the random number MR2-1 is 796 ms.

The range of random number MR2-2 is the range of values with which random number MR2-2 can be updated, and is the same as random number MR2-1, from "0" to "198." The magnitude of random number MR2-2 is the total number of random values included in the update range of random number MR2-2, and is the same as random number MR2-1, "199," corresponding to the range of random number MR2-2, which is "0" to "198." Since random number MR2-2 has a magnitude of "199," the total number of random values included in the update range is a prime number. The number of bytes of numeric data used to update the value of random number MR2-2 is "1." The maximum value of random number MR2-2 is set by setting an immediate value in the program code. The method for updating random number MR2-2 is software update SA2. The update conditions for random number MR2-2 include a timer interrupt due to the passage of a predetermined time, and the presence of a loop process that serves as standby processing within the main processing P_MAIN for game control. The acquisition condition for random number MR2-2 is when random number MR2-1 has completed one cycle. The period of random number MR2-2 is indefinite due to the update conditions.

Figure 10-5 (C) shows a setting example AKA13 of a gaming random number used to determine the display mode for the variable display of special and normal symbols. The gaming random numbers in setting example AKA13 include a random number MR3-1 for a normal symbol variation pattern, a random number MR3-2 for selecting a miss effect, a random number MR3-3 for selecting a variation pattern type, and a random number MR3-4 for a variation pattern. For example, the random number MR3-1 for a normal symbol variation pattern can be used to determine a normal symbol variation pattern corresponding to the variable display of a normal symbol. The random number MR3-2 for selecting a miss effect can be used to determine the variable display mode corresponding to the variable display of a special symbol for which the special symbol display result is "miss." The random number MR3-3 for selecting a variation pattern type can be used to select a variation pattern type corresponding to the variable display of a special symbol. The random numbers MR3-4 for the variation patterns can be used to determine the variation patterns corresponding to the variable display of special symbols.

The range of random number MR3-1 is the range of values within which random number MR3-1 can be updated, from 0 to 232. The magnitude of random number MR3-1 is the total number of random values included in the update range of random number MR3-1, and is 233, which corresponds to the range of random number MR3-1, from 0 to 232. Because the magnitude of random number MR3-1 is 233, the total number of random values included in the update range is a prime number. The number of bytes of numeric data used to update the value of random number MR3-1 is 1. The maximum value of random number MR3-1 is set by initializing a register associated with the 8-bit random number circuit 104B. The random number MR3-1 is updated by hardware updating using the 8-bit random number circuit 104B. The update condition for random number MR3-1 is the system clock input to the 8-bit random number circuit 104B. The condition for obtaining the random number MR3-1 is the start of fluctuations in the variable display of normal symbols. The period of the random number MR3-1 is 0.249 [ms].

The range of random number MR3-2 is the range of values within which random number MR3-2 can be updated, from 0 to 65518. The magnitude of random number MR3-2 is the total number of random values included in the update range of random number MR3-2, and is 65519, which corresponds to the range of 0 to 65518 for random number MR3-2. Because the magnitude of random number MR3-2 is 65519, the total number of random values included in the update range is a prime number. The number of bytes of numeric data used to update the value of random number MR3-2 is 2. The maximum value of random number MR3-2 is set by initializing a register associated with the 16-bit random number circuit 104A. The random number MR3-2 is updated by hardware updating using the 16-bit random number circuit 104A. The update condition for random number MR3-2 is the system clock input to the 16-bit random number circuit 104A. The conditions for obtaining the random number MR3-2 include reading it into the random number buffer using software that corresponds to the initial winnings. The period of the random number MR3-2 is 139.774 [ms].

The range of random number MR3-3 is the range of values within which random number MR3-3 can be updated, from 0 to 240. The magnitude of random number MR3-3 is the total number of random values included in the update range of random number MR3-3, and is 241, which corresponds to the range of 0 to 240 for random number MR3-3. Because the magnitude of random number MR3-3 is 241, the total number of random values included in the update range is a prime number. The number of bytes of numeric data used to update the value of random number MR3-3 is 1. The maximum value of random number MR3-3 is set by initializing a register associated with the 8-bit random number circuit 104B. The random number MR3-3 is updated by hardware updating using the 8-bit random number circuit 104B. The update condition for random number MR3-3 is the system clock input to the 8-bit random number circuit 104B. The conditions for obtaining the random number MR3-3 include reading it into the random number buffer using software that corresponds to the initial winnings. The period of the random number MR3-3 is 0.257 [ms].

The range of random number MR3-4 is the range of values within which random number MR3-4 can be updated, from 0 to 250. The magnitude of random number MR3-4 is the total number of random values included in the update range of random number MR3-4, and is 251, which corresponds to the range of 0 to 250 for random number MR3-4. Because the magnitude of random number MR3-4 is 251, the total number of random values included in the update range is a prime number. The number of bytes of numeric data used to update the value of random number MR3-4 is 1. The maximum value of random number MR3-4 is set by initializing a register associated with the 8-bit random number circuit 104B. The random number MR3-4 is updated by hardware updating using the 8-bit random number circuit 104B. The update condition for random number MR3-4 is the system clock input to the 8-bit random number circuit 104B. The conditions for obtaining random numbers MR3-4 include reading them into a random number buffer using software that corresponds to the initial winnings. The period of random numbers MR3-4 is 0.268 [ms].

Software update SA1, which is the method for updating random numbers MR1-2 and MR2-1, can be updated by adding 1 to the previous value each time the software update process is executed. If the updated value exceeds the maximum random number value, it is changed to "0," the minimum random number value. Furthermore, if the updated value matches the random number initial value, the corresponding initial random number is used to set the current random number value and stored as the new random number initial value. For example, for random number MR1-2, if the updated value matches the random number initial value, random number MR1-3, which is the initial value for the winning symbol, is used to set the current random number value, and this random number value is stored as the new random number initial value. For random number MR2-1, if the updated value matches the random number initial value, random number MR2-2, which is the initial value for the winning normal symbol, is used to set the current random number value, and this random number value is stored as the new random number initial value.

Software update SA2, which is the method for updating random numbers MR1-3 and MR2-2, can update the previous value by adding 1 each time the software update process is executed. If the updated value exceeds the maximum random number value, it is changed to "0," the minimum random number value. In this case, unlike software update SA1, no initial random number value is used, so the updated value will be either the previous value plus 1, or the minimum random number value of "0."

Figure 10-6 is a diagram illustrating the random number update period when updating random numbers using the 16-bit random number circuit 104A and the 8-bit random number circuit 104B included in the random number circuit 104. Here, the random numbers that can be generated by channels RL0 to RL4 provided in the 16-bit random number circuit 104A are referred to as 16-bit random numbers RLn. Also, the random numbers that can be generated by channels RS0 to RS4 provided in the 8-bit random number circuit 104B are referred to as 8-bit random numbers RSn. The period in which the 16-bit random number RLn that can be updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 104A completes one cycle is determined by different relational expressions depending on whether the maximum value of the 16-bit random number RLn is a specific maximum value expressed using a power of 2. The cycle in which the 8-bit random number RSn, which can be updated by the 8-bit random number circuit 104B, completes one cycle is determined by a different relational equation depending on whether the maximum value of the 8-bit random number RSn is a specific maximum value expressed using a power of 2.

Figure 10-6 (A) shows a 16-bit random number period setting example AKA21 in the 16-bit random number circuit 104A. The 16-bit random number period is the period in which the 16-bit random number RLn, which can be updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 104A, completes one cycle. In the 16-bit random number period setting example AKA21, if the maximum value of the 16-bit random number RLn corresponds to 2m-1 where m = 9 to 16, the period in which the 16-bit random number sequence completes one cycle is proportional to the inverse of the count clock frequency, i.e., the count clock period. The maximum value plus 1, i.e., the value obtained by adding 1 to the maximum value, becomes a linear function where the magnitude of the 16-bit random number RLn is used as a variable. In contrast, if the maximum value of the 16-bit random number RLn does not correspond to 2m-1 when m is any value between 9 and 16, the period in which the 16-bit random number sequence completes one cycle is proportional to the inverse of the count clock frequency, i.e., 32 times the count clock period. It is then a linear function of the maximum value plus 1, i.e., the magnitude of the 16-bit random number RLn, which can be updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 104A. Thus, when the maximum value of the 16-bit random number RLn is a specific maximum value, the random number update period is shorter than when the maximum value is other than the specific maximum value, i.e., the random number value update speed is faster.

Figure 10-6 (B) shows an example AK22 of an 8-bit random number period setting for the 8-bit random number circuit 104B. The 8-bit random number period is the period during which the 8-bit random number RSn, which can be updated by the 8-bit random number circuit 104B, completes one cycle. In the 8-bit random number period setting example AK22, if the maximum value of the 8-bit random number RSn corresponds to 2m-1 when m = 5 to 8, the period during which the 8-bit random number sequence completes one cycle is proportional to the inverse of the count clock frequency, i.e., the count clock period. The value obtained by adding 1 to the maximum value, i.e., the magnitude of the 8-bit random number RSn, is a linear function with the variable being the magnitude of the 8-bit random number RSn. In contrast, if the maximum value of the 8-bit random number RSn does not correspond to 2m-1 when m = 5 to 8, the period during which the 8-bit random number sequence completes one cycle is proportional to the inverse of the count clock frequency, i.e., 16 times the count clock period. The value obtained by adding 1 to the maximum value, i.e., the value becomes a linear function when the magnitude of the 8-bit random number RSn is used as a variable. In this way, when the maximum value of the 8-bit random number RSn that can be updated by the 8-bit random number circuit 104B is a specific maximum value, the random number update period is shorter than when the maximum value is other than the specific maximum value, i.e., the random number value update speed is faster.

Figure 10-6 (C) shows a comparative random number example AKA23, comparing the random number values that can be updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 104A and the 8-bit random number circuit 104B. The 16-bit random number circuit 104A can update the random number values corresponding to the random number MR1-1 for determining a special symbol and the random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing effect. The 8-bit random number circuit 104B can update the random number values corresponding to the random number MR3-3 for selecting a variation pattern type and the random number MR3-4 for a variation pattern.

The maximum value of random number MR1-1 is "65535," which corresponds to 2m-1 when m = 16. This results in a period of 4.369 ms, and an update rate of 15,000 times/ms. The maximum value of random number MR3-2 is "65518," which does not correspond to 2m-1 when m = 9 to 16. This results in a period of 139.774 ms, and an update rate of 469 times/ms. The maximum value of random number MR3-3 is "240," which does not correspond to 2m-1 when m = 5 to 8. This results in a period of 0.257 ms, and an update rate of 938 times/ms. The maximum value of random number MR3-4 is 250, which does not correspond to 2m-1 when m is any value between 5 and 8. As a result, the period of random number MR3-4 is 0.268 [ms], and the update rate at this time is 938 [times/ms].

As such, the gaming random numbers that can be updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 104A include random number MR1-1 for determining special symbols and random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing effect. Both random numbers MR1-1 and MR3-2 have a numeric data byte count of "2," consisting of a specific number of bytes. Since the size of random number MR1-1 is "65536" and the size of random number MR3-2 is "65519," if the total number of random numbers included in the update range of random number MR1-1 is a specific number, the total number of random numbers included in the update range of random number MR3-2 is a predetermined number smaller than the specific number. The update rate of random number MR1-1 is 15,000 times/ms, and the update rate of random number MR3-2 is 469 times/ms, meaning that random number MR1-1 has a faster update rate than random number MR3-2. This prevents random numbers from being generated synchronously, allowing for appropriate updates to random numbers.

Furthermore, the gaming random numbers that can be updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 104A include the random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing effect. The gaming random numbers that can be updated by the 8-bit random number circuit 104B include the random number MR3-3 for selecting a variation pattern type and the random number MR3-4 for a variation pattern. For all of these random numbers MR3-2 to MR3-4, the total number of random numbers included in the update range is a prime number. The update rate for random number MR3-2 is 469 times/ms, while the update rate for random numbers MR3-3 and MR3-4 is 938 times/ms. In other words, the update rate for random numbers MR3-3 and MR3-4 is twice the update rate for random number MR3-2, which is an integer multiple of that. Therefore, if random number MR3-2 is the first random number value and random numbers MR3-3 and MR3-4 are the second random number values, the first random number value has an update speed of the first speed, and the second random number value has an update speed of the second speed, which is an integer multiple of the first speed. The update range for random number MR3-2 is "0" to "65518", the update range for random number MR3-3 is "0" to "240", and the update range for random number MR3-4 is "0" to "250". Therefore, the total number of random number values included in each update range is different for the first random number value and the second random number value, and the total number of random number values included in both update ranges is a prime number. This prevents synchronization of random number values and enables appropriate random number value updates.

The CPU 103 is provided with multiple registers, including a program counter, interrupt register, stack pointer, index register, flag register, address register, and general-purpose registers including an accumulator. The index register, flag register, and general-purpose register may be provided as main registers and sub-registers. The registers included in the main registers and sub-registers, and the stack pointer may be provided so that multiple register banks can be configured. The multiple register banks may include a first register bank for use within an area that can be used when executing a game program, and a second register bank for use outside an area that can be used when executing a non-game program. This eliminates the need to save and restore values stored in general-purpose registers, etc., to and from the stack area when switching between executing a game program and a non-game program, for example, thereby preventing an increase in program size and processing load.

The program counter, also known as the PC register, holds the address value of the next instruction to be executed by the CPU 103. The value stored in the program counter is counted up sequentially each time an instruction is executed, and is set to the address value of the branch destination of a branch instruction. The interrupt register, also known as the I register, can hold the upper address value of the interrupt vector table. The value stored in the I register is set in response to the start of power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The stack pointer, also known as the SP register, can hold address values corresponding to game stack areas and non-game stack areas. The value stored in the stack pointer can specify a destination address for saving and holding a stored value or immediate value in a predetermined register (including the program counter) or a register specified by an instruction in response to an interrupt occurrence, execution of a PUSH instruction, or execution of a subroutine call instruction such as a CALL instruction, a CALLF instruction, or a RST instruction. Upon saving, the value is updated to indicate the start address of the storage area holding the stored value. The value stored in the stack pointer can also specify a read address for restoring a saved register value in response to the end of interrupt processing, execution of a POP instruction, or the end of subroutine processing. Upon this restoration, the value is updated to indicate the address corresponding to the read value. The stack pointer can also be set to a stored value or immediate value in a register specified by a load instruction such as an LD instruction.

Index registers include the IX register and the IY register, each with 2 bytes of storage capacity capable of storing 16-bit data. The accumulator is also called the A register. Other general-purpose registers include multiple registers with 1 byte of storage capacity capable of storing 8-bit data, such as the B register, C register, D register, E register, H register, and L register. The B register and C register can be used as the BC register of a pair of registers capable of storing 16-bit data. The D register and E register can be used as the DE register of a pair of registers capable of storing 16-bit data. The H register and L register can be used as the HL register of a pair of registers capable of storing 16-bit data.

The internal registers of the CPU 103 can update stored values in response to calculation instructions and transfer instructions executed by the CPU 103, and are used to specify program addresses, data addresses, or built-in register addresses provided in the game control microcomputer 100, and to hold calculation data and transfer data.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the instruction set for causing the CPU 103 to execute a program is composed of transfer instructions such as load instructions, subroutine call instructions, jump instructions, other calculation instructions including arithmetic operation instructions and logical operation instructions, input/output instructions, etc. Computer programs such as game programs and non-game programs that can be executed by the CPU 103 are prepared in advance as program code that describes these various instructions and are stored in ROM 101.

The load instruction is a transfer instruction that can be used to store and set data read from a memory area or internal device area of ROM 101 or RAM 102 in an internal register of CPU 103, to write and store a value stored in an internal register of CPU 103 in a memory area or internal device area of RAM 102, and to set or store a numerical value specified by an operand as an immediate value in an internal register of CPU 103 or a memory area or internal device area of RAM 102. The target to which data is transferred by a load instruction can be specified according to the instruction code and operand, and generally includes the source and destination of the data. However, if an immediate value is specified by the operand, the source of the data is not included.

Load instructions include the normal LD instruction, the special LDQ instruction, the special LDF instruction, and the special ICPLD instruction. The normal LD instruction is also called the normal transfer instruction. The special LDQ instruction is also called the first special transfer instruction. The special LDF instruction is also called the second special transfer instruction. The special ICPLD instruction is also called the third special transfer instruction.

The LD instruction, which is a normal transfer instruction, is a normal transfer instruction that can transfer data by specifying both a high-order address and a low-order address when transferring data to a storage area or built-in device area in ROM 101 or RAM 102. Furthermore, when transferring data to a storage area or built-in device area in ROM 101 or RAM 102, the LD instruction, which is a normal transfer instruction, can use a pair register such as the HL register as a pointer to specify the destination or source address using the pointer to transfer data.

The LDQ instruction, which is the first special transfer instruction, can transfer data by specifying only the lower address using the Q register, a special register included in the internal registers of the CPU 103. A value indicating the upper address is preset in the Q register, and by combining this with the lower address specified by the LDQ instruction, it is possible to specify the destination or source address and transfer data.

The LDQ instruction, which is the first special transfer instruction, can transfer data using less program code than the LD instruction, which is the normal transfer instruction. However, in programs that frequently change the value stored in the Q register, the amount of program code may actually be greater than with the normal LD instruction. Therefore, it is sufficient to be able to transfer data using the LDQ instruction, which is the first special transfer instruction, in response to processes that require multiple transfers of various data to the game work area at addresses F000 [H] to F0D7 [H], the function setting register area at addresses FE00 [H] to FEBF [H], or the function control register area at addresses FF00 [H] to FFFF [H].

The second special transfer instruction, the LDF instruction, allows data to be transferred by specifying only the lower addresses of data stored in a specific address range. The specific address range is, for example, the range from address 1200 [H] to 1DFF [H]. Therefore, by pre-setting the game data area of ROM 101 to be included in this specific address range and combining it with the lower address specified by the LDF instruction, the source address can be specified and data can be transferred. Note that the game data area of ROM 101 is read-only and not writable, so the address of the game data area cannot be specified as the destination address.

The second special transfer instruction, the LDF instruction, can transfer data using a smaller amount of program code than the normal transfer instruction, the LD instruction. However, since the specific address range is fixed by specification, it is sufficient to set a storage area for frequently used data, such as the game data area of ROM 101, to be included in the specific address range, and then be able to transfer data using the second special transfer instruction, the LDF instruction.

The third special transfer instruction, the ICPLD instruction, compares the update target value with the comparison judgment value, and updates the update target value by adding 1 if the update target value is less than the comparison judgment value, but changes the update target value to the minimum value of "0" if the update target value is equal to or greater than the comparison judgment value. The update target value may be the value indicated by the stored data at the address pointed to by the pointer, or the value stored in a register. The comparison judgment value may be the value stored in a register, or the value indicated by the operand of the ICPLD instruction.

In this way, the third special transfer instruction, the ICPLD instruction, is a single compare and add instruction that compares the update target value with the comparison judgment value, adds 1 to the update target value if the comparison result is less than the comparison judgment value, and changes the update target value to the minimum value if the comparison result is equal to or greater than the comparison judgment value.

Note that setting a stored value in an internal register of CPU 103 using an immediate value from the operand of a transfer command is also referred to as "setting." Reading stored data from the game data area of ROM 101 or the game work area of RAM 102 and storing it in an internal register of CPU 103 is also referred to as "loading." Storing a stored value in an internal register of CPU 103 in a buffer, counter, timer, or any other storage area provided in the game work area of RAM 102 is also referred to as "storing."

Figure 10-7 is a flowchart showing an example of the power supply start response processing P_POWER_ON. The power supply start response processing P_POWER_ON is included in the processing that can be called from the main processing P_MAIN for game control shown in Figure 4, and can be executed in step S1 in response to the start of power supply in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the CPU 103 executes the power supply start response processing P_POWER_ON, it disables interrupts (step AKS1) and then sets the in-area stack pointer initial value to the stack pointer (step AKS2). The in-area stack pointer initial value may be address F200 [H], which is the final address of the gaming stack area plus 1, corresponding to the initial state in which no saved data is stored in the gaming stack area.

Following step AKS2, a connection confirmation signal ON output value is set by a transfer instruction for setting the internal register of CPU 103 (step AKS3). The connection confirmation signal ON output value is a value indicating that the connection confirmation signal is ON, and may be, for example, 00 [H]. At this time, a function control register upper address is set to the Q register by a transfer instruction for setting the Q register contained in the internal register of CPU 103 (step AKS4). The function control register upper address is the value FF [H] indicating the upper address of the function control register area in the setting example AKA02 shown in Figure 10-4. Once the function control register upper address is set in this way, a transfer instruction using the upper address indicated by the value stored in the Q register stores the connection confirmation signal ON output value (step AKS5). In this case, the lower address of the transfer destination can be specified by the operand of the transfer instruction. The value stored in the Q register is set to the upper address of the function control register area by step AKS4. Therefore, by using a transfer command to write to a memory area at a specified address, such as a special 2-byte LDQ command that specifies a lower address, the connection confirmation signal ON output value set in step AKS3 can be stored in the function control register at the specified address in the function control register area. In step AKS5, the connection confirmation signal ON output value is stored in the output port number "1" register provided in the function control register area. This sets the connection confirmation signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the dispensing control board to the ON state.

When the connection confirmation signal is set to the ON state in step AKS5, the SCU0 command register clear output value is stored by a transfer instruction using the upper address indicated by the value stored in the Q register (step AKS6). In this case, the lower address of the transfer destination can be specified by the operand of the transfer instruction. The value stored in the Q register was set to the upper address of the function control register area in step AKS4. The SCU0 command register clear output value can be specified by the operand of the transfer instruction. Therefore, the SCU0 command register clear output value can be stored in the function control register at a specified address in the function control register area by a transfer instruction for writing to a memory area at a specified address, such as a 3-byte special LDQ instruction that specifies the lower address and the SCU0 command register clear output value. In step AKS6, the SCU0 command register clear output value is stored in the SCU0 command register located at address FF28 [H] in the function control register area in the setting example AKA02 shown in Figure 10-4. This resets the serial communication function using channel SCU0 of serial communication circuit 139 to its initial state.

After step AKS6, the SCU1 command register clear output value is stored using a transfer instruction that uses the upper address indicated by the value stored in the Q register (step AKS7). In this case, the lower address of the transfer destination can be specified by the operand of the transfer instruction. The value stored in the Q register was set to the upper address of the function control register area in step AKS4. The SCU1 command register clear output value can be specified by the operand of the transfer instruction. Therefore, the SCU1 command register clear output value can be stored in the function control register at the specified address in the function control register area by a transfer instruction that writes to a memory area at a specified address, such as a 3-byte special LDQ instruction that specifies the lower address and the SCU0 command register clear output value. In step AKS7, the SCU1 command register clear output value is stored in the SCU1 command register located at address FF2C[H] in the function control register area in the setting example AKA02 shown in Figure 10-4. This resets the serial communication function using channel SCU1 of the serial communication circuit 139 to its initial state.

When these serial communication functions are controlled to their initial state, a transfer command for setting the internal registers of CPU 103 sets the interrupt vector table upper address (step AKS8). The interrupt vector table upper address is the upper address of the interrupt vector table provided in the game program area of ROM 101. The interrupt vector table stores the top address at a table position corresponding to the interrupt priority for, for example, the timer interrupt process P_PCT for game control, which is executed in response to the occurrence of a timer interrupt. This interrupt vector table upper address is set in the I register by a transfer command for setting the internal registers of CPU 103 (step AKS9).

After step AKS9, the value stored in the Q register is updated by subtracting 1 (step AKS10). The value stored in the Q register was set to the upper address of the function control register area in step AKS4. When this stored value is subtracted by 1, the upper address of the function setting register area in the setting example AKA01 shown in Figure 10-3 becomes stored in the Q register. In this way, after the function control registers in the function control register area are set, the function setting registers in the function setting register area become configurable. At this time, a transfer command for setting the pointer is used to set the function setting register storage value table address (step AKS11). The function setting register storage value table address is the address of the function setting register storage value table stored in the game data area of ROM 101. Then, a transfer command for reading the stored data at the address pointed to by the pointer is used to load the processing count (step AKS12). Furthermore, a function setting register store command is used to set the function setting register storage value table (step AKS13). The function setting register store instruction is merely an instruction that specifies the function setting register based on the data stored at the address obtained by adding 1 to the address pointed to by the pointer, stores the function setting register setting value indicated by the data stored at the address obtained by adding 2 to the address pointed to by the pointer in the specified function setting register, adds 2 to the value stored in the pointer, and subtracts 1 from the number of processes, repeating this process until the number of processes is 0. In this way, the function setting register can be initialized.

Once the initial setting of the function setting register is completed in step AKS13, an access permission output value is stored in the RWM access protect register (step AKS14). The access permission output value of the RWM access protect register is set to, for example, 01 [H] by a transfer command for setting an internal register of the CPU 103. This access permission output value is stored in the RWM access protect register by a transfer command for writing to the memory area at the top address in the function setting register area. The RWM access protect register enables function control to allow access to RAM 102, which is the RWM, in response to the setting of the access permission output value 01 [H]. Therefore, by storing the access permission output value in the RWM access protect register in step AKS14, access to RAM 102 is permitted in response to the start of power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1.

After step AKS14, the upper address of the game work area, which serves as the working area of RAM 102, is set in the Q register (step AKS15), and the power supply start response process P_POWER_ON is then terminated. In this way, after access to RAM 102 is permitted in step AKS14, the value F0 [H] indicating the upper address of the game work area in RAM 102 is set in the Q register. After step AKS15, when the LDQ instruction, which is the first special transfer instruction, is executed, the value F0 [H] stored in the Q register can be used as the upper address of the transfer destination or transfer source without being specified by an operand. This reduces the program size for processing using the game work area in RAM 102, improving the marketability of the gaming machine.

Figure 10-8 shows an example configuration AKT01 of the function setting register storage value table used in the power supply start response process P_POWER_ON. In the power supply start response process P_POWER_ON, for example, the function setting register storage table whose address was set in step AKS11 is used to load the number of processes in step AKS12, and the stored values of each function setting register are stored by a function setting register store command in step AKS13. The function setting register storage value table of example configuration AKT01 stores a value of 18 [H] indicating the number of processes at a starting address of 1200 [H]. In step AKS12, this table data is read and loaded into an internal register of CPU 103. Thereafter, the function setting register store command in step AKS13 sequentially reads table data that combines the lower addresses and stored values of the function setting registers, making it possible to store the stored values in the function setting registers corresponding to each lower address.

In the function setting register storage value table of configuration example AKT01, the table data is configured so that the stored value of a function setting register with a smaller value indicating a lower address can be set first, and the stored value of a function setting register with a larger value indicating a lower address can be set later. As a result, in the function setting register area, the stored values of each function setting register are set in the order of the stored value of the function setting register closest to the first address being set first, and the stored value of the function setting register closest to the last address being set last. This makes it easier to design and manage the data indicating the stored values of the function setting registers, improving the marketability of the gaming machine.

The 16-bit random number circuit 104A corresponds to four channels RL0 to RL3 and can start updating from the channel whose maximum value setting register has a value indicating the maximum random number value set. The 8-bit random number circuit 104B corresponds to four channels RS0 to RS3 and can start updating from the channel whose maximum value setting register has a value indicating the maximum random number value set. The function setting register area for the setting example AKA01 shown in Figure 10-3 includes an RL0 maximum value setting register at addresses FE3F[H] to FE40[H], an RL1 maximum value setting register at addresses FE41[H] to FE42[H], an RL2 maximum value setting register at addresses FE43[H] to FE44[H], and an RL3 maximum value setting register at addresses FE45[H] to FE46[H], each corresponding to the four channels RL0 to RL3 of the 16-bit random number circuit 104A. Furthermore, this function setting register area includes an RS0 maximum value setting register at address FE47[H], an RS1 maximum value setting register at address FE48[H], an RS2 maximum value setting register at address FE49[H], and an RS3 maximum value setting register at address FE4A[H], which correspond to the four channels RS0 to RS4 in the 8-bit random number circuit 104B. The function setting register storage value table of configuration example AKT01 is configured so that, of these maximum value setting registers, the stored value of the RL0 maximum value setting register is set first, then the stored value of the RL2 maximum value setting register, then the stored value of the RS1 maximum value setting register, then the stored value of the RS2 maximum value setting register, and finally the RS3 maximum value setting register. Therefore, updating of channel RL0 in the 16-bit random number circuit 104A starts first, then updating of channel RL2 in the 16-bit random number circuit 104A starts next, then updating of channel RS1 in the 8-bit random number circuit 104B starts next, then updating of channel RS2 in the 8-bit random number circuit 104B starts next, and finally updating of channel RS3 in the 8-bit random number circuit 104B starts last. In this way, because updates start in order from the random number value for which the maximum random number value is set, the uncertainty of the random number value is increased depending on the timing at which the update of the random number value starts, reducing the processing load and enabling appropriate updating of the random number value.

The power supply start response processing P_POWER_ON is included in the processing that can be called from the game control main processing P_MAIN, which is a startup processing executed based on the start of power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1. It uses the function setting register storage value table of the example configuration AKT01 to set storage values in the function setting register area, which serves as a storage area for functions. Since the maximum random number value updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 104A and the 8-bit random number circuit 104B can be set, the power supply start response processing P_POWER_ON can be executed as a maximum value setting processing. The 16-bit random number circuit 104A can update a first random number value consisting of 16 bits, which corresponds to a specific number of bytes (2 bytes). The 8-bit random number circuit 104B can update a second random number value consisting of 8 bits, which corresponds to a predetermined number of bytes (1 byte) smaller than the specific number of bytes. When the power supply start response process P_POWER_ON is executed, the function setting register storage value table of configuration example AKT01 is used to set the maximum random number value of the first random number value that can be updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 104A, and then the maximum random number value of the second random number value that can be updated by the 8-bit random number circuit 104B. In this way, by setting the first random number value of a specific number of bytes and then setting the second random number value of a predetermined number of bytes, the first random number value and second random number value can be stably updated, making it possible to update the random number values appropriately.

Figure 10-9 shows an example of the configuration of the RWM access protection register. The RWM access protection register is located at address FF00[H] in the example configuration AKA02 of the function control register area shown in Figure 10-4. The value stored in the RWM access protection register will be different depending on whether access to the RAM 102 that serves as the RWM is permitted or prohibited.

Figure 10-9 (A) shows an example of the bit configuration of the RWM access protection register. The RWM access protection register can store 8-bit data RAP with bit numbers "0" to "7", and bit data RAP0 with bit number "0" can be set to 0 [B] or 1 [B]. In contrast, bit data with bit numbers "1" to "7" are always set to 0 [B] and represent fixed values that are never set to "1".

Figure 10-9 (B) is a diagram illustrating an example of the use of bit data RAP of the RWM access protection register. In bit data RAP, bit data RAP0 with bit number "0" is an RWM access control bit; setting it to 0 [B] prohibits access to the RWM, and setting it to 1 [B] allows access to the RWM. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 begins, bit data RAP0 with bit number "0" is set to its initial value, 0 [B]. This makes it possible to prohibit access to RAM 102, which serves as the RWM, when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 begins.

Figure 10-10 is a flowchart showing an example of power-off processing P_POWER_OFF. Power-off processing P_POWER_OFF is included in the processing that can be called from the game control timer interrupt processing P_PCT shown in Figure 5, and can be executed in step S51 each time a timer interrupt occurs. When power-off processing P_POWER_OFF is executed, the CPU 103 sets the backup monitoring timer address using a transfer command to set a pointer (step AKS31). The backup monitoring timer address is the address of the backup monitoring timer located in the game work area of RAM 102.

Input port number "3" is input (step AKS32). Input port number "3" is an input port assigned port number "3" and includes a power check signal input bit. Therefore, a logical AND operation is performed using the input data for input port number "3" and the check data corresponding to the bit position of the power check signal input bit. At this time, whether the power check signal input bit is "0" is determined based on whether the zero flag is on (step AKS33). When the power check signal input bit's bit value is 0 [B], which corresponds to "0," it indicates that the power check signal is in the off state, and when the bit value is 1 [B], which corresponds to "1," it indicates that the power check signal is in the on state.

If the power check signal input bit is "1" rather than "0" (step AKS33; No), backup monitoring timer clear data is stored using a transfer command that can update the stored data at the address pointed to by the pointer (step AKS34). In step AKS34, by storing the clear data in the backup monitoring timer, the backup monitoring timer can be cleared when the power check signal is in the ON state, in response to a state other than power-off determination being made.

If the power check signal input bit is "0" in response to step AKS33 (step AKS33; Yes), the backup monitoring timer's time count is updated by adding 1 (step AKS35). The backup monitoring timer is loaded using a transfer command to read the stored data at the address pointed to by the pointer (step AKS36). Then, a calculation return command that compares the backup monitoring timer's time count with the judgment value corresponding to the backup judgment time (step AKS37) confirms that the backup monitoring timer does not indicate the backup judgment time (step AKS38). This calculation return command corresponds to a zero flag that turns off when the backup monitoring timer's time count differs from the judgment value corresponding to the backup judgment time, thereby terminating the power-off process and enabling a return to the special symbol process. Thus, if the backup monitoring timer does not indicate the backup judgment time (step AKS38; Yes), the power-off process is terminated.

If the backup monitoring timer indicates the backup determination time in response to step AKS38 (step AKS38; No), the checksum calculation process P_SUM_CALC is executed (step AKS39). The checksum calculation process P_SUM_CALC in step AKS39 may be the same process as the checksum calculation process included in the RWM check process P_RWM_CHK in step S2 in the main game control process P_MAIN shown in FIG. 4. In this way, by executing the same checksum calculation process in response to the start and stop of power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1, it becomes possible to determine whether recovery using backup data is possible based on whether the contents stored in the game work area of RAM 102 are retained unchanged. The checksum data created by the checksum calculation process P_SUM_CALC in step AKS39 is stored in the checksum buffer by a transfer command to write it to the memory area at the address pointed to by the pointer (step AKS40).

After step AKS40, an exclusive OR instruction is executed to set clear data to the output value data (step AKS41). This exclusive OR instruction executes an exclusive OR on the stored values of a single register, resulting in all bit values being the exclusive OR of the same value. This allows the stored value to be initialized to clear data 00 [H]. This clear data is stored in the RWM access protect register by a transfer instruction to write it to the memory area at the top address in the function setting register area (step AKS42). The RWM access protect register enables function control to prohibit access to the RWM RAM 102 in response to the setting of the clear data 00 [H]. Therefore, by storing the clear data in the RWM access protect register in step AKS42, access to the RAM 102 is prohibited in response to a power outage in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

After step AKS42, output port numbers "0" through "10" are cleared (step AKS43). Output port numbers "0" through "10" are the output ports with port numbers "0" through "10," and represent all of the output ports in the gaming control microcomputer 100. Therefore, step AKS43 clears all of the output ports in the gaming control microcomputer 100 in response to the power supply cutoff in the pachinko gaming machine 1. At this time, a transfer command for setting an internal register in the CPU 103 sets a connection confirmation signal OFF output value (step AKS44). The connection confirmation signal OFF output value is a value indicating that the connection confirmation signal is OFF, and may be, for example, 01 [H]. This connection confirmation signal OFF output value is stored in the output port number "1" register by a transfer command for writing it to a memory area at a specified address in the function control register area (step AKS45). As a result, the connection confirmation signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the payout control board is set to OFF.

Following step AKS45, a PTC0 interrupt disable output value is set by a transfer command for setting an internal register in the CPU 103 (step AKS46). The PTC0 interrupt disable output value is an output value for disabling timer interrupts using channel PTC0 of the timer circuit 136. This PTC0 interrupt disable output value is stored in the PTC0 control register by a transfer command for writing to a function setting register at a specified address in the function setting register area (step AKS47). The PTC0 control register can set the usage state of the timing function using channel PTC0 of the timer circuit 136. In step AKS47, the PTC0 interrupt disable output value set in step AKS46 is stored in the PTC0 control register, thereby disabling timer interrupts for game control in response to a power outage in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Once this setting corresponding to the elapse of the backup determination time has been made, the system transitions to a standby state by executing a loop process. In this standby state, input port number "3" is input (step AKS48), and it is determined whether the power supply confirmation signal input bit is "0" (step AKS49). If the power supply confirmation signal is in the OFF state and the power supply confirmation signal input bit is "0" (step AKS49; Yes), the system continues the loop process returning to step AKS48. This allows the system to maintain a standby state until operation is halted due to a power outage in response to an interruption in the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1, thereby preventing inappropriate changes to stored data and runaway processing by the CPU 103.

If the power check signal input bit is "1" and not "0" in response to step AKS49 (step AKS49; No), the power interruption recovery vector table address is set to the stack pointer (step AKS50), and then the power interruption processing P_POWER_OFF is terminated by an interrupt return instruction. The power interruption recovery vector table address is the address of the power interruption recovery vector table provided in the game program area of ROM 101. The interrupt return instruction can use the stack pointer as a pointer to set the data stored in the memory area indicated by the address specified by the stored value of the stack pointer to the program counter. For example, the data stored in the memory area indicated by the address specified by the stored value of the stack pointer is set to the lower byte of the program counter, and the data stored in the memory area indicated by the address specified by the value obtained by adding 1 to the stored value of the stack pointer is set to the upper byte of the program counter.

Figures 10-11 are diagrams illustrating an example of the data structure used for power-off processing P_POWER_OFF. In power-off processing P_POWER_OFF, for example, step AKS38 executes branch processing using the time value of the backup monitoring timer, and step AKS40 saves checksum data using a checksum buffer. Furthermore, step AKS50 sets a vector table address for power-off recovery, enabling game control programs to be executed from the beginning if normal power supply is resumed without halting operation after a power-off interruption is detected in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this way, power-off processing P_POWER_OFF uses the backup monitoring timer, checksum buffer, and power-off recovery vector table to enable control when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is interrupted.

Figure 10-11 (A) shows example configuration AKB01 of a memory area that serves as a backup data area. The backup data area of example configuration AKB01 can store backup setting data used when backing up data stored in the game work area of RAM 102. This backup data area includes a backup monitoring timer at address F000[H] and a checksum buffer at address F0DE[H]. Address F000[H] is the starting address of the game work area, and address F0DE[H] is the last address of the game work area. In this way, providing a backup data area at the starting address and last address of the game work area enables appropriate backup of data stored in the game work area of RAM 102.

Figure 10-11 (B) shows an example configuration AKT11 of a power failure recovery vector table. The power failure recovery vector table of configuration AKT11 can specify a return address from power failure processing in response to an interrupt return command when normal power supply is resumed. The power failure recovery vector table is composed of table data containing lower address designation data 00 [H] stored at address 0016 [H] in the game program area of ROM 101 and upper address designation data 00 [H] stored at address 0017 [H] in the game program area of ROM 101. In step AKS50 of the power failure processing P_POWER_OFF, data indicating address 0016 [H] is set in the stack pointer as the power failure recovery vector table address. Thereafter, an interrupt return command is issued to set the stored value of the program counter to 0000 [H], thereby restoring processing and enabling the game control main processing P_MAIN to be executed from the beginning.

Figure 10-12 is a flowchart showing an example of the random number update process P_RANDOM. The random number update process P_RANDOM is included in the processes that can be called from the game control timer interrupt process P_PCT shown in Figure 5, and can be executed in step S56 in response to the occurrence of a periodic timer interrupt after a predetermined time has elapsed, for example, 4 ms. On the other hand, the random number update process P_RANDOM is not included in the processes that can be called from the game control main process P_MAIN shown in Figure 4, and is not executed in the loop process that is repeated until a timer interrupt occurs after step S7. Therefore, although the random number update process P_RANDOM is included in the first process that can be executed in response to a timer interrupt after a predetermined time has elapsed, it is not included in the second process that can be repeatedly executed until the first process is executed. Furthermore, although the random number update process P_RANDOM can be called and executed in the game control timer interrupt process P_PCT that controls the progress of the game, it cannot be called and executed in the standby process that serves as a repeated loop process after startup processes such as the power supply start response process P_POWER_ON in step S1 in the game control main process P_MAIN that is executed based on the start of power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The random number update process P_RANDOM uses internal registers of the CPU 103, such as the B register, DE register, and HL register, to update the numerical data indicating the values of the random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol and the random number MR2-1 for the winning normal symbol. The random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol is used to determine the confirmed special symbol that results in the display of the special symbol in a special symbol game, which is a variable display of special symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The random number MR2-1 for the winning normal symbol is used to determine the confirmed normal symbol that results in the display of the normal symbol in a normal symbol game, which is a variable display of normal symbols on the normal symbol display device 20. The random number update process P_RANDOM can update the random number values for both the winning symbol random number MR1-2 and the normal winning symbol random number MR2-1 using the B register, DE register, and HL register as common internal registers.

When the CPU 103 executes the random number update process P_RANDOM, it sets the winning symbol random number counter address using a transfer command to set the HL register used as a random number pointer (step AKS61). The winning symbol random number counter address is the address of the winning symbol random number counter provided in the game work area of RAM 102. The random number pointer can store the address of the random number counter corresponding to the random number value to be updated, and the random number value to be updated can be specified by setting the stored value. In step AKS61, the LDQ command is used to store the address of the winning symbol random number counter in the random number pointer, thereby setting the winning symbol random number MR1-2 as the random number value to be updated.

Following step AKS61, a transfer command is issued to set register B, which is used as the random number maximum register, to set a random number maximum value corresponding to the maximum random number determination value for the winning symbol (step AKS62). The random number maximum register can store the maximum value that the random number to be updated can take, and the maximum random number value can be specified by setting the stored value. In step AKS62, for random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol, the maximum value included in the update range of random number MR1-2, such as C7 [H] corresponding to "199", is stored in the random number maximum register using the LD command. This allows the maximum random number value for random number MR1-2, which was set as the random number to be updated in step AKS61, to be set.

After step AKS62, a transfer command is issued to set the DE register used as the initial value pointer, setting the random number initial value data buffer address for the winning symbol (step AKS63). The random number initial value data buffer address for the winning symbol is the address of the random number initial value data buffer for the winning symbol located in the game work area of RAM 102. The initial value pointer can store the address of the random number initial value data buffer corresponding to the random number value to be updated, and setting the stored value makes it possible to obtain or change the random number initial value. In step AKS63, the LDQ command is used to store the address of the random number initial value data buffer for the winning symbol in the initial value pointer, thereby making the random number initial value obtainable and changeable corresponding to the random numbers MR1-2 selected as the random numbers to be updated in step AKS61. Next, a subroutine call command is issued to execute the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP (step AKS64). The initial value change random number update process P_RANCP in step AKS64 updates the random numbers MR1-2 for winning symbols, which are the random number values to be updated, and changes the random number initial value, based on the settings in steps AKS61-AKS63.

After the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP in step AKS64, a transfer command is issued to set the HL register used as a random number pointer, setting the random number counter address for the normal symbol (step AKS65). The random number counter address for the normal symbol is the address of the random number counter for the normal symbol located in the game work area of RAM 102. In step AKS65, the LDQ command is used to store the address of the random number counter for the normal symbol in the random number pointer, thereby setting the random number MR2-1 for the normal symbol as the random value to be updated.

Following step AKS65, a transfer instruction is issued to set register B, which is used as the random number maximum register, to set a random number maximum value corresponding to the random number maximum judgment value for the normal symbol per symbol (step AKS66). In step AKS66, for random number MR2-1 for the normal symbol per symbol, the maximum value included in the update range of random number MR2-1, such as C6[H] corresponding to the maximum value "198", is stored in the random number maximum register using the LD instruction. This allows the maximum random number value for random number MR2-1, which was selected as the random number value to be updated in step AKS65, to be set.

Following step AKS66, a transfer instruction is issued to set the DE register used as the initial value pointer, thereby setting the random number initial value data buffer address for the normal symbol (step AKS67). The random number initial value data buffer address for the normal symbol is the address of the random number initial value data buffer for the normal symbol provided in the game work area of RAM 102. In step AKS67, the LDQ instruction is used to store the address of the random number initial value data buffer for the normal symbol in the initial value pointer, thereby setting the random number initial value for random number MR2-1, which was set as the random number value to be updated in step AKS65, to be obtainable and changeable. Next, a subroutine call instruction, which is common to step AKS64, is used to execute the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP (step AKS68). The initial value change random number update process P_RANCP in step AKS68 updates the random number value to be updated, MR2-1, for the normal winning symbol, and changes the random number initial value, based on the settings in steps AKS65 to AKS67.

Figure 10-13 is a diagram illustrating an example of the use of data configuration related to the random number update process P_RANDOM. In the random number update process P_RANDOM, the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP is executed in step AKS64 using the winning symbol random number counter whose address was set in the random number pointer in step AKS61 and the winning symbol random number initial value data buffer whose address was set in the initial value pointer in step AKS63. Furthermore, in the random number update process P_RANDOM, the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP is executed in step AKS68 using the normal symbol winning symbol random number counter whose address was set in the random number pointer in step AKS65 and the normal symbol winning symbol random number initial value data buffer whose address was set in the initial value pointer in step AKS67. The winning symbol random number counter is provided in the special symbol random number buffer area and is capable of storing numerical data corresponding to the winning symbol random numbers MR1-2. The random number initial value data buffer for winning symbols is provided in the random number data area for winning symbols and can store numerical data corresponding to the random number initial value of the random number MR1-2. The random number counter for winning normal symbols is provided in the random number data area for winning symbols and can store numerical data corresponding to the random number MR2-1 for winning normal symbols. The random number initial value data buffer for winning normal symbols is provided in the random number data area for winning symbols and can store numerical data corresponding to the random number initial value of the random number MR2-1. In this way, the random number update process P_RANDOM enables software to update the random numbers MR1-2 and MR2-1 using the winning symbol random number initial value data buffer provided in the winning symbol random number data area, the normal symbol winning symbol random number counter, the normal symbol winning symbol random number initial value data buffer, and the winning symbol random number counter provided in the special symbol random number buffer area.

Figure 10-13 (A) shows a configuration example AKB11 of a random number data area for winning symbols. The winning symbol random number data area of configuration example AKB11 includes a random number initial value data buffer for winning symbols at address F050 [H], a winning symbol initial value random number counter at address F051 [H], a random number counter for normal winning symbols at address F052 [H], a random number initial value data buffer for normal winning symbols at address F053 [H], and a normal winning symbol initial value random number counter at address F054 [H]. Of these, address F050[H] of the random number initial value data buffer for winning symbols is set to the initial value pointer by step AKS63 of the random number update process P_RANDOM, address F052[H] of the random number counter for normal symbols is set to the random number pointer by step AKS65 of the random number update process P_RANDOM, and address F053[H] of the random number initial value data buffer for normal symbols is set to the initial value pointer by step AKS67 of the random number update process P_RANDOM. The winning symbol initial value random number counter can store numerical data corresponding to random numbers MR1-3, which are the initial values for winning symbols. The normal symbol initial value random number counter can store numerical data corresponding to random numbers MR2-2, which are the initial values for normal symbols.

Figure 10-13 (B) shows an example configuration AKB12 of the special symbol random number buffer area. The special symbol random number buffer area of example configuration AKB12 includes a special symbol determination random number buffer at address F07F[H], a winning symbol random number counter at address F081[H], a variation pattern type selection random number buffer at address F082[H], a variation pattern random number buffer at address F083[H], and a losing effect selection random number buffer at address F084[H]. Of these, the winning symbol random number counter address F081[H] is set to the random number pointer by step AKS61 of the random number update process P_RANDOM. The special symbol determination random number buffer is capable of storing numerical data corresponding to the special symbol determination random number MR1-1 obtained from the 16-bit random number circuit 104A. The random number buffer for selecting a variation pattern type can store numerical data corresponding to the random number MR3-3 for selecting a variation pattern type obtained from the 8-bit random number circuit 104B. The random number buffer for variation patterns can store numerical data corresponding to the random number MR3-4 for variation patterns obtained from the 8-bit random number circuit 104B. The random number buffer for selecting a losing effect can store numerical data corresponding to the random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing effect obtained from the 16-bit random number circuit 104A.

Figure 10-14 is a flowchart showing an example of the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP. The initial value change random number update process P_RANCP is included in the processes that can be called from the random number update process P_RANDOM shown in Figure 10-12, and can be executed in step AKS64 after the random numbers MR1-2 for winning symbols have been set in steps AKS61 to AKS63, and can be executed in step AKS68 after the random numbers MR2-1 for normal and winning symbols have been set in steps AKS65 to AKS67. Such initial value change random number update process P_RANCP makes it possible to update the values of the random numbers MR1-2 using numerical data corresponding to the random numbers MR1-2 for winning symbols in step AKS64. Additionally, the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP uses the numerical data corresponding to the random number MR2-1 for the normal symbol in step AKS68 to update the value of the random number MR2-1.

When the CPU 103 executes the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP, it first executes a compare and add instruction (step AKS101). This compare and add instruction uses the stored data at the address indicated by the stored value of the HL register, which is a random number pointer, as the update target value, and the stored value of the B register, which is a random number maximum value register, as the comparison judgment value. It can be executed by a single ICPLD instruction, which is a third special transfer instruction. The stored value of the HL register, which is a random number pointer, indicates the address of the random number counter in which numerical data corresponding to the random number value to be updated is stored. The stored value of the B register, which is a random number maximum value register, indicates the random number maximum value set corresponding to the random number value to be updated. If the count value of the random number counter indicating the random number value to be updated is less than the stored value of the random number maximum value register, the count value of the random number counter is updated to increment by 1, thereby incrementing the random number value to be updated by 1. In contrast, if the count value of the random number counter indicating the random number value to be updated is equal to or greater than the value stored in the maximum random number register, the random number counter is cleared and initialized to "0," changing the random number value to the minimum random number value. Therefore, the compare and add instruction of step AKS101 is a single instruction that includes comparing the random number value to be updated with the maximum random number value, incrementing the random number value to be updated by 1 if the comparison result is less than the maximum random number value, and changing the random number value to the minimum random number value if the comparison result is equal to or greater than the maximum random number value. In this way, when updating the random number value to be updated using the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP, a single compare and add instruction is executed first. By executing this single compare and add instruction first, it is possible to prevent malfunctions and update the random number value appropriately.

When the compare and add instruction is executed in step AKS101, a transfer instruction for reading stored data is used to load the random number value pointed to by the random number pointer (step AKS102). The random number pointer and initial value pointer are also exchanged (step AKS103). The random number value loaded in step AKS102 is then compared with the random number initial value data buffer pointed to by the initial value pointer (step AKS104). It is determined whether the compared random number value is different from the value stored in the random number initial value data buffer pointed to by the initial value pointer (step AKS105). The value stored in the DE register, which is the initial value pointer, indicates the address of the random number initial value data buffer corresponding to the random number value to be updated. Therefore, in step AKS104, after the compare and add instruction of step AKS101 is executed, the random number value to be updated after being updated by the compare and add instruction is compared with the random number initial value.

If the random number value corresponding to step AKS105 differs from the value stored in the random number initial value data buffer pointed to by the initial value pointer (step AKS105; Yes), the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP ends. When the compare and add instruction of step AKS101 is executed, the count value of the random number counter indicating the random number value to be updated will indicate the updated random number value to be updated. Then, when the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP ends due to the judgment result of step AKS105, the stored value of the random number counter indicating the updated random number value to be updated is stored as the current random number value. Therefore, in step AKS105, if the updated random number value to be updated does not match the random number initial value, the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP ends, allowing the updated random number value to be stored as the current random number value.

If the random number value is the same as the value stored in the random number initial value data buffer pointed to by the initial value pointer in response to step AKS105 (step AKS105; No), the initial value random number counter pointed to when the value stored in the initial value pointer is incremented by 1 is loaded (step AKS106). In the example configuration AKB11 of the winning symbol random number data area shown in Figure 10-13 (A), when 1 is incremented from address F050 [H] where the winning symbol random number initial value data buffer is located, the next address F051 [H] is provided with an initial value random number counter for the winning symbol. Furthermore, when 1 is incremented from address F053 [H] where the normal symbol winning symbol random number initial value data buffer is located, the next address F054 [H] is provided with an initial value random number counter for the normal symbol winning symbol. Therefore, in step AKS106, if the value stored in the initial value pointer indicates the address of the random number initial value data buffer for the winning symbol, the count value of the initial value random number counter for the winning symbol is read out. Also, in step AKS106, if the value stored in the initial value pointer indicates the address of the random number initial value data buffer for the normal winning symbol, the count value of the initial value random number counter for the normal winning symbol is read out. In this way, in step AKS106, the count value of the initial value random number counter can be read out as the initial value random number value.

When the initial value random number counter is loaded in step AKS106, the count value of the initial value random number counter read thereby is stored in the random number counter pointed to by the random number pointer (step AKS107). Since the stored value of the random number pointer indicates the address of the random number counter corresponding to the random number value to be updated, step AKS107 can store the count value of the initial value random number counter as the current random number value to be updated. Therefore, if the result of step AKS105 is that the updated random number value to be updated matches the random number initial value, step AKS107 can store the initial value random number value read in step AKS106 as the current random number value.

Following step AKS107, the count value of the initial value random number counter read in step AKS106 is stored in the random number initial value data buffer pointed to by the initial value pointer (step AKS108), and then the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP ends. Because the value stored in the initial value pointer indicates the address of the random number initial value data buffer corresponding to the random number value to be updated, step AKS108 can store the count value of the initial value random number counter as a new random number initial value. Therefore, if the result of step AKS105 indicates that the updated random number value to be updated matches the random number initial value, step AKS107 stores the random number value for initial value as the current random number value, and step AKS108 can store the random number value for initial value read in step AKS106 as the new random number initial value. In this way, setting a new random number initial value increases the uncertainty of the random number value, and storing it as the current random number value also prevents an increase in data volume, enabling appropriate random number updating.

The random number update process P_RANDOM shown in Figure 10-12 executes the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP in step AKS64 after setting the target random number value, maximum random number value, and initial random number value for the random numbers MR1-2 for winning symbols in steps AKS61 to AKS63. The initial value change random number update process P_RANCP enables the update of the target random number value and the change of the initial random number value based on the settings for the target random number value, maximum random number value, and initial random number value. The initial value change random number update process P_RANCP in step AKS64 enables the update of the target random number value for the winning symbol MR1-2, which was set as the target random number value for update in step AKS61, using the maximum random number set in step AKS62 and the initial random number set in step AKS63. Additionally, the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP in step AKS64 allows the random number initial value to be changed for the random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol that was set as the random number value to be updated in step AKS61 if that value matches the random number initial value set in step AKS63. In this way, appropriate random number values can be updated by updating the set random number value to be updated.

The random number update process P_RANDOM executes the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP in step AKS68 after setting the random number value to be updated, the maximum random number value, and the initial random number value for the random number MR2-1 for the normal symbol per symbol in steps AKS65 through AKS67. The initial value change random number update process P_RANCP in step AKS68 enables the random number MR2-1 for the normal symbol per symbol, which is set as the random number value to be updated in step AKS65, to be updated using the maximum random number value set in step AKS66 or the initial random number value set in step AKS67. Furthermore, the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP in step AKS68 enables the initial random number value to be changed for the random number MR2-1 for the normal symbol per symbol, which is set as the random number value to be updated in step AKS65, if the value matches the initial random number value set in step AKS67. In this way, appropriate random number values can be updated by updating the set target random number values. Also, appropriate random number values can be updated by updating the set target random number values or changing the initial random number value.

The random number update process P_RANDOM can update the random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol, which is used when determining the display result of the special symbol, through a first update process consisting of steps AKS61 to AKS64, and can update the random number MR2-1 for the winning normal symbol, which is used when determining the display result of the normal symbol, through a second update process consisting of steps AKS65 to AKS68. Steps AKS61 to AKS64 update the random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol as the first random number value, and then steps AKS65 to AKS68 update the random number MR2-1 for the winning normal symbol as the second random number value. The confirmed special symbol that results in the display of the special symbol corresponds to the maximum number of times the jackpot opening occurs during jackpot gaming. Additionally, the confirmed special symbol, which is the display result of the special symbol, may correspond to whether or not the game is controlled to a high probability state after the jackpot game state ends, or the maximum number of variable display times that can be performed in the time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends. In contrast, the confirmed normal symbol, which is the display result of the normal symbol, corresponds to the opening time and number of times the second large prize opening is opened. Therefore, the display result of the special symbol attracts more attention from players than the display result of the normal symbol. The random number update process P_RANDOM, which is a specific update process, updates the random number MR1-2 as the first random number value and then updates the random number MR2-1 as the second random number value. By updating the first random number value used to determine the display result that attracts the player's attention before the second random number value, the occurrence of malfunctions is suppressed and the random number value can be updated appropriately.

In the random number update process P_RANDOM, steps AKS61 to AKS64 can update the random number MR1-2, which will be the first random number value, and steps AKS65 to AKS68 can update the random number MR2-1, which will be the second random number value. The initial value change random number update process P_RANCP of step AKS64 can be called and executed in response to the random number MR1-2, which will be the first random number value, and the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP of step AKS68 can be called and executed in response to the random number MR2-1, which will be the second random number value. In this way, the random number update process P_RANDOM, which is a specific update process, updates the random number MR1-2, which will be the first random number value, and the random number MR2-1, which will be the second random number value, thereby making their initial values changeable. This common update process, the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP, prevents an increase in program size, stably updates the first random number value and second random number value, and enables appropriate random number value updates.

In the random number update process P_RANDOM, steps AKS61 to AKS64, which enable updating of random number MR1-2, which will become the first random number value, constitute the first update process, and steps AKS65 to AKS68, which enable updating of random number MR2-1, which will become the second random number value, constitute the second update process. The first update process can be executed by calling the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP in step AKS64, and the second update process can be executed by calling the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP in step AKS68. In this way, the random number update process P_RANDOM updates random number MR1-2, which will become the first random number value, and random number MR2-1, which will become the second random number value, thereby enabling their initial values to be changed by calling the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP as a common update process in both the first and second update processes. This common update process, the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP, prevents an increase in program size, stably updates the first random number value and second random number value, and enables appropriate random number value updates.

In the random number update process P_RANDOM, steps AKS61 to AKS64, which enable updating of random number MR1-2, which will become the first random number value, constitute the first update process, and steps AKS65 to AKS68, which enable updating of random number MR2-1, which will become the second random number value, constitute the second update process. The first and second update processes use the HL register, B register, and DE register of CPU 103, which are common internal storage means, to enable updating of random number MR1-2, which will become the first random number value, and random number MR2-1, which will become the second random number value. In this way, the first and second random number values can be stably updated using the common internal storage means, enabling appropriate random number updating.

In the random number update process P_RANDOM, before step AKS64 executes the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP, steps AKS61 to AKS63 store reference information such as the winning symbol random number counter address, the winning symbol random number maximum judgment value, and the winning symbol random number initial value data buffer address in the HL register, B register, and DE register of CPU 103, which are internal storage means. In addition, in the random number update process P_RANDOM, before step AKS68 executes the initial value change random number update process P_RANDCP, steps AKS65 to AKS67 store reference information such as the normal symbol winning symbol random number counter address, the normal symbol winning symbol random number maximum judgment value, and the normal symbol winning symbol random number initial value data buffer address in the HL register, B register, and DE register of CPU 103, which are internal storage means. The instruction used to update random number MR1-2, which becomes the first random number value in step AKS61, and the instruction used to update random number MR2-1, which becomes the second random number value in step AKS65, are common instructions in that they set the HL register of CPU 103, and since step AKS61 sets the random number counter address for the winning symbol but step AKS65 sets the random number counter address for the normal symbol, different reference information can be set. The instruction used to update random number MR1-2, which becomes the first random number value, and the instruction used to update random number MR2-1, which becomes the second random number value in step AKS66 are common instructions in that they set the B register of CPU 103, and since step AKS62 sets the random number maximum value corresponding to the random number maximum judgment value for the winning symbol but step AKS66 sets the random number maximum value corresponding to the random number maximum judgment value for the normal symbol, different reference information can be set. The instruction used to update random number MR1-2, which becomes the first random number value in step AKS63, and the instruction used to update random number MR2-1, which becomes the second random number value in step AKS67, are common instructions in that they set the DE register of CPU 103. Step AKS63 sets the random number initial value data buffer address for the winning symbol, while step AKS67 sets the random number initial value data buffer address for the winning symbol, so different reference information can be set. These steps AKS61 to AKS63 and steps AKS65 to AKS67 use common instructions, such as the LD instruction and the LDQ instruction, which are transfer instructions for setting the internal registers of CPU 103, to enable different reference information to be set. Then, steps AKS64 and AKS68 call and execute the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP using a common subroutine call instruction. In this way, in the random number update process P_RANDOM, which is a specific update process, the instruction used to update the random number MR1-2, which becomes the first random number value, and the instruction used to update the random number MR2-1, which becomes the second random number value, are the same. By using a common instruction to make it possible to update the random number MR1-2 as the first random number value and the random number MR2-1 as the second random number value, the first random number value and the second random number value can be stably updated, making it possible to update the random number values appropriately.

The random number update process P_RANDOM enables the update of random number MR1-2, which will be the first random number value, through steps AKS61 to AKS64, which constitute the first update process, and enables the update of random number MR2-1, which will be the second random number value, through steps AKS65 to AKS68, which constitute the second update process. Steps AKS64 and AKS68 then call and execute the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP. The initial value change random number update process P_RANCP shown in Figure 10-14 first executes a single compare and add instruction, making the compare and add instruction executable first in both cases of updating random number MR1-2 as the first random number value and updating random number MR2-1 as the second random number value. By executing this compare and add instruction first, it is possible to prevent errors from occurring in the first or second random number value and update the random number values appropriately.

When the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP is executed in step AKS64 of the random number update process P_RANDOM, it can update the random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol, and can change the random number initial value corresponding to the random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol using the random number MR1-3, which becomes the initial value for the winning symbol. Furthermore, when the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP is executed in step AKS68 of the random number update process P_RANDOM, it can update the random number MR2-1 for the winning normal symbol, and can change the random number initial value corresponding to the random number MR2-1 for the winning normal symbol using the random number MR2-2, which becomes the initial value for the winning normal symbol. Therefore, the random number MR1-3, which serves as the initial value for the winning symbol, is a first initial value random number value used when changing the random number initial value in response to the case where the random number value to be updated is the random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol, which becomes the first random number value, when the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP is executed in step AKS64 of the random number update process P_RANDOM. The random number MR2-2, which serves as the initial value for the winning normal symbol, is a second initial value random number value used when changing the random number initial value in response to the case where the random number value to be updated is the random number MR2-1 for the winning normal symbol, which becomes the second random number value, when the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP is executed in step AKS68 of the random number update process P_RANDOM.

Figure 10-15 is a flowchart showing an example of the random number update process P_TFINIT for determining initial values. The random number update process P_TFINIT for determining initial values is included in the process that can be called from the main process P_MAIN for game control shown in Figure 4, and can be executed in step S9 of the loop process that is repeated after step S7 until a timer interrupt occurs. The random number update process P_TFINIT for determining initial values is also included in the process that can be called from the timer interrupt process P_PCT for game control shown in Figure 5, and can be executed in step AKS57 in response to the occurrence of a periodic timer interrupt upon the lapse of a predetermined time, for example, 4 ms. Therefore, the random number update process P_TFINIT for determining initial values is included in a first process that can be executed in response to a timer interrupt upon the lapse of a predetermined time, and a second process that can be executed repeatedly until the first process is executed. Furthermore, the initial value determination random number update process P_TFINIT can be called and executed in the game control timer interrupt process P_PCT that controls the progress of the game, and can also be called and executed in step S9, which is included in the standby process as a repeated loop process, after startup processes such as the power supply start response process P_POWER_ON in step S1 in the game control main process P_MAIN that is executed based on the start of power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this way, the initial value determination random number update process P_IFINIT is included in processes that can be executed in response to periodic timer interrupts as initial value random number update process, and is also included in processes that can be executed repeatedly at irregular intervals. This makes the update period and update speed of the initial value random number variable uncertain, thereby increasing the uncertainty of the initial value random number variable and enabling appropriate random number value updating.

When the CPU 103 executes the initial value determination random number update process P_TINIT, it sets the winning symbol initial value random number counter address using a transfer instruction to set a pointer (step AKS81). The winning symbol initial value random number counter address is address F051 [H] assigned to the winning symbol initial value random number counter in the winning symbol random number data area configuration example AKB11 shown in Figure 10-13 (A). With the pointer set in this manner, the count value of the winning symbol initial value random number counter can be updated within the update range of "0" to "199" using a compare and add instruction (step AKS82). This compare and add instruction uses the stored data at the address pointed to by the pointer as the update target value and the immediate value specified by the operand as the comparison judgment value. It can be executed by a single ICPLD instruction, which is the third special transfer instruction. The value stored in the pointer indicates the address of the random number counter where the numerical data corresponding to the initial value random number to be updated is stored. The immediate value specified by the operand indicates the maximum random number value for the initial value that is set corresponding to the random number value for the initial value to be updated. If the count value of the random number counter indicating the random number value for the initial value to be updated is less than the maximum random number value for the initial value, the count value of the random number counter is updated to increment by 1, thereby incrementing the random number value for the initial value to be updated by 1. On the other hand, if the count value of the random number counter indicating the random number value for the initial value to be updated is equal to or greater than the value stored in the maximum random number register for the initial value, the random number counter is cleared and initialized to "0", thereby changing the random number value for the initial value to be updated to the minimum random number value. Therefore, the compare and add instruction in step AKS82 is a single instruction that sets random numbers MR1-3, which serve as the initial values for the winning symbols, to the random number value for the initial value to be updated, compares the random number value for the initial value to the maximum random number for the initial value, increments the random number value for the initial value to be updated by 1 if the comparison result is less than the maximum random number value for the initial value, and changes the random number value for the initial value to the minimum random number if the comparison result is equal to or greater than the maximum random number value for the initial value. Note that the compare and add instruction is not limited to an ICPLD instruction in which the address of the stored data indicating the update value is specified by a pointer. For example, it could be an ICPLDQ instruction in which the upper address is set using the Q register and the lower address is set using an immediate value specified in the first operand of the compare and add instruction. In this case, the immediate value specified in the second operand of the compare and add instruction can be set as the comparison judgment value. Using such a compare and add instruction to update the random number value for the initial value to be updated reduces the occurrence of errors and enables appropriate random number updating.

After step AKS82, a transfer command for setting a pointer is issued to set the address of the initial random number counter for the normal symbol (step AKS83). The address of the initial random number counter for the normal symbol is address F054[H] assigned to the initial random number counter for the normal symbol in the example configuration AKB11 of the random number data area for winning symbols shown in Figure 10-13(A). With the pointer set in this manner, a comparison and addition command is issued to update the count value of the initial random number counter for the normal symbol within the update range of "1" to "198" (step AKS84), thereby completing the initial value determination random number update process P_TFINIT. The comparison and addition command for step AKS84 may be the same as the comparison and addition command for step AKS82. However, in the compare and add instruction of step AKS84, random number MR2-2, which serves as the initial value for the normal symbol, is set as the random number value for the initial value to be updated, and therefore the immediate value specified by the operand indicating the maximum random number value for the initial value is set to a different value than in the compare and add instruction of step AKS82. Therefore, the compare and add instruction of step AKS84 is a single instruction that sets random number MR2-2, which serves as the initial value for the normal symbol, as the random number value for the initial value to be updated, compares the random number value for the initial value to the maximum random number value for the initial value, increments the random number value for the initial value to be updated by 1 if the result of the comparison is less than the maximum random number value for the initial value, and changes the random number value for the initial value to the minimum random number value if the result of the comparison is equal to or greater than the maximum random number value for the initial value. Using such a compare and add instruction to update the random number value for the initial value to be updated prevents malfunctions and enables appropriate random number updating.

The random number update process for determining initial values P_TFINIT updates random number MR1-3, which serves as the initial value for the winning symbol, in steps AKS81 and AKS82 as an update to the random number value for the first initial value. At the same time, the random number update process for determining initial values P_TFINIT updates random number MR2-2, which serves as the initial value for the winning normal symbol, in steps AKS83 and AKS84 as an update to the random number value for the second initial value. The random number MR1-3, which serves as the initial value for the winning normal symbol, is the first random number value used to change the random number initial value when the random number value to be updated is the random number MR1-2 for the winning normal symbol, which is the first random number value. The random number MR2-2, which serves as the initial value for the winning normal symbol, is the second random number value used to change the random number initial value when the random number value to be updated is the random number MR2-1 for the winning normal symbol, which is the second random number value. Steps AKS81 and AKS82 of the random number update process P_TFINIT for determining initial values constitute a first initial value update process that can update the random number value for the first initial value. Steps AKS83 and AKS84 of the random number update process P_TFINIT for determining initial values constitute a second initial value update process that can update the random number value for the second initial value. By updating the random number values for the first initial value and the second initial value in this way, it becomes possible to update the random number values appropriately so as to reliably increase the uncertainty of the first random number value and the second random number value.

In addition, the initial value determination random number update process P_TFINIT updates random number MR1-3, which will be the initial value for the winning symbol, as the first initial value random number value in steps AKS81 and AKS82, and then updates random number MR2-2, which will be the initial value for the winning normal symbol, as the second initial value random number value in steps AKS83 and AKS84. Therefore, the initial value determination random number update process P_TFINIT updates random number MR1-3, which will be the initial value for the winning symbol and the first initial value random number value in steps AKS81 and AKS82, which is the first initial value update process, and then updates random number MR2-1, which will be the initial value for the winning normal symbol and the second initial value random number value in steps AKS83 and AKS84, which is the second initial value update process.

Figure 10-16 is a flowchart showing an example of the start port switch passing process P_TZU_ON. The start port switch passing process P_TZU_ON is included in the processes that can be called from the special pattern process process P_TPROC shown in Figure 6, and can be executed in step S104 if the first start winning corresponding flag is on in step S103, and can be executed in step S108 if the second start winning corresponding flag is on in step S107. When the CPU 103 executes the start port switch passing process P_TZU_ON, it sets the start port winning memory counter address using a transfer command to set a pointer (step AKS201). The start port winning memory counter address is the address of the first start port winning memory counter or the second start port winning memory counter provided in the game work area of RAM 102. In step AKS201, a different address in the game work area can be specified corresponding to the first or second starting gate winning table set by the special symbol process P_TPROC. For example, the upper address F0[H] of the game work area, which serves as the working area, is set to the upper byte of the pointer using a transfer command, and the lower address of the starting gate winning memory counter stored in the first or second starting gate winning table pointed to by the table pointer is set to the lower byte of the pointer using a transfer command. As a result, the value indicating the address of the first or second starting gate winning memory counter is stored in the internal register of CPU 103, which serves as the pointer. Next, the starting gate winning memory counter is loaded using a transfer command to read the stored data at the address pointed to by the pointer (step AKS202).

Following step AKS202, a determination is made as to whether the count value of the start port winning memory counter is equal to or greater than the counter's maximum value (step AKS203). For example, a comparison and return command can compare the value loaded in step AKS202 with a counter maximum value, such as "4." If the value is equal to or greater than the counter maximum value (step AKS203; Yes), the start port switch passing process P_TZU_ON ends and the process returns to the special symbol process process P_TPROC. On the other hand, if the value is less than the counter maximum value (step AKS203; No), the count value of the start port winning memory counter is updated by adding 1 (step AKS204). In this case, an arithmetic and logic operation command that increments the stored data at the address pointed to by the pointer can update the count value of the first start port winning memory counter or the second start port winning memory counter by adding 1.

After step AKS204, the special symbol determination buffer address is set as the transfer destination (step AKS205). The special symbol determination buffer address is the address of the first special symbol determination buffer contained in the first special symbol reserve buffer or the second special symbol determination buffer contained in the second special symbol reserve buffer provided in the game work area of RAM 102. In step AKS205, different addresses in the game work area can be specified corresponding to the first start port winning table or second start port winning table set by the special symbol process processing P_TPROC and the count value of the first start port winning counter or second start port winning counter loaded in step AKS202.

The first special symbol reserve buffer is a first reserve memory buffer comprising a first special symbol determination buffer, a first winning symbol buffer, a first variation pattern type selection buffer, a first variation pattern buffer, and a first losing effect selection buffer. It is allocated as a plurality of memory areas, such as five memory areas corresponding to buffer numbers "0" to "4," corresponding to cases where the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed and the number of first reserve memories that have not yet been executed. The second special symbol reserve buffer is a second reserve memory buffer comprising a second special symbol determination buffer, a second winning symbol buffer, a second variation pattern type selection buffer, a second variation pattern buffer, and a second losing effect selection buffer. It is allocated as a plurality of memory areas, such as five memory areas corresponding to buffer numbers "0" to "4," corresponding to cases where the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed and the number of second reserve memories that have not yet been executed.

In step AKS205, the value corresponding to the buffer size of the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer is multiplied by the count value of the start port winning counter, and the multiplied value is added to the lower address of the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer with buffer number "1". By setting this added value as the transfer destination pointer, the special pattern determination buffer address can be set as the transfer destination.

Following step AKS205, the RL0 hard latch random number register address is set (step AKS206). The RL0 hard latch random number register address is the address of the RL0 hard latch random number register located in the function control register area. For example, the upper address FF[H] of the function control register area is set to the upper byte of the pointer using a transfer command, and the lower address of the RL0 hard latch random number register stored in the first start port winning table or second start port winning table pointed to by the table pointer is set to the lower byte of the pointer using a transfer command. The first start port winning table stores the lower address of the RL0 hard latch random number register, which has buffer number "0." The second start port winning table stores the lower address of the RL0 hard latch random number register, which has buffer number "1." As a result, different addresses are stored in the internal register of CPU 103, which serves as the pointer, as the address of the RL0 hard latch random number register for the first start port winning event and the second start port winning event.

After step AKS206, the RL0 hard latch random number register is loaded with a transfer command to read the stored data at the address pointed to by the pointer (step AK207). The value thus obtained from the RL0 hard latch random number register is stored in the special symbol determination random number buffer with a transfer command to write it to a memory area at a specified address in the gaming work area of RAM 102 (step AKS208). In this way, by storing the numerical data obtained from the RL0 hard latch random number register in the special symbol determination random number buffer, numerical data indicating the value of the special symbol determination random number MR1-1 is extracted, and the value of the random number MR1-1 can be stored in the special symbol determination random number buffer.

After step AKS208, the RL2 soft latch random number register is loaded by a transfer command to read stored data from a memory area at a specified address in the function control register area (step AKS209). The value stored in the RL2 soft latch random number register obtained at this time is stored in the random number buffer for selecting a losing effect by a transfer command to write it to a memory area at a specified address in the game work area of RAM 102 (step AKS210). In this way, by storing the numerical data obtained from the RL2 soft latch random number register in the random number buffer for selecting a losing effect, numerical data indicating the value of random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing effect is extracted, and the value of random number MR3-2 can be stored in the random number buffer for selecting a losing effect.

After step AKS210, the RS1 soft latch random number register is loaded by a transfer command to read stored data from a memory area at a specified address in the function control register area (step AKS211). The value stored in the RS1 soft latch random number register obtained at this time is stored in the random number buffer for selecting a variation pattern type by a transfer command to write it to a memory area at a specified address in the game work area of RAM 102 (step AKS212). In this way, by storing the numerical data obtained from the RS1 soft latch random number register in the random number buffer for selecting a variation pattern type, numerical data indicating the value of the random number MR3-3 for selecting a variation pattern type is extracted, and the value of the random number MR3-3 can be stored in the random number buffer for selecting a variation pattern type.

After step AKS212, the RS2 soft latch random number register is loaded by a transfer command to read stored data from a memory area at a specified address in the function control register area (step AKS213). The value stored in the RS2 soft latch random number register obtained at this time is stored in the random number buffer for variation patterns by a transfer command to write it to a memory area at a specified address in the game work area of RAM 102 (step AKS214). In this way, by storing the numerical data obtained from the RS2 soft latch random number register in the random number buffer for variation patterns, numerical data indicating the value of random numbers MR3-4 for variation patterns is extracted, and the values of random numbers MR3-4 can be stored in the random number buffer for variation patterns.

Following step AKS214, a block transfer is performed from the random number buffer to the special symbol determination buffer (step AKS215). The random number buffer includes a special symbol determination random number buffer in which the value of random number MR1-1 is stored in step AKS208, a loss effect selection random number buffer in which the value of random number MR3-2 is stored in step AKS210, a variation pattern type selection random number buffer in which the value of random number MR3-3 is stored in step AKS212, and a variation pattern random number buffer in which the value of random number MR3-4 is stored in step AKS214. In step AKS215, the address of the special symbol determination random number buffer is set as the transfer source, and a value corresponding to the buffer size of the random number buffer is set as the number of transfers. The special symbol determination buffer address, which is the transfer destination, was set in step AKS205. Based on these settings, by executing a block transfer command, the values of each random number temporarily stored in the random number buffer can be stored as new reserved information in the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer.

Once the new memory information is stored in step AKS215, it is determined whether the winning effect conditions are met (step AKS216). The winning effect conditions may be preset as conditions that enable the pre-reading effect. For example, if the starting gate winning designation value is "2," it is determined that the winning effect conditions are met. Furthermore, if the starting gate winning designation value is "1," it is determined that the winning effect conditions are met if the time-saving function flag is "0" corresponding to the non-time-saving state, and the special pattern process code is less than 03 [H] corresponding to the non-small win or big win game state. If it is determined that the winning effect conditions are met (step AKS216; Yes), the winning effect process P_GAME_CHK is executed (step AKS217). The winning effect processing P_GAME_CHK includes determining whether a special symbol has been hit, selecting effect specification values corresponding to the result of the determination, and enabling the sending of a winning effect command.

If it is determined in step AKS216 that the winning effect conditions are not met (step AKS216; No), or after executing the winning effect processing in step AKS217, a transfer command for setting a pointer is issued to set the effect memory information designation command transmission table address (step AKS218). The effect memory information designation command transmission table address is the address of the effect memory information designation command transmission table stored in the game data area of ROM 101. Then, by executing the command set processing P_COM_SET (step AKS219), the first effect memory information designation command or the second effect memory information designation command can be transmitted as the start winning command. The first effect memory information designation command is a presentation control command that designates the first reserved memory number indicated by the count value of the first starting gate winning memory counter. The second effect memory information designation command is a presentation control command that designates the second reserved memory number indicated by the count value of the second starting gate winning memory counter. In this way, the command set process P_COM_SET in step AKS219 allows the performance control command, which becomes the command at the time of the initial winning, to be sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

After step AKS219, a transfer command for setting a pointer is used to set the start port winning buffer memory counter address (step AKS220). The start port winning buffer memory counter address is the address of the start port winning buffer memory counter located in the game work area of RAM 102. In this way, the count value of the start port winning buffer memory counter whose address has been set is updated by incrementing it by one (step AKS221). Furthermore, a composite transfer command for setting a register or pointer is used to update the pointer corresponding to the start port winning buffer memory counter (step AKS222). For example, the count value of the start port winning buffer memory counter after update in step AKS221 is loaded into an internal register of CPU 103, and the stored value of the pointer is updated by incrementing it by one, thereby storing a value indicating the starting address of the start port winning buffer in the pointer. Furthermore, the count value of the loaded start port winning buffer memory counter is added to the stored value of the pointer, thereby making it possible to identify the storage area of the buffer number to be updated in the start port winning buffer.

After updating the pointer in step AKS222, the start port winning designation value is loaded (step AKS223). The start port winning designation value can be set to "1" indicating a first start port winning or "2" indicating a second start port winning, corresponding to the first start port winning table or second start port winning table set by the special symbol process processing P_TPROC. In step AKS223, a transfer command is issued to read table data from the first start port winning table or second start port winning table, making it possible to obtain the start port winning designation value. The start port winning designation value thus obtained is stored in the start port winning buffer by a transfer command to write it to the memory area indicated by the pointer (step AKS224), and the start port switch passing processing P_TZU_ON ends.

Figure 10-17 is a diagram illustrating an example of the use of data configuration related to the start port switch passing process P_TZU_ON. In the start port switch passing process P_TZU_ON, various settings and controls are performed using the first start port winning table set in step S102 or the second start port winning table set in step S106 of the special pattern process process P_TPROC shown in Figure 6. For example, the first start port winning memory counter and the second start port winning memory counter, whose count values can be updated in step AKS204, are provided in the special pattern control data area and can store data corresponding to the first and second reserved memory numbers. The start port winning buffer memory counter, whose count values can be updated by AKS221, and the start port winning buffer, in which the start port winning designation value is stored by AKS224, are provided in the start port winning buffer area and can store the total number of first and second start port winnings and the order in which they occur. Additionally, the command set process P_COM_SET in step AKS219 uses the first effect memory information designation command transmission table or the second effect memory information designation command transmission table whose address was set in step AKS218.

In this way, the start port switch passing process P_TZU_ON enables control of the special symbol game, which is a variable display of special symbols, using the first start port winning table or the second start port winning table, the first start port winning memory counter or the second start port winning memory counter provided in the special symbol control data area, the start port winning buffer memory counter or the start port winning buffer provided in the start port winning buffer area, and the first effect memory information designation command transmission table or the second effect memory information designation command transmission table.

Figure 10-17 (A1) shows an example configuration AKT21 of the first start port winning table. The first start port winning table of configuration example AKT21 is configured to include table data indicating the lower address of the first start port winning memory counter, the lower address of the RL0 hard latch random number register number "0", the lower address of the first special symbol determination buffer number "1", the address of the first effect memory information designation command transmission table, and the start port winning designation value "1".

The first start gate winning memory counter is located in the game work area of RAM 102 and is capable of storing data corresponding to the first reserved memory number. RL0 hard latch random number register number "0" is an RL0 hard latch random number register with register number "0" located in the function control register area. It is capable of acquiring and storing numerical data indicating the value of the special symbol determination random number MR1-1, which can be generated by channel RL0 located in the 16-bit random number circuit 104A, via hard latch. First special symbol determination buffer number "1" is a first special symbol determination buffer included in the first reserved memory buffer with buffer number "1" in the first special symbol reserved buffer. The first effect memory information designation command transmission table is stored in the game data area of ROM 101 and is used when transmitting a first effect memory information designation command that specifies the first reserved memory number. Start gate winning designation value "1" is a designated value that identifiably indicates that a first start win has occurred.

Figure 10-17 (A2) shows an example configuration AKT22 of the second start port winning table. The second start port winning table of configuration example AKT22 is configured to include table data indicating the lower address of the second start port winning memory counter, the lower address of the RL0 hard latch random number register number "1", the lower address of the second special symbol determination buffer number "1", the address of the second effect memory information designation command transmission table, and the start port winning designation value "2".

The second start gate winning memory counter is located in the game work area of RAM 102 and is capable of storing data corresponding to the second reserved memory number. RL0 hard latch random number register number "1" is an RL0 hard latch random number register with register number "1" located in the function control register area. It is capable of acquiring and storing numerical data indicating the value of the special symbol determination random number MR1-1, which can be generated by channel RL0 located in the 16-bit random number circuit 104A, via hard latch. Second special symbol determination buffer number "1" is a second special symbol determination buffer included in the second reserved memory buffer with buffer number "1" in the second special symbol reserved buffer. The second effect memory information designation command transmission table is stored in the game data area of ROM 101 and is used when transmitting a second effect memory information designation command that specifies the second reserved memory number. Start gate winning designation value "2" is a designated value that specifically indicates that a second start gate winning has occurred.

Figure 10-17 (B1) shows a configuration example AKB21 of the special symbol control data area. The special symbol control data area of configuration example AKB21 can store various data related to control by the special symbol process processing P_TPROC, such as the special symbol game, which is a variable display of special symbols, and the small hit game state and big hit game state that can be controlled based on the display results. This special symbol control data area includes a special symbol process timer at address F030[H], a win flag at address F032[H], a special symbol process code at address F033[H], a first start port winning memory counter at address F034[H], a big win symbol determination buffer at address F035[H], a small win symbol determination buffer at address F036[H], a large prize port winning number counter at address F037[H], a large prize port opening count counter at address F038[H], a large prize port opening pattern timer at address F039[H], a large prize port opening pattern table pointer at address F03B[H], a demo display flag at address F03D[H], and a second start port winning memory counter at address F099[H].

The special pattern process timer can store a timing value corresponding to the control time by the special pattern process processing P_TPROC. The special pattern process code can specify the processing selected in the special pattern process processing P_TPROC. The first start port winning memory counter can store a count value corresponding to the first reserved memory number. The jackpot pattern determination buffer can store data corresponding to the jackpot pattern specified value. The jackpot pattern specified value is a specified value corresponding to the confirmed special pattern displayed when the display result in the variable display of the special pattern is "jackpot", and makes it possible to set the type of jackpot game state. The small jackpot pattern determination buffer can store data corresponding to the small jackpot pattern specified value. The small jackpot pattern specified value is a specified value corresponding to the confirmed special pattern displayed when the display result in the variable display of the special pattern is "small jackpot", and makes it possible to set the type of alcohol in the small jackpot game state. The large prize opening number counter can store a count value corresponding to the number of game balls that have passed through the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 50. The large prize opening number counter can store a count value corresponding to the number of times the large prize opening has been opened in a small prize game state or a big prize game state. The large prize opening pattern timer can store a time value corresponding to the remaining time for controlling the large prize opening to an open state in a small prize game state or a big prize game state. The large prize opening pattern table pointer can specify a storage address in the large prize opening pattern table in which the opening time of the large prize opening is set. The demo display flag can store a flag value corresponding to an on or off state depending on whether a demonstration display is being executed. The second start opening memory counter can store a count value corresponding to the second reserved memory number.

Figure 10-17 (B2) shows a configuration example AKB22 of the start port winning buffer area. The start port winning buffer area of configuration example AKB22 can store various data related to the first start winning and second start winning that occur when the gaming ball enters the first start winning port or second start winning port. This start port winning buffer area includes a start port winning buffer storage counter at address F0BA[H] and start port winning buffer numbers "0" to "8" at addresses F0BB[H] to F0C3[H].

The start port winning buffer storage counter can store a count value corresponding to the number of valid start port winning designation values stored in the start port winning buffer area. Therefore, the count value of the start port winning buffer storage counter indicates the total number of first start winnings and second start winnings. Start port winning buffer numbers "0" to "8" are start port winning buffers assigned buffer numbers "0" to "8", and can store start port winning designation values in the order in which the first start winnings and second start winnings occurred. As a result, the information stored in the start port winning buffer indicates the order in which the first start winnings and second start winnings occurred.

Figure 10-17 (C1) shows an example configuration AKT23 of the first effect memory information designation command transmission table. The first effect memory information designation command transmission table of configuration example AKT23 is configured to include table data indicating the upper byte of the first effect memory information designation command and the first start port winning memory counter reference designation value. The command set process P_COM_SET in step AKS219 enables the first effect memory information designation command to be transmitted when the first effect memory information designation command transmission table is used. The first effect memory information designation command can set the lower byte corresponding to the count value of the first start port winning memory counter. By transmitting such a first effect memory information designation command, the first pending memory number can be notified to the effect control board 12.

Figure 10-17 (C2) shows an example configuration AKT24 of the second effect memory information designation command transmission table. The second effect memory information designation command transmission table of configuration example AKT24 is configured to include table data indicating the upper bytes of the second effect memory information designation command and the second start port winning memory counter reference designation value. The command set process P_COM_SET in step AKS219 enables the second effect memory information designation command to be transmitted when the second effect memory information designation command transmission table is used. The second effect memory information designation command can set the lower bytes corresponding to the count value of the second start port winning memory counter. By transmitting such a second effect memory information designation command, the second pending memory number can be notified to the effect control board 12.

The start port switch passing process P_TZU_ON shown in Figure 10-16 stores the value stored in the RL2 soft latch random number register loaded in step AKS209 in the random number buffer for selecting a losing effect in step AKS210, thereby enabling the extraction of numerical data indicating the value of the random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing effect. Furthermore, the start port switch passing process P_TZU_ON stores the value stored in the RS1 soft latch random number register loaded in step AKS211 in the random number buffer for selecting a variation pattern type in step AKS212, thereby enabling the extraction of numerical data indicating the value of the random number MR3-3 for selecting a variation pattern type. Furthermore, the start port switch passing process P_TZU_ON stores the value stored in the RS2 soft latch random number register loaded in step AKS213 in the random number buffer for variation patterns in step AKS214, thereby enabling the extraction of numerical data indicating the value of the random number MR3-4 for the variation pattern. Here, if the random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing effect is the first random number value, the random number MR3-3 for selecting a variation pattern type is the second random number, and the random number MR3-4 for the variation pattern is the third random number value, the start port switch passing process P_TZU_ON is executed in response to the occurrence of a starting winning, so the first random number value, the second random number value, and the third random number value can be extracted when the common extraction condition of the occurrence of a starting winning is met. The random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing effect is included in the gaming random numbers that can be updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 104A, and the random number MR3-3 for selecting a variation pattern type and the random number MR3-4 for the variation pattern are included in the gaming random numbers that can be updated by the 8-bit random number circuit 104B, and the total number of random numbers included in the update range for each is a prime number. The update rate of random number MR3-2 is 469 times/ms, while the update rates of random numbers MR3-3 and MR3-4 are 938 times/ms. In other words, the update rates of random numbers MR3-3 and MR3-4 are twice the update rate of random number MR3-2, which is an integer multiple of that rate. The update range of random number MR3-2 is "0" to "65518," the update range of random number MR3-3 is "0" to "240," and the update range of random number MR3-4 is "0" to "250." Therefore, the total number of random numbers included in each update range is different, and the total number of random numbers included in each update range is a prime number. In this way, when the update rates of the second random number value and the third random number value are an integer multiple of the update rate of the first random number value, the total number of random numbers included in each update range is different, and the total number of random numbers included in each update range is a prime number. This prevents synchronization between the first, second, and third random number values, enabling appropriate random number updates.

Figure 10-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol normal processing P_TNORMAL. The special symbol normal processing P_TNORMAL is included in the processing that can be called from the special symbol process processing P_TPROC shown in Figure 6, and can be executed in step S112 if the special symbol process code loaded in step S110 is 00 [H]. When the special symbol normal processing P_TNORMAL is executed, the CPU 103 sets the start port winning buffer memory counter address using a transfer command to set a pointer (step AKS241). The start port winning buffer memory counter address is the address of the start port winning buffer memory counter provided in the game work area of RAM 102. In this way, it is determined whether the count value of the start port winning buffer memory counter whose address has been set is "0" (step AKS242). For example, an arithmetic jump instruction branches processing depending on whether the stored data at the address pointed to by the pointer is 00 [H], which corresponds to "0," making it possible to execute different processing content when the count value of the start port winning buffer storage counter is "0" and when it is other than "0."

If the count value of the start port winning buffer storage counter is not "0" in response to step AKS242 (step AKS242; No), the count value of the start port winning buffer storage counter is updated to subtract 1 (step AKS243). A block transfer for shifting the start port winning buffer is also performed (step AKS244). In step AKS244, the destination address is set to the lower address BB[H] of start port winning buffer number "0," the source address is set to the lower address BC[H] of start port winning buffer number "1," and the number of transfers is set to "8," which is the buffer size of the start port winning buffer. Then, by executing a block transfer command, the contents of the start port winning buffer are shifted by transferring them one unit at a time to the previous buffer. Then, the memory area of start port winning buffer number "8" is initialized by clearing it.

After step AKS244, a transfer command for setting the table pointer is issued to set the second special symbol determination control table address (step AKS245). The second special symbol determination control table address is the address of the second special symbol determination control table stored in the game data area of ROM 101. At this time, a start port winning check process is executed to determine whether the start port winning designation value is "1" (step AKS246). For example, in the start port winning check process, if the start port winning designation value is "1," the zero flag is turned on, and if the start port winning designation value is "2," the zero flag is turned off. After this start port winning check process is executed, a jump command is issued to branch the process depending on whether the zero flag is off, allowing different processing to be executed depending on whether the start port winning designation value is "1" or "2."

If the start gate winning designation value is "1" in response to step AKS246 (step AKS246; Yes), a transfer command for setting the table pointer is issued to set the first special symbol determination control table address (step AKS247). The first special symbol determination control table address is the address of the first special symbol determination control table stored in the game data area of ROM 101. In step AKS247, a transfer command for setting the table pointer is issued to overwrite the value of the table pointer. Thus, in the normal special symbol processing P_TNORMAL, after the second special symbol determination control table address is set in step AKS245, the start gate winning designation value corresponds to "1" in step AKS246, and the first special symbol determination control table address is re-set by overwriting in step AKS247. As a result, when the second special symbol determination control table is used more frequently than the first special symbol determination control table, the program capacity required for table setting can be reduced, improving the marketability of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Furthermore, when the second special symbol determination control table is used more frequently than the first special symbol determination control table, processing using jump commands as branch commands can be simplified, making it easier to check at the design stage and improving the marketability of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

If the starting gate winning designation value is "2" and not "1" in response to step AKS246 (step AKS246; No), after step AKS247, the special symbol determination process P_TDECISION is executed (step AKS248), and the variable pattern setting process P_TPATSET is executed (step AKS249), after which the normal special symbol processing ends.

If the count value of the start slot winning buffer memory counter is "0" in response to step AKS242 (step AKS242; Yes), it is determined whether the demo display flag is on (step AKS250). The demo display flag is a flag indicating that a demonstration display is being executed. If the demo display flag is on (step AKS250; Yes), the normal special pattern processing ends. In contrast, if the demo display flag is off (step AKS250; No), a transfer command to set the demo display flag is issued to store the demo display designated value 01 [H] in the demo display flag (step AKS251). This sets the demo display flag to the on state. In addition, a transfer command to set the pointer is issued to set the standby command transmission table address (step AKS252). The standby command transmission table address is the address of the standby command transmission table stored in the game data area of ROM 101. Then, the command set process P_COM_SET is executed (step AKS253), and the normal special symbol processing ends.

Figure 10-19 is a diagram illustrating an example of the use of data configuration related to the normal special symbol processing P_TNORMAL. In the normal special symbol processing P_TNORMAL, the special symbol determination processing in step AKS248 is executed using the second special symbol determination control table whose address was set in step AKS245 or the first special symbol determination control table whose address was set in step AKS247. Furthermore, the command set processing P_COM_SET in step AKS253 uses the standby command transmission table whose address was set in step AKS252. In this way, the normal special symbol processing P_TNORMAL enables control of the special symbol game, which is the variable display of special symbols, using the first special symbol determination control table, second special symbol determination control table, or standby command transmission table.

Figure 10-19 (A1) shows an example configuration AKT31 of the first special symbol determination control table. The first special symbol determination control table of the example configuration AKT31 is configured to include table data indicating the address of the first special symbol buffer shift control table, the lower address of the first special symbol determination buffer number "0", the lower address of the first winning symbol buffer number "0", the lower address of the first special symbol buffer, and the address of the work setting table after the first special symbol win determination. The first special symbol buffer shift control table is stored in the game data area of ROM 101 and is used when shifting the memory contents of the first special symbol reserve buffer. The first special symbol determination buffer number "0" is the first special symbol determination buffer included in the first reserved memory buffer with buffer number "0" in the first special symbol reserve buffer. The first winning symbol buffer number "0" is the first winning symbol buffer included in the first reserved memory buffer with buffer number "0" in the first special symbol reserved buffer. The first special symbol buffer is provided in the game work area of RAM 102 and is capable of storing special symbol pattern designation values corresponding to the confirmed special symbols stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A. The first special symbol post-winning symbol determination work setting table is stored in the game data area of ROM 101 and is used when initializing data in response to the end of the special symbol determination process P_TDECISION.

Figure 10-19 (A2) shows an example configuration AKT32 of the second special symbol determination control table. The second special symbol determination control table of the example configuration AKT32 is configured to include table data indicating the address of the second special symbol buffer shift control table, the lower address of the second special symbol determination buffer number "0", the lower address of the second winning symbol buffer number "0", the lower address of the second special symbol buffer, and the address of the work setting table after the second special symbol win determination. The second special symbol buffer shift control table is stored in the game data area of ROM 101 and is used when shifting the memory contents of the second special symbol reserve buffer. The second special symbol determination buffer number "0" is the second special symbol determination buffer included in the second reserved memory buffer with buffer number "0" in the second special symbol reserve buffer. The second winning symbol buffer number "0" is a buffer for the second winning symbol included in the second reserved memory buffer with buffer number "0" in the second special symbol reserved buffer. The second special symbol buffer is provided in the game work area of RAM 102, and is capable of storing special symbol pattern designation values corresponding to the confirmed special symbols stopped and displayed in the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. The second special symbol post-winning symbol determination work setting table is stored in the game data area of ROM 101, and is used when initializing data in response to the end of the special symbol determination process P_TDECISION.

Figure 10-19 (B) shows an example configuration AKT33 of the standby command transmission table AKT33. The standby command transmission table of configuration example AKT33 is configured to include table data indicating the number of processes, the upper byte of the second specific count specification command, the specific count command buffer reference value, the upper byte of the background color specification command, the special symbol state specification code reference value, the upper byte of the customer waiting demo command, and the lower byte of the customer waiting demo command. The command set process P_COM_SET in step AKS253 uses the standby command transmission table of configuration example AKT33 to enable the transmission of the second specific count specification command, the background color specification command, and the customer waiting demo command. The second specific count specification command can have its lower byte set to correspond to the value stored in the specific count command buffer. The background color specification command can have its lower byte set to correspond to the special symbol state specification code. The customer waiting demo command can have its lower byte set to use the fixed value 03 [H].

Figure 10-20 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol determination process P_TDECISION. The special symbol determination process P_TDECISION is included in the processes that can be called from the normal special symbol process P_TNORMAL shown in Figure 10-18, and can be executed in step AKS248 when variable display of special symbols is started. When the CPU 103 executes the special symbol determination process P_TDECISION, it sets the special symbol buffer shift control table address using a transfer command to set a pointer (step AKS301). The special symbol buffer shift control table address is the address of the first special symbol buffer shift control table or the second special symbol buffer shift control table stored in the game data area of ROM 101. In step AKS301, a different address in the game data area can be specified corresponding to the first special symbol determination control table or the second special symbol determination control table set by the normal special symbol process P_TNORMAL. For example, when the first special symbol determination control table is set, a value indicating the address 13C2[H] of the first special symbol buffer shift control table is set in the pointer. Also, when the second special symbol determination control table is set, a value indicating the address 13C8[H] of the second special symbol buffer shift control table is set in the pointer.

Following step AKS301, special symbol buffer shift processing P_TBUFSHIFT is executed (step AKS302). The special symbol buffer shift processing P_TBUFSHIFT in step AKS302 can shift the contents of the first special symbol reserve buffer or the second special symbol reserve buffer using the first special symbol buffer shift control table or the second special symbol buffer shift control table whose address was set in step AKS301. For example, by setting the destination address, source address, and number of transfers, and then executing a block transfer command, the contents of the first reserve memory buffer of the first special symbol buffer or the second reserve memory buffer of the second special symbol buffer can be shifted by transferring them one unit at a time to the previous buffer.

Following step AKS302, the special symbol determination buffer with buffer number "0" is loaded (step AKS303). The special symbol determination buffer with buffer number "0" is the first special symbol determination buffer or the second special symbol determination buffer included in the first reserved memory buffer with buffer number "0" in the first special symbol reserve buffer. In step AKS303, the stored values of the special symbol determination buffer can be read from the first special symbol reserve buffer or the second special symbol reserve buffer in accordance with the first special symbol determination control table or the second special symbol determination control table set by the special symbol normal processing P_TNORMAL. For example, the upper address F0 [H] of the game work area, which serves as the work area, can be set to the upper byte of the pointer using a transfer command, and the lower address of the first special pattern determination buffer number "0" or the second special pattern determination buffer number "0" stored in the first special pattern determination control table or the second special pattern determination control table pointed to by the table pointer can be set to the lower byte of the pointer using a transfer command. Then, by reading the stored data at the address in the game work area pointed to by the pointer, it is possible to read the random number MR1-1 for special pattern determination stored in the special pattern determination buffer with buffer number "0".

After step AKS303, the special symbol jackpot determination process P_TFVR_CHK is executed (step AKS304). The special symbol jackpot determination process P_TFVR_CHK in step AKS304 can determine whether the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" by comparing the value of the special symbol determination random number MR1-1 read in step AKS303 with the jackpot determination value. The determination of whether the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" is also referred to as the special symbol jackpot determination, and is a determination of whether to control the game to a favorable jackpot gaming state. If the special symbol jackpot determination determines the special symbol display result to be a "jackpot," the jackpot designated value 01 [H] is stored in the hit flag. The hit flag is located in the special symbol control data area of the configuration example AKB21 shown in Figure 10-17 (B1) and is assigned address F032 [H]. The special symbol jackpot determination process of step AKS304 simply stores the specified jackpot value in the hit flag using a transfer command to write to a memory area at a specified address in the game work area of RAM 102. Note that the hit flag only needs to be able to be set to its initial value of 00 [H] using a clear command executed in response to the start of the special symbol jackpot determination process P_TFVR_CHK in step AKS304.

The special symbol small win determination process P_TLITTLE_CHK is executed in conjunction with the special symbol big win determination process P_TFVR_CHK in step AKS304 (step AKS305). The special symbol small win determination process P_TLITTLE_CHK in step AKS305 can determine whether the special symbol display result is a "small win" by comparing the value of the special symbol determination random number MR1-1, read by loading the special symbol determination buffer in step AKS303, with the small win determination value. The determination of whether the special symbol display result is a "small win" is also referred to as the special symbol small win determination, and is a determination of whether to control the game to a predetermined small win gaming state. Then, if the special symbol small win determination determines that the special symbol display result is a "small win," the small win designated value 02 [H] is stored in the win flag. The special symbol small win determination process P_TLITTLE_CHK in step AKS305 simply stores the small win designated value in the win flag using a transfer command to write it to a memory area at a designated address in the game work area of RAM 102.

In the special symbol small hit determination process P_TLITTLE_CHK in step AKS305, the small hit determination value is included in a range different from the big hit determination value. Therefore, after the special symbol big hit determination determines the special symbol display result as a "big hit," the special symbol small hit determination will not determine the special symbol display result as a "small hit." However, if, for example, an error occurs, after the special symbol big hit determination determines the special symbol display result as a "big hit," the special symbol small hit determination determines the special symbol display result as a "small hit," the small hit specified value will be stored in the hit flag. Therefore, in the event of a conflict between the special symbol big hit determination determining the special symbol display result as a "big hit" and the special symbol small hit determination determining the special symbol display result as a "small hit," fraudulent behavior due to a malfunction in the determination process is prevented, enabling appropriate game control so that the game is not controlled to a big hit game state, which is more advantageous than a small hit game state.

When the special symbol small win determination process P_TLITTLE_CHK in step S305 is executed, the winning symbol buffer with buffer number "0" is loaded (step AKS306). The winning symbol buffer with buffer number "0" is the first winning symbol buffer contained in the first reserved memory buffer with buffer number "0" in the first special symbol buffer, or the second winning symbol buffer contained in the second reserved memory buffer with buffer number "0" in the second special symbol buffer. In step AKS306, the stored value of the winning symbol buffer can be read from the first special symbol buffer or the second special symbol buffer corresponding to the first special symbol determination control table or the second special symbol determination control table whose address was set by the special symbol normal process P_TNORMAL. For example, the upper address F0 [H] of the game work area, which serves as the working area, is set to the upper byte of the buffer pointer using a transfer command, and the lower address of the special symbol determination buffer stored in the first special symbol determination control table or second special symbol determination control table pointed to by the table pointer is set to the lower byte of the buffer pointer using a transfer command. Then, by reading the stored data at the address in the game work area pointed to by the buffer pointer, it is possible to read the random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol stored in the winning symbol buffer with buffer number "0".

After step AKS306, the special symbol buffer lower address is loaded (step AKS307). The special symbol buffer lower address is the address of the first or second special symbol buffer provided in the game work area of RAM 102. In step AKS307, a different lower address can be specified corresponding to the first or second special symbol determination control table whose address was set by the normal special symbol processing P_TNORMAL. For example, when the first special symbol determination control table is set, a value indicating the lower address B8 [H] of the first special symbol buffer is set in the lower byte of the buffer pointer. Also, when the second special symbol determination control table is set, a value indicating the lower address B9 [H] of the second special symbol buffer is set in the lower byte of the buffer pointer. The upper address F0 [H] of the game work area has already been stored in the upper byte of the buffer pointer by step AKS306.

Following step AKS307, the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET is executed (step AKS308). The special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET makes it possible to determine the confirmed special symbol to be displayed in the special symbol game and to store the special symbol pattern designation value corresponding to the determined result in the special symbol buffer. Following the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET, the post-special symbol hit determination work setting table address is set (step AKS309). The post-special symbol hit determination work setting table address is the address of the first special symbol hit determination work setting table or the second special symbol hit determination work setting table stored in the game data area of ROM 101. In step AKS309, a different address in the game data area can be specified corresponding to the first special symbol hit determination control table or the second special symbol hit determination control table whose address was set by the special symbol normal process P_TNORMAL. For example, when the first special symbol determination control table is set, a value indicating address 12BB [H] of the work setting table after the first special symbol win determination is set in the pointer. Also, when the second special symbol determination control table is set, a value indicating address 12C0 [H] of the work setting table after the second special symbol win determination is set in the pointer.

Following step AKS309, data set processing P_DATASET is executed (step AKS310), and the special symbol determination processing P_TDECISION is completed. Data set processing P_DATASET in step AKS310 uses the special symbol post-win determination work setting table whose address was set in step AKS309 to clear the special symbol determination buffer and the winning symbol buffer in the first reserved memory buffer or second reserved memory buffer with buffer number "0," thereby enabling initialization. For example, when the first special symbol post-win determination work setting table is set, the first special symbol determination buffer and the first winning symbol buffer are initialized in the first reserved memory buffer with buffer number "0," which is included in the first special symbol reserve buffer. Additionally, when the work setting table is set after determining that the second special symbol has been won, the second special symbol determination buffer and the second winning symbol buffer are initialized in the second reserved memory buffer with buffer number "0" included in the second special symbol reserved buffer.

Figure 10-21 is a diagram illustrating an example of the use of data configuration related to the special symbol determination process P_TDECISION. In the special symbol determination process P_TDECISION, the special symbol big hit determination process P_TFVR_CHK in step AKS304 and the special symbol small hit determination process P_TLITTLE_CHK in step AKS305 use the special symbol determination random number MR1-1 to determine whether the display result in the variable display of the special symbol is a "big hit" or a "small hit" in response to the start of the variable display. Furthermore, the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET in step AKS308 uses the special symbol buffer whose lower address was loaded in step AKS307. In this way, the special symbol determination process P_TDECISION uses the special symbol determination random number MR1-1 and the special symbol buffer to enable control of the special symbol game, which is the variable display of special symbols.

Figure 10-21 (A) shows a special symbol determination example AKC01 by the special symbol jackpot determination process P_TFVR_CHK in step AKS304 and the special symbol minor jackpot determination process P_TLITTLE_CHK in step AKS305. The special symbol jackpot determination process P_TFVR_CHK in step AKS304 enables a comparison operation to be performed with the jackpot determination value for the special symbol determination random number MR1-1 to determine whether its value is within the jackpot determination range. The jackpot determination value includes a jackpot lower limit determination value and an jackpot upper limit determination value. When the value of random number MR1-1 is subtracted from the jackpot lower limit determination value, if the carry flag is off, the value of random number MR1-1 is a value below the jackpot lower limit determination value, and if the carry flag is on, the value of random number MR1-1 is a value above the jackpot lower limit determination value. If the value of random number MR1-1 is equal to or less than the lower limit of the jackpot determination value, it is not within the jackpot determination range, and the special symbol jackpot determination process P_TFVR_CHK is terminated, returning to the special symbol determination process P_TDECISION. On the other hand, if the value of random number MR1-1 exceeds the lower limit of the jackpot determination value, the value of random number MR1-1 is subtracted from the upper limit of the jackpot determination value. At this time, if the carry flag is off, the value of random number MR1-1 is equal to or less than the upper limit of the jackpot determination value, and if the carry flag is on, the value of random number MR1-1 exceeds the upper limit of the jackpot determination value. Therefore, if the value of random number MR1-1 is equal to or less than the upper limit of the jackpot determination value, it is within the jackpot determination range, and the value 01 [H], which is the designated jackpot value, is stored in the hit flag. If the value of the random number MR1-1 exceeds the upper jackpot judgment value, it is not within the jackpot judgment range, and the special symbol jackpot judgment process P_TFVR_CHK is terminated, returning to the special symbol judgment process P_TDECISION.

As an example, the lower limit jackpot judgment value may be preset to "60000" and the upper limit jackpot judgment value to "60285." As a result, as in special symbol judgment example AKC01, when the starting slot winning designation value corresponds to "1" and "2" and the value of random number MR1-1 is within the jackpot judgment range of "60001" to "60285," the judgment result for the special symbol display result will be "jackpot."

The special symbol small win determination process P_TLITTLE_CHK in step AKS305 enables a comparison operation to be performed with the small win determination value for the random number MR1-1 used for determining the special symbol to determine whether its value is within the small win determination range. The small win determination value includes a small win lower limit determination value and a small win upper limit determination value. When the value of the random number MR1-1 is subtracted from the small win lower limit determination value, if the carry flag is off, the value of the random number MR1-1 is a value below the small win lower limit determination value; if the carry flag is on, the value of the random number MR1-1 is a value above the small win lower limit determination value. If the value of the random number MR1-1 is below the small win lower limit determination value, it is not within the small win determination range, and the process terminates the special symbol small win determination process P_TLITTLE_CHK and returns to the special symbol determination process P_TDECISION. In contrast, if the value of random number MR1-1 exceeds the small win lower limit judgment value, the value of random number MR1-1 is subtracted from the small win upper limit judgment value. At this time, if the carry flag is off, the value of random number MR1-1 is a value equal to or less than the small win upper limit judgment value, and if the carry flag is on, the value of random number MR1-1 is a value equal to or less than the small win upper limit judgment value. Therefore, if the value of random number MR1-1 is a value equal to or less than the small win upper limit judgment value, it is within the small win judgment range, and 02 [H], which is the small win designation value, is stored in the win flag. If the value of random number MR1-1 exceeds the small win upper limit judgment value, it is not within the small win judgment range, and the process returns to the special pattern small win determination process P_TDECISION by terminating the special pattern small win determination process P_TLITTLE_CHK. The small win upper limit judgment value may be set to a different value depending on whether the start gate winning designation value is "1" or "2."

As an example, the small win lower limit judgment value may be preset to "21000," which is the same whether the starting port winning designation value is "1" or "2." The small win upper limit judgment value may be preset to "21285" when the starting port winning designation value is "1," and "29282" when the starting port winning designation value is "2." As a result, as in special symbol judgment example AKC01, when the starting port winning designation value corresponds to "1" and the value of random number MR1-1 is within the small win judgment range of "21001" to "21285," or when the starting port winning designation value corresponds to "2" and the value of random number MR1-1 is within the small win judgment range of "21001" to "29282," the judgment result for the special symbol display will be "small win."

Figure 10-21 (B) shows a configuration example AKB31 of the special symbol buffer area. The special symbol buffer area of configuration example AKB31 is capable of storing special symbol pattern designation values corresponding to the confirmed special symbol that is stopped and displayed as a result of the display of the special symbol. This special symbol buffer area includes a first special symbol buffer at address F0B8 [H] and a second special symbol buffer at address F0B9 [H]. The first special symbol buffer is capable of storing special symbol pattern designation values when a first special symbol game is executed by the first special symbol display device 4A. The second special symbol buffer is capable of storing special symbol pattern designation values when a second special symbol game is executed by the second special symbol display device 4B. The special symbol pattern designation value is a designation value for a display pattern corresponding to a confirmed special symbol that is the display result in the variable display of special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and includes a big win special symbol pattern designation value and a small win special symbol pattern designation value. The big win special symbol pattern designation value is a designation value for a display pattern corresponding to a confirmed special symbol that is displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B when the display result in the variable display of special symbols is a "big win." The small win special symbol pattern designation value is a designation value for a display pattern corresponding to a confirmed special symbol that is displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B when the display result in the variable display of special symbols is a "small win."

Figure 10-22 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET. The special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET is included in the processes that can be called from the special symbol determination process P_TDECISION shown in Figure 10-20, and can be executed in step AKS308 after the special symbol big win determination process P_TFVR_CHK in step AKS304 and the special symbol small win determination process P_LITTLE_CHK in step AKS305 are executed. When the CPU 103 executes the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET, it loads a win flag (step AKS321). The win flag is provided in the special symbol control data area of the configuration example AKB21 shown in Figure 10-17 (B1), and is assigned address F032 [H]. In step AKS321, the hit flag is loaded using a transfer command to read the stored data at a specified address in the game work area of RAM 102. Then, an arithmetic jump command that can compare the hit flag with a judgment value corresponding to the designated jackpot value is used to confirm that the hit flag is not the designated jackpot value (step AKS322).

If the winning flag is set to the jackpot specified value in step AKS322 (step AKS322; No), the winning symbol buffer with buffer number "0" is set (step AKS323). The value stored in the winning symbol buffer with buffer number "0" was loaded by step AKS306 of the special symbol determination process P_TDECISION shown in Figure 10-20. This loaded content can be set as the processing target by transferring it to a processing register included in the internal registers of CPU 103. For the winning symbol buffer with buffer number "0" set in this way, the stored value is stored in the special symbol buffer (step AKS324). The special symbol buffer is the first special symbol buffer or the second special symbol buffer whose lower address was loaded by step AKS307 of the special symbol determination process P_TDECISION shown in Figure 10-20. As a result, for the random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol stored in the winning symbol buffer with buffer number "0," numerical data indicating that random number value is stored in the first special symbol buffer or the second special symbol buffer. Therefore, when the special symbol display result is "jackpot," the numerical data indicating the value of the random number MR1-2 corresponds to the special symbol whose confirmed special symbol is the jackpot symbol, and can be used as a jackpot special symbol pattern designation value.

Following step AKS324, the start port winning buffer with buffer number "0" is loaded to the start port winning designated value (step AKS325). The start port winning buffer with buffer number "0" is located in the start port winning buffer area of the configuration example AKB22 shown in Figure 10-17 (B2), and is assigned address F0BB [H]. In step AKS325, the start port winning buffer with buffer number "0" is loaded using a transfer command to read stored data from the memory area of the specified address in the game work area of RAM 102.

After step AKS325, the jackpot information data selection process P_TFVR_ZU is executed (step AKS326). The jackpot information data selection process P_TFVR_ZU determines the jackpot symbol designation value using the start-up winning designation value loaded by step AKS325 and the value stored in the winning symbol buffer loaded by step AKS306 of the special symbol determination process P_TDECISION shown in Figure 10-20, and can set the jackpot information setting data corresponding to the determined result. The jackpot information setting data is data indicating the jackpot performance designation value, the fanfare display designation value, and the jackpot end display designation value. The jackpot symbol designation value determined by this jackpot information data selection process P_TFVR_ZU is stored in the jackpot symbol determination buffer (step AKS327). The jackpot symbol determination buffer is located in the special symbol control data area of the configuration example AKB21 shown in Figure 10-17 (B1), and is assigned address F035 [H]. In step AKS327, the jackpot symbol designation value is stored using a transfer command to write it to the memory area of the specified address in the game work area of RAM 102.

Following step AKS327, the jackpot information setting data is transferred (step AKS328). In this case, in the jackpot information setting table stored in the game data area of ROM 101, the storage address of the jackpot information setting data corresponding to the determined jackpot symbol designation value is set in a pointer specifying the transfer source. In addition, the address of the effect symbol information buffer provided in the game work area of RAM 102 is set in a buffer pointer specifying the transfer destination. Furthermore, the data size of the jackpot information setting data is set in the number of transfers. Thereafter, the block transfer command is used to transfer and store the jackpot information setting data read from the jackpot information setting table to the effect symbol information buffer, fanfare display buffer, and jackpot end display buffer. At this time, the variable command designation buffer is set (step AKS329). The variable command designation buffer is located at the next address of the jackpot end display buffer in the game work area of RAM 102, and the stored value can be set using the destination address updated by the block transfer command of step AKS327. For example, the variable command designation value 01 [H], which corresponds to the special symbol display result being determined to be a "jackpot," can be set as the stored value of the variable command designation buffer. Note that the stored value may be initialized to 00 [H] by clearing the variable command designation buffer in accordance with the presentation state after the jackpot game state has ended, the stored value of the presentation symbol information buffer, etc.

After setting the variable command designation buffer in step AKS329, the maximum number of times the special prize opening is performed is set (step AKS330). The maximum number of times the special prize opening is performed is set in the game work area of RAM 102 at the next address after the variable command designation buffer, and is capable of storing the maximum number of times the special prize opening is controlled to be open during a special prize game. In step AKS330, the maximum number of times the special prize opening is performed can be determined using the jackpot symbol designation value determined by the jackpot information data selection process P_TFVR_ZU in step AKS326 and the maximum number of times the special prize opening is performed table stored in the game data area of ROM 101. The value corresponding to the determined maximum number of times the special prize opening is performed can then be stored in the maximum number of times the special prize opening is performed buffer using a transfer command to write the value to a memory area at a specified address in the game work area of RAM 102.

If the hit flag is not the designated jackpot value in step AKS322 (step AKS322; Yes), an arithmetic jump instruction is used to compare the hit flag with a judgment value corresponding to the designated small hit value to confirm that the hit flag is not the designated small hit value (step AKS331). If the hit flag is the designated small hit value (step AKS331; No), a special small hit symbol pattern designation value is stored in the special symbol buffer (step AKS332). The special small hit symbol pattern designation value may be created by adding a preset small hit symbol addition value to the stored value read from the winning symbol buffer with buffer number "0." The special small hit symbol pattern designation value may also be a value different from the special large hit symbol pattern designation value. The special symbol buffer is the first special symbol buffer or the second special symbol buffer into which the lower address is loaded in step AKS307 of the special symbol determination process P_TDECISION shown in Figures 10-20. In step AKS332, the small win special symbol pattern designation value created using the small win symbol addition value, etc., is stored in the first special symbol buffer or the second special symbol buffer by a transfer command to write it to the memory area of the designated address in the game work area of RAM 102.

After storing the small win special symbol pattern designation value in step AKS332, the small win symbol designation value is determined (step AKS333). The small win symbol designation value can be determined using the value stored in the winning symbol buffer loaded in step AKS306 of the special symbol determination process P_TDECISION shown in Figure 10-20 and the first small win state setting table or the second small win state setting table set corresponding to the starting gate winning designation value. The determined small win symbol designation value is stored in the small win symbol determination buffer (step AKS334). The small win symbol determination buffer is located in the special symbol control data area of the configuration example AKB21 shown in Figure 10-17 (B1) and is assigned address F036 [H]. In step AKS334, the small win symbol designation value is stored using a transfer command to write it to the memory area of the specified address in the game work area of RAM 102.

After step AKS334, a small win effect designation value is determined (step AKS335). The small win effect designation value can be determined using the small win information setting table stored in the game data area of ROM 101 and the small win pattern designation value determined in step AKS333. The small win effect designation value determined at this time is stored in the designation pattern information buffer (step AKS336). In step AKS336, the small win effect designation value determined in step AKS335 is stored in the designation pattern information buffer by a transfer command to write it to the memory area of the specified address in the game work area of RAM 102.

Once the small win effect designation value is stored in step AKS336, the small win information setting data is transferred (step AKS337). The small win information setting data indicates the small win fanfare display designation value and the small win ending display designation value. In step AKS337, the storage address of the small win information setting data corresponding to the determined small win effect designation value in the small win information setting table stored in the game data area of ROM 101 is set as a pointer specifying the transfer source. The address of the small win fanfare display buffer provided in the game work area of RAM 102 is also set as the transfer destination. Furthermore, the data size of the small win information setting data is set as the number of transfers. Thereafter, the small win information setting data read from the small win information setting table is transferred and stored in the small win fanfare display buffer and small win ending display buffer using a block transfer command.

If the win flag is not the small win designated value in step AKS331 (step AKS331; Yes), the loss special symbol pattern designated value is stored in the special symbol buffer (step AKS338). The loss special symbol pattern designated value may be a value different from the big win special symbol pattern designated value or the small win special symbol pattern designated value, as long as it is prepared in advance. For example, F1 [H] may be set as the loss special symbol pattern designated value. The special symbol buffer is the first special symbol buffer or the second special symbol buffer, whose lower address is loaded by step AKS307 of the special symbol determination process P_TDECISION shown in Figure 10-20. In step AKS338, the loss special symbol pattern designated value prepared in advance is stored in the first special symbol buffer or the second special symbol buffer by a transfer command for writing it to the memory area of the designated address in the game work area of RAM 102.

Following step AKS338, the effect symbol information buffer is cleared (step AKS339). The effect symbol information buffer can store effect specification values corresponding to when the special symbol display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." On the other hand, when the special symbol display result is a "miss," the effect symbol information buffer is cleared, initializing the stored value to 00 [H]. In addition, the variable command specification buffer is cleared (step AKS340).

After steps AKS330, AKS337, and AKS340, a transfer command for setting a pointer is issued to set the pre-variation command transmission table address (step AKS341). The pre-variation command transmission table address is the address of the pre-variation command transmission table stored in the game data area of ROM 101. Then, the command set process P_COM_SET is executed (step AKS342), and the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET ends.

Figure 10-23 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot information data selection process P_TFVR_ZU. The jackpot information data selection process P_TFVR_ZU is called in the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET shown in Figure 10-22, and can be executed in step AKS326 if the hit flag is set to the jackpot specified value in step AKS322. When the CPU 103 executes the jackpot information data selection process P_TFVR_ZU, it sets the second jackpot state setting table address using a transfer command to set a pointer (step AKS401). The second jackpot state setting table address is the address of the second jackpot state setting table stored in the game data area of ROM 101.

Following step AKS401, it is confirmed that the start gate winning designation value is not "1" (step AKS402). The start gate winning designation value is stored in an internal register of CPU 103 by step AKS325 of the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET shown in Figure 10-22. If this start gate winning designation value is "1" (step AKS402; No), a transfer command for setting a pointer is issued to set the table address for setting the first jackpot state (step AKS403). The table address for setting the first jackpot state is the address of the table for setting the first jackpot state stored in the game data area of ROM 101. In step AKS403, the value of the pointer is overwritten by a transfer command for setting a pointer. Thus, in the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET, after setting the second jackpot state setting table address in step AKS401, the starting gate winning designation value corresponds to "1" in step AKS402, and the first jackpot state setting table address is overwritten in step AKS403. This reduces the program capacity required for table setting when the second jackpot state setting table is used more frequently than the first jackpot state setting table, thereby improving the marketability of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Furthermore, when the second jackpot state setting table is used more frequently than the first jackpot state setting table, processing using a jump command as a branch command is simplified, facilitating confirmation at the design stage and improving the marketability of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

If the starting gate winning designation value is "2" and not "1" in response to step AKS402 (step AKS401: Yes), or after step AKS403, a winning symbol buffer is set (step AKS404). The winning symbol buffer is the winning symbol buffer with buffer number "0" whose stored value was loaded in step AKS306 of the special symbol determination process P_TDECISION shown in Figure 10-20. This loaded content can be set as the processing target by transferring it to a processing register included in the internal registers of CPU 103. The stored value of the winning symbol buffer set in this way is used together with the second jackpot state setting table set in step AKS401 or the first jackpot state setting table set in step AKS403 to execute the second allocation determination value comparison process P_HANTEI2 (step AKS405).

The second allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI2 sets the stored data at the top address of the table as the start number data, the stored data at the next address as the processing count data, and initially sets the start number data as the allocation result data. It then compares the numeric data set as the comparison value with the allocation judgment value indicated by the stored data at the address after the processing count data, in increasing order from the top to the bottom of the table addresses, until the allocation judgment value exceeds the comparison value. If the allocation judgment value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the allocation result data is updated by incrementing it by one and the next comparison is performed. If the allocation judgment value exceeds the comparison value, the second allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI2 ends. If the number of comparisons corresponds to the processing count data but the allocation judgment value does not exceed the comparison value, the process can be repeated using the stored data at the next address and subsequent addresses, starting with setting the start number data and processing count data. In the second allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI2 of step AKS405, the random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol, which is the stored value in the winning symbol buffer, is set as a comparison value, and the jackpot symbol designated value indicated by the allocation result data can be determined as the type of jackpot game state corresponding to the display result by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, based on the stored data in the first jackpot state setting table or the second jackpot state setting table. The second allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI2 only needs to be executable when the small jackpot symbol designated value is determined by step AKS333 of the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET. In this case, the random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol, which is the value stored in the winning symbol buffer, is set as the comparison value, and the small win designation value indicated by the allocation result data can be determined as the type of small win game state corresponding to the display result by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, based on the stored data in the first small win state setting table or the second small win state setting table.

When the second allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI2 of step AKS405 is completed, data for setting jackpot information is determined (step AKS406). The data for setting jackpot information can be selected from multiple types of pre-prepared data sets using the jackpot information data designation table selected corresponding to the stored value in the presentation state selection buffer and the jackpot symbol designation value determined by the second allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI2 of step AKS405. The presentation state selection buffer can be set to a stored value corresponding to the presentation state after the jackpot game state has ended.

Figure 10-24 is a diagram illustrating an example of the use of data configuration corresponding to the control of the jackpot game state in relation to the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET and the jackpot information data selection process P_TFVR_ZU. If the hit flag is set to the jackpot designated value in step AKS322 of the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET, the jackpot information data selection process P_TFVR_ZU can be executed in step AKS326. In this jackpot information data selection process P_TFVR_ZU, the second allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI2 in step AKS405 is executed using the second jackpot state setting table whose address is set in step AKS401 or the first jackpot state setting table whose address is set in step AKS403, thereby making it possible to determine the jackpot symbol designated value. Then, in step AKS328 of the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET, the jackpot information setting data read from the jackpot information setting table corresponding to the jackpot symbol specified value can be transferred and stored in the effect symbol information buffer, fanfare display buffer, and jackpot end display buffer. The effect symbol information buffer, fanfare display buffer, and jackpot end display buffer are provided in the effect symbol information area and can store setting data when controlled to a jackpot gaming state. Additionally, in step AKS330 of the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET, the maximum number of times the jackpot opening slot can be opened can be determined corresponding to the jackpot symbol specified value using the maximum number of times the jackpot opening slot can be opened.

In this way, the jackpot information data selection process P_TFVR_ZU uses the first jackpot state setting table or the second jackpot state setting table to determine the jackpot symbol designation value. The special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET can set the storage values of the effect symbol information buffer, fanfare display buffer, and jackpot display buffer provided in the effect symbol information area, and can determine the maximum number of times the large prize opening will be opened corresponding to the jackpot symbol designation value.

Figure 10-24 (A1) shows an example configuration of the first jackpot status setting table AKT41. The first jackpot status setting table of the example configuration AKT41 stores a value of 00 [H] corresponding to the jackpot symbol designation value "1" at the first address 1AFD [H], and a value of 0A [H] indicating the number of processes at the next address 1AFE [H]. The stored data from address 1AFF [H] onwards indicates allocation judgment values corresponding to the jackpot symbol designation values "1" to "10." When using the first jackpot status setting table of the example configuration AKT41, the second allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI2 of step AKS405 can determine one of the jackpot symbol designation values "1" to "10" in accordance with the winning symbol random number MR1-2 indicated by the value stored in the winning symbol buffer. For example, if the random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol is 00 [H], which corresponds to the minimum random number value of "0", the jackpot symbol designation value "1" is determined.

Figure 10-24 (A2) shows an example configuration of the second jackpot status setting table AKT42. The second jackpot status setting table of the example configuration AKT42 stores a value 0A[H] corresponding to the jackpot symbol designated value "11" at the first address 1B09[H], and a value 04[H] indicating the processing number at the next address 1B0A[H]. The stored data from address 1B0B[H] onwards indicates allocation judgment values corresponding to the jackpot symbol designated values "11" to "14." When using the second jackpot status setting table of the example configuration AKT42, the second allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI2 of step AKS405 can determine one of the jackpot symbol designated values "11" to "14" in accordance with the winning symbol random number MR1-2 indicated by the value stored in the winning symbol buffer. For example, if the random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol is 00 [H], which corresponds to the minimum random number value of "0", the jackpot symbol designation value "11" is determined.

Figure 10-24 (B) shows an example configuration AKB41 of the effect symbol information area. The effect symbol information area of configuration AKB41 can store various data related to game control and effect control, including variable display of effect symbols, in response to control in either the big win game state or the small win game state. This effect symbol information area includes a effect symbol information buffer at address F056 [H], a fanfare display buffer at address F057 [H], a big win end display buffer at address F058 [H], a variable command specification buffer at address F059 [H], a maximum number of large prize openings buffer at address F05A [H], a small win fanfare display buffer at address F05F [H], and a small win ending display buffer at address F060 [H].

Figure 10-24 (C) shows an example AKD01 for determining the maximum number of times a large prize opening can be performed. Step AKS330 of the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET determines the maximum number of times a large prize opening can be performed corresponding to the designated jackpot symbol value determined by the second allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI2 in step AKS405 of the jackpot information data selection process P_TFVR_ZU. In example AKD01 for determining the maximum number of times a large prize opening can be performed, the maximum number of times a large prize opening can be determined to be one of the following: 02 [H] corresponding to "2," 04 [H] corresponding to "4," 07 [H] corresponding to "7," and 0A [H] corresponding to "10." The first jackpot status setting table of example AKT41 is used when the designated starting symbol value is "1," allowing the designated jackpot symbol value to be determined to be one of "1" to "10." In contrast, the second jackpot status setting table of the configuration example AKT42 is used when the starting slot winning designation value is "2," and allows the determination of any of the jackpot symbol designation values "11" to "14." Meanwhile, in the example AKD01 for determining the maximum number of times a jackpot slot is opened, when the jackpot symbol designation values are 00 [H] to 09 [H], corresponding to "1" to "10," the maximum number of times a jackpot slot is opened can be determined to be either 04 [H], corresponding to "4," or 0A [H], corresponding to "10." Meanwhile, in the example AKD01 for determining the maximum number of times a jackpot slot is opened, when the jackpot symbol designation values are 0A [H] to 0D [H], corresponding to "11" to "14," the maximum number of times a jackpot slot is opened can be determined to be either 02 [H], corresponding to "2," 04 [H], corresponding to "4," 07 [H], corresponding to "7," or 0A [H], corresponding to "10."

In this way, in example AKD01 for determining the maximum number of times a large prize opening can be performed, when the jackpot symbol designated value is 00 [H], which corresponds to "1," the maximum number of times a large prize opening can be performed is 04 [H], which corresponds to "4." This corresponds to the smaller of the maximum number of times a large prize opening can be performed, "4" or "10," which can be determined when the starting prize opening designated value is "1." The jackpot symbol designated value "1" can be determined when the random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol, indicated by the value stored in the winning symbol buffer, is the smallest random number, "0." Furthermore, in example AKD01 for determining the maximum number of times a large prize opening can be performed, when the jackpot symbol designated value is 0A [H], which corresponds to "11," the maximum number of times a large prize opening can be performed is 02 [H], which corresponds to "2." This corresponds to "2," the smallest of the maximum possible values of "2," "4," "7," and "10" for the number of times the jackpot opening slot can be opened when the starting slot winning designation value is "2." The jackpot designation value "11" can be determined when the random number MR1-2 for the winning slot, indicated by the value stored in the winning slot buffer, is the minimum random number value of "0." Therefore, among special slot games in which special slots are displayed variably on the first special slot display device 4A or the second special slot display device 4B, when the random number MR1-2 for the winning slot is the minimum random number value of "0," a more advantageous display result is not determined compared to when the random number is other than the minimum random number value. This allows for the appropriate random number value to be updated to prevent fraudulent activity due to a malfunction of the first random number value when the random number MR1-2 for the winning slot is set to the first random number value.

Figure 10-25 is a diagram illustrating an example of the use of data configuration corresponding to the control of the small win game state, with regard to the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET, etc. If the win flag is a small win designated value in step AKS331 of the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET, step AKS333 makes it possible to determine the small win pattern designated value. In this case, if the starting hole winning designated value is "1", the small win pattern designated value is determined using the first small win state setting table. On the other hand, if the starting hole winning designated value is "2", the small win pattern designated value is determined using the second small win state setting table. Then, in step AKS339 of the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET, the small win effect designated value determined in step AKS338 is stored in the effect pattern information buffer. Then, in step AKS340 of the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET, the small win information setting data read from the small win information setting table corresponding to the small win symbol designation value can be transferred to and stored in the small win fanfare display buffer and small win ending display buffer. The effect symbol information buffer, small win fanfare display buffer, and small win ending display buffer are provided in the effect symbol information area shown in Figure 10-24 (B), and can store setting data when controlled to a small win gaming state. Also, in step S112 of the special symbol process process P_TPROC shown in Figure 6, when the special symbol process code corresponds to 03 [H] and the small win opening pre-processing P_TLFAN is executed, the opening time and number of times the large prize opening can be opened can be determined using the small win opening work setting table, etc.

In this way, the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET can determine the small win symbol designation value using the first small win state setting table or the second small win state setting table. The special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET can also set the storage values of the effect symbol information buffer, small win fanfare display buffer, and small win ending display buffer provided in the effect symbol information area. Furthermore, the small win pre-opening process P_TLFAN, which is executed in response to control to the small win gaming state, can determine the opening time and number of times the large prize opening will be opened.

Figure 10-25 (A1) shows an example configuration of the first small win status setting table AKT43. In the first small win status setting table of the example configuration AKT43, the value 00 [H] corresponding to the small win symbol designated value "1" is stored at the first address 1B0B [H], and the value 01 [H] indicating the number of processes is stored at the next address 1B0C [H]. The stored data at address 1B0D [H] indicates the allocation judgment value corresponding to the small win symbol designated value "1". When using the first small win status setting table of the example configuration AKT43, step AKS333 of the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET can only determine the small win symbol designated value "1" in accordance with the random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol indicated by the stored value in the winning symbol buffer. Therefore, when the random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol is 00 [H], which corresponds to the minimum random number value of "0", the small winning symbol designation value "1" is determined.

Figure 10-25 (A2) shows an example configuration of the second small win status setting table AKT44. The second small win status setting table of the example configuration AKT44 stores the value 01 [H] corresponding to the small win symbol designated value "2" at the first address 1B0E [H], and stores the value 06 [H] indicating the number of processes at the next address 1B0F [H]. The stored data from address 1B10 [H] onwards indicates allocation judgment values corresponding to the small win symbol designated values "2" to "7." When using the second small win status setting table of the example configuration AKT44, step AKS333 of the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET can determine one of the small win symbol designated values "2" to "7" in accordance with the winning symbol random number MR1-2 indicated by the value stored in the winning symbol buffer. For example, if the random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol is 00 [H], which corresponds to the minimum random number value of "0", the small winning symbol designation value "2" is determined.

Figure 10-25 (B) shows example AKD02 of determining the large prize opening mode. The pre-opening process P_TLFAN for small prizes can determine the large prize opening mode corresponding to the start prize opening designated value. The large prize opening mode can be determined to one of multiple modes with different opening times and number of times the large prize opening is opened. In example AKD02 of determining the large prize opening mode, a large prize opening mode with an opening time of 36 ms and 15 openings is determined in response to a start prize opening designated value of "1." Also, in example AKD02 of determining the large prize opening mode, a large prize opening mode with an opening time of 1600 ms and 1 opening is determined in response to a start prize opening designated value of "2."

In this way, the large prize opening mode during a small win game state can be determined to have different opening times and different opening times for the large prize opening, depending on the starting prize opening designated value, regardless of the small prize symbol designated value. The small prize symbol designated value can be determined in accordance with the random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol indicated by the value stored in the winning symbol buffer. If the starting prize opening designated value is the same, a common large prize opening mode is determined whether the random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol is the minimum random number value of "0" or any other random number value. Therefore, among special symbol games in which special symbols are variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, when the random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol is the minimum random number value of "0," a display result with a higher degree of advantage is not determined compared to when the random number is any other random number value. This makes it possible to update the random number value appropriately to prevent fraudulent activity due to a malfunction in the first random number value when the random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol is used as the first random number value.

Figure 10-26 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable pattern setting process P_TPATSET. The variable pattern setting process P_TPATSET is included in the processes that can be called from the normal special symbol process P_TNORMAL shown in Figure 10-18, and can be executed in step AKS249 when variable display of special symbols is initiated. When the variable pattern setting process P_TPATSET is executed, the CPU 103 loads a hit flag (step AKS361). The hit flag is provided in the special symbol control data area of the configuration example AKB21 shown in Figure 10-17 (B1), and is assigned address F032 [H]. In step AKS361, the hit flag is loaded using a transfer command to read the stored data at a specified address in the game work area of RAM 102. Then, an arithmetic jump command that can compare the hit flag with a judgment value corresponding to the specified jackpot value is used to confirm that the hit flag is not the specified jackpot value (step AKS362).

If the hit flag is set to the jackpot specified value in step AKS362 (step AKS362; No), the jackpot symbol determination buffer is loaded (step AKS363). The jackpot symbol determination buffer is located in the special symbol control data area of the configuration example AKB21 shown in Figure 10-17 (B1) and is assigned address F035 [H]. In step AKS363, the jackpot symbol determination buffer is loaded using a transfer command to read the stored data at the specified address in the game work area of RAM 102. At this time, a transfer command to set a pointer is used to set the state-specific jackpot selection table address (step AKS364). The state-specific jackpot selection table address is the address of the state-specific jackpot selection table stored in ROM 101. Then, the hit-time fluctuation pattern type table selection process P_TPATA is executed (step AKS365). The winning variation pattern type table selection process P_TPATA in step AKS365 makes it possible to select a variation pattern type allocation table when the special chart display result corresponds to a "jackpot."

If the hit flag is not the designated value for a big hit in response to step AKS362 (step AKS362; Yes), an arithmetic jump instruction is used to compare the hit flag with the judgment value corresponding to the designated value for a small hit, thereby confirming that the hit flag is not the designated value for a small hit (step AKS366). If the hit flag is the designated value for a small hit (step AKS366; No), the variable command designation buffer is set (step AKS367). The variable command designation buffer is located in the performance symbol information area of the configuration example AKB41 shown in Figure 10-24 (B) and is assigned address F059 [H]. In step AKS367, a transfer instruction is used to write to the memory area of the designated address in the game work area of RAM 102, and 01 [H] is simply stored in the variable command designation buffer. The small hit symbol judgment buffer is also loaded (step AKS368). The small win symbol determination buffer is located in the special symbol control data area of the configuration example AKB21 shown in Figure 10-17 (B1) and is assigned address F036 [H]. In step AKS368, the small win symbol determination buffer is loaded using a transfer command to read the stored data at a specified address in the game work area of RAM 102. At this time, a transfer command to set a pointer is used to set the state-specific small win selection table address (step AKS369). The state-specific small win selection table address is the address of the state-specific small win selection table stored in ROM 101. Then, the win-time variation pattern type table selection process P_TPATA is executed (step AKS370). The win-time variation pattern type table selection process P_TPATA in step AKS370 enables selection of a variation pattern type allocation table in response to the special symbol display result being "small win."

If the hit flag is not the small hit designated value in response to step AKS366 (step AKS366; Yes), the miss fluctuation pattern type table selection process P_TPATH is executed (step AKS371). The miss fluctuation pattern type table selection process P_TPATH of step AKS371 corresponds to the special chart display result being "miss," and enables the selection of a fluctuation pattern type allocation table.

After steps AKS365, AKS370, and AKS371, the variation pattern type selection buffer with buffer number "0" is loaded (step AKS372). The variation pattern type selection buffer with buffer number "0" is the first variation pattern type selection buffer included in the first reserved memory buffer with buffer number "0" in the first special symbol reserved buffer, or the second variation pattern type selection buffer included in the second reserved memory buffer with buffer number "0" in the second special symbol reserved buffer. In step AKS372, after setting the address of the second variation pattern type selection buffer with buffer number "0," a start gate winning check process is executed. If the start gate winning designation value is "1," the address of the first variation pattern type selection buffer with buffer number "0" is set, and then a transfer command for reading the stored data at the set address is issued, allowing the variation pattern type selection random number MR3-3 stored in the variation pattern type selection buffer with buffer number "0" to be read.

When the random number MR3-3 for selecting a variation pattern type is read in step AKS372, the variation pattern allocation table selection process P_TPATTBL is executed (step AKS373). The variation pattern allocation table selection process P_TPATTBL in step AKS373 makes it possible to select a variation pattern allocation table using the variation pattern type allocation table selected in either step AKS365, AKS370, or AKS371 and the random number MR3-3 for selecting a variation pattern type read in step AKS372.

Following step AKS373, the variation pattern buffer with buffer number "0" is loaded (step AKS374). The variation pattern buffer with buffer number "0" is the first variation pattern buffer included in the first reserved memory buffer with buffer number "0" in the first special symbol reserved buffer, or the second variation pattern buffer included in the second reserved memory buffer with buffer number "0" in the second special symbol reserved buffer. In step AKS374, after setting the address of the second variation pattern buffer with buffer number "0," a start gate winning check process is executed. If the start gate winning designation value is "1," the address of the first variation pattern buffer with buffer number "0" is set, and then a transfer command is issued to read the stored data at the set address, allowing the variation pattern random numbers MR3-4 stored in the variation pattern buffer with buffer number "0" to be read.

When the random numbers MR3-4 for the fluctuation pattern are read in step AKS374, the second allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI2 is executed (step AKS375). The second allocation judgment value comparison process in step AKS375 makes it possible to determine a fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern allocation table selected in step AKS373 and the random numbers MR3-4 for the fluctuation pattern read in step AKS374. At this time, fluctuation pattern designation data corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern is stored in the effect symbol fluctuation pattern buffer (step AKS376). The effect symbol fluctuation pattern buffer is provided in the game work area of RAM 102, and is capable of storing different fluctuation pattern designation data corresponding to the result of the fluctuation pattern determination.

Following step AKS376, a variable command transmission table is selected (step AKS377). In step AKS377, a variable command transmission table is selected using the variable command transmission table selection table and the value stored in the variable command designation buffer. This allows different variable command transmission tables to be selected, for example, when the special symbol display result is a "big hit" or "small hit," and when it is a "miss." The variable command transmission table is configured to include table data indicating the number of processes, the upper byte of the pattern information designation command, the pattern information designation code reference designation value, the upper byte of the performance symbol designation command, the performance symbol designation code reference designation value, the performance symbol variation command, and the variation pattern designation data reference designation value. Then, the command set process P_COM_SET is executed (step AKS378). The command set process P_COM_SET in step AKS378 uses the variation command transmission table selected in step AKS377 to enable the transmission of pattern information specification commands, performance pattern specification commands, and performance pattern variation commands. This command set process P_COM_SET in step AKS378 enables the transmission of performance control commands, which serve as variation start commands, from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When step AKS378 enables the transmission of the fluctuation start command, the special symbol fluctuation time is set (step AKS379). In step AKS379, a time data expansion process is executed using the special symbol fluctuation time table and fluctuation pattern designation data, making it possible to set different special symbol fluctuation times corresponding to the result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Next, a transfer command for setting a pointer is issued to set the post-fluctuation pattern setting work table address (step AKS380). The post-fluctuation pattern setting work table address is the address of the post-fluctuation pattern setting work table stored in the game data area of ROM 101. Next, data set process P_DATASET is executed (step AKS381), and the fluctuation pattern setting process P_TPATSET is completed. The data set processing P_DATASET in step AKS381 uses the post-variation pattern setting work table whose address was set in step AKS380 to set the special pattern process code to 01 [H], which is the special pattern variation processing designated value, and sets the value stored in the special pattern variation display buffer to 01 [H], which is the special pattern variation display data. Additionally, the special pattern display update timer, the loss effect selection buffer with buffer number "0", the variation pattern type selection buffer with buffer number "0", and the variation pattern buffer with buffer number "0" are cleared to enable initialization. By referencing different tables when the start gate winning designated value is "1" and "2", different buffers and timers can be set and cleared.

Figure 10-27 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the winning fluctuation pattern type table selection process P_TPATA. The winning fluctuation pattern type table selection process P_TPATA is included in the processes that can be called from the fluctuation pattern setting process P_TPATSET shown in Figure 10-26, and can be executed in step AKS365 if the winning flag is set to the designated value for a big win in step AKS362, and can be executed in step AKS370 if the winning flag is set to the designated value for a small win in step AKS366. When the CPU 103 executes the winning fluctuation pattern type table selection process P_TPATA, it loads the presentation state selection buffer (step AKS421). The presentation state selection buffer is provided in the game work area of RAM 102, and can be set to a storage value corresponding to the presentation state after the end of the big win game state. In step AKS421, it is sufficient that the value stored in the performance state selection buffer can be read using a transfer command to read the stored data at a specified address in the game work area of RAM 102.

Following step AKS421, a fluctuation pattern type selection table is determined (step AKS422). In step AKS422, the fluctuation pattern type selection table can be determined using the state-specific jackpot selection table or state-specific small jackpot selection table and the stored value of the presentation state selection buffer read in step AKS421. The address of the state-specific jackpot selection table is set in step AKS364 when the win-time fluctuation pattern type table selection process P_TPATA is executed in step AKS365 of the fluctuation pattern setting process P_TPATSET shown in Figure 10-26. The address of the state-specific small jackpot selection table is set in step AKS369 when the win-time fluctuation pattern type table selection process P_TPATA is executed in step AKS370 of the fluctuation pattern setting process P_TPATSET shown in Figure 10-26. The state-specific big hit selection table and state-specific small hit selection table are configured to include table data that enables different variation pattern type selection tables to be determined in accordance with the value stored in the presentation state selection buffer. Therefore, step AKS422 enables different variation pattern type selection tables to be determined in accordance with the value stored in the presentation state selection buffer when the special chart display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit."

Once the variation pattern type selection table is determined in step AKS422, a winning symbol designation value is set (step AKS423). In step AKS423, the contents loaded from the jackpot symbol determination buffer or the small win symbol determination buffer are set as the processing target by transferring them to a processing register included in the internal registers of CPU 103. The jackpot symbol determination buffer is loaded in step AKS363 when the win-time variation pattern type table selection process P_TPATA is executed in step AKS365 of the variation pattern setting process P_TPATSET shown in Figure 10-26. The small win symbol determination buffer is loaded in step AKS368 when the win-time variation pattern type table selection process P_TPATA is executed in step AKS370 of the variation pattern setting process P_TPATSET shown in Figure 10-26. The value stored in the jackpot symbol determination buffer indicates the jackpot symbol designation value. The value stored in the small win symbol determination buffer indicates the small win symbol designation value. The set win symbol designation value, along with the variation pattern type selection table determined in step AKS422, is used to execute the allocation determination value comparison process P_HANTEI (step AKS424).

The allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTE compares the numerical data set as the comparison value with the allocation judgment value indicated by the table storage data, in increasing order from the top to the bottom of the table address, until the allocation judgment value exceeds the comparison value. At this time, if the allocation judgment value is equal to or less than the comparison value, it proceeds to the next comparison, and makes the table storage data readable as designated data corresponding to the allocation judgment value that exceeds the comparison value. The allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI in step AKS424 sets the big hit symbol designated value or small hit symbol designated value as the comparison value, and reads out the designated data corresponding to the allocation judgment value that exceeds the comparison value from the data stored in the variation pattern type selection table.

When the allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI of step AKS424 is completed, the fluctuation pattern type allocation table is determined (step AKS425), and the hit-time fluctuation pattern type table selection process P_TPATA is completed. In step AKS425, the specified data read by the allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI of step AKS424 is added to the starting address of the fluctuation pattern type allocation table, and the address of the fluctuation pattern type allocation table to be used is set as a pointer, making it possible to determine the fluctuation pattern type allocation table.

Figure 10-27 (B1) shows an example AKD11 of a variation pattern type allocation table determination where the special symbol display result corresponds to "jackpot." When the special symbol display result is "jackpot," the second allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI2 can determine one of the values 00 [H] to 0D [H] corresponding to the jackpot symbol designation value "1" to "14." When the win-time variation pattern type table selection process P_TPATA is executed in step AKS365 of the variation pattern setting process P_TPATSET shown in Figure 10-26, it can determine a variation pattern type allocation table corresponding to the determination result of the jackpot symbol designation value. In the variation pattern type allocation table determination example AKD11, one of the variation pattern type allocation tables AKU01 to AKU03 can be determined in accordance with the values 00 [H] to 0D [H] indicating the jackpot symbol designation value.

Figure 10-27 (B2) shows an example of a variation pattern type allocation table determination AKD12 corresponding to the special symbol display result of "small win." When the special symbol display result is "small win," step AKS333 of the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET shown in Figure 10-22 can determine one of the values 00 [H] to 06 [H] corresponding to the small win symbol designation value "1" to "7." When executed in step AKS370 of the variation pattern setting process P_TPATSET shown in Figure 10-26, the variation pattern type table selection process P_TPATA at the time of win can determine a variation pattern type allocation table corresponding to the determination result of the small win symbol designation value. In variation pattern type allocation table determination example AKD12, either variation pattern type allocation table AKU11 or AKU12 can be determined corresponding to the small win symbol designation value of 00 [H] to 06 [H].

Figure 10-28 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the loss-time fluctuation pattern type table selection process P_TPATH. The loss-time fluctuation pattern type table selection process P_TPATH is included in the processes that can be called from the fluctuation pattern setting process P_TPATSET shown in Figure 10-26, and can be executed in step AKS371 if the hit flag is not set to the small hit designated value in step AKS366. When the loss-time fluctuation pattern type table selection process P_TPATH is executed, the CPU 103 sets the state-specific loss selection table address using a transfer command to set a pointer (step AKS441). The state-specific loss selection table address is the address of the first state-specific loss selection table or the second state-specific loss selection table stored in the game data area of ROM 101. In step AKS441, different addresses in the game data area can be specified corresponding to whether the starting gate winning designated value is "1" or "2." This allows the address of the first status-specific miss selection table to be set when the start port winning designation value is "1," and the address of the second status-specific miss selection table to be set when the start port winning designation value is "2." The presentation state selection buffer is then loaded (step AKS442). The presentation state selection buffer is provided in the game work area of RAM 102, and can be set to a value corresponding to the presentation state after the jackpot game state ends.

Following step AKS442, a pending miss effect allocation selection table is determined (step AKS443). In step AKS443, the pending miss effect allocation selection table is determined using the first state-specific miss selection table or the second state-specific miss selection table whose address was set in step AKS441 and the stored value of the effect state selection buffer loaded in step AKS442. The first state-specific miss selection table or the second state-specific miss selection table is configured to include table data that enables a different pending miss effect allocation selection table to be determined in accordance with the stored value of the effect state selection buffer. Furthermore, the pending miss effect allocation selection table is configured to include table data that enables a different miss effect allocation table to be determined in accordance with the count value of the start port winning memory counter. Therefore, step AKS443 determines a different pending miss effect allocation selection table depending on whether the start port winning designation value is "1" or "2," in accordance with the value stored in the effect state selection buffer.

Following step AKS443, the start port winning memory counter is loaded (step AKS444). The start port winning memory counter is the first start port winning memory counter when the start port winning designation value is "1" or the second start port winning memory counter when the start port winning designation value is "2." In step AKS444, the second start port winning memory counter address is set to the memory pointer, and then the start port winning check process is executed. If the start port winning designation value is "1," the first start port winning memory counter address is set to the memory pointer, and then a transfer command is issued to read the stored data at the address set in the memory pointer, making it possible to obtain the count value of the first start port winning memory counter or the second start port winning memory counter.

After step AKS444, allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI is executed (step AKS445). In allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI of step AKS445, the count value of the first start port winning memory counter or the second start port winning memory counter obtained in step AKS444 is set as a comparison value, and designated data corresponding to the allocation judgment value that exceeds the comparison value is read out using the stored data of the pending miss effect allocation selection table determined in step AKS443.

When the allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI of step AKS445 is completed, a miss effect allocation table is determined (step AKS446). In step AKS446, the specified data read by the allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI of step AKS445 is added to the starting address of the miss effect allocation table, and the address of the miss effect allocation table to be used is set as a pointer, making it possible to determine the miss effect allocation table.

Following step AKS446, the losing effect selection buffer with buffer number "0" is loaded (step AKS447). The losing effect selection buffer with buffer number "0" is the first losing effect selection buffer included in the first reserved memory buffer with buffer number "0" in the first special symbol reserved buffer, or the second losing effect selection buffer included in the second reserved memory buffer with buffer number "0" in the second special symbol reserved buffer. In step AKS447, after setting the address of the second losing effect selection buffer with buffer number "0," if the starting gate winning designation value is "1" as determined by the starting gate winning check process, the address of the first losing effect selection buffer with buffer number "0" is set, and then a transfer command is issued to read the data stored at the set address, allowing the losing effect selection random number MR3-2 stored in the losing effect selection buffer with buffer number "0" to be read.

When the random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing effect is read in step AKS447, the allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI is executed (step AKS448). The allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI in step AKS448 uses the losing effect allocation table determined in step AKS446 and the random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing effect read in step AKS447 to determine the offset value of the variation pattern type allocation table. In this case, the random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing effect read in step AKS447 is set as the comparison value, and the stored data of the losing effect allocation table determined in step AKS446 makes it possible to read the offset value of the variation pattern type allocation table indicated by the specified data corresponding to the allocation judgment value that exceeds the comparison value.

When the allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI of step AKS448 is completed, the fluctuation pattern type allocation table is determined (step AKS449), and the miss fluctuation pattern type table selection process P_TPATH is completed. In step AKS449, the offset value indicated by the specified data read by the allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI of step AKS448 is added to the starting address of the fluctuation pattern type allocation table, and the address of the fluctuation pattern type allocation table to be used is set in the pointer, making it possible to determine the fluctuation pattern type allocation table.

Figure 10-28 (B1) shows an example AKD21 of determining a miss effect allocation table corresponding to a first special symbol miss. A first special symbol miss occurs when the start port winning designation value corresponds to "1" and the special symbol display result is "miss" in a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. When the start port winning designation value is "1," step AKS444 of the miss time variation pattern type table selection process P_TPATH can obtain the count value of the first start port winning memory counter. The count value of the first start port winning memory counter indicates the first reserved memory number. Then, the allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI in step AKS445 reads out the designated data corresponding to the count value of the first start port winning memory counter, and step AKS446 can determine a miss effect allocation table corresponding to the first reserved memory number. In the example of determining the miss effect allocation table AKD21, one of the miss effect allocation tables AKV01 to AKV04 can be determined according to the first reserved memory count "0" to "3".

Figure 10-28 (B2) shows an example AKD22 of determining a miss effect allocation table corresponding to a miss on the second special symbol. A miss on the second special symbol occurs when the start port winning designation value corresponds to "2" and the special symbol display result is "miss" in a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. When the start port winning designation value is "2," step AKS444 of the miss time variation pattern type table selection process P_TPATH can obtain the count value of the second start port winning counter. The count value of the second start port winning memory counter indicates the second reserved memory number. Then, the allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI in step AKS445 reads out the designated data corresponding to the count value of the second start port winning memory counter, and step AKS446 can determine a miss effect allocation table corresponding to the second reserved memory number. In the example of determining the miss effect allocation table AKD22, only the common miss effect allocation table AKV11 can be determined for the second reserved memory counts "0" to "3".

Figure 10-28 (C) shows an example AKD23 of a variation pattern type allocation table determination for the miss effect allocation table AKV01. The miss effect allocation table AKV01 can be determined when the first pending memory count is "0" in the example AKD21 of the miss effect allocation table determination when the starting port winning designation value is "1." When the starting port winning designation value is "1," step AKS447 of the miss time variation pattern type table selection process P_TPATH can read the random number MR3-2 for selecting a miss effect from the first miss effect selection buffer with buffer number "0." Then, the allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI in step AKS448 reads the designation data corresponding to the random number MR3-2 for selecting a miss effect, and the variation pattern type allocation table can be determined in step AKS449. In the variation pattern type allocation table determination example AKD23, one of the variation pattern type allocation tables AKU21 to AKU25 can be selected in response to the random number MR3-2 used to select the losing effect.

Figure 10-29 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a fluctuation pattern type allocation table. When the winning fluctuation pattern type table selection process P_TPATA shown in Figure 10-27 (A) is executed in step AKS365 of the fluctuation pattern setting process P_TPATSET shown in Figure 10-26, it can determine one of multiple fluctuation pattern type allocation tables, such as one of the fluctuation pattern type allocation tables AKU01 to AKU03 in the fluctuation pattern type allocation table determination example AKD11 shown in Figure 10-27 (B1), in accordance with the result of determining the jackpot symbol designation value. When the winning fluctuation pattern type table selection process P_TPATA shown in Figure 10-27 (A) is executed in step AKS370 of the fluctuation pattern setting process P_TPATSET shown in Figure 10-26, it can determine one of a plurality of fluctuation pattern type allocation tables, such as one of the fluctuation pattern type allocation tables AKU11 and AKU12 in the fluctuation pattern type allocation table determination example AKD12 shown in Figure 10-27 (B2), in accordance with the result of determining the small win symbol designation value. Step AKS449 of the losing fluctuation pattern type table selection process P_TPATH shown in Figure 10-28 (A) can determine one of a plurality of fluctuation pattern type allocation tables, such as one of the fluctuation pattern type allocation tables AKU21 to AKU25 in the fluctuation pattern type allocation table determination example AKD23 shown in Figure 10-28 (C). The fluctuation pattern allocation table selection process P_TPATTBL, which is executed in step AKS373 of the fluctuation pattern setting process P_TPATSET shown in Figure 10-26, can select a fluctuation pattern type by referencing the fluctuation pattern type allocation table using the random number MR3-3 for selecting the fluctuation pattern type read out in step AKS372, and can select a fluctuation pattern allocation table corresponding to the selection result.

Figure 10-29(A) shows an example of the configuration of the fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU01. The fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU01 is included in multiple fluctuation pattern type allocation tables that can be determined in accordance with the jackpot symbol designation value. The fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU01 in Figure 10-29(A) is configured so that the table data can be determined to be one of the fluctuation pattern types CPA01 to CPA05 in accordance with the random number MR3-3 used to select the fluctuation pattern type.

Figure 10-29 (B1) shows an example of the configuration of the fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU11. The fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU11 is included in multiple fluctuation pattern type allocation tables that can be determined in response to the small win symbol designation value. The fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU11 in Figure 10-29 (B1) is configured so that the table data can be determined to only the common fluctuation pattern type CPB01 in response to all of the random numbers MR3-3 used to select fluctuation pattern types.

Figure 10-29 (B2) shows an example of the configuration of the fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU12. The fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU12 is included in multiple fluctuation pattern type allocation tables that can be determined in response to the small win symbol designation value. The fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU12 in Figure 10-29 (B2) is configured so that the table data can be determined to be only the common fluctuation pattern type CPB02 in response to all of the random numbers MR3-3 used to select fluctuation pattern types.

Figure 10-29 (C1) shows an example of the configuration of the fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU21. The fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU21 is included in multiple fluctuation pattern type allocation tables that can be determined in response to the random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing effect. The fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU21 in Figure 10-29 (C1) has table data configured so that it can be determined to be either the fluctuation pattern type CPC01 or CPC02 in response to the random number MR3-3 for selecting the fluctuation pattern type.

Figure 10-29 (C2) shows an example of the configuration of the fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU22. The fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU22 is included in multiple fluctuation pattern type allocation tables that can be determined in response to the random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing effect. The fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU22 in Figure 10-29 (C2) is configured so that only the common fluctuation pattern type CPC03 can be determined in response to all of the random numbers MR3-3 for selecting fluctuation pattern types.

Figure 10-29 (C3) shows an example of the configuration of the fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU23. The fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU23 is included in multiple fluctuation pattern type allocation tables that can be determined in response to the random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing effect. The fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU23 in Figure 10-29 (C3) is configured so that only the common fluctuation pattern type CPC04 can be determined in response to all of the random numbers MR3-3 for selecting fluctuation pattern types.

Figure 10-29 (C4) shows an example of the configuration of the fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU24. The fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU24 is included in multiple fluctuation pattern type allocation tables that can be determined in response to the random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing effect. The fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU24 in Figure 10-29 (C4) has table data configured so that it can be determined to be one of the fluctuation pattern types CPC05 to CPC07 in response to the random number MR3-3 for selecting a fluctuation pattern type.

Figure 10-29 (C5) shows an example of the configuration of the fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU25. The fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU25 is included in multiple fluctuation pattern type allocation tables that can be determined in response to the random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing effect. The fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU25 in Figure 10-29 (C5) is configured so that only the common fluctuation pattern type CPC08 can be determined in response to all of the random numbers MR3-3 for selecting fluctuation pattern types.

Figures 10-30 to 10-32 are diagrams illustrating example configurations of fluctuation pattern allocation tables that can be used in accordance with fluctuation pattern types. In the fluctuation pattern allocation table selection process P_TPATTBL executed in step AKS373 of the fluctuation pattern setting process P_TPATSET shown in Figure 10-26, a fluctuation pattern allocation table is selected in accordance with the result of the selection of the fluctuation pattern type using the random number MR3-3 for selecting the fluctuation pattern type. Thereafter, the second allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI2 in step AKS375 uses the random number MR3-4 for the fluctuation pattern read out in step AKS374 to refer to the fluctuation pattern allocation table, thereby making it possible to determine the fluctuation pattern.

Figure 10-30 (A1) shows an example of the configuration of a fluctuation pattern allocation table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern type CPA01. When using the fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU01, which can be determined in accordance with the jackpot symbol specified value, the fluctuation pattern type CPA01 can be determined at a predetermined rate corresponding to the random number MR3-3 for selecting the fluctuation pattern type. In the configuration example of Figure 10-30 (A1), the fluctuation pattern allocation table is configured so that it can be determined as one of the fluctuation patterns PA01 to PA03, PA51, or PA52 in accordance with the random number MR3-4 for the fluctuation pattern. In this way, the allocation judgment value is set by the stored data of the fluctuation pattern allocation table so that the fluctuation pattern type CPA01 can be determined as one of the fluctuation patterns PA01 to PA03, PA51, or PA52.

Figure 10-30 (A2) shows an example of the configuration of a fluctuation pattern allocation table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern type CPA02. When using the fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU01, which can be determined in accordance with the jackpot symbol designation value, the fluctuation pattern type CPA02 can be determined at a predetermined rate corresponding to the random number MR3-3 for selecting the fluctuation pattern type. In the configuration example of Figure 10-30 (A2), the fluctuation pattern allocation table is configured so that the fluctuation pattern type can be determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PA04 to PA11, PA21 to PA23, or PA54 in accordance with the random number MR3-4 for the fluctuation pattern. In this way, the allocation judgment value is set by the stored data of the fluctuation pattern allocation table so that the fluctuation pattern type CPA02 can be determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PA04 to PA11, PA21 to PA23, or PA54.

Figure 10-30 (A3) shows an example of the configuration of a fluctuation pattern allocation table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern type CPA03. When using the fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU01, which can be determined in accordance with the jackpot symbol specified value, the fluctuation pattern type CPA03 can be determined at a predetermined rate corresponding to the random number MR3-3 for selecting the fluctuation pattern type. In the configuration example of Figure 10-30 (A3), the fluctuation pattern allocation table is configured so that the fluctuation pattern type can be determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PA31 to PA38, PA24 to PA26, or PA55 in accordance with the random number MR3-4 for the fluctuation pattern. In this way, the allocation judgment value is set by the stored data of the fluctuation pattern allocation table so that the fluctuation pattern type CPA03 can be determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PA31 to PA38, PA24 to PA26, or PA55.

Figure 10-30 (A4) shows an example of the configuration of a fluctuation pattern allocation table corresponding to fluctuation pattern type CPA04. When using fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU01, which can be determined in accordance with the jackpot symbol specified value, fluctuation pattern type CPA04 can be determined at a predetermined rate corresponding to random number MR3-3 for selecting fluctuation pattern type. In the configuration example of Figure 10-30 (A4), the fluctuation pattern allocation table is configured so that only the common fluctuation pattern PA41 can be determined in accordance with random numbers MR3-4 for all fluctuation patterns. In this way, the allocation judgment value is set by the stored data of the fluctuation pattern allocation table so that fluctuation pattern type CPA04 can only be determined to fluctuation pattern PA41.

Figure 10-30 (A5) shows an example of the configuration of a fluctuation pattern allocation table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern type CPA05. When using the fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU01, which can be determined in accordance with the jackpot symbol specified value, the fluctuation pattern type CPA05 can be determined at a predetermined rate corresponding to the random number MR3-3 for selecting the fluctuation pattern type. In the configuration example of Figure 10-30 (A5), the fluctuation pattern allocation table is configured so that only the common fluctuation pattern PA42 can be determined in accordance with the random numbers MR3-4 for all fluctuation patterns. In this way, the allocation judgment value is set by the stored data of the fluctuation pattern allocation table so that the fluctuation pattern type CPA05 can only be determined as fluctuation pattern PA42.

Figure 10-30 (B1) shows an example of the configuration of a fluctuation pattern allocation table corresponding to fluctuation pattern type CPB01. When using the fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU11, which can be determined in accordance with the small win symbol designation value, the fluctuation pattern type CPB01 can be determined in accordance with the random numbers MR3-3 for selecting all fluctuation pattern types. In the configuration example of Figure 10-30 (B1), the fluctuation pattern allocation table is configured so that only the common fluctuation pattern PB01 can be determined in accordance with the random numbers MR3-4 for all fluctuation patterns. In this way, the allocation judgment value is set by the stored data of the fluctuation pattern allocation table so that the fluctuation pattern type CPB01 can only be determined as fluctuation pattern PB01.

Figure 10-30 (B2) shows an example of the configuration of a fluctuation pattern allocation table corresponding to fluctuation pattern type CPB02. When using fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU12, which can be determined in accordance with the small win symbol designation value, fluctuation pattern type CPB02 can be determined in accordance with all fluctuation pattern type selection random numbers MR3-3. In the configuration example of Figure 10-30 (B2), the fluctuation pattern allocation table is configured so that it can determine one of fluctuation patterns PB11 to PB14 in accordance with the fluctuation pattern random number MR3-4. In this way, the allocation judgment value is set by the stored data of the fluctuation pattern allocation table so that fluctuation pattern type CPB02 can be determined to be one of fluctuation patterns PB11 to PB14.

Figure 10-31(A) shows an example of the configuration of a fluctuation pattern allocation table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern type CPC01. When using the fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU21, which can be determined in accordance with the random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing effect, the fluctuation pattern type CPC01 can be determined at a predetermined rate corresponding to the random number MR3-3 for selecting the fluctuation pattern type. In the configuration example of Figure 10-31(A), the fluctuation pattern allocation table is configured so that only the common fluctuation pattern PC01 can be determined in accordance with the random numbers MR3-4 for all fluctuation patterns. In this way, the allocation judgment value is set by the stored data of the fluctuation pattern allocation table so that the fluctuation pattern type CPC01 can only be determined to be the fluctuation pattern PC01.

Figure 10-31(B) shows an example of the configuration of a fluctuation pattern allocation table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern type CPC02. When using the fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU21, which can be determined in accordance with the random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing effect, the fluctuation pattern type CPC02 can be determined at a predetermined rate corresponding to the random number MR3-3 for selecting the fluctuation pattern type. In the configuration example of Figure 10-31(B), the fluctuation pattern allocation table is configured so that the fluctuation pattern type can be determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PC12, PC13, PC15, PC16, PC24, PC27, PC33, or PC49 in accordance with the fluctuation pattern random number MR3-4. In this way, the allocation judgment value is set by the stored data of the fluctuation pattern allocation table so that the fluctuation pattern type CPC02 can be determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PC12, PC13, PC15, PC16, PC24, PC27, PC33, or PC49.

Figure 10-31(C) shows an example of the configuration of a fluctuation pattern allocation table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern type CPC03. When using the fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU22, which can be determined in accordance with the random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing effect, the fluctuation pattern type CPC03 can be determined in accordance with all of the fluctuation pattern type selection random numbers MR3-3. In the configuration example of Figure 10-31(C), the fluctuation pattern allocation table is configured so that it can be determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PC11 to PC18, or PC101 in accordance with the fluctuation pattern random number MR3-4. In this way, the allocation judgment value is set by the stored data of the fluctuation pattern allocation table so that the fluctuation pattern type CPC03 can be determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PC11 to PC18, or PC101.

Figure 10-31(D) shows an example of the configuration of a fluctuation pattern allocation table corresponding to fluctuation pattern type CPC04. When using fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU23, which can be determined in accordance with random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing effect, fluctuation pattern type CPC04 can be determined in accordance with all fluctuation pattern type selection random numbers MR3-3. In the configuration example of Figure 10-31(D), the fluctuation pattern allocation table is configured so that it can be determined to be one of fluctuation patterns PC19 to PC27, or PC102 in accordance with fluctuation pattern random number MR3-4. In this way, the allocation judgment value is set by the stored data of the fluctuation pattern allocation table so that fluctuation pattern type CPC04 can be determined to be one of fluctuation patterns PC19 to PC27, or PC102.

Figure 10-32(A) shows an example of the configuration of a fluctuation pattern allocation table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern type CPC05. When using the fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU24, which can be determined in accordance with the random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing effect, the fluctuation pattern type CPC05 can be determined at a first ratio corresponding to the random number MR3-3 for selecting the fluctuation pattern type. In the configuration example of Figure 10-32(A), the fluctuation pattern allocation table is configured so that it can be determined as one of the fluctuation patterns PC28 to PC43 in accordance with the random number MR3-4 for the fluctuation pattern. In this way, the allocation judgment value is set by the stored data of the fluctuation pattern allocation table so that the fluctuation pattern type CPC05 can be determined as one of the fluctuation patterns PC28 to PC43.

Figure 10-32(B) shows an example of the configuration of a fluctuation pattern allocation table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern type CPC06. When using the fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU24, which can be determined in accordance with the random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing effect, the fluctuation pattern type CPC06 can be determined at a second rate different from the first rate corresponding to the random number MR3-3 for selecting the fluctuation pattern type. The second rate is a rate lower than the first rate. In the configuration example of Figure 10-32(B), the fluctuation pattern allocation table is configured so that the fluctuation pattern type CPC06 can be determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PC44 to PC59 in accordance with the random number MR3-4 for the fluctuation pattern. In this way, the allocation judgment value is set by the stored data of the fluctuation pattern allocation table so that the fluctuation pattern type CPC06 can be determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PC44 to PC59.

Figure 10-32(C) shows an example of the configuration of a fluctuation pattern allocation table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern type CPC07. When using the fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU24, which can be determined in accordance with the random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing effect, the fluctuation pattern type CPC07 can be determined at a third rate, which is different from the first rate and second rate corresponding to the random number MR3-3 for selecting the fluctuation pattern type. The third rate is a rate lower than the first rate and the second rate. In the configuration example of Figure 10-32(C), the fluctuation pattern allocation table is configured so that it can be determined as one of the fluctuation patterns PC60 to PC75 in accordance with the random number MR3-4 for the fluctuation pattern. In this way, the allocation judgment value is set by the stored data of the fluctuation pattern allocation table so that the fluctuation pattern type CPC07 can be determined as one of the fluctuation patterns PC60 to PC75.

Figure 10-32(D) shows an example of the configuration of a fluctuation pattern allocation table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern type CPC08. When using the fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU25, which can be determined in accordance with the random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing effect, the fluctuation pattern type CPC08 can be determined in accordance with the random number MR3-3 for selecting all fluctuation pattern types. In the configuration example of Figure 10-32(D), the fluctuation pattern allocation table is configured so that only the common fluctuation pattern PC02 can be determined in accordance with the random number MR3-4 for all fluctuation patterns. In this way, the allocation judgment value is set by the stored data of the fluctuation pattern allocation table so that the fluctuation pattern type CPC08 can only be determined as the fluctuation pattern PC02.

Figure 10-33 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol process processing P_FPROC. Normal symbol process processing P_FPROC is included in the processing that can be called from the game control timer interrupt processing P_PCT shown in Figure 5, and can be executed in step AKS59 each time a timer interrupt occurs. When normal symbol process processing P_FPROC is executed, the CPU 103 sets the gate switch passing response flag (step AKS501). The gate switch passing response flag is set by, for example, executing a logical operation instruction, reflecting the state of the gate switch 21 contained in the switch-on buffer in the flag register of the CPU 103. At this time, a zero flag in the flag register being in the on state indicates that the gate switch passing response flag is in the off state. Conversely, a zero flag being in the off state indicates that the gate switch passing response flag is in the on state. It is then determined whether the gate switch passing response flag is on (step AKS502). If the gate switch passing flag is on (step AKS502; Yes), the gate switch passing process P_FZU_ON is executed (step AKS503).

If the gate switch passing flag is off in step AKS502 (step AKS502; No), or after the gate switch passing process P_FZU_ON in step AKS503, a transfer command that sets a pointer sets the normal symbol process processing jump table (step AKS504). The normal symbol process processing jump table is an address management table that selects and executes the process corresponding to the read value of the normal symbol process code. The normal symbol process code can be updated to any of 00 [H] to 04 [H] in accordance with the progress of game control in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and is also called the normal symbol process code.

Following step AKS504, a transfer command to read stored data is used to load the normal symbol process code (step AKS505). Next, the 2-byte data selection process P_ABXEXEC is executed (step AKS506) to obtain the address of the process selected corresponding to the normal symbol process code. The address obtained at this time is set in a pointer. Then, a subroutine call command is issued to execute the process pointed to by the pointer (step AKS507), making the process selected corresponding to the normal symbol process code executable. When the selected process is completed and a return command is issued to return to the normal symbol process process P_FPROC, this normal symbol process process P_FPROC also ends, and a return command is issued to return to the game control timer interrupt process P_PCT.

Figure 10-33 (B) shows an example configuration of the normal symbol process processing jump table AKT51 used in the normal symbol process processing P_FPROC. The normal symbol process processing jump table is configured to include table data that allows the address of the process selected in accordance with the normal symbol process code to be set in an internal register of the CPU 103 used as a pointer. The normal symbol process processing jump table of configuration example AKT51 includes table data that allows the pointer to be set to address values corresponding to normal symbol normal processing P_FNORM when the normal symbol process code is 00 [H], normal symbol change processing P_FSCRL when the normal symbol process code is 01 [H], normal symbol stop processing P_FSTOP when the normal symbol process code is 02 [H], normal electric role activation pre-processing P_FINT when the normal symbol process code is 03 [H], and normal electric role activation processing P_FOPEN when the normal symbol process code is 04 [H].

Normal symbol normal processing P_FNORM determines whether to start a normal symbol game based on the presence or absence of stored normal symbol pending information, determines the confirmed normal symbol to be displayed as a stopped symbol in the variable normal symbol display, and determines the normal symbol change pattern, which is the normal symbol change pattern. Normal symbol change processing P_FSCRL measures the elapsed time since the normal symbol began to change on the normal symbol display device 20, and determines whether the normal symbol change time corresponding to the normal symbol change pattern has elapsed. Normal symbol stop processing P_FSTOP measures the elapsed time since the normal symbol stopped changing on the normal symbol display device 20, and determines whether the normal symbol stop time has elapsed. When the normal symbol stop time has elapsed, the normal symbol process code can be updated and various settings can be made in accordance with the normal symbol display result. In this embodiment, it is sufficient that the normal symbol process code can be updated to 03[H] in accordance with all normal symbol display results. The normal electric device pre-activation processing P_FINT and the normal electric device activation processing P_FOPEN are processes that enable the second starting winning port formed in the variable winning ball device 6B to be changed from a closed state to an open state by controlling the normal electric device solenoid 81.

Figure 10-34 is a diagram illustrating an example of the use of data configuration related to the control of a normal symbol game, which is a variable display of normal symbols. For example, the normal symbol process processing P_FPROC shown in Figure 10-33(A) uses the normal symbol process code loaded in step AKS505 to execute the 2-byte data selection processing P_ABXEXEC in step AKS506, thereby enabling step AKS507 to execute the processing selected corresponding to the normal symbol process code. The normal symbol process code is provided in the normal symbol control data area, and its stored value can be updated corresponding to the control status of the normal symbol game and the second start winning slot. The gate switch passing processing P_FZU_ON in step AKS503 can read the random number MR2-1 for the normal symbol, and for the read random number MR2-1, the numerical data indicating its value can be stored in the normal symbol buffer for saving. The normal symbol buffer is located in the normal symbol buffer area and can store numerical data indicating the value of the read random number MR2-1 until the normal symbol reserve memory number reaches the upper limit. In this way, the normal symbol process processing P_FPROC and the processes executable in the normal symbol process processing P_FPROC use stored data in the normal symbol control data area and the normal symbol buffer area to enable control of the normal symbol game, which is a variable display of normal symbols.

Figure 10-34 (A) shows an example configuration AKB51 of the normal symbol control data area. The normal symbol control data area of configuration AKB51 can store various data related to control by the normal symbol process processing P_FPROC, such as the normal symbol game, which is a variable display of normal symbols, and the closed/open state of the second start winning gate, which can be controlled based on the display results. This normal symbol control data area includes a normal symbol process code at address F03E[H], a gate passage memory counter at address F03F[H], a normal symbol buffer at address F040[H], a normal electric feature release pattern timer at address F041[H], a normal electric feature release pointer at address F043[H], a normal electric feature winning number counter at address F045[H], and a normal symbol process timer at address F04A[H].

The normal symbol process code can specify the processing selected in the normal symbol process processing P_FPROC. The gate passage memory counter can store a count value corresponding to the number of game balls detected by the gate switch 21. The normal symbol buffer can store data corresponding to the normal symbol designation value. The normal symbol designation value is a designation value corresponding to the confirmed normal symbol that is the display result in the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display device 20, and includes a normal symbol winning symbol designation value. The normal symbol winning symbol designation value is a designation value corresponding to the confirmed normal symbol displayed by the normal symbol display device 20 when the display result in the variable display of the normal symbol is "normal winning." The normal electric device opening pattern timer can store a timing value corresponding to the remaining time for controlling the second start winning port to an open state. The normal electric device opening pointer can specify the storage address of the normal electric device opening pattern table, in which the time for controlling the second start winning port to an open state is set. The normal electric device winning number counter can store a count value corresponding to the number of game balls detected by the second start switch 22B. The normal symbol process timer can store a time value corresponding to the control time by the normal symbol process processing P_FPROC.

Figure 10-34 (B) shows a configuration example AKB52 of a buffer area for normal symbols. The buffer area for normal symbols of configuration example AKB52 can store numerical data indicating the value of the random number MR2-1 for normal symbols read when a gaming ball passes through the passing gate 41. This buffer area for normal symbols includes normal symbol buffer numbers "1" to "4" at addresses F046 [H] to F049 [H]. Normal symbol buffer numbers "1" to "4" are buffers for normal symbols assigned buffer numbers "1" to "4," and can store the values of the random number MR2-1 in the order in which the gaming ball passes through the passing gate 41. As a result, the information stored in the normal symbol buffer indicates the number of game balls that have passed through the passing gate 41, and also indicates the value of the random number MR2-1 read in response to each passage.

Figure 10-35 is a flowchart showing an example of gate switch passing processing P_FZU_ON. Gate switch passing processing P_FZU_ON is included in the processing that can be called from the normal symbol process processing P_FPROC shown in Figure 10-33 (A), and can be executed in step AKS503 if the gate switch passing flag is on in step AKS502. When the CPU 103 executes gate switch passing processing P_FZU_ON, it sets the gate passing memory counter address using a transfer command to set a pointer (step AKS601). The gate passing memory counter address is the address of the gate passing memory counter located in the game work area of RAM 102. Next, it loads the gate passing memory counter using a transfer command to read the stored data at the address pointed to by the pointer (step AKS602).

After step AKS602, it is determined whether the count value of the gate passage memory counter is greater than or equal to the counter maximum value (step AKS603). For example, a comparison and return instruction is used to compare the value loaded in step AKS602 with a counter maximum value such as "4." If the count value is greater than or equal to the counter maximum value (step AKS603; Yes), the gate switch passage processing P_FZU_ON ends and returns to the normal symbol process processing P_FPROC. On the other hand, if the count value is less than the counter maximum value (step AKS603; No), the count value of the gate passage memory counter is updated by adding 1 (step AKS604). In this case, an arithmetic and logic operation instruction that increments the stored data at the address pointed to by the pointer makes it possible to update the count value of the gate passage memory counter by adding 1.

After step AKS604, the buffer address for the normal symbol is set by a transfer command or the like to set the pointer (step AKS605). In this case, the address of the buffer for the normal symbol with buffer number "0" provided in the game work area of RAM 102 is set to the pointer. The value loaded in step AKS602 is then added to the value stored in the pointer. This allows the address of the buffer for the normal symbol, which stores the random number MR2-1 for the normal symbol in the buffer area for the normal symbol, to be set to the pointer. Following this, the random number counter for the normal symbol is stored (step AKS606), and the gate switch passing process P_FZU_ON ends. In step AKS606, a transfer command is issued to specify the lower address of the random number counter for normal symbols in the game work area of RAM 102, and write the value read to the memory area at the address indicated by the pointer. The value of random number MR2-1 obtained from the random number counter for normal symbols can then be stored in the buffer for normal symbols.

Figure 10-36 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol normal processing P_FNORM. Normal symbol normal processing P_FNORM is included in the processing that can be called from normal symbol process processing P_FPROC shown in Figure 10-33 (A) and can be executed in step AKS507 when the normal symbol process code loaded in step AKS505 is 00 [H]. When executing normal symbol normal processing P_FNORM, CPU 103 loads the gate passage memory counter (step AKS621). In this case, the count value of the gate passage memory counter can be obtained by a transfer command that specifies the lower address of the gate passage memory counter in the game work area of RAM 102 and sets the value read from the counter in an internal register of CPU 103. Then, a calculation return command that returns processing when the second zero flag in the flag register of CPU 103 is on determines whether the count value of the gate passage memory counter is "0" (step AKS622). At this time, if the second zero flag is on, the count value of the gate passage memory counter is "0" (step AKS622; Yes), and the normal symbol normal processing P_FNORM ends and returns to the normal symbol process processing P_FPROC.

If the count value of the gate passage memory counter is not "0" in response to step AKS622 (step AKS622; No), a transfer command for setting a pointer is used to set the table address for setting the normal symbol per symbol (step AKS623). The table address for setting the normal symbol per symbol is the address of the table for setting the normal symbol per symbol stored in the game data area of ROM 101. Then, the buffer for normal symbol per symbol with buffer number "1" is loaded (step AKS624). In step AKS624, a transfer command is used to set the value read by specifying the lower address of the buffer for normal symbol per symbol with buffer number "1" in the game work area of RAM 102 in an internal register of CPU 103. Therefore, it is sufficient if the random number MR2-1 for the normal symbol per symbol stored in the buffer for normal symbol per symbol with buffer number "1" can be read.

When the random number MR2-1 for the normal symbol winning pattern is read in step AKS624, the second allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI2 is executed (step AKS625). The value of the random number MR2-1 read in step AKS624 is set as the comparison value in the second allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI2 in step AKS625, and the normal symbol winning pattern designated value indicated by the allocation result data can be determined as the display result by the normal symbol display device 20 based on the stored data of the normal symbol winning pattern setting table whose address was set in step AKS623. When the normal symbol winning pattern designated value is determined by the second allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI2 in step AKS625, the normal symbol winning pattern designated value is stored in the normal symbol buffer (step AKS626). The normal symbol buffer is located in the normal symbol control data area shown in Figure 10-34 (A) and is assigned address F040 [H]. In step AKS626, the normal symbol value is stored using a transfer command to write it to the memory area of the specified address in the game work area of RAM 102.

After step AKS626, the count value of the gate passage memory counter is decremented by 1 (step AKS627). Then, the buffer for symbols corresponding to normal symbols is shifted (step AKS628). In this case, in the buffer area for symbols corresponding to normal symbols provided in the game work area of RAM 102, the address of the buffer for symbols corresponding to normal symbols with buffer number "2" is set in the pointer specifying the transfer source. Also, the address of the buffer for symbols corresponding to normal symbols with buffer number "1" is set in the buffer pointer specifying the transfer destination. Furthermore, the number of transfers corresponding to the data size of the buffer area for symbols corresponding to normal symbols is set. Thereafter, the contents of the buffer for symbols corresponding to normal symbols are sequentially transferred and shifted using a block transfer command. At this time, the buffer for symbols corresponding to normal symbols with buffer number "4" is cleared to initialize its contents.

After step AKS628, a transfer command for setting a pointer is issued to set the address of the first normal symbol variation pattern allocation table (step AKS629). The first normal symbol variation pattern allocation table address is the address of the first normal symbol variation pattern allocation table stored in the game data area of ROM 101. Furthermore, a time-saving check process is executed to confirm that the time-saving function flag is not the time-saving activation designated value (step AKS630). At this time, if the time-saving function flag is the time-saving activation designated value (step AKS630; No), a transfer command for setting a pointer is issued to set the address of the second normal symbol variation pattern allocation table (step AKS631). The second normal symbol variation pattern allocation table address is the address of the second normal symbol variation pattern allocation table stored in the game data area of ROM 101.

If the time-saving function flag is not set to the time-saving activation value in response to step AKS630 (step AKS630; Yes), or after step AKS631, the RS3 soft latch random number register is loaded (step AKS632). In this case, the address of the RS3 soft latch random number register in the function control register area is specified, and the stored value is read and set in an internal register of CPU 103 using a transfer command, making it usable as the random number MR3-1 for the normal symbol variation pattern. Then, the second allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI2 is executed (step AKS633). In the second allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI2 in step AKS633, the value of the random number MR3-1 read in step AKS632 is set as the comparison value, and the normal pattern variation pattern indicated by the allocation result data can be determined using the stored data in the first normal pattern variation pattern allocation table whose address was set in step AKS629 or the second normal pattern variation pattern allocation table whose address was set in step AKS631.

Once the normal symbol variation pattern is determined by the second allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI2 in step AKS633, the normal symbol variation time corresponding to that normal symbol variation pattern is set (step AKS634). In step AKS634, a time data expansion process is executed using the normal symbol variation time table and normal symbol variation pattern designation data, making it possible to set the normal symbol variation time corresponding to the determined normal symbol variation pattern. Next, a transfer command for setting a pointer is issued to set the normal symbol variation work table address (step AKS635). The normal symbol variation work table address is the address of the normal symbol variation work table stored in the game data area of ROM 101. Next, data set process P_DATASET is executed (step AKS636), and normal symbol normal process P_FNORM is terminated. The data set processing P_DATASET in step AKS636 uses the normal pattern change work table whose address was set in step AKS635 to set the normal pattern process code to 01 [H], which is the normal pattern change processing designated value, and sets the value stored in the normal pattern change display buffer to 01 [H], which is the normal pattern change display data. In addition, the normal pattern display update timer can be initialized by clearing it.

Figure 10-37 is a diagram illustrating an example of the use of data configuration related to the normal pattern normal processing P_FNORM. In the normal pattern normal processing P_FNORM, the normal pattern per symbol designation value can be determined by executing the second allocation judgment value comparison processing P_HANTEI2 in step AKS625 using the normal symbol per symbol symbol setting table whose address was set in step AKS623. Furthermore, the normal symbol symbol variation pattern can be determined by executing the second allocation judgment value comparison processing P_HANTEI2 in step AKS633 using the first normal symbol variation pattern allocation table whose address was set in step AKS629 or the second normal symbol variation pattern allocation table whose address was set in step AKS631. In step AKS634, the normal symbol variation time table can be used to set the normal symbol variation time corresponding to the result of determining the normal symbol variation pattern. Additionally, in step AKS507 of the normal symbol process processing P_FPROC shown in Figure 10-33 (A), when the normal symbol process code corresponds to 03 [H] and the normal electric device pre-activation processing P_FINT is executed, the opening time of the normal electric device provided in correspondence with the second start winning slot can be determined using a work setting table when the normal electric device is activated, etc.

In this way, normal pattern normal processing P_FNORM makes it possible to determine the pattern designation value for a normal pattern using a table for setting patterns for normal patterns. Also, normal pattern normal processing P_FNORM makes it possible to determine the normal pattern change pattern using the first normal pattern change pattern allocation table or the second normal pattern change pattern allocation table. Furthermore, normal pattern normal processing P_FNORM makes it possible to determine the normal pattern change time using the normal pattern change time table. Normal electric device pre-activation processing P_FINT, which is executed in response to the execution result of the normal game, can determine the opening time of the normal electric device.

Figure 10-37 (A) shows an example configuration AKT61 of a table for setting symbols for normal symbols. The normal symbol setting table of example configuration AKT61 stores the value 00 [H] corresponding to the first normal symbol designated value at the first address 1B54 [H], and stores the value 03 [H] indicating the number of processes at the next address 1B55 [H]. The stored data from address 1B56 [H] onwards indicates allocation judgment values corresponding to the first to third normal symbol designated values. When using the normal symbol setting table of example configuration AKT61, the second allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI2 of step AKS625 can determine one of the first to third normal symbol designated values in accordance with the random number MR2-1 for the normal symbol. In the example configuration AKT61, the designated symbol value for the first normal symbol is 00 [H], the designated symbol value for the second normal symbol is 01 [H], and the designated symbol value for the third normal symbol is 02 [H]. For example, when the random number MR2-1 for the normal symbol is 00 [H], which corresponds to the minimum random number value of "0", the designated symbol value for the first normal symbol is determined.

Figure 10-37 (B1) shows an example configuration of the first normal symbol variation pattern allocation table AKT62. The first normal symbol variation pattern allocation table of the example configuration AKT62 stores the value 00 [H] corresponding to the normal symbol variation pattern FPZ1 designated value at the first address 1B59 [H], and stores the value 04 [H] indicating the number of processes at the next address 1B5A [H]. The stored data from address 1B5B [H] onwards indicates allocation judgment values corresponding to the normal symbol variation patterns FPZ1 to FPZ4. When using the first normal symbol variation pattern allocation table of the example configuration AKT62, the second allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI2 of step AKS633 can determine one of the normal symbol variation patterns FPZ1 to FPZ4 in accordance with the random number MR3-1 for the normal symbol variation pattern.

Figure 10-37 (B2) shows a configuration example AKT63 of the second normal symbol variation pattern allocation table. In the second normal symbol variation pattern allocation table of configuration example AKT63, the value 04 [H] corresponding to the normal symbol variation pattern FPZ5 designated value is stored at the first address 1B5F [H], and the value 04 [H] indicating the number of processes is stored at the next address 1B60 [H]. The stored data from address 1B61 [H] onwards indicates allocation judgment values corresponding to normal symbol variation patterns FPZ5 to FPZ8. When using the second normal symbol variation pattern allocation table of configuration example AKT63, the second allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI2 of step AKS633 can determine one of the normal symbol variation patterns FPZ5 to FPZ8 in accordance with the random number MR3-1 for the normal symbol variation pattern.

Figure 10-37 (C) shows normal pattern fluctuation time determination example AKD61. In determination example AKD61, the normal pattern fluctuation time is determined to be 1000 [ms] corresponding to normal pattern fluctuation patterns FZP1 to FZP4, and the normal pattern fluctuation time is determined to be 100 [ms] corresponding to normal pattern fluctuation patterns FZP5 to FZP8. In step AKS634, the normal pattern fluctuation time corresponding to the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determined by the second allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI2 in step AKS633 is set. Normal pattern fluctuation patterns FZP1 to FZP4 can be determined using the first normal pattern fluctuation pattern allocation table of configuration example AKT61 when the time-saving function flag is off. Normal pattern fluctuation patterns FZP5 to FZP8 can be determined using the second normal pattern fluctuation pattern allocation table of configuration example AKT62 when the time-saving function flag is on. This makes it possible to set the normal pattern variation time, which is the variable display time of the normal pattern, to be shorter when time-saving control is in effect than when time-saving control is not in effect.

Figure 10-37 (D) shows an example of determining the normal electric feature release time AKD62. The normal electric feature activation preprocessing P_FINT can determine the normal electric feature release time in accordance with the time-saving activation designated value and the normal symbol per symbol designated value. The normal electric feature release time is determined to be 16 ms in accordance with all normal symbol per symbol designated values 00 [H] to 02 [H] when the time-saving activation designated value is set to 00 [H], corresponding to "X," indicating that the time-saving activation is not in effect. In contrast, the normal electric feature activation time is determined to be 5000 ms in accordance with all normal symbol per symbol designated values 00 [H] to 02 [H] when the time-saving activation designated value is set to 01 [H], corresponding to "○," indicating that the time-saving activation is in effect.

In this way, the normal electric device opening time can be determined to a different time corresponding to the time-saving operation designated value, regardless of the value of the normal symbol per symbol designated value. The normal symbol per symbol designated value can be determined in accordance with the random number MR2-1 for the normal symbol per symbol read from the normal symbol per symbol buffer. If the time-saving operation designated value is the same, the normal electric device operation time is determined to be the same whether the random number MR2-1 for the normal symbol per symbol is the minimum random number value of "0" or any other random number value. Therefore, in correspondence with a special symbol game, which is a variable display of normal symbols on the normal symbol display device 20, when the random number MR2-1 for the normal symbol per symbol is the minimum random number value of "0," a display result with a higher degree of advantage is not determined compared to when it is any other random number value. This makes it possible to update the random number value appropriately to prevent fraudulent activity due to a malfunction in the second random number value when the random number MR2-1 for the normal winning symbol is used as the second random number value.

In the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 10-1, the 16-bit random number circuit 104A and the 8-bit random number circuit 104B can update the numerical data indicating the values of the random numbers included in the game random numbers, including the random number MR1-1 for determining a special symbol, the random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing effect, the random number MR3-3 for selecting a variation pattern type, the random number MR3-4 for a variation pattern, and the random number MR3-1 for a normal symbol variation pattern. Furthermore, by executing the random number update process P_RANDOM shown in FIG. 10-12, the CPU 103 can update the numerical data indicating the values of the random numbers included in the game random numbers, including the random number MR1-2 for a winning symbol, the random number MR1-3 serving as the initial value for a winning symbol, the random number MR2-1 for a normal winning symbol, and the random number MR2-2 serving as the initial value for a normal winning symbol.

When the special symbol determination process P_TDECISION shown in FIG. 10-20 is executed in step AKS248 of the normal special symbol processing shown in FIG. 10-18, the special symbol big win determination process in step AKS304 and the special symbol small win determination process in step AKS305 can use the special symbol determination random number MR1-1 to determine whether the special symbol display result is a "big win" or a "small win." Then, when the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET shown in FIG. 10-22 is executed in step AKS308 of the special symbol determination process P_TDECISION, the jackpot information data selection process P_TFVR_ZU in step AKS326 or step AKS333 can use the winning symbol random number MR1-2 to determine the jackpot symbol designation value or small win symbol designation value corresponding to the confirmed special symbol that results in the special symbol display. In addition, when the second allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEIS is executed in step AKS625 of the normal pattern normal processing shown in Figure 10-36, it becomes possible to determine the normal pattern winning symbol designated value corresponding to the confirmed normal pattern that will be the display result of the normal pattern using the random number MR2-1 for the normal pattern winning symbol. The jackpot symbol designated value determined using the random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol makes it possible to set the maximum number of times the large prize opening hole is opened in step AKS330 of the special pattern information setting process P_TZU_SET, as in the example AKD01 of determining the maximum number of times the large prize opening hole is opened shown in Figure 10-24 (C). The normal winning symbol designation value determined using the normal winning symbol random number MR2-1 enables the setting of the normal electric device opening time, as shown in the normal electric device opening time determination example AKD62 shown in FIG. 10-37(D), when the normal symbol process code corresponds to 03[H] and the normal electric device pre-activation process P_FINT is executed in step AKS507 of the normal symbol process processing P_FPROC shown in FIG. 10-33(A). Therefore, the winning symbol random number MR1-2 is used to determine the display results of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, enabling the setting of the type of jackpot game state advantageous to the player. The normal winning symbol random number MR2-1 is used to determine the display results of the normal symbol display device 20, enabling the setting of a change mode that changes the second starting winning hole, which serves as the starting area, to a guidance state that makes it easier for the game ball to pass through.

In this way, game control-related processing can be performed using random number values that serve as various gaming random numbers. The random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol, which serves as the first random number value, and the random number MR2-1 for the winning normal symbol, which serves as the second random number value, can be updated within their respective update ranges using a common update process, such as the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP, which can be called and executed by the random number update process P_RANDOM shown in Figures 10-12. Here, the update range for the random number MR2-1 for the winning normal symbol is "0" to "198," and the total number of random numbers included in the update range is "199," so the total number of random numbers included in the update range is a prime number. Therefore, for at least one of the first and second random number values that can be updated using the common update process, the total number of random number values included in the update range is a prime number. In this way, the shared update process prevents an increase in program size, and the total number of random numbers included in the update range is a prime number, which suppresses the occurrence of random number synchronization and enables appropriate random number updates.

The random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol, which serves as the first random number value, has an update range of "0" to "199," and the total number of random numbers included in the update range is "200," meaning that the total number of random numbers included in the update range is not a prime number. The random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol is used to determine the jackpot symbol designation value for the fixed special symbol, and the jackpot symbol designation value may determine whether or not a special state will be entered after the jackpot gaming state ends. In this case, the determination rate of the jackpot symbol designation value corresponds to the special state entry rate, which is the rate at which the special state is entered. The special state entry rate is included in important specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and it is desirable for it to be a value that is clearly recognizable. However, if the total number of random numbers included in the update range of the winning symbol MR1-2 is a prime number, the denominator of the special state entry rate will be a prime number, making it difficult to express as a percentage, and thus potentially making the special state entry rate difficult to recognize. Therefore, of the random numbers MR1-2 for winning symbols and MR2-1 for normal winning symbols, which can be updated using a common update process, the total number of random numbers included in the update range for the normal winning symbols MR2-1 may be a prime number, while the total number of random numbers included in the update range for the winning symbols MR1-2 may not be a prime number. This makes it possible to appropriately update the random numbers so that the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be clearly recognized while suppressing the occurrence of synchronization in the random numbers.

The total number of random numbers included in the update range for the winning symbol random number MR1-2, which serves as the first random number value, may also be a prime number. This more reliably prevents the synchronous occurrence of random number values that can be updated using a common update process, enabling appropriate random number value updates.

In the random number update process P_RANDOM shown in Figure 10-12, steps AKS61 to AKS64 can update random number MR1-2, which becomes the first random number value, and steps AKS65 to AKS68 can update random number MR2-1, which becomes the second random number value. The random number update process P_RANDOM can update random number MR1-2, which becomes the first random number value, and random number MR2-1, which becomes the second random number value, using the HL register, B register, and DE register of CPU 103, which are shared internal storage means. In this way, the first random number value and second random number value can be stably updated using the shared internal storage means, making it possible to update random numbers appropriately.

The CPU 103 executing the random number update process P_RANDOM shown in Figures 10-12 serves as a first update means capable of updating the first and second random number values within their respective update ranges through the random number update process when the random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol is set as the first random number value and the random number MR2-1 for the winning normal symbol is set as the second random number value. Furthermore, the 16-bit random number circuit 104A and the 8-bit random number circuit 104B serve as second update means capable of updating the third and fourth random number values within their respective update ranges through a system clock input that serves as a random number clock signal when the third and fourth random number values are set from among the random number MR1-1 for determining a special symbol, the random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing effect, the random number MR3-3 for selecting a variation pattern type, and the random number MR3-4 for a variation pattern. For example, the random number MR2-1 for the normal winning symbol has an update range of "0" to "198", and the total number of random numbers included in the update range is "199", so the total number of random numbers included in the update range of the second random number is a prime number. In contrast, for example, the random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing effect has an update range of "0" to "65518", and the total number of random numbers included in the update range is "65519", the random number MR3-3 for selecting a variation pattern type has an update range of "0" to "240", and the total number of random numbers included in the update range is "241", and the random number MR3-4 for the variation pattern has an update range of "0" to "250", and the total number of random numbers included in the update range is "251", so the total number of random numbers included in the update range of at least one of the third random number and the fourth random number is a prime number. In this way, the update methods used by the first update means and the second update means are different, and even if the update methods are the same, the total number of random number values included in the update range for at least one of the means is a prime number, thereby suppressing synchronization and enabling appropriate random number updating.

The 16-bit random number circuit 104A and the 8-bit random number circuit 104B function as first update means capable of updating the first and second random number values by a system clock input that serves as a random number clock signal when the first and second random number values are set from among the random number MR1-1 for determining a special symbol, the random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing effect, the random number MR3-3 for selecting a variation pattern type, and the random number MR3-4 for a variation pattern. The CPU 103, which executes the random number update process P_RANDOM shown in Figure 10-12, functions as second update means capable of updating the third random number value by the random number update process when the third random number value is set from among the random number MR1-2 for a winning symbol and the random number MR2-1 for a normal or winning symbol. When the CPU 103 executes the main processing P_MAIN for game control shown in FIG. 4 upon the start of power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1, it executes the power supply start response processing P_POWER_ON shown in FIG. 10-7 in step S1. Then, it sets a stored value in the function setting register area by a function setting register store instruction in step AKS13. At this time, by setting a stored value in a maximum value setting register provided corresponding to the 16-bit random number circuit 104A or the 8-bit random number circuit 104B, it is possible to execute a maximum value setting process that sets the maximum random number value of the random number value updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 104A or the 8-bit random number circuit 104B. Then, in the maximum value setting process, the 16-bit random number circuit 104A or the 8-bit random number circuit 104B, which serves as the first updating means, starts updating the first random number when the maximum random number value of the first random number is set, and then starts updating the second random number when the maximum random number value of the second random number is set. After executing the power supply start response process P_POWER_ON in step S1, the CPU 103 executing the game control main process P_MAIN shown in FIG. 4 becomes able to execute the game control timer interrupt process P_PCT shown in FIG. 5 in response to the occurrence of a timer interrupt while executing the loop process of steps S8 to S11, and starts updating the third random number value by executing the random number update process P_RANDOM in step S56. In this way, the CPU 103 executing the random number update process P_RANDOM, which serves as the second updating means, is able to update the third random number value after executing the maximum value setting process in the power supply start response process P_POWER_ON. Therefore, by starting the update of a random number value highly related to game value, such as the random number MR1-1 used to determine special symbols, first, uncertainty is increased, enabling appropriate random number value updates.

In the bit data RAP of the RWM access protect register shown in Figure 10-9 (B), bit data RAM0 with bit number "0" is set to its initial value of 0 [B] in response to the start of power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a result, access to RAM 102, which serves as the RWM, is prohibited in response to the storage value of the RWM access protect register, which is a specific storage area, being set to the first storage value. After executing the power supply start response processing P_POWER_ON shown in Figure 10-7, the CPU 103 sets the storage value of the function setting register area using the function setting register store instruction in step AKS13, and then stores the access permission output value in the RWM access protect register in step AKS14. In this way, after setting the storage value in the function setting register area, which is a storage area related to functions, a second storage value that permits access to RAM 102 as a storage means can be set in the RWM access protect register, which is a specific storage area. Then, as the next process after setting the second stored value, the RWM check process P_RWM_CHK in step S2 of the main game control process P_MAIN shown in Figure 4 can be executed to perform a confirmation process to check whether the control state can be restored based on the contents stored in RAM 102, which is the storage means. In this way, the contents stored in the storage means are not changed unnecessarily, allowing the confirmation process to be executed reliably and the random number value to be updated appropriately.

The CPU 103 executing the power-off processing P_POWER_OFF shown in FIG. 10-10 stores the checksum data created by the checksum calculation processing P_SUM_CALC in step AKS39 in the checksum buffer in step AKS40, thereby executing a stop-time storage process in which the checksum data, which serves as recovery information for restoring the control state in response to a power supply interruption, is stored in a storage area such as the checksum buffer of the storage means, RAM 102. After such stop-time storage processing is executed, the clear data set in the output value data in step AKS41 is stored in the RWM access protection register in step AKS42, thereby executing a stop-time storage process in which the first storage value is set in a specific storage area. After the stop-time storage processing is executed, the loop processing of steps AKS48 and AKS49 transitions to a standby state in which game control is not executed. In response to the power supply being restored during this standby state, if the power confirmation signal input bit is not "0" in step AKS49, the power recovery vector table address is set to the stack pointer in step AKS50, and then the power-off processing P_POWER_OFF is terminated by an interrupt return command, allowing the game control main processing P_MAIN shown in Figure 4 to be executed from the beginning as startup processing based on the startup of the pachinko gaming machine 1. This prevents unstable operation when the power supply is restored and enables appropriate random number values to be updated.

In the address map of the game control microcomputer 100 shown in Figure 10-2, the function setting register area of the built-in register assigned addresses FE00[H] to FEBF[H] is the first area for setting functions using the various circuits included in the game control microcomputer 100, and the function control register area of the built-in register assigned addresses FF00[H] to FFFF[H] is the second area for controlling functions using the various circuits included in the game control microcomputer 100. Of these, the RWM access protection register at address FF00[H] is a specific storage area in which a storage value indicating whether or not to allow access to the RWM RAM 102 can be set. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the CPU 103, which executes the game control main process P_MAIN shown in FIG. 4, executes the power supply start response process P_POWER_ON shown in FIG. 10-7 in step S1. This process can then execute steps AKS5 through AKS7 for control storage, which sets a value stored in the function control register area, which is the second area. After this control storage process is executed, steps AKS11 through AKS13 for setting a value stored in the function setting register area, which is the first area. After this setting storage process is executed, step AKS14 can set a value that permits access to the RAM 102, which is the storage means, in the RWM access protection register, which is the specific storage area. This prevents unauthorized changes to the contents of the storage means and enables appropriate random number updates.

(Means for solving the problems and effects of characteristic part 01AK)
(1-1) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
An update means capable of updating the random value;
a first display means capable of variably displaying special identification information;
and a second display means capable of variably displaying the normal identification information,
a type of advantageous state is determined in accordance with the display result by the first display means;
A change mode for changing the start area into a guidance state in which the game medium can easily pass through is determined in accordance with the display result by the second display means;
The update method is
the first random number used to determine the display result by the first display means and the second random number used to determine the display result by the second display means can be updated within their respective update ranges by a common update process;
The first random number value and the second random number value can be updated using a common internal storage means;
The first random number is the number of random numbers included in the update range that is not a prime number.
The total number of random values included in the update range of the second random value is a prime number.
Here, the gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The update means may be, for example, a CPU 103 that executes a random number update process P_RANDOM. The special identification information may be, for example, a special symbol. The first display means may be, for example, a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B. The normal identification information may be, for example, a normal symbol. The second display means may be, for example, a normal symbol display device 20. The display result by the first display means may be, for example, a confirmed special symbol that results in the display of a special symbol. The display result by the second display means may be, for example, a confirmed normal symbol that results in the display of a normal symbol. The type of advantageous state may be, for example, the maximum number of times the big prize opening is opened. The change mode may be, for example, the opening time of a normal electric device. The first random number value may be, for example, a random number MR1-2. The second random number value may be, for example, a random number MR2-1. The update process may be, for example, the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP. The internal storage means may be, for example, the HL register, B register, or DE register of the CPU 103. The total number of first random numbers may be, for example, "65536" for the random number MR1-2. The total number of second random numbers may be, for example, "199" for the random number MR2-1.
With this configuration, the common update process prevents an increase in program capacity, and since the total number of random numbers included in the update range is a prime number, synchronization between the first random number value and the second random number value is suppressed, making it possible to update the random number values appropriately.

(1-2) When executing the update process, the update means may be capable of updating the random number value to be updated and changing the initial random number value after setting the random number value to be updated, the maximum random number value, and the initial random number value.
Here, the setting for executing the update process may be, for example, steps AKS61 to AKS63 and AKS65 to AKS67. The update of the random number value to be updated and the change of the initial value of the random number may be, for example, the part that executes the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP in steps AKS64 and AKS68.
In such a configuration, it is possible to update the random number values appropriately by updating the set random number values to be updated.

(1-3) The updating means may update the second random number value after updating the first random number value through the specific updating process.
Here, the specific update process may be, for example, a random number update process P_RANDOM.
In such a configuration, by updating the first random number value, which is used to determine the display result that attracts the player's attention, before the second random number value, the occurrence of malfunctions is suppressed and appropriate random number value updates are possible.

(1-4) The update means may be capable of updating the first random number value and the second random number value and changing the initial values of the first random number value and the second random number value by calling a common update process corresponding to the first random number value and the second random number value through the specific update process.
Here, the common update process may be, for example, the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP of steps AKS64 and AKS68 in the random number update process P_RANDOM.
In such a configuration, the common update process prevents an increase in program capacity, and the first random number value and the second random number value are stably updated, making it possible to update the random number value appropriately.

(1-5) The updating means may be capable of updating the first random number value and the second random number value by a specific updating process using a common internal storage means.
For example, in the random number update process P_RANDOM, the HL register is set by steps AKS61 and AKS65, the B register is set by steps AKS62 and AKS66, and the DE register is set by steps AKS63 and AKS67, and then the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP is executed by steps AKS64 and AKS68.
In such a configuration, the first random number value and the second random number value are stably updated using a common internal storage means, making it possible to update the random number values appropriately.

(1-6) When the specific update process stores the reference information in the internal storage means before the common update process, the update means may be capable of setting different reference information in the internal storage means using a common instruction corresponding to the first random number value and the second random number value.
Here, the internal storage means may be, for example, an HL register, a B register, a DE register, etc. The common instruction may be a transfer instruction such as an LD instruction or an LDQ instruction. The different reference information may be, for example, the address F081 [H] of the random number counter for the winning symbol and the address F052 [H] of the random number counter for the normal winning symbol, or the address F050 [H] of the random number initial value data buffer for the winning symbol and the address F053 [H] of the random number initial value data buffer for the normal winning symbol.
In such a configuration, by making it possible to update the first random number value and the second random number value using a common instruction, it becomes possible to stably update the first random number value and the second random number value, thereby updating the random number value appropriately.

(1-7) When executing the update process, the update means updates the random number value to be updated, and then changes the random number initial value in response to the random number value to be updated matching the random number initial value.
For example, in the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP, after updating the random number value to be updated in step AKS101, a new random number initial value is stored in step AKS108 in response to the value matching the value stored in the random number initial value data buffer in step AKS105.
In such a configuration, it is possible to update the random number values appropriately by updating the random number values to be updated and changing the initial random number values.

(1-8) When the update means executes the update process to update the random number value to be updated,
Comparing the random number value to be updated with the maximum random number value;
If the comparison result is less than the maximum random number value, add 1 to the random number value to be updated.
A single compare and add instruction may be executed first, which includes changing the random number value to be updated to the minimum random number value if the comparison result is greater than or equal to the maximum random number value.
Here, the compare and add instruction may be, for example, the part of step AKS101.
In such a configuration, by executing the compare and add instruction first, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of malfunctions and update the random number values appropriately.

(1-9) The updating means may first execute a compare and add instruction in both cases of updating the first random number value and updating the second random number value.
For example, it may be step AKS101 in the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP of steps AKS64 and AKS68.
In such a configuration, by executing the compare and add instruction first, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of errors in the first random number value and the second random number value, and to update the random number value appropriately.

(1-10) When determining the display result by the first display means, when the first random number value is the minimum random number value, the display result is not determined to be more advantageous than when the first random number value is other than the minimum random number value;
When determining the display result by the second display means, when the second random number value is the minimum random number value, the display result may not be determined to be more advantageous than when the second random number value is other than the minimum random number value.
Here, the display result that is not determined to have a high degree of advantage may be, for example, example AKD01 of determining the number of times the large prize opening is to be performed or example AKD02 of determining the mode of the large prize opening.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately update the random number values so as to prevent fraudulent acts due to defects in the first random number values or the second random number values.

(1-11) The update means is
An initial value update process can be executed to update the initial random value used when changing the random number initial value;
After executing the compare and add instruction, the random number value to be updated after the compare and add instruction is compared with the initial random number value;
If the updated random number value does not match the initial random number value, store the updated random number value as the current random number value.
If the updated random number value to be updated matches the random number initial value, the initial value random number value obtained by the initial value update process may be stored as the current random number value and also as a new random number initial value.
Here, the random number value for the initial value may be, for example, random number MR1-3 or random number MR2-2. The initial value update process may be, for example, random number update process P_TFINIT for determining initial value. The comparison with the random number initial value may be, for example, in step AKS105. If it does not match the random number initial value, it may be, for example, in the case of Yes in step AKS105. If it matches the random number initial value, it may be, for example, in the case of No in step AKS105, in steps AKS106 to AKS108.
In such a configuration, the uncertainty of the random number value is increased by setting a new initial value for the random number, and by storing it as the current random number value, an increase in data volume is prevented, and the random number value can be updated appropriately.

(1-12) The update means is
a first initial value update process for updating a first initial value random number value used when changing the random number initial value in response to a case where the random number value to be updated is a first random number value;
In the case where the random number value to be updated is a second random number value, it may be possible to execute an initial value update process that includes a second initial value update process that updates a random number value for a second initial value that is used when changing the random number initial value.
Here, the first random number value for initial values may be, for example, random number MR1-3. The first initial value update process may be, for example, steps AKS81 and AKS82 in the initial value determination random number update process P_TFINIT. The second random number value for initial values may be, for example, random number MR2-2. The second initial value update process may be, for example, steps AKS83 and AKS84 in the initial value determination random number update process P_TFINIT.
In such a configuration, the random number values can be updated appropriately by updating the first initial value random number values and the second initial value random number values.

(1-13) The updating means may update the second random number value for the initial value after updating the first random number value for the initial value through the initial value update process.
For example, in the initial value determination random number update process P_TFINIT, steps AKS83 and AKS84 may be executed after steps AKS81 and AKS82.
In such a configuration, by updating the random number value for the first initial value, which has a higher priority, before the random number value for the second initial value, which has a lower priority, the occurrence of malfunctions is suppressed, and appropriate random number value updates are possible.

(1-14) When executing the initial value update process, the update means performs the following based on the settings regarding the random number value for the initial value to be updated and the maximum value of the random number for the initial value:
comparing the random number value for the initial value to be updated with the maximum random number value for the initial value;
If the comparison result is less than the maximum value of the initial value random number, add 1 to the initial value random number to be updated.
A single compare and add instruction may be executed, which includes changing the initial value random number value to be updated to the minimum random number value if the comparison result is equal to or greater than the initial value random number maximum value.
Here, the compare and add instruction may be, for example, the part of steps AKS82 and AKS84.
In such a configuration, by updating the random number value for the initial value to be updated using a compare and add instruction, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems and update the random number value appropriately.

(1-15) The update means is
A random number update process capable of updating the random number value to be updated;
An initial value random number update process that can update the initial value random number used when changing the random number initial value corresponding to the random number to be updated;
The first process executable in response to a timer interrupt due to the lapse of a predetermined time includes a random number update process and an initial value random number update process,
The second process that can be repeatedly executed until the first process is executed may not include the random number update process, but may include the initial value random number update process.
Here, the random number value to be updated may be, for example, random number MR1-2 or random number MR2-1. The random number update process may be, for example, random number update process P_RANDOM. The random number value for initial value may be, for example, random number MR1-3 or random number MR2-2. The random number update process for initial value may be, for example, random number update process P_TFINIT for initial value determination. The first process may be, for example, timer interrupt process P_PCT for game control. The second process may be, for example, steps S8 to S10 in the main process P_MAIN for game control.
In such a configuration, the initial value random number updating process increases the uncertainty of the initial value random number, making it possible to update the random number appropriately.

(1-16) The update process is
A random number update process capable of updating the random number value to be updated;
An initial value random number update process capable of updating the initial value random number used when changing the random number initial value corresponding to the random number value to be updated,
The random number update process and the initial value random number update process can be called and executed in the timer interrupt process that controls the progress of the game.
The initial value random number update process may be called and executed during standby processing that is repeated after startup processing that is executed based on the start of power supply.
Here, the random number value to be updated may be, for example, random number MR1-2 or random number MR2-1. The random number update process may be, for example, random number update process P_RANDOM. The random number value for initial value may be, for example, random number MR1-3 or random number MR2-2. The random number update process for initial value may be, for example, random number update process for initial value determination P_TFINIT. The timer interrupt process may be, for example, timer interrupt process P_PCT for game control. The startup process may be, for example, steps S1 to S7 in the main process P_MAIN for game control. The standby process may be, for example, steps S8 to S10 in the main process P_MAIN for game control.
In such a configuration, the initial value random number updating process increases the uncertainty of the initial value random number, making it possible to update the random number appropriately.

(2-1) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
An update means capable of updating the random value;
processing means for executing processing relating to game control using the random number value updated by the updating means;
the updating means is capable of updating a first random number value for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state and a second random number value different from the first random number value;
The first random value is composed of a specific number of bytes, and the total number of random values included in the update range is a specific number,
The second random number value is a predetermined number that is composed of a specific number of bytes, and the total number of random numbers included in the update range is smaller than the specific number,
The first random number value may be updated faster than the second random number value.
Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot gaming state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The updating means may be, for example, a 16-bit random number circuit 104A, an 8-bit random number circuit 104B, or the like. The processing means may be, for example, a CPU 103 that executes special symbol process processing P_TPROC, or the like. The first random number value may be, for example, a random number MR1-1. The second random number value may be, for example, a random number MR3-2, or the like. The specific number of bytes may be, for example, 2 bytes. The specific number may be, for example, "65536", which is the size of the random number MR1-1. The predetermined number may be, for example, "65519", which is the size of the random number MR3-2. A fast update speed means that, for example, the update speed of the random number MR1-1 in the comparative random number value AKA23 is 15,000 times/ms and the update speed of the random number MR3-2 is 469 times/ms.
In such a configuration, it is possible to update the random number value appropriately so that intentional control of the advantageous state becomes difficult due to the fast update speed of the first random number value related to the advantageous state.

(2-2) A gaming machine capable of playing games,
An update means capable of updating the random value;
processing means for executing processing relating to game control using the random number value updated by the updating means;
the updating means is capable of updating a first random number value and a second random number value different from the first random number value;
The first random value is updated at a first rate,
The second random number value is a second speed at which the update speed is an integer multiple of the first speed,
The total number of random values included in the update ranges of the first random value and the second random value may be different, and the total number of random values included in both update ranges may be prime numbers.
Here, the gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The updating means may be, for example, a 16-bit random number circuit 104A or an 8-bit random number circuit 104B. The processing means may be, for example, a CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process P_TPROC. The first random number value may be, for example, random number MR3-2. The second random number value may be, for example, random numbers MR3-3, MR3-4. The first speed may be, for example, 469 times/ms. The second speed may be, for example, 938 times/ms. The total number of random numbers may be, for example, "65519," which is the size of random number MR3-2, "241," which is the size of random number MR3-3, and "251," which is the size of random number MR3-4.
In such a configuration, even if the update speed becomes an integer multiple, the total number of random number values included in the update range is a different prime number, thereby suppressing synchronization between the first random number value and the second random number value, thereby enabling appropriate updating of the random number values.

(2-3) A gaming machine capable of playing games,
An update means capable of updating the random value;
processing means for executing processing relating to game control using the random number value updated by the updating means;
the updating means is capable of updating a first random number value, a second random number value different from the first random number value, and a third random number value different from the first random number value and the second random number value;
The processing means is capable of extracting the first random number value, the second random number value, and the third random number value when a common extraction condition is satisfied;
The first random value is updated at a first rate,
the second random number value and the third random number value are a second speed at which the update speed is an integer multiple of the first speed;
The total number of random numbers included in each update range may be different for the first random number value, the second random number value, and the third random number value, and the total number of random numbers included in each update range may be a prime number.
Here, the gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The updating means may be, for example, a 16-bit random number circuit 104A or an 8-bit random number circuit 104B. The processing means may be, for example, a CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process P_TPROC. The first random number value may be, for example, a random number MR3-2. The second random number value may be, for example, a random number MR3-3. The third random number value may be, for example, a random number MR3-4. The first speed may be, for example, 469 times/ms. The second speed may be, for example, 938 times/ms. The total number of random numbers may be, for example, "65519," which is the size of random number MR3-2, "241," which is the size of random number MR3-3, and "251," which is the size of random number MR3-4.
In such a configuration, even if the update speed becomes an integer multiple, the total number of random numbers included in the update range is a different prime number, thereby suppressing synchronization between the first random number value, the second random number value, and the third random number value, thereby enabling appropriate updating of the random number values.

(2-4) A gaming machine capable of playing games,
An update means capable of updating the random value;
processing means for executing processing relating to game control using the random number value updated by the updating means;
The update method is
a first updating means for updating the first random number value and the second random number value within their respective update ranges by a random number updating process;
a second updating means for updating the third random number value and the fourth random number value within their respective update ranges using a random number clock signal;
At least one of the first random number value and the second random number value is such that the total number of random number values included in the update range is a prime number;
At least one of the third random value and the fourth random value may be such that the total number of random value values included in the update range is a prime number.
Here, the gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The update means may be, for example, a 16-bit random number circuit 104A, an 8-bit random number circuit 104B, or a CPU 103 that executes a random number update process P_RANDOM. The processing means may be, for example, a CPU 103 that executes a special symbol process process P_TPROC or a normal symbol process process P_FPROC. The first random number value may be, for example, a random number MR2-1. The second random number value may be, for example, a random number MR1-2. The random number update process may be, for example, a random number update process P_RANDOM. The third random number value may be, for example, a random number MR3-3. The fourth random number value may be, for example, a random number MR3-4. The random number clock signal may be, for example, a system clock. The total number of random numbers included in the update range may be, for example, "199", which is the size of random number MR2-1, "200", which is the size of random number MR1-2, "241", which is the size of random number MR3-3, and "251", which is the size of random number MR3-4.
In such a configuration, the first update means and the second update means use different update methods, and even if the update methods are the same, the total number of random number values included in the update range of at least one of the means is a prime number, thereby suppressing the occurrence of synchronization and enabling appropriate updating of the random number values.

(3-1) A gaming machine capable of playing games,
An update means capable of updating the random value;
processing means for executing processing relating to game control using the random number value updated by the updating means;
a storage means including a storage area relating to the functions of the updating means and the processing means;
the processing means is capable of executing a maximum value setting process for setting a maximum value of the random numbers updated by the update means when a storage value is set in a storage area related to a function by a startup process executed based on the start of power supply;
The update method is
a first updating means capable of updating a first random number value consisting of a specific number of bytes;
a second updating means capable of updating a second random number value that is configured with a predetermined number of bytes that is smaller than the specific number of bytes,
When executing the maximum value setting process, the processing means may set the maximum random number value for the first random number value and then set the maximum random number value for the second random number value.
Here, the gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The updating means may be, for example, a random number circuit 104. The processing means may be, for example, a CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process P_TPROC. The storage area related to the function may be, for example, a function setting register area of setting example AKA01 or a function control register area of setting example AKA02. The storage means may be, for example, an internal register of the gaming control microcomputer 100. The startup processing may be, for example, the main processing P_MAIN for gaming control. The maximum value setting processing may be, for example, steps AKS11 to AKS13 in the power supply start response processing P_POWER_ON. The specific number of bytes may be, for example, 2 bytes. The first random number value may be, for example, the random number MR3-2. The first updating means may be, for example, a 16-bit random number circuit 104A. The predetermined number of bytes may be, for example, 1 byte. The second random number value may be, for example, random numbers MR3-3, MR3-4, etc. The second updating means may be, for example, an 8-bit random number circuit 104B, etc. Setting the maximum random number value for the first random number value and setting the maximum random number value for the second random number value may be performed by executing step AKS13 using the function setting register stored value table AKT01, etc.
In such a configuration, by setting a first random number value of a specific number of bytes and then setting a second random number value of a predetermined number of bytes, the first random number value and the second random number value can be stably updated, making it possible to update the random number values appropriately.

(3-2) The updating means may start updating the random numbers in order from the random number for which the maximum random number value is set.
For example, it may be a part that uses the function setting register storage value table AKT01 to set maximum values for the 16-bit random number circuit channel RL0 with channel number "0", the 16-bit random number circuit channel RL2 with channel number "2", and the 8-bit random number circuit channels RS1 to RS3 with channel numbers "1" to "3".
In such a configuration, the uncertainty of the random number value is increased depending on the timing at which the update of the random number value is started, reducing the processing load and enabling appropriate updating of the random number value.

(3-3) A gaming machine capable of playing games,
An update means capable of updating the random value;
processing means for executing processing relating to game control using the random number value updated by the updating means;
a storage means including a storage area relating to the functions of the updating means and the processing means;
the processing means is capable of executing a maximum value setting process for setting a maximum value of the random numbers updated by the update means when a storage value is set in a storage area related to a function by a startup process executed based on the start of power supply;
The update method is
a first updating means capable of updating the first random number value and the second random number value by a random number clock signal;
a second updating means capable of updating the third random number value by a random number updating process;
the first updating means, in the maximum value setting process executed by the processing means, starts updating the first random number value when the maximum random number value of the first random number value is set, and then starts updating the second random number value when the maximum random number value of the second random number value is set;
The second updating means may start updating the third random number value after the processing means has executed the maximum value setting process.
Here, the gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The updating means may be, for example, a random number circuit 104 or a CPU 103 that executes random number update processing P_RANDOM. The processing means may be, for example, a CPU 103 that executes special symbol process processing P_TPROC or normal symbol process processing P_FPROC. The storage area related to the function may be, for example, a function setting register area of setting example AKA01 or a function control register area of setting example AKA02. The storage means may be, for example, an internal register of the gaming control microcomputer 100. The startup processing may be, for example, a main processing P_MAIN for gaming control. The maximum value setting processing may be, for example, steps AKS11 to AKS13 in the power supply start response processing P_POWER_ON. The first random number value may be, for example, random numbers MR1-1, MR3-2, etc. The second random number value may be, for example, random numbers MR3-3, MR3-4, etc. The first updating means may be, for example, a 16-bit random number circuit 104A or an 8-bit random number circuit 104B. The third random number value may be, for example, random numbers MR1-2 or MR2-1. The random number updating process may be, for example, the random number updating process P_RANDOM. The second updating means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes the random number updating process P_RANDOM in step S56. The updating of the first random number value may be initiated, for example, by setting maximum values for the 16-bit random number circuit channel RL0 with channel number "0" and the 16-bit random number circuit channel RL2 with channel number "2" using the function setting register stored value table AKT01. The updating of the second random number value may be initiated, for example, by setting maximum values for the 8-bit random number circuit channels RS1 to RS3 with channel numbers "1" to "3" using the function setting register stored value table AKT01. The updating of the third random number value may be started, for example, at the part where the random number update process P_RANDOM of step S56 is executed in the timer interrupt process P_PCT for game control after the power supply start response process P_POWER_ON of step S1 is executed.
In such a configuration, by starting the update of random numbers such as MR1-1, which have a high correlation with the gaming value, first, uncertainty is increased, and appropriate random number values can be updated.

(4-1) a storage means capable of storing information related to game control;
a storage means including a storage area relating to the functions of the updating means and the processing means;
a specific storage area among the storage areas relating to the function can be set to a first storage value that prohibits access to the storage means in response to the start of power supply;
The processing means is
After setting a storage value in the storage area related to the function, a second storage value that allows access to the storage means can be set in the specific storage area;
As a next process after the second storage value is set in the specific storage area, a confirmation process may be executed to confirm whether or not the control state can be restored based on the stored contents of the storage means.
Here, the storage means may be, for example, RAM 102. The storage area related to the function may be, for example, the function setting register area of setting example AKA01 or the function control register area of setting example AKA02. The storage means may be, for example, an internal register of the game control microcomputer 100. The specific storage area may be, for example, an RWM access protection register. The first storage value may be, for example, 00 [H]. The second storage value may be, for example, 01 [H]. The second storage value may be set in the specific storage area by, for example, executing step AKS14 in the power supply start response processing P_POWER_ON. The confirmation processing may be, for example, the RWM check processing P_RWM_CHK of step S2.
In this configuration, the contents stored in the storage means are prevented from being changed unnecessarily, so that the confirmation process can be executed reliably and the random number values can be updated appropriately.

(4-2) The processing means is
In response to the power supply interruption, a stoppage storage process can be executed to store recovery information for restoring the control state in the storage means,
After the stop-time storage process is executed, a stop-time storage process can be executed to set the first storage value in the specific storage area,
After the stop storage process is executed, the machine may be shifted to a standby state in which game control is not executed, and in response to the power supply being restored while the machine is in the standby state, the start-up process based on the start-up of the game machine may be executed from the beginning.
The recovery information may be, for example, checksum data. The stop storage process may be, for example, the checksum calculation process of step AKS39 or step AKS40 in the power-off process P_POWER_OFF. The stop storage process may be, for example, steps AKS41 and AKS42 in the power-off process P_POWER_OFF. The transition to the standby state may be, for example, the execution of steps AKS48 and AKS49 in the power-off process P_POWER_OFF. The executable process from the beginning of the startup process may be, for example, the execution of step AKS50 in the power-off process P_POWER_OFF and then the execution of the RET command.
In such a configuration, when the power supply is restored, unstable operation can be prevented and the random number values can be updated appropriately.

(4-3) a storage means capable of storing information related to game control;
a storage means including a storage area relating to the functions of the updating means and the processing means;
The storage means includes, as a storage area relating to functions,
a first area for setting functions;
a second area for function control;
the second area includes a specific storage area in which a storage value indicating whether or not access to the storage means is permitted can be set;
The processing means performs a startup process based on the start of power supply,
A control storage process for setting a storage value in the second area can be executed;
After the control storage process is executed, a setting storage process can be executed to set a storage value in the first area,
After the setting storage process is executed, a storage value that allows access to the storage means may be set in the specific storage area.
Here, the storage means may be, for example, RAM 102. The storage area related to the function may be, for example, the function setting register area of setting example AKA01 or the function control register area of setting example AKA02. The storage means may be, for example, an internal register of the game control microcomputer 100. The first area may be, for example, the function setting register area of setting example AKA01. The second area may be, for example, the function control register area of setting example AKA02. The specific storage area may be, for example, an RWM access protection register. The startup processing may be, for example, the main processing P_MAIN for game control. The control storage processing may be, for example, steps AKS5 to AKS7 in the power supply start response processing P_POWER_ON. The setting storage processing may be, for example, steps AKS11 to AKS13 in the power supply start response processing P_POWER_ON. The storage value can be set in the specific storage area by, for example, executing step AKS14 in the power supply start response process P_POWER_ON.
In this configuration, it is possible to prevent the contents stored in the storage means from being changed unnecessarily and to update the random number values appropriately.

(SKY2021-664) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
An update means capable of updating the random value;
the random number values include a first random number value and a second random number value different from the first random number value;
The determination result of the first random number value has a greater influence on the payout rate than the determination result of the second random number value,
The update means
The first random value and the second random value can be updated within their respective update ranges by a common update process,
updating the first random value and then updating the second random value;
before updating the first random value by the update process, setting reference information for the first random value in an internal storage means using a specific command;
Before updating the second random value by the update process, the specific instruction is used to set reference information for the second random value in the internal variable means.
Here, the payout rate is a rate calculated by taking the number of game balls inserted into the gaming machine as the denominator and the number of game balls paid out to the player as the numerator. It is set as a design value for each gaming machine. If it exceeds 100%, it indicates that the number of game balls paid out to the player is greater than the number of game balls inserted into the gaming machine.
Here, the first random number corresponds to the random number for the winning symbol (MR1-2), and the second random number corresponds to the random number for the winning symbol (MR2-1). The random number for the winning symbol is a random number used to determine the number of jackpot rounds, which is the main trigger for acquiring game balls (a random number for determining the display result of the special symbol linked to the number of jackpot rounds) (see Figure 10-24 (C)). The random number for the winning symbol is a random number used to determine the opening time of the normal electric device (a random number for determining the display result of the normal symbol linked to the opening time of the normal electric device) (see Figure 10-37 (D)). The determination by the random number for the winning symbol is used to determine the number of jackpot rounds, while the determination by the random number for the winning symbol is used to determine the opening time of the normal electric device, and the random number for the winning symbol has a greater impact on the number of game balls acquired. The number of game balls that can be won by landing a ball in the big prize slot is 15, while the number of game balls that can be won by landing a ball in a regular electric device is 1.
In this configuration, since the first random number value has a greater impact on the number of balls a player wins, by processing it first, it is possible to prevent as much as possible the random number value becoming constant due to a malfunction or the like (which would result in a biased period of time without being updated), and by updating the random number using a common command, stable updates can be performed.

(SKY2021-665) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
An update means capable of updating the random value;
the random number values include a first random number value and a second random number value different from the first random number value;
The update means
The first random value and the second random value can be updated within their respective update ranges by a common update process,
A single compare and add instruction including: comparing the random number value with a maximum random number value; adding 1 to the random number value if the comparison result is less than the maximum random number value; and changing the random number value to a minimum random number value if the comparison result is equal to or greater than the maximum random number value; is the first process of the update process for the first random number value and the update process for the second random number value;
When the first random number value is the minimum random number value, the determination result is not more advantageous than when the first random number value is other than the minimum random number value,
If the second random number value is the minimum random number value, the determination result will not be more advantageous than if the second random number value is other than the minimum random number value.
Here, the display result that is not determined to have a high degree of advantage may be, for example, the example of determining the number of times the large prize opening is performed AKD01 or the example of determining the mode of opening the large prize opening AKD02. Also, the normal electric device opening time in the example of determining the normal electric device opening time in Figure 10-37 (D) is designed so that there is no advantage or disadvantage, such as a uniform 16 ms in the normal state (time-saving operation designated value ×) and a uniform 5000 ms in the special state (time-saving operation designated value 0). However, in the example of determining the normal electric device opening time in Figure 10-37 (D), the normal electric device opening time for the normal symbol designated value "00" is 16 ms or 5000 ms, but it may be set to 10 ms or 3000 ms to make it relatively disadvantageous compared to other opening times. By doing so, when the number of times the large prize opening is opened, which is the result of the first random number value (random number for winning symbols (MR1-2)), and the opening time of the normal electric device, which is the result of the second random number value (random number for winning symbols (MR2-1)), both become the minimum random number value (00H), it is possible to prevent a favorable decision result (10 times for the number of times the large prize opening is opened, and 5000 ms for the opening time of the normal electric device).
In such a configuration, by executing the comparison and addition instruction first, the occurrence of malfunctions is suppressed and the random number value can be updated appropriately. If a malfunction occurs, the random number value will be slightly biased toward the smallest random number value, but even in that case, the design is such that the decision result will not be highly advantageous, so it is possible to prevent the malfunction from being intentionally induced, and as a result, it is possible to update the random number value appropriately.

(SKY2021-708) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
An update means capable of updating the random value;
The random number values include a first random number value used in a process regarding whether or not to control to the advantageous state, and a second random number value different from the first random number value,
The first random value is composed of a specific number of bytes, and the total number of random values included in the update range is a specific number;
the second random number value is configured by the specific number of bytes, and the total number of random numbers included in the update range is a predetermined number smaller than the specific number;
The update speed of the first random number value by the update means is faster than the update speed of the second random number value by the update means.
Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot gaming state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The updating means may be, for example, a 16-bit random number circuit 104A, an 8-bit random number circuit 104B, or the like. The processing means may be, for example, a CPU 103 that executes special symbol process processing P_TPROC, or the like. The first random number value may be, for example, a random number MR1-1. The second random number value may be, for example, a random number MR3-2, or the like. The specific number of bytes may be, for example, 2 bytes. The specific number may be, for example, "65536", which is the size of the random number MR1-1. The predetermined number may be, for example, "65519", which is the size of the random number MR3-2. A fast update speed means that, for example, the update speed of the random number MR1-1 in the comparative random number value AKA23 is 15,000 times/ms and the update speed of the random number MR3-2 is 469 times/ms.
In such a configuration, it is possible to update the random number value appropriately so that intentional control of the advantageous state becomes difficult due to a fast update speed of the first random number value related to the advantageous state.

(SKY2021-709) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
An update means capable of updating the random value;
the random number values include a first random number value and a second random number value different from the first random number value;
the first random value is updated at a first rate;
the second random number value is a second speed at which the update speed is an integer multiple of the first speed,
The first random number value and the second random number value are random number values obtained at the same time,
the total number of random values included in each update range is different between the first random value and the second random value;
The first random value is a prime number, and the total number of random values included in the update range is a prime number.
The total number of random values included in the update range of the second random value is a prime number.
Here, the gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The updating means may be, for example, a 16-bit random number circuit 104A or an 8-bit random number circuit 104B. The processing means may be, for example, a CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process P_TPROC. The first random number value may be, for example, random number MR3-2. The second random number value may be, for example, random numbers MR3-3, MR3-4. The first speed may be, for example, 469 times/ms. The second speed may be, for example, 938 times/ms. The total number of random numbers may be, for example, "65519," which is the size of random number MR3-2, "241," which is the size of random number MR3-3, and "251," which is the size of random number MR3-4.
In such a configuration, even if the update speed becomes an integer multiple, the total number of random number values included in the update range is a different prime number, thereby suppressing synchronization between the first random number value and the second random number value, thereby enabling appropriate updating of the random number values.

(SKY2021-710) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
An update means capable of updating the random value;
the random number values include a first random number value, a second random number value different from the first random number value, and a third random number value different from the first random number value and the second random number value;
the first random value is updated at a first rate;
the second random number value and the third random number value are a second speed at which an update speed is an integer multiple of the first speed,
the first random number value, the second random number value, and the third random number value are random number values obtained at the same opportunity,
the total number of random numbers included in each update range is different for the first random number value, the second random number value, and the third random number value;
The first random value is a prime number, and the total number of random values included in the update range is a prime number.
The second random value is a prime number, and the total number of random values included in the update range is a prime number.
The total number of random values included in the update range of the third random value is a prime number.
Here, the gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The updating means may be, for example, a 16-bit random number circuit 104A or an 8-bit random number circuit 104B. The processing means may be, for example, a CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process P_TPROC. The first random number value may be, for example, a random number MR3-2. The second random number value may be, for example, a random number MR3-3. The third random number value may be, for example, a random number MR3-4. The first speed may be, for example, 469 times/ms. The second speed may be, for example, 938 times/ms. The total number of random numbers may be, for example, "65519," which is the size of random number MR3-2, "241," which is the size of random number MR3-3, and "251," which is the size of random number MR3-4.
In such a configuration, even if the update speed becomes an integer multiple, the total number of random numbers included in the update range is a different prime number, thereby suppressing synchronization between the first random number value, the second random number value, and the third random number value, thereby enabling appropriate updating of the random number values.

(SKY2021-711) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a first updating means for updating the first random number value and the second random number value within their respective update ranges by a random number updating process;
a second update means for updating the third random number value and the fourth random number value within their respective update ranges using a random number clock signal;
At least one of the first random value and the second random value has a total number of random values included in an update range that is a prime number;
At least one of the third random number value and the fourth random number value has a total number of random number values included in an update range that is a prime number.
Here, the gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The update means may be, for example, a 16-bit random number circuit 104A, an 8-bit random number circuit 104B, or a CPU 103 that executes a random number update process P_RANDOM. The processing means may be, for example, a CPU 103 that executes a special symbol process process P_TPROC or a normal symbol process process P_FPROC. The first random number value may be, for example, a random number MR2-1. The second random number value may be, for example, a random number MR1-2. The random number update process may be, for example, a random number update process P_RANDOM. The third random number value may be, for example, a random number MR3-3. The fourth random number value may be, for example, a random number MR3-4. The random number clock signal may be, for example, a system clock. The total number of random numbers included in the update range may be, for example, "199", which is the size of random number MR2-1, "200", which is the size of random number MR1-2, "241", which is the size of random number MR3-3, and "251", which is the size of random number MR3-4.
In such a configuration, the first update means and the second update means use different update methods, and even if the update methods are the same, the total number of random number values included in the update range of at least one of the means is a prime number, thereby suppressing the occurrence of synchronization and enabling appropriate updating of the random number values.

(SKY2021-712) A gaming machine capable of playing games,
a game control means for controlling the game;
a first updating means capable of updating the first random number value and the second random number value by a random number clock signal;
a second updating means for updating the third random number value by a random number updating process;
The game control means is capable of executing a maximum value setting process for setting a maximum value of the first random number value and the second random number value when setting a stored value in a storage area by a startup process executed based on the start of power supply,
the first updating means, in the maximum value setting process, can start updating the first random number value when a maximum random number value for the first random number value has been set, and then start updating the second random number value when a maximum random number value for the second random number value has been set;
The second updating means can start updating the third random number value after starting to update the first random number value and the second random number value.
Here, the gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The updating means may be, for example, a random number circuit 104 or a CPU 103 that executes random number update processing P_RANDOM. The processing means may be, for example, a CPU 103 that executes special symbol process processing P_TPROC or normal symbol process processing P_FPROC. The storage area related to the function may be, for example, a function setting register area of setting example AKA01 or a function control register area of setting example AKA02. The storage means may be, for example, an internal register of the gaming control microcomputer 100. The startup processing may be, for example, a main processing P_MAIN for gaming control. The maximum value setting processing may be, for example, steps AKS11 to AKS13 in the power supply start response processing P_POWER_ON. The first random number value may be, for example, random numbers MR1-1, MR3-2, etc. The second random number value may be, for example, random numbers MR3-3, MR3-4, etc. The first updating means may be, for example, a 16-bit random number circuit 104A or an 8-bit random number circuit 104B. The third random number value may be, for example, random numbers MR1-2 or MR2-1. The random number updating process may be, for example, the random number updating process P_RANDOM. The second updating means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes the random number updating process P_RANDOM in step S56. The updating of the first random number value may be initiated, for example, by setting maximum values for the 16-bit random number circuit channel RL0 with channel number "0" and the 16-bit random number circuit channel RL2 with channel number "2" using the function setting register stored value table AKT01. The updating of the second random number value may be initiated, for example, by setting maximum values for the 8-bit random number circuit channels RS1 to RS3 with channel numbers "1" to "3" using the function setting register stored value table AKT01. The updating of the third random number value may be started, for example, at the part where the random number update process P_RANDOM of step S56 is executed in the timer interrupt process P_PCT for game control after the power supply start response process P_POWER_ON of step S1 is executed.
In such a configuration, by starting the update of random numbers such as MR1-1, which have a high correlation with the gaming value, first, uncertainty is increased, and appropriate random number values can be updated.

(SKY2021-713) A gaming machine capable of playing games,
a game control means for controlling the game;
a storage means capable of storing information relating to game control;
a storage means including a storage area related to game control functions;
The storage means has a storage area relating to functions,
a first area for setting functions related to game control;
a second area for controlling functions related to game control;
the second area includes a specific storage area in which a storage value indicating whether or not access to the storage means is permitted can be set;
The game control means performs a startup process based on the start of power supply,
A control storage process for setting a storage value in the second area can be executed,
After the control storage process is executed, a setting storage process can be executed to set a storage value in the first area,
After the setting storage process is executed, a storage value that permits access to the storage means can be set in the specific storage area.
Here, the storage means may be, for example, RAM 102. The storage area related to the function may be, for example, the function setting register area of setting example AKA01 or the function control register area of setting example AKA02. The storage means may be, for example, an internal register of the game control microcomputer 100. The first area may be, for example, the function setting register area of setting example AKA01. The second area may be, for example, the function control register area of setting example AKA02. The specific storage area may be, for example, an RWM access protection register. The startup processing may be, for example, the main processing P_MAIN for game control. The control storage processing may be, for example, steps AKS5 to AKS7 in the power supply start response processing P_POWER_ON. The setting storage processing may be, for example, steps AKS11 to AKS13 in the power supply start response processing P_POWER_ON. The storage value can be set in the specific storage area by, for example, executing step AKS14 in the power supply start response process P_POWER_ON.
In this configuration, it is possible to prevent the contents stored in the storage means from being changed unnecessarily and to update the random number values appropriately.

The various forms described above are not limited to pachinko gaming machines, but can also be applied to slot machines, etc.

In addition, when a variable display is performed based on the extracted random number value, it is possible to change the display mode of the displayed decorative pattern or move the display position of the decorative pattern to perform a preview effect that suggests the likelihood of a jackpot, reach, etc. In this case, it is preferable to perform the preview effect at different rates and in different modes depending on the extracted random number value, thereby performing a wide variety of preview effects. Further detailed explanations are provided below.

Other embodiments for implementing the gaming machine according to the present invention are described below based on the embodiments.

[Form 1] (No. 1)
The gaming machine of form 1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The size of the reduced identification information is smaller than that of the decorative identification information, and it is possible to variably display reduced identification information corresponding to each of the plurality of types of decorative identification information (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 executes variably display of small patterns corresponding to decorative patterns),
The variable display of the ornament identification information includes a moving display (e.g., a scrolling display, see FIG. 31 ) that moves the ornament identification information,
The variable display of the reduced identification information is a switching display (e.g., switching display; see FIG. 32(E) ) in which the reduced identification information is switched to another reduced identification information without moving the reduced identification information,
In the variable display of the reduced identification information, one piece of decorative identification information is displayed in the variable display of the decorative identification information, and the reduced identification information can be switched multiple times during the period until the display of the one piece of decorative identification information is completed (for example, during the period Ta2 from when one decorative pattern is displayed until the display of the decorative pattern is completed, the small patterns are switched five times to small patterns of losing combinations, and are displayed for the period Ta1 each (period Ta1<period Ta2). See FIG. 32(E)).
The display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information is configured by a combination of the decorative identification information (for example, a combination of decorative patterns such as "111" and "326");
The display result of the variable display of the reduced symbol information is configured by a combination of the reduced symbol information (for example, a combination of small symbols such as "111" and "326");
When a non-specific combination, which is a combination of the decorative identification information corresponding to a non-specific display result other than the specific display result, is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information, the reduced identification information is switched so that the combination of the reduced identification information corresponding to the non-specific combination does not become the combination of the reduced identification information corresponding to the non-specific combination before the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information is derived (for example, when the performance control CPU 120 decides to statically display a confirmed decorative pattern of a losing combination (e.g., "326"), this part switches the display so that the small symbols of the losing combination, which are the same as the decorative pattern "326", are not displayed after starting the variable display of the decorative pattern and before statically displaying the confirmed decorative pattern of the losing combination (e.g., "326"); see FIG. 32(E)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a non-specific combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative identification information, the reduced identification information is switched before the display result of the variable display of decorative identification information is derived so that the combination of reduced identification information in the variable display of reduced identification information does not correspond to the non-specific combination.Therefore, it is not known in advance that a non-specific combination will be derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative identification information from the combination of reduced identification information in the variable display of reduced identification information, and a decrease in interest can be prevented.

[Form 2] (No. 2)
The gaming machine of form 2 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
Light-emitting means (for example, a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, and a movable body lamp 9d),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information is constituted by a combination of the decorative identification information that has stopped in the valid display area among the plurality of decorative identification information displayed in the display area (for example, a portion that results in a jackpot or a loss depending on a combination of decorative patterns such as "111" and "326" that have stopped and displayed at the stop positions of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R),
When a non-specific combination, which is a combination of the decorative identification information corresponding to a non-specific display result other than the specific display result, is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information, when the decorative identification information is stopped in the effective display area, the decorative identification information can be displayed in a manner in which it is enlarged from a normal size and then returned to the normal size (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can execute a variable stop action when it temporarily stops and displays a decorative pattern in a variable display based on a miss variable pattern. See Figures 46 to 48, 52, and 53).
When the decoration identification information to be stopped in the effective display area is enlarged and displayed, the decoration identification information that is not located in the effective display area is not enlarged and displayed (see Modification 3 of FIG. 67 ).
During the execution of the variable display of the decorative identification information, predetermined light emission control is repeatedly performed to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode for a predetermined light emission period, and the predetermined light emission control is also continuously performed when the decorative identification information to be stopped in the effective display area is enlarged and displayed (for example, even when the performance control CPU 120 is executing a variable stop action when temporarily stopping a decorative pattern, loop light emission control of the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and movable body lamp 9d is performed. See Figures 52 and 53).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a non-specific combination of decoration identification information corresponding to a non-specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of decoration identification information, the decoration identification information stopped in the valid display area is temporarily enlarged to draw the player's attention to the decoration identification information stopped in the valid display area, and even when a non-specific combination that is meaningless to the player is derived, the player's gaze can be kept on the area where the decoration identification information is displayed. Furthermore, when the decoration identification information stopped in the valid display area is enlarged, decoration identification information that is not located in the valid display area is not enlarged, so the player's gaze can be focused on the decoration identification information stopped in the valid display area and the load on display control can be reduced. Furthermore, since the predetermined light-emission control continues even when the decoration identification information stopped in the valid display area is enlarged, the control of the light-emitting means can be simplified.

[Form 3-1] (No. 4-1)
The gaming machine of form 3-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The variable display of the ornament identification information includes a front-moving display (e.g., a scrolling display) in which the ornament identification information is moved from the back side to the front side while increasing transparency, and then disappeared (see FIGS. 38 to 40 ).
The ornament identification information includes a character image (e.g., a character display unit 002SG052) and a number image (e.g., a number display unit 002SG051),
During the forward movement display of the decoration identification information, other decoration identification information located on the back side of one decoration identification information becomes visible through the one decoration identification information, and the character images of the other decoration identification information are displayed while the number images are not displayed. After the one decoration identification information is erased, the number images of the other decoration identification information are displayed (for example, as shown in Figures 40(A) and (B), between being displayed in a frame-in state in the decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R and being displayed out of the frame, (For example, a decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern "3") located at the back so as to overlap partially with the decorative pattern "2" may become visible through the decorative pattern "2". In this case, the character in the character display portion 002SG052 of the decorative pattern "3" is displayed, while the number ("3") in the number display portion 002SG051 becomes difficult to see (or is not displayed), and as shown in Figure 40 (C), the decorative pattern "2" is erased, and then the number ("3") in the number display portion 002SG051 of the decorative pattern "3" is displayed.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a front-moving display is performed in which decorative identification information is moved from the back side toward the front side while increasing its transparency and then erased, other decorative identification information located behind one decorative identification information can be seen through the first decorative identification information, but in this case, the character image of the other decorative identification information located behind is displayed while the number image is not displayed, and the first decorative identification information is erased before the number image of the other decorative identification information is displayed, so the number image of one decorative identification information and the number image of the other decorative identification information are not displayed overlapping each other, preventing the number image of the first decorative identification information located in the front side from becoming difficult to see.

[Form 3-2] (No. 4-2)
The gaming machine of form 3-2 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The variable display of the ornament identification information includes a front-moving display (e.g., a scrolling display) in which the ornament identification information is moved from the front side to the back side while increasing in transparency, and then disappeared (see FIGS. 41 and 42 ).
The ornament identification information includes a character image (e.g., a character display unit 002SG052) and a number image (e.g., a number display unit 002SG051),
During the forward movement display of the decoration identification information, other decoration identification information located behind one decoration identification information becomes visible through the one decoration identification information, and the character image of the one decoration identification information is displayed while the number image is not displayed. After the other decoration identification information is erased, the number image of the one decoration identification information is displayed. (For example, as shown in Figures 41(G) and (H), in the scroll display, the decorative patterns move in a curved manner from the front side to the back side. Therefore, between the time when the other decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern "2") is displayed in the frame-in display in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R and the time when the other decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern "3") is displayed out of the frame, the other decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern "2") located behind the one decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern "3") so as to partially overlap the one decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern "3") may become visible through the decorative pattern "3". At this time, the character in character display portion 002SG052 of the decorative pattern "2" is displayed, while the number ("2") in number display portion 002SG051 becomes difficult to see (or is not displayed). Variation 1)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a front-moving display is performed in which decorative identification information is moved from the front side toward the back side while increasing its transparency and then erased, other decorative identification information located behind one decorative identification information can be seen through the one decorative identification information, but in this case, the one decorative identification information located in the front side has its character image displayed while its number image is not displayed, and the other decorative identification information is erased before the number image of the one decorative identification information is displayed, so the number image of the other decorative identification information and the number image of the one decorative identification information do not overlap and this prevents the number image of the other decorative identification information located behind from becoming difficult to see.

[Form 4] (No. 5)
The gaming machine of form 5 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
Light-emitting means (for example, a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, and a movable body lamp 9d),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The variable display of the ornament identification information includes a rotation display in which the ornament identification information is rotated to alternately display the front and back sides of the ornament identification information (see FIGS. 43 and 44 ).
The decoration identification information is semi-transparent during the rotating display, and becomes opaque when the rotating display stops (see FIGS. 43 and 44).
The decoration identification information includes a number image (e.g., number display unit 002SG051),
During the rotation display, the number image on the front side of the decorative identification information, which is in a semi-transparent state, is displayed, while the number image on the back side is not displayed (see FIG. 44 ).
During the execution of the variable display of the decorative identification information, a predetermined light emission control is repeatedly performed to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode for a predetermined light emission period, and the predetermined light emission control is continuously performed even during the rotation display (for example, even when the variable display of the decorative pattern is being executed in a high base state, a light emission pattern of white, blue, and yellow may be repeatedly executed in this order based on a loop light emission control (see FIG. 34(B)) corresponding to the background pattern. Modified example. See FIG. 54).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the decorative identification information is rotated to repeatedly display the front and back sides of the decorative identification information, the decorative identification information becomes semi-transparent, so that not only the front side but also the back side of the decorative identification information can be seen through the display. In this case, the number images on the front side of the decorative identification information are displayed, but the number images on the back side are not displayed, so the number images on the front side and the number images on the back side of the decorative identification information do not overlap, preventing the number images on the front side from becoming difficult to see. In addition, since the predetermined light emission control is continued even during the rotation display, the control of the light emitting means can be simplified.

[Form 5] (No. 6)
The gaming machine of form 5 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The area in which the decorative identification information is displayed includes a first area (e.g., a left decorative pattern display area 5L), a second area (e.g., a right decorative pattern display area 5R), and a third area (e.g., a middle decorative pattern display area 5C) located between the first area and the second area,
When the specific display result is derived, after a ready-to-win state is reached in which the decoration identification information of the same type is temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area, a specific combination (for example, a predetermined jackpot combination) is reached in which the decoration identification information of the same type as the decoration identification information forming the ready-to-win state is stopped in the third area,
When the reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion effect can be executed in which a reach line suggestion image (e.g., reach line effect display 002SG250) is displayed so as to be superimposed on the decorative identification information temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area and the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area, and then erased (e.g., a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 can execute the reach line suggestion effect),
After the reach state is reached, the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area is made to be transparent at a first transparency (e.g., first transparency F1) until the reach line suggestion performance is executed, and after the reach line suggestion performance is executed, the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area is made to be transparent at a second transparency (e.g., second transparency F2) that is lower than the first transparency (see FIG. 62 ).
After the reach line suggestion performance is executed, the timing at which the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area is set to the second transparency is the timing at which the reach line suggestion image is erased from the third area (for example, after the reach line effect display 002SG250 is executed, the timing at which the transmittance (transparency) of the decorative pattern being variably displayed in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C is set to the second transmittance F2 which is lower than the first transmittance F1 before the reach line effect display 002SG250 is executed is the timing after the reach line effect display 002SG250 is erased from the middle decorative pattern display area 5C. See FIGS. 60 to 62).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion image is displayed so as to be superimposed on the decorative identification information stopped in the first area and the second area and the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area, and at the timing when the reach line suggestion image is erased from the third area, the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area becomes a second transparency lower than the first transparency, so that the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area does not interfere with the reach line suggestion image.

[Form 6] (No. 7)
The gaming machine of form 6 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
a light emitting means,
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The area in which the decorative identification information is displayed includes a first area (e.g., a left decorative pattern display area 5L), a second area (e.g., a right decorative pattern display area 5R), and a third area (e.g., a middle decorative pattern display area 5C) located between the first area and the second area,
When the specific display result is derived, after a ready-to-win state is reached in which the decoration identification information of the same type is temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area, a specific combination (for example, a predetermined jackpot combination) is reached in which the decoration identification information of the same type as the decoration identification information forming the ready-to-win state is stopped in the third area,
When the reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion effect can be executed in which a reach line suggestion image (e.g., reach line effect display 002SG250) is displayed so as to be superimposed on the decorative identification information temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area and the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area, and then erased (e.g., a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 can execute the reach line suggestion effect),
When the reach line suggestion performance is executed, an enlarged display for enlarging the decorative identification information temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area, and a separated display for separating the decorative identification information after the enlarged display are executed can be executed (see FIGS. 60 to 62 ).
The second period from the start to the end of the distant display is longer than the first period from the start to the end of the enlarged display (for example, the second period te1 from the start to the end of the distant display is longer than the first period td1 from the start to the end of the enlarged display (td1<te1; see FIG. 62 ).
The light emitting means includes a specific light emitting means (e.g., a movable lamp 9d) disposed around the display means,
It is possible to execute a light-off control for turning off the specific light-emitting means while the reach line suggestion performance is being executed (for example, a part for turning off the movable body lamps 9d of the movable bodies 32A, 32B arranged on the periphery (nearby) of the display screen of the image display device 5 when the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 is being changed. See Figures 60(F) to (H)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion image is displayed so as to be superimposed on the decorative identification information stopped in the first and second regions and the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third region, and the decorative identification information stopped in the first and second regions is enlarged and displayed for a first period and then spaced apart for a second period longer than the first period, thereby allowing the player to recognize the decorative identification information that forms the reach state. Also, by turning off the specific light-emitting means around the display means, the reach line suggestion image can be made to stand out more.

[Form 7] (No. 8)
The gaming machine of form 7 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
a light emitting means,
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The area in which the decorative identification information is displayed includes a first area (e.g., a left decorative pattern display area 5L), a second area (e.g., a right decorative pattern display area 5R), and a third area (e.g., a middle decorative pattern display area 5C) located between the first area and the second area,
When the specific display result is derived, after a ready-to-win state is reached in which the decoration identification information of the same type is temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area, a specific combination (for example, a predetermined jackpot combination) is reached in which the decoration identification information of the same type as the decoration identification information forming the ready-to-win state is stopped in the third area,
When the reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion effect can be executed in which a reach line suggestion image (e.g., reach line effect display 002SG250) is displayed so as to be superimposed on the decorative identification information temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area and the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area, and then erased (e.g., a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 can execute the reach line suggestion effect),
The light emitting means includes a specific light emitting means (e.g., a movable lamp 9d) disposed around the display means,
It is possible to execute a light-off control for turning off the specific light-emitting means while the reach line suggestion performance is being executed (for example, a part for turning off the movable body lamps 9d of the movable bodies 32A, 32B arranged on the periphery (nearby) of the display screen of the image display device 5 when the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 is being changed. See Figures 60(F) to (H)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion image is displayed so as to be superimposed on the decorative identification information stopped in the first and second areas and the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area, and by turning off specific light-emitting means around the display means, the reach line suggestion image can be made to stand out more.

[Form 8] (No. 9)
The gaming machine of form 8 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
Light-emitting means (e.g., main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b),
The game control means
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control it into a normal state (for example, a low-probability, low-base state) and a special state (for example, a low-probability, high-base state or a high-probability, high-base state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state and the average variable display period is shorter,
The performance control means
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
When the variable display of the decorative identification information is temporarily stopped in the normal state, a predetermined operation display control is repeatedly performed to operate the decorative identification information in a predetermined operation mode over a first period (for example, when the performance control CPU 120 temporarily stops and displays the decorative symbols at the stop positions of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the low base state, the loop action of the decorative symbols is repeatedly performed until the variable display of the special symbols is completed. See Figures 33(C), 52, and 53).
When the variable display of the decorative identification information is temporarily stopped in the normal state, predetermined light emission control is repeatedly performed to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode over a second period (for example, when the performance control CPU 120 temporarily stops and displays the decorative patterns at the stop positions of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the low base state, the loop light emission control of the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the movable body lamp 9d is repeatedly performed. See Figures 34(B), 52, and 53).
When the variable display of the decorative identification information is stopped in the special state, the predetermined operation display control is not performed (for example, when the performance control CPU 120 temporarily stops and displays the decorative symbols at the stop positions of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the high base state, the loop action of the decorative symbols is not executed. See FIG. 54).
The second period is longer than the first period (for example, loop action period Tb3<loop light emission period Tb4. See FIG. 34A).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the normal state, the predetermined action display control is repeatedly performed to prompt the player to change the display of the decorative identification information, while in the special state in which the variable display is likely to be performed, the variable display is not excessively prompted and the player feels annoyed. Furthermore, since the predetermined action display control is repeatedly performed at a shorter cycle than the predetermined light emission control, the decorative identification information can be suitably highlighted.

[Form 9] (No. 10)
The gaming machine of form 9 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control it into a normal state (for example, a low-probability, low-base state) and a special state (for example, a low-probability, high-base state or a high-probability, high-base state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state and the average variable display period is shorter,
Information relating to the variable display of special identification information that has not yet started can be stored as reserved memory information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 stores reserved information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updates the number of reserved memories in the start winning determination process of step S101).
The performance control means
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information is constituted by a combination of the decorative identification information stopped in the valid display area (for example, a portion that results in a jackpot or a loss depending on a combination of decorative patterns such as "111" and "326" stopped and displayed at the stop positions of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R),
In the normal state, when a non-specific combination, which is a combination of the decorative identification information corresponding to a non-specific display result other than the specific display result, is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information, when the decorative identification information is stopped in the effective display area, the decorative identification information can be enlarged from the normal size and then returned to the normal size according to the number of reserved memories stored as the reserved memory information (for example, a part where a variable stop action can be executed when the performance control CPU 120 temporarily stops and displays a decorative pattern. See Figures 46 to 49).
In the special state, when the non-specific combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information, when the decorative identification information is stopped in the effective display area, the decorative identification information is maintained at a normal size regardless of the number of reserved memories stored as the reserved memory information (for example, in a high base state in which the average variable display period is short and the decorative pattern is difficult to see, if a variable display based on a shortened variable pattern is executed regardless of the number of reserved memories, a variable stop action is not executed and the size is maintained and the decorative identification information is displayed as a temporary stop. See Figures 49 and 54).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the normal state, interest is enhanced by providing variations in the movement of the decorative identification information when it stops according to the number of reserved memories, while in the special state in which the average variable display period is short and the decorative identification information is difficult to see, the size is maintained while the decorative identification information is stopped so that its visibility is not impaired.

[Form 10] (No. 11)
The gaming machine of form 10 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
In one presentation mode, a plurality of types of background images including a first background image and a second background image can be switched and displayed (for example, in the first presentation mode, a first background image 002SG081 (see FIG. 50(A1)) showing a daytime cityscape seen from afar and a first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see FIG. 50(A2)) showing a daytime cityscape can be switched and displayed as background images),
When the background image is switched from the first background image to the second background image, a background fade-out display can be executed in which the transparency of the first background image is gradually increased and then the image is erased, and a background fade-in display can be executed in which the transparency of the second background image is gradually decreased while the background fade-out display of the first background image is being executed (for example, a portion in which a cross-fade display is executed in which a fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and a fade-in display period B1 of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A are synchronized; see FIG. 50 ).
When variable display of the decorative identification information is started, an identification information fade-out display can be executed in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually increased and the decorative identification information is erased (for example, a decorative pattern is gradually accelerated after the start of scrolling display to be displayed at high speed, and the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed, causing the decorative pattern to be faded out).
When the variable display of the decorative identification information is terminated, an identification information fade-in display can be executed in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually reduced (for example, when the timing for stopping the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the center decorative pattern display area 5C are gradually decelerated and displayed at a slow speed in that order, and the transmittance (transparency) also decreases in proportion to the reduction in speed, resulting in a fade-in display).
The period during which the background fade-out display is performed is longer than the period during which the identification information fade-out display is performed (for example, the fade-out display period A1 during which the first background image 002SG081 is faded out is longer than the fade-out display period A21 from when the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R start to be scrolled until they are displayed at high speed (fade-out display period A1>fade-out display period A21). See FIGS. 52 and 53).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the shorter the fade-out display is performed, the more suddenly the impression is given that the display has disappeared. Therefore, if there is a possibility that the variable display of decorative identification information and the background change are performed at the same time, the fade-out display of identification information is performed in a shorter period of time than the fade-out display of the background, thereby drawing attention to the start of the variable display of decorative identification information.

[Form 11] (No. 12)
The gaming machine of form 11 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
In one presentation mode, a plurality of types of background images including a first background image and a second background image can be switched and displayed (for example, in the first presentation mode, a first background image 002SG081 (see FIG. 50(A1)) showing a daytime cityscape seen from afar and a first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see FIG. 50(A2)) showing a daytime cityscape can be switched and displayed as background images),
When the background image is switched from the first background image to the second background image, a background fade-out display can be executed in which the transparency of the first background image is gradually increased and then the image is erased, and a background fade-in display can be executed in which the transparency of the second background image is gradually decreased while the background fade-out display of the first background image is being executed (for example, a portion in which a cross-fade display is executed in which a fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and a fade-in display period B1 of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A are synchronized; see FIG. 50 ).
When variable display of the decorative identification information is started, an identification information fade-out display can be executed in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually increased and the decorative identification information is erased (for example, a decorative pattern is gradually accelerated after the start of scrolling display to be displayed at high speed, and the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed, causing the decorative pattern to be faded out).
When the variable display of the decorative identification information is terminated, an identification information fade-in display can be executed in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually reduced (for example, when the timing for stopping the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the center decorative pattern display area 5C are gradually decelerated and displayed at a slow speed in that order, and the transmittance (transparency) also decreases in proportion to the reduction in speed, resulting in a fade-in display).
The execution period of the identification information fade-out display and the execution period of the background fade-out display are different (for example, a portion where the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-out display period A22 are not executed at the same time. See FIGS. 52 and 53).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by synchronizing the fade-out display of the identification information and the fade-out display of the background, it is possible to prevent the start of variable display of the decoration identification information from becoming difficult to notice.

[Form 12] (No. 13)
A gaming machine of form 12 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
In one presentation mode, a plurality of types of background images including a first background image and a second background image can be switched and displayed (for example, in the first presentation mode, a first background image 002SG081 (see FIG. 50(A1)) showing a daytime cityscape seen from afar and a first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see FIG. 50(A2)) showing a daytime cityscape can be switched and displayed as background images),
When the background image is switched from the first background image to the second background image, a background fade-out display can be executed in which the transparency of the first background image is gradually increased and then the image is erased, and a background fade-in display can be executed in which the transparency of the second background image is gradually decreased while the background fade-out display of the first background image is being executed (for example, a portion in which a cross-fade display is executed in which a fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and a fade-in display period B1 of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A are synchronized; see FIG. 50 ).
When variable display of the decorative identification information is started, an identification information fade-out display can be executed in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually increased and the decorative identification information is erased (for example, a decorative pattern is gradually accelerated after the start of scrolling display to be displayed at high speed, and the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed, causing the decorative pattern to be faded out).
When the variable display of the decorative identification information is terminated, an identification information fade-in display can be executed in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually reduced (for example, when the timing for stopping the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the center decorative pattern display area 5C are gradually decelerated and displayed at a slow speed in that order, and the transmittance (transparency) also decreases in proportion to the reduction in speed, resulting in a fade-in display).
The execution period of the background fade-in display is longer than the execution period of the identification information fade-in display (for example, the fade-in display period B1 during which the fade-in display of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is performed is longer than the fade-in display period B21 from when the display speed of the scrolling display of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R starts to slow down until the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R are temporarily stopped (fade-in display period B1>fade-in display period B21). See FIGS. 52 and 53).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the fade-in display basically gives the impression of appearing suddenly the shorter the period in which it is performed, so if there is a possibility that the variable display of decorative identification information and the background change are performed at the same time, the fade-in display of identification information is performed in a shorter period of time than the fade-in display of the background, thereby drawing attention to the end of the variable display of decorative identification information.

[Form 13] (No. 14)
The gaming machine of form 13 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
In one presentation mode, a plurality of types of background images including a first background image and a second background image can be switched and displayed (for example, in the first presentation mode, a first background image 002SG081 (see FIG. 50(A1)) showing a daytime cityscape seen from afar and a first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see FIG. 50(A2)) showing a daytime cityscape can be switched and displayed as background images),
When the background image is switched from the first background image to the second background image, a background fade-out display can be executed in which the transparency of the first background image is gradually increased and then the image is erased, and a background fade-in display can be executed in which the transparency of the second background image is gradually decreased while the background fade-out display of the first background image is being executed (for example, a portion in which a cross-fade display is executed in which a fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and a fade-in display period B1 of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A are synchronized; see FIG. 50 ).
When variable display of the decorative identification information is started, an identification information fade-out display can be executed in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually increased and the decorative identification information is erased (for example, a decorative pattern is gradually accelerated after the start of scrolling display to be displayed at high speed, and the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed, causing the decorative pattern to be faded out).
When the variable display of the decorative identification information is terminated, an identification information fade-in display can be executed in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually reduced (for example, when the timing for stopping the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the center decorative pattern display area 5C are gradually decelerated and displayed at a slow speed in that order, and the transmittance (transparency) also decreases in proportion to the reduction in speed, resulting in a fade-in display).
The execution period of the identification information fade-in display and the execution period of the background fade-in display are different (for example, a portion where the fade-in display period B1 and the fade-in display period B21 are not executed at the same time. See FIGS. 52 and 53).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by synchronizing the fade-in display of the identification information and the fade-in display of the background, it is possible to prevent the user from being confused about the end of the variable display of the decoration identification information.

[Form 14] (No. 15)
A gaming machine of form 14 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
A specific effect can be executed in which the variable display is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the decorative identification information until the display result is derived and displayed, and then the variable display is resumed (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 can execute a "pseudo consecutive announcement" that determines whether or not the variable display will be resumed after the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern until the display result is derived and displayed, in other words, whether or not one variable display will be made to look like multiple variable displays in a pseudo manner).
The decorative identification information has decorative identification information of multiple colors (e.g., blue, red) including a number image,
When the variable display is resumed in the specific performance, a number image (e.g., pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212) that can specify the number of times the variable display has resumed can be displayed in multiple colors (e.g., blue, red) (see Figures 58 and 59).
In the specific performance, there are cases where the number image of the decorative identification pattern temporarily displayed and the number display of the number image when the variable display is resumed are the same type, resulting in a first combination where the decorative identification pattern temporarily displayed and the number image are different in color, and there are cases where the number image of the decorative identification pattern temporarily displayed and the number image are different in color, resulting in a second combination where the number image of the decorative identification pattern temporarily displayed and the number display of the number image when the variable display is resumed, and both the decorative identification pattern temporarily displayed and the number image are the same type,
In the specific presentation, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the variable display is resumed in the second combination than when the variable display is resumed in the first combination (for example, in the pseudo consecutive prediction, there is a case where the display colors of the decorative symbols temporarily displayed and the pseudo consecutive number of times are not the same, and a case where the display colors of the decorative symbols temporarily displayed and the pseudo consecutive number of times are the same, and there is a case where the display colors of the decorative symbols temporarily displayed and the pseudo consecutive number of times are the same, and there is a higher probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state when the variable display is resumed in the second combination than when the variable display is resumed in the first combination in the pseudo consecutive prediction).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, interest in the game is increased because it is possible to draw attention not only to whether or not a specific effect is executed, but also to the combination of the number image of the decorative identification information temporarily displayed and the number and color of the count image if the specific effect is executed.

[Form 15] (No. 16)
A gaming machine of form 15 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The size of the reduced identification information is smaller than that of the decorative identification information, and it is possible to variably display reduced identification information corresponding to each of the plurality of types of decorative identification information (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 executes variably display of small patterns corresponding to decorative patterns),
When the variable display is not being executed, a waiting effect that displays a predetermined image can be executed (for example, a portion that can execute a "waiting-customer demo effect" when a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has passed since the effect control CPU 120 received a customer waiting demo designation command output from the main board 11 without receiving a control command such as a variable display start designation command. See FIG. 56 ).
When the standby effect is being executed, the decorative identification information is not displayed, while the reduced identification information continues to be displayed (see FIG. 56 ).
If the start condition for the variable display is met while the waiting effect is being executed, the variable display of the reduced identification information is started before the predetermined image is hidden, and then, after the predetermined image is hidden, the decorative identification information is displayed and the variable display is started (for example, if a start winning occurs while the customer waiting demo effect is being executed, the variable display of the small symbols is started before the customer waiting demo effect image 002SG400 is hidden, then the customer waiting demo effect image 002SG400 is hidden and switched to the background image corresponding to the effect mode at that time (here, the first background image 002SG081 corresponding to the first effect mode), and then the decorative symbols are displayed and the scrolling display is started. See FIG. 57).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display of the decorative identification information begins after the specified image is hidden, allowing the player to recognize that the variable display has begun when the conditions for starting the variable display are met, but since the variable display of the reduced identification information begins before the specified image is hidden, it is possible to ensure a display that corresponds to the variable display of the specific identification information.

[Form 16] (No. 17)
A gaming machine of form 16 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means
Execute variable display of the specific identification information based on a plurality of types of variable display patterns (see FIG. 17) (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control it into a normal state (for example, a low-probability, low-base state) and a special state (for example, a low-probability, high-base state or a high-probability, high-base state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state and the average variable display period is shorter,
The performance control means
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (e.g., a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
It is possible to display a hold display corresponding to the variable display of special identification information that has not yet started (for example, the part where the performance control CPU 120 performs the process of displaying the first hold display 002SG101 or the second hold display 002SG102 in the special chart hold memory display area 5U in the hold display update process of step S161).
It is possible to display a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information being executed in the corresponding display area (for example, the part where the performance control CPU 120 performs processing to display the active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F in the pending display update processing of step S161).
When the variable display of the specific identification information starts, it is possible to perform a switching display in which the reserved display corresponding to the variable display is switched to the corresponding display (for example, the performance control CPU 120 performs a shift display in which the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special chart reserved memory display area 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and switched to the active display 002SG103. See FIG. 35).
As the variable display of the decorative identification information, it is possible to perform a moving display (e.g., a scrolling display, see FIG. 31 ) that moves the decorative identification information, and a pre-action display (e.g., a change start action, see FIG. 33(A) ) that operates the decorative identification information in a manner different from the moving display before starting the moving display,
In the normal state, when the switching display is being performed, the pre-operation display is performed (for example, the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special reserved memory display area 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and displayed, and the scroll display (variable display) of the decorative pattern does not start until the reserved shift display period until it is switched and displayed as the active display 002SG103 ends, the above-mentioned variable start action is executed, and the scroll display (variable display) of the decorative pattern starts after the reserved shift display period ends. See Figures 36 (C) to (F)).
The variable display of the decorative identification information is executed based on variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of the decorative pattern based on a variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 in the performance control process processing of step S76),
It is possible to perform the common switching display when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable display pattern information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes a shift display that switches the first pending display 002SG101 or the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display 002SG103 in a common manner when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable pattern designation command (for example, a non-reach variable pattern designation command) and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable pattern designation command (for example, a reach variable pattern designation command). See FIG. 35).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the variable display of the specific identification information begins, a switching display is performed to switch the reserved display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display, and while the switching display is being performed, a pre-operation display is performed to operate the decorative identification information in a manner different from the moving display, thereby making effective use of the time required for the switching display. Furthermore, since the pre-operation display is performed when the switching display is being performed in the normal state, the average variable display period is longer than in the special state, and the normal state tends to be monotonous, making it more interesting when the variable display of the decorative identification information begins. Furthermore, since a common switching display is performed even when variable displays based on different types of variable display patterns are executed, the number of switching display patterns can be reduced.

[Form 17] (No. 18)
The gaming machine of form 17 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means
Execute variable display of the specific identification information based on a plurality of types of variable display patterns (see FIG. 17) (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control it into a normal state (for example, a low-probability, low-base state) and a special state (for example, a low-probability, high-base state or a high-probability, high-base state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state and the average variable display period is shorter,
The performance control means
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (e.g., a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
It is possible to display a hold display corresponding to the variable display of special identification information that has not yet started (for example, the part where the performance control CPU 120 performs the process of displaying the first hold display 002SG101 or the second hold display 002SG102 in the special chart hold memory display area 5U in the hold display update process of step S161).
It is possible to display a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information being executed in the corresponding display area (for example, the part where the performance control CPU 120 performs processing to display the active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F in the pending display update processing of step S161).
When the variable display of the specific identification information starts, it is possible to perform a switching display in which the reserved display corresponding to the variable display is switched to the corresponding display (for example, the performance control CPU 120 performs a shift display in which the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special chart reserved memory display area 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and switched to the active display 002SG103. See FIG. 35).
As the variable display of the decorative identification information, it is possible to perform a moving display (e.g., a scrolling display, see FIG. 31 ) that moves the decorative identification information, and a pre-action display (e.g., a change start action, see FIG. 33(A) ) that operates the decorative identification information in a manner different from the moving display before starting the moving display,
In the normal state, when the switching display is being performed, the pre-operation display is performed, and the scrolling display is not started until the switching display is completed (for example, the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special reserved memory display area 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and is switched to and displayed as the active display 002SG103. The scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern is not started until the reserved shift display period is completed, the above-mentioned variable start action is executed, and the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern is started after the reserved shift display period is completed. See Figures 36 (C) to (F)).
The variable display of the decorative identification information is executed based on variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of the decorative pattern based on a variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 in the performance control process processing of step S76),
It is possible to perform the common switching display when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable display pattern information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes a shift display that switches the first pending display 002SG101 or the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display 002SG103 in a common manner when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable pattern designation command (for example, a non-reach variable pattern designation command) and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable pattern designation command (for example, a reach variable pattern designation command). See FIG. 35).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, upon the start of variable display of specific identification information, a switching display is performed to switch the reserved display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display. Furthermore, during the switching display, a pre-operation display is performed to operate the decorative identification information in a manner different from the moving display before starting the moving display of the decorative identification information. This allows for effective use of the time required for the switching display. Furthermore, since the moving display of the decorative identification information does not start until the switching display ends and the corresponding display is displayed in the corresponding display area, the sense of incongruity caused by the moving display of the decorative identification information starting before the corresponding display is displayed can be eliminated. Furthermore, since the pre-operation display is performed when the switching display is performed in the normal state, the average variable display period is longer than in the special state, which can easily become monotonous, and the start of the variable display of the decorative identification information can be more interesting. Furthermore, since a common switching display is performed even when variable displays based on different types of variable display patterns are executed, the number of switching display patterns can be reduced.

[Form 18] (No. 19)
The gaming machine of form 18 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means
Execute variable display of the specific identification information based on a plurality of types of variable display patterns (see FIG. 17) (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control it into a normal state (for example, a low-probability, low-base state) and a special state (for example, a low-probability, high-base state or a high-probability, high-base state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state and the average variable display period is shorter,
The performance control means
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (e.g., a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
It is possible to display a hold display corresponding to the variable display of special identification information that has not yet started (for example, the part where the performance control CPU 120 performs the process of displaying the first hold display 002SG101 or the second hold display 002SG102 in the special chart hold memory display area 5U in the hold display update process of step S161).
It is possible to display a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information being executed in the corresponding display area (for example, the part where the performance control CPU 120 performs processing to display the active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F in the pending display update processing of step S161).
When the variable display of the specific identification information starts, it is possible to perform a switching display in which the reserved display corresponding to the variable display is switched to the corresponding display (for example, the performance control CPU 120 performs a shift display in which the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special chart reserved memory display area 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and switched to the active display 002SG103. See FIG. 35).
As the variable display of the decorative identification information, it is possible to perform a moving display (e.g., a scrolling display, see FIG. 31 ) that moves the decorative identification information, and a pre-action display (e.g., a change start action, see FIG. 33(A) ) that operates the decorative identification information in a manner different from the moving display before starting the moving display,
In the special state, when the switching display is being performed, the pre-operation display is performed (for example, the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special reserved memory display area 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and displayed, and the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern does not start until the reserved shift display period until it is switched and displayed as the active display 002SG103 ends, the above-mentioned variable start action is executed, and the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern starts after the reserved shift display period ends. Variant example).
The display of the decorative identification information is performed based on variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of the decorative pattern based on a variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 in the performance control process processing of step S76).

It is possible to perform the common switching display when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable display pattern information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes a shift display that switches the first pending display 002SG101 or the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display 002SG103 in a common manner when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable pattern designation command (for example, a non-reach variable pattern designation command) and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable pattern designation command (for example, a reach variable pattern designation command). See FIG. 35).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the variable display of the specific identification information starts, a switching display is performed to switch the reserved display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display, and while the switching display is being performed, a pre-action display is performed to operate the decorative identification information in a manner different from the moving display, thereby making effective use of the time required to perform the switching display. Furthermore, since the pre-action display is performed when the switching display is being performed in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state, the start of the variable display of the decorative identification information in the special state can be made more exciting. Furthermore, since a common switching display is performed even when variable displays based on different types of variable display patterns are executed, the number of switching display patterns can be reduced.

[Form 19] (No. 20)
The gaming machine of form 19 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means
Execute variable display of the specific identification information based on a plurality of types of variable display patterns (see FIG. 17) (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control it into a normal state (for example, a low-probability, low-base state) and a special state (for example, a low-probability, high-base state or a high-probability, high-base state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state and the average variable display period is shorter,
The performance control means
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (e.g., a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
It is possible to display a hold display corresponding to the variable display of special identification information that has not yet started (for example, the part where the performance control CPU 120 performs the process of displaying the first hold display 002SG101 or the second hold display 002SG102 in the special chart hold memory display area 5U in the hold display update process of step S161).
It is possible to display a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information being executed in the corresponding display area (for example, the part where the performance control CPU 120 performs processing to display the active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F in the pending display update processing of step S161).
When the variable display of the specific identification information starts, it is possible to perform a switching display in which the reserved display corresponding to the variable display is switched to the corresponding display (for example, the performance control CPU 120 performs a shift display in which the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special chart reserved memory display area 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and switched to the active display 002SG103. See FIG. 35).
As the variable display of the decorative identification information, it is possible to perform a moving display (e.g., a scrolling display, see FIG. 31 ) that moves the decorative identification information, and a pre-action display (e.g., a change start action, see FIG. 33(A) ) that operates the decorative identification information in a manner different from the moving display before starting the moving display,
In the special state, when the switching display is being performed, the pre-operation display is performed, and the moving display is not started until the switching display is completed (for example, the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special reserved memory display area 5U is moved to the active display area 5F, and the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern is not started until the reserved shift display period until it is switched and displayed as the active display 002SG103 is completed, and the above-mentioned variable start action is executed, and the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern is started after the reserved shift display period has completed. Variant example).
The display of the decorative identification information is performed based on variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of the decorative pattern based on a variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 in the performance control process processing of step S76).

It is possible to perform the common switching display when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable display pattern information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes a shift display that switches the first pending display 002SG101 or the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display 002SG103 in a common manner when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable pattern designation command (for example, a non-reach variable pattern designation command) and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable pattern designation command (for example, a reach variable pattern designation command). See FIG. 35).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the variable display of a specific identification information begins, a switching display is performed to switch the reserved display corresponding to the variable display to a corresponding display. Furthermore, during the switching display, a pre-action display is performed to operate the decorative identification information in a manner different from the moving display before starting the moving display of the decorative identification information. This allows the time required for the switching display to be effectively utilized. Furthermore, since the moving display of the decorative identification information does not begin until the switching display ends and the corresponding display is displayed in the corresponding display area, the sense of incongruity caused by the moving display of the decorative identification information beginning before the corresponding display is displayed can be eliminated. Furthermore, since the pre-action display is performed when the switching display is performed in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state, the start of the variable display of the decorative identification information in the special state can be made more exciting. Furthermore, since a common switching display is performed even when variable displays based on different types of variable display patterns are executed, the number of switching display patterns can be reduced.

[Form 20] (No. 21)
The gaming machine of form 20 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
It is possible to control to one of a plurality of presentation modes (for example, the first presentation mode to the fourth presentation mode) including the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode,
When variable display of the decorative identification information is started, a fade-out display can be executed in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually increased and the decorative identification information is erased (for example, a portion in which the decorative pattern is gradually accelerated after the start of scrolling display to be displayed at high speed, and the transmittance (transparency) also increases in proportion to the increase in speed, and the decorative pattern is faded out).
In the first presentation mode, a moving display is executed to move the decoration identification information as a variable display of the decoration identification information (see FIGS. 30(A1) and (A2)).
In the second presentation mode, a special variable display different from the moving display is executed as the variable display of the decoration identification information (see FIGS. 30(B1) and (B2)).
The execution period of the fade-out display when the special variable display is executed in the second presentation mode is longer than the execution period of the fade-out display when the moving display is executed in the first presentation mode (for example, the fade-out display period A22 when the scrolling display is executed in the second presentation mode is longer than the fade-out display period A21 when the scrolling display is executed in the first presentation mode (fade-out display period A21<fade-out display period A22. See Figures 55(A) and 55(B))).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second presentation mode, not only is the manner of variable display of the decorative identification information different from that in the first presentation mode, but the fade-out display period from the start of variable display to the erasure of the decorative identification information is longer, so that the decorative identification information can be focused on for a longer period of time.

[Form 21] (No. 22)
The gaming machine of form 21 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
It is possible to control to one of a plurality of presentation modes (for example, the first presentation mode to the fourth presentation mode) including the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode,
When variable display of the decorative identification information is started, a fade-out display can be executed in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually increased and the decorative identification information is erased (for example, a portion in which the decorative pattern is gradually accelerated after the start of scrolling display to be displayed at high speed, and the transmittance (transparency) also increases in proportion to the increase in speed, and the decorative pattern is faded out).
The variable display pattern of the decoration identification information can be determined to be any one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns,
The execution period of the fade-out display differs between a case where a predetermined variable display pattern is determined in the first presentation mode and a case where the predetermined variable display pattern is determined in the second presentation mode (for example, the fade-out display periods A21, A22 differ between a case where a non-reach miss variable pattern PA1-1 is determined in the first presentation mode and a case where a non-reach miss variable pattern PA1-1 is determined in the second presentation mode. See Figures 55(A) and 55(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a predetermined variable display pattern is determined, the fade-out execution period differs between when the display is controlled in the first presentation mode and when the display is controlled in the second presentation mode, making it difficult for the player to predict that the predetermined variable display pattern is determined, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 22] (No. 23)
The gaming machine of form 22 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The ornament identification information includes a character image (e.g., a character display section 002SG052) and a related information image (e.g., an information display section 002SG053) that is information related to the character of the character image,
The variable display period includes a pre-variable display period from when the variable display start condition is met until the decorative identification information starts to be variable displayed, and a post-variable display period after the decorative identification information starts to be variable displayed (for example, the variable display period of a special pattern includes a pre-variable display period from when the variable display of the special pattern and small pattern starts until the scrolling display of the decorative pattern starts, and a post-variable display period after the scrolling display of the decorative pattern starts).
the character image is displayed in the pre-variable display period and the post-variable display period,
The related information image is erased after being displayed in the pre-variable display period and before the post-variable display period begins (for example, the name of the character (character related information) displayed in the information display unit 002SG053 is erased after being displayed in the pre-variable display period, that is, when the variable start action is being executed, and before the post-variable display period begins, that is, before the scrolling display of the decorative pattern begins. See FIGS. 33(A) and 36).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by drawing attention to the related information image before the variable display of the decorative identification information starts, i.e., while it is statically displayed, the player can deepen his/her understanding of the character. Also, by erasing the related information image before the variable display starts, the player can focus attention on the variable display, preview effects, etc. rather than the related information image.

[Form 23] (No. 24)
The gaming machine of form 23 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control it into a normal state (for example, a low-probability, low-base state) and a special state (for example, a low-probability, high-base state or a high-probability, high-base state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state and the average variable display period is shorter,
The performance control means
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
In the normal state, the display can be controlled to one of a plurality of display modes including a first display mode (e.g., the first display mode) and a second display mode (e.g., the second display mode) (e.g., the first display mode to the fourth display mode. See FIG. 30 ).
In the special state, it is possible to control to a presentation mode including a third presentation mode (for example, a third presentation mode or a fourth presentation mode),
The ornament identification information includes a character image (e.g., a character display section 002SG052) and a related information image (e.g., an information display section 002SG053) that is information related to the character of the character image,
In the first presentation mode, the decoration identification information is displayed in a manner including the character image and the related information image (see FIG. 36 );
In the second and third presentation modes, the decoration identification information is displayed without including the related information image (see FIGS. 38, 39, and 43).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the first presentation mode, the related information image is displayed to draw the player's attention to the related information image, thereby allowing the player to deepen their understanding of the character, while in the second and third presentation modes, the related information image is erased, allowing the player to focus more on the variable display and preview presentation rather than the related information image.

[Form 24] (No. 25)
The gaming machine of form 24 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control it into a normal state (for example, a low-probability, low-base state) and a special state (for example, a low-probability, high-base state or a high-probability, high-base state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state and the average variable display period is shorter,
The performance control means
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The decoration identification information includes a number image (e.g., number display unit 002SG061),
When the normal background image is displayed, it is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state will be achieved (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can execute an SP reach effect that notifies whether or not a jackpot will be achieved),
In the notification performance, a specific background image (for example, a fifth background image 002SG085) different from the normal background image is displayed,
When the notification effect is executed in a variable display in which the specific display result is derived as a result of the variable display, a combination of decorative identification information corresponding to the specific display result is displayed when the specific background image is displayed in the notification effect (for example, in an SP reach effect, when the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP reach effect is displayed as the background image, a combination of symbols that determine a jackpot (for example, "222") is displayed in a provisionally stopped state (see FIG. 63(F)),
As the notification effect ends, the specific background image is erased and the normal background image is displayed, and while the normal background image is displayed, a combination of decorative identification information corresponding to the specific display result is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 63(G), as the SP reach effect ends, the fifth background image 002SG085 is hidden and the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, and while the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, a combination of symbols that determine a jackpot (for example, "222") is temporarily stopped and displayed).
a specific image (e.g., specific image 002SG075) is displayed in an operational state adjacent to the number image of the combination of decorative identification information corresponding to the specific display result displayed when the normal background image is displayed;
In the special state, the specific image is not displayed (for example, in the low base state, the specific image 002SG075 showing a flame is displayed in the number display section 002SG051 of the combination of jackpot confirmation decorative symbols displayed after the end of the SP reach effect (see Figures 63(H) and (I)), while in the high base state, the specific image 002SG075 showing a flame is not displayed in the number display section 002SG051 of the combination of jackpot confirmation decorative symbols displayed after the end of the SP reach effect (see Figures 64(P) and (S))).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the normal state, the effect of the presentation is enhanced and made more exciting by displaying a specific image in motion relative to the number image of the decorative identification information displayed after the end of the notification presentation, but in the special state in which the average variable display period is short, the specific image is not displayed in motion relative to the number image of the decorative identification information displayed after the end of the notification presentation, thereby giving a sense of speed to the variable display.

[Form 25] (No. 18-2)
A gaming machine of aspect 25 is the gaming machine according to aspect 17 or aspect 18,
The performance control means
When the corresponding display (e.g., active display 002SG103) corresponding to the variable display displayed in the corresponding display area (e.g., active display area 5F) is erased based on the completion of the variable display of the specific identification information, an erasure effect display (e.g., erasure effect 002SG110) can be displayed to emphasize that the corresponding display has been erased,
If the hold display is displayed when the erase effect display is displayed, the erase effect display continues to be displayed until the variable display corresponding to the hold display starts (for example, the erase effect 002SG110 continues to be displayed even after the active display 002SG103 is erased, and is erased after the next variable display corresponding to the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts, as shown below. See FIG. 35 (B3)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by not creating a blank period in the presentation between the end of a variable display and the start of the next variable display, it is possible to prevent the interest in the presentation from declining. Also, the erasure effect display allows the player to recognize that the corresponding display corresponding to the ended variable display has been erased, and the display of a new corresponding display allows the player to recognize that a new variable display has started.

[Form 26] (No. 18-3)
A gaming machine of aspect 26 is the gaming machine according to aspect 17 or aspect 18,
The area in which the decorative identification information is displayed includes a first area (e.g., a left decorative pattern display area 5L), a second area (e.g., a right decorative pattern display area 5R), and a third area (e.g., a middle decorative pattern display area 5C) located between the first area and the second area,
In the normal state, the decoration identification information is displayed in a smaller size in the third area than in the first area and the second area (see, for example, FIG. 29 );
In the special state, the decorative identification information in the first area, the second area, and the third area is displayed in the same size (see, for example, FIG. 29 );
The third area in the special state is disposed closer to the center of the display area of the display means than the third area in the normal state (see, for example, FIG. 29).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the normal state, the decorative identification information in the first and second areas is made to look larger, and the decorative identification information in the third area is shifted to create a sense of depth and enhance interest, while in the special state in which the average variable display period is short, the decorative identification information is positioned near the center of the display area, thereby increasing the degree of recognition of the decorative identification information.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which also applies to the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

Next, an embodiment of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. In the following, the front side of Figure 11 will be referred to as the front (front face) side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the back side will be referred to as the rear (rear face) side, and the description will be based on the up, down, left, and right directions when viewing the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the front side. Note that the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment is the surface facing the player playing on the pachinko gaming machine 1. Furthermore, in describing each step in the flowchart, for example, "Step S1" may be abbreviated as "S1" or "002SGS1," and "Normal Reach" may be abbreviated as "N Reach" and "Super Reach" as "SP Reach."

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
11 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is broadly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that forms the gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A gaming area is formed on the gaming board 2, and gaming balls, which serve as gaming media, are launched into this gaming area by a predetermined ball launching device.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols refers to, for example, the variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. When special symbols or the normal symbols described below vary, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. When decorative symbols described below vary, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variation also includes the display of a certain symbol flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that variable display is sometimes referred to as variable display or variation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as the "first special symbol," and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as the "second special symbol." A special symbol game using the first special symbol is also referred to as the "first special symbol game," and a special symbol game using the second special symbol is also referred to as the "second special symbol game." There may be only one type of special symbol display device that variably displays special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or organic EL (electroluminescence) display, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, a variable display of multiple types of decorative symbols (such as symbols showing numbers, etc.) as decorative identification information different from the special symbols is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that the special symbol games and variable display of decorative symbols that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

In addition, a display area 5S is provided in the upper left corner of the display screen of the image display device 5 for displaying the first reserved memory number (for example, the number "0"), the second reserved memory number (for example, the number "4"), and small symbols corresponding to the decorative symbols, and the small symbols are displayed variably in response to the variable display of the decorative symbols.

In addition, the first reserved memory count, second reserved memory count, reserved display, small symbols, error display (not shown) indicating an error state that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1, right-hit notification image 002SG201 (see Figure 30) that prompts the player to perform a right-hit operation, and remaining time-saving display 002SG202 (see Figure 30) that indicates the number of remaining time-saving plays may be displayed in front of (higher layer than) the effect images such as characters, thereby preventing overlapping of the effect images and reducing the visibility of the first reserved memory count, second reserved memory count, small symbols, and error display, while decorative symbols may be displayed behind (lower layer than) the effect images to prevent overlapping of the decorative symbols and reducing the visibility of the effect images.

The small symbol is also referred to as the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating that a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is being variably displayed, and is variably displayed by a certain operation in a manner that is always visible on a display device such as the image display device 5. The variably displayed fourth symbol makes it possible to determine whether or not a variably displayed symbol is currently being displayed, even if the decorative symbol is difficult to recognize, such as when the effect content, including the variably displayed decorative symbol, momentarily disappears from the screen, or when movable bodies 32A and 32B obscure all or part of the screen of the image display device 5. Based on receiving the first variable display start command, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 to variably display the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. Based on receiving the second variable display start command, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 to variably display the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol.

In addition, the pattern displayed on a fourth pattern display device provided in a location other than the image display device 5 (such as the special variable winning ball device 7, which is a predetermined location on the game board 2), such as the first special symbol LED or second special symbol LED, is also referred to as the fourth symbol.

Display areas (special symbol pending memory display area 5U, active display area 5F) are provided at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying pending displays corresponding to variable displays whose execution is pending and active displays corresponding to variable displays that are currently being executed. The pending displays and active displays are collectively referred to as variable display-compatible displays corresponding to variable displays. Note that in this embodiment, a special symbol pending memory display area 5U is provided that is common to the first and second special symbols; however, a first special symbol pending memory display area that displays a first pending display representing a variable display whose execution of the first special symbol is pending, and a second special symbol pending memory display area that displays a second pending display representing a variable display whose execution of the second special symbol is pending may also be provided separately.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each consisting of multiple LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the number of first hold memories by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the number of second hold memories by the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning opening, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable prize ball device 6B (a normal electric device) forms a second start prize opening that changes between a closed and an open state due to the solenoid 81 (see Figure 12). The variable prize ball device 6B, for example, comprises an electric device with a movable piece that can be opened and closed. When the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable piece is in an upright position, thereby creating a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the second start prize opening (also referred to as the second start prize opening being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable piece of the variable prize ball device 6B is in a tilted position, thereby creating an open state in which game balls can enter the second start prize opening (also referred to as the second start prize opening being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start prize opening, a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g., three) are paid out and the second special game can be initiated. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the above, as long as it can change between a closed state and an open state.

General winning openings 10 are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in Figure 1, three locations at the bottom left of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), and are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 with a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 12), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize door (for the special electric device) is in the off state, the large prize door closes the large prize door, preventing game balls from entering (passing through) the large prize door. On the other hand, in the special variable prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize door is in the on state, the large prize door opens the large prize door, making it easier for game balls to enter the large prize door.

When a gaming ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of gaming balls (for example, 14) are paid out as prize balls. When a gaming ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a gaming ball enters, for example, the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10.

When a game ball enters any of the prize slots, including the general prize slot 10, it is also referred to as a "win." In particular, a win at a start slot (first start slot, second start slot) is also referred to as a start slot.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in Figure 1, the lower left of the play area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and displays a variety of normal symbols as normal identification information that differs from special symbols. Normal symbols are represented by numbers from "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". Normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This type of variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

To the right of the image display device 5, there is a passing gate 41 through which the game ball can pass. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A regular symbol pending indicator 25C is provided below the regular symbol display 20. The regular symbol pending indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the regular symbol pending memory count, which is the number of regular symbol games pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is equipped with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls as they flow down, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L and 8R are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3 for playing and outputting sound effects, etc. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 on the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right of the main lamp 9a to surround the gaming area. Furthermore, an attacca lamp 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the gaming board 2.

Moveable bodies 32A and 32B that operate in response to the effects are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2 (above and below the image display device 5 in Figure 1). Furthermore, movable body lamps 9d are provided on movable bodies 32A and 32B. These movable body lamps 9d, together with the aforementioned main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and attacca lamp 9c, are sometimes collectively referred to as the game effect lamps 9. Furthermore, these main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are constructed to include LEDs.

A ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided at the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3. The ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is operated by the player or the like to launch gaming balls toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

A ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned from a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a payout section (ball supply tray) separate from the upper tray, from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by a player. Operation of the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see Figure 12).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, which the player can press to issue a specific command. Operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see Figure 12).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 while the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on that passage cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on that passage is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed, the normal symbol display result will be "normal winning." On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the normal symbol display result will be "normal losing." When a "normal winning" occurs, opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

Furthermore, if a game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when a special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state described below (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on that start winning cannot be played immediately), the execution of the special game based on that entry will be suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In special game games, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol will vary depending on the type of jackpot, as described below) is displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it is a "jackpot," and if a special symbol other than the jackpot symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it is a "miss."

Once the display result in the special game shows "jackpot," the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, which is advantageous for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or until the number of game balls entering the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9), whichever comes first. This predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is opened is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can win prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is advantageous to the player. The more rounds played in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the maximum opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A "jackpot" has a set type of jackpot. For example, there are multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot slot (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after a jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, probability variable state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set accordingly. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may enter a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (the period during which the special symbol fluctuates) compared to the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning slot by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (the period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) compared to the normal state and by increasing the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in a regular symbol game compared to the normal state. The time-saving state is advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of fluctuation of special symbols (especially the second special symbol).

In the probability variable state (probability variable state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is implemented, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for players, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuations, but also makes it easier to win a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability variation state will continue until one of the following conditions is met: a predetermined number of special games have been played, or the next jackpot game state has begun. A state in which the condition for the special game to end is played a predetermined number of times is also called a count-cut state (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability variation state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a gaming state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot gaming state that are advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability variable state. It is a state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability that the displayed result in a normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the displayed result in a special game will be a "jackpot," is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified recovery process is not executed after power is turned on).

A state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and a state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and a state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. A high probability state and a low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

The game state may also change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area within the jackpot opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a special state after the jackpot game state.

(Progression of the production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (such as notifying the player of the game progress or enhancing the excitement of the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. These effects are described below. The effects are executed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be executed by audio output from the speakers 8L, 8R, turning on or off the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable bodies 32A, 32B, or by using any effect device including some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed in accordance with the progress of the game, the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 begin to display variable decorative symbols in response to the start of the first or second special symbol game. At the timing when the display result (also called the confirmed special symbol) in the first or second special symbol game is statically displayed, the confirmed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols is also statically displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols begins to when it ends, the variable display of the decorative symbols may assume a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, as described below.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach mode is reached during the variable display of decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. Pachinko gaming machine 1 executes multiple types of reach effects, with different rates (also called jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" depending on the effect mode. Reach effects include, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot," a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative pattern (for example, "7") is displayed stopped and aligned on a predetermined effective line in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" where the game state is controlled to a probability jackpot after the jackpot gaming state ends, odd-numbered decorative symbols (e.g., "7") are displayed in a line-up, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (regular jackpot)" where the game state is not controlled to a probability jackpot after the jackpot gaming state ends, even-numbered decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line-up. In this case, odd-numbered decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even-numbered decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (regular symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot."

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may display a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may display a fixed decorative symbol of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. Other effects, such as preview effects that predict the jackpot reliability, are executed during the variable display of decorative symbols. Preview effects include preview effects that predict the jackpot reliability in the currently executing variable display, and pre-read preview effects that predict the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is reserved). Pre-read preview effects may be executed that change the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode that is different from normal.

In addition, the image display device 5 may temporarily stop the decorative symbols while they are being displayed in a variable manner, and then resume the variable display, thereby executing a pseudo-consecutive effect that makes a single variable display appear as multiple variable displays.

Even during a jackpot gaming state, a jackpot effect is executed to notify the player of the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot effect may include an effect to notify the number of rounds or an upgrade effect to indicate that the value of the jackpot gaming state is increasing.

Also, for example, when a special game or the like is not being played, a demo image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Fig. 12. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a firing control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it on), power from an AC power source, such as an external power source like a commercial power supply, such as 100V AC, can be supplied from the power supply board 17 to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 is equipped with, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of special games (including reserved game management), execution of regular games (including reserved game management), jackpot game status, game status, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a single-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock 106.

The CPU 103 executes the program stored in ROM 101 to control the progress of the game (processing that realizes the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in ROM 101 (such as data on variation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) is used, and RAM 102 is used as the main memory. RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM, where the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if part or all of the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. Note that all or part of the program stored in ROM 101 may be deployed to RAM 102 and executed on RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (gaming random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specified computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals that control (drive) the first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first hold display device 25A, second hold display device 25B, normal symbol hold display device 25C, etc., and solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (such as detection signals indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switches (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), and count switch 23), and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal that stops control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal turns off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and turns on when the specified power supply voltage remains below the specified value for a period of time that exceeds the power-off reference time. The clear signal turns on, for example, in response to pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 or solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

As part of its control of the game's progress, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the game's progress, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. These presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various decisions made by the main board 11 (e.g., the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable patterns used when executing the special game (details will be described later)), the game status (e.g., the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot slot, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable bodies 32A and 32B, error notifications, and notifications of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, ROM 121, RAM 122, display control unit 123, random number circuit 124, and I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes programs stored in ROM 121, and performs processing to execute performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing to realize the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). During this processing, various data (such as data from various tables) stored in ROM 121 is used, and RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute an effect based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the operation content).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes presentations based on instructions to execute presentations from the presentation control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display device 5 by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. It also performs display processing to output image data from the display image creation area of the VRAM area specified by the display register as a video signal. In this embodiment, the display image creation area and drawing area switch for each V blank. Therefore, drawing is performed in the area assigned as the drawing area in one V blank, and then switched to the display image creation area in the next V blank, so that the image data drawn in the previous V blank is displayed and output, while drawing continues in the other area during that time.

In addition, since the display control unit 123 generates images to be displayed on the image display device 5 by superimposing (compositing) multiple layers, the VRAM area is provided with a layer image drawing area for drawing and arranging the images of each layer, and a display image creation area for generating images to be displayed on the image display device 5 by further superimposing (compositing) the images drawn and arranged in each layer image drawing area. In addition, each layer is classified into upper, middle, and lower levels, with images in higher layers being set with a higher display priority on the image display device 5, and images in lower layers being set with a lower display priority on the image display device 5.

The VRAM area contains a Layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging Layer 1 images, a Layer 2 image drawing area for drawing and arranging Layer 2 images, and a Layer 3 image drawing area for drawing and arranging Layer 3 images. The VRAM area also contains a displacement image creation area for creating displacement images, and a display image creation area.

The displacement image creation area is an area where an image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area and an image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed (combined) to create a displacement target image, and where a displacement image is created by applying a displacement image to the displacement target image.

The display image creation area is an area where an image is created as a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5, which is an image obtained by superimposing (combining) an image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area, an image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area, and an image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area, or an image obtained by superimposing (combining) an image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area with a displacement image created in the displacement image creation area.

The image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area is set as the image with the highest display priority (display priority: high) on the image display device 5, the image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area is set as the image with a lower display priority (display priority: medium) than the image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area on the image display device 5, and the image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area is set as the image with the lowest display priority (display priority: low) on the image display device 5. In other words, layer 1 is the upper layer with the highest image display priority, layer 2 is a middle layer with a lower image display priority than layer 1, and layer 3 is the lower layer with the lowest image display priority.

The layer 1 image drawing area is a drawing area in which these images are drawn to display a first interface image at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5, which includes a special pattern reserved memory display area 5U that identifiably displays the first and second special pattern reserved memory counts, and a second interface image at the top left of the display area of the image display device 5, which includes a small pattern with a smaller display area than the decorative pattern and a reserved memory count display.

The layer 2 image drawing area is a drawing area in the center of the display area of the image display device 5 where the left, center, and right decorative patterns are drawn to perform variable display of the decorative patterns.

The layer 3 image drawing area is a drawing area in which the background image is drawn to display the background image across the entire display area of the image display device 5.

In this embodiment, an image to be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 can be generated by superimposing the image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area (layer 1 image), the image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area (layer 2 image), and the image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area (layer 3 image). In particular, as described above, the images drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area (first interface image and second interface image) are set to have the highest display priority and are therefore displayed as the top-level images on the image display device 5; the images drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area (decorative design) are set to have a lower display priority than the images drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area and are therefore displayed as the middle-level images on the image display device 5; and the images drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area (background image) are set to have the lowest display priority and are therefore displayed as the bottom-level images on the image display device 5.

In this embodiment, the transmittance (transparency) of the images drawn and placed in each image drawing area is set to 0% so that when superimposed, the upper image makes the overlapping area of the lower image invisible to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the situation, the transmittance (transparency) of the images drawn and placed in each image drawing area may be set higher than 0%, and images may be displayed transparently in the display area of the image display device 5 or temporarily hidden.

The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal that designates the lamp on/off state) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies signals that operate the movable bodies 32A, 32B to the movable bodies 32A, 32B or to the drive circuits that drive the movable bodies 32A, 32B.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the on/off of the lamp.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 may be configured to perform control of audio output, lamp on/off (such as supplying sound designation signals and lamp signals), and control of movable bodies 32A and 32B (such as supplying signals to operate movable bodies 32A and 32B).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (performance random numbers) used to execute various performances. The performance random numbers may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for receiving performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, sound control board 13, and lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

Figure 13(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a performance control command used in this embodiment. A performance control command is, for example, two bytes long, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit of the MODE data (bit 7) is always set to "0", and the first bit of the EXT data is always set to "0". Note that the command format shown in Figure 13(A) is just one example, and other command formats may also be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in Figure 13 (A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variation pattern specification command that specifies the variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) of decorative symbols (also called performance symbols) that are variably displayed in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. Here, XXH represents an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set according to the instructions given by the performance control command. Note that the variation pattern specification command sets different EXT data depending on the specified variation pattern, etc.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, and is a presentation control command that specifies variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. With the variable display result specification command, different EXT data is set depending on the determination result (pre-determined result) of whether the variable display result (also called the variable display result) is a "miss" or a "jackpot," and the determination result of which of several types of jackpot type will be selected if the variable display result is a "jackpot" (jackpot type determination result), as shown in Figure 13 (B) for example.

For example, as shown in FIG. 13(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result that the variable display result will be a "miss." Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command notifying the predetermined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be a "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be a "variable jackpot A." Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command notifying the predetermined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be a "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be a "variable jackpot B." Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command notifying the predetermined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be a "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be a "variable jackpot C." Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "non-variable jackpot."

Command 8F00H is a symbol determination command that specifies the stopping (determination) of the decorative symbol variation in each of the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. Command 95XXH is a game state designation command that specifies the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which neither time-saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low-probability, low-base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed but probability variable control is not performed (low-probability, high-base state, time-saving state). Furthermore, command 9502H is a third game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which both time-saving control and probability variable control are performed (high-probability, high-base state, time-saving, probability variable state). Furthermore, the time-saving probability variable state may be simply referred to as the "probability variable state."

Command A0XXH is a start-of-jackpot command (also known as a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of a presentation image indicating the start of a jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening notification command that notifies players that the large prize opening is in an open state during a jackpot game. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-opening notification command that notifies players that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a jackpot game. Command A3XXH is a end-of-jackpot command that specifies the display of a presentation image at the end of a jackpot game.

In the hit start designation command and hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set depending on the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result, for example by setting the same EXT data as in the variable display result designation command. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result designation command. In the large prize opening notification command and the large prize opening after opening notification command, for example, different EXT data is set depending on the number of rounds executed in the jackpot state (e.g., "0" to "10"), as described below.

Command B100H is a first start port entry designation command that notifies that the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A has been met, based on the occurrence of a start prize (first start prize) when a gaming ball that has passed through (entered) the first start port formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port entry designation command that notifies that the second start condition for executing a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B has been met, based on the occurrence of a start prize (second start prize) when a gaming ball that has passed through (entered) the second start port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second start port switch 22B.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command that notifies the first special symbol reserved memory number so that the number of reserved special symbols can be specified. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command that notifies the second special symbol reserved memory number so that the number of reserved special symbols can be specified. The first reserved memory number notification command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when a first start port entry designation command is sent, for example, based on the first start condition being met when a gaming ball passes (enters) the first start port. The second reserved memory number notification command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when a second start port entry designation command is sent, for example, based on the second start condition being met when a gaming ball passes (enters) the second start port. Additionally, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command may be sent in response to the start of execution of the special game when either the first or second start condition is met (when the pending memory number decreases).

Instead of the first pending memory count notification command or the second pending memory count notification command, a total pending memory count notification command may be sent to notify the total number of pending memories. In other words, the total pending memory count notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Note that the commands shown in Figure 13 (A) are just examples, and some of these commands may not be included, different commands may be used instead of these commands, or different commands may be added. For example, it may be possible to provide a prize ball number notification command that enables the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball entering each winning slot, a gate passage notification command that notifies the game ball that it has passed through the passage gate 41, and a notification command that notifies the remaining number of variable display times at which the probability change control or time-saving control will be executed.

Figure 14 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the random number values counted on the main board 11. As shown in Figure 14, on the main board 11, the following numerical data is controlled so that they can be counted: random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result. Note that random number values other than these may also be used to enhance the gaming effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may be configured to count numerical data representing some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 may also count numerical data representing some of the random number values MR1 to MR4 by updating various numerical data using software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown).

The random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to treat the variable display result of a special symbol or other game in a special symbol game as a "jackpot" and control the game to a jackpot gaming state, and takes a value in the range of "0" to "65536", for example. The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type when the variable display result is a "jackpot" as either "Probable jackpot A", "Probable jackpot B", "Probable jackpot C", or "Non-probable jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "0" to "100", for example.

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special and decorative patterns, and is one of several pre-prepared types. For example, it takes a value in the range of "0" to "997".

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 20 is a "normal symbol hit" or a "normal symbol miss," and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13," for example.

Figure 15 shows an example of the configuration of a display result determination table stored in ROM 101. In this embodiment, a common display result determination table is used for the first special chart and the second special chart, but the present invention is not limited to this, and separate display result determination tables may be used for the first special chart and the second special chart.

The display result determination table is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to treat the variable display result as a "jackpot" and control the game to a jackpot game state before the determined special pattern that will be the variable display result is derived and displayed in a special pattern game using the first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A or a special pattern game using the second special pattern by the second special pattern display device 4B, based on the random number value MR1 used to determine the special pattern display result.

In the display result determination table, a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 used to determine the special symbol display result is assigned to the special symbol display result of "jackpot" or "miss" depending on whether the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is normal state, time-saving state (low probability state), or special symbol state (high probability state).

In the display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is determination data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to treat the special symbol display result as a "jackpot" and control it to a jackpot gaming state. In the display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more determination values are assigned to the "jackpot" special symbol display result than when the gaming state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in a probability variable state (high probability state) where probability variable control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the probability of determining that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and control it to a jackpot gaming state is higher (approximately 1/30 in this embodiment) than the probability of determining that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and control it to a jackpot gaming state when the gaming state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) (approximately 1/300 in this embodiment). In other words, in the display result determination table, determination data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state so that when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the probability of determining that it will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state is higher than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

Figure 16 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. In this embodiment, the jackpot type determination table is a table referenced to determine one of several types of jackpot types based on the jackpot type determination random number value MR2 when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and that the jackpot game state should be controlled. In the jackpot type determination table, the number (determination value) compared with the jackpot type determination random number value MR2 is assigned to several types of jackpot types, such as "non-variable jackpot," "variable jackpot A," "variable jackpot B," and "variable jackpot C," depending on whether the special symbol variably displayed (variably displayed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game using the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (special symbol game using the second special symbol display device 4B).

Here, the types of jackpots in this embodiment will be explained using Figure 16 (B). In this embodiment, the jackpot types are "Probable jackpot A," "Probable jackpot B," and "Probable jackpot C," in which probability variable control and time-saving control are executed after the jackpot gaming state ends, resulting in a transition to a high-probability, high-base state, and "Non-probable jackpot," in which only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot gaming state ends, resulting in a transition to a low-probability, high-base state.

The jackpot gaming state resulting from a "probable jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed ten times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, the jackpot gaming state resulting from a "probable jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. The jackpot gaming state resulting from a "probable jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed two times (so-called 2 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. Furthermore, the jackpot gaming state resulting from a "non-probable jackpot" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, "Probable jackpot A" may be referred to as a 10-round (10R) probable jackpot, "Probable jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5-round (5R) probable jackpot, and "Probable jackpot C" may be referred to as a 2-round (2R) probable jackpot.

The probability variable control and time-saving control that begin after the jackpot gaming state of probability variable jackpot A through probability variable jackpot C ends are terminated on the condition that control is entered into the jackpot gaming state. Furthermore, the time-saving control that begins after the jackpot gaming state of a non-probability variable jackpot ends is terminated on the condition that 100 variable displays are completed or that control is entered into the jackpot gaming state before the 100 variable displays are completed. Therefore, if a recurring jackpot is one of probability variable jackpot A through probability variable jackpot C, probability variable control and time-saving control are executed again after the jackpot gaming state ends, resulting in a so-called consecutive jackpot state, in which the jackpot gaming state occurs continuously without an intermediate normal state. In other words, the probability variable state in this embodiment is a gaming state that continues until the variable display result is a jackpot, regardless of the number of variable displays, while the time-saving state in this embodiment is a gaming state that is controlled to the normal state by executing 100 variable displays if the variable display result is not a jackpot. For this reason, the time-saving state is also the game state that is controlled when a winning streak may end.

In the example setting of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 16 (A), the allocation of determination values to the jackpot types "Probable jackpot A," "Probable jackpot B," "Probable jackpot C," and "Non-probable jackpot" differs depending on whether the variably displayed special symbol is the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In other words, when the variably displayed special symbol is the first special symbol, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "81" to "100") is assigned to the jackpot types "Probable jackpot B" and "Probable jackpot C," which have fewer rounds, whereas when the variably displayed special symbol is the second special symbol, no determination value is assigned to the jackpot types "Probable jackpot B" and "Probable jackpot C." This setting allows for different rates of determining the jackpot type as a "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C," which have fewer rounds, depending on whether the jackpot type is determined based on the first start condition being met to start a special game using the first special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second start condition being met to start a special game using the second special symbol displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B. In particular, in special games using the second special symbol, the jackpot type is never determined to be a "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C," which results in fewer rounds. Therefore, for example, in game states where game balls are likely to enter the second start entry slot formed by the variable prize ball device 6B due to high-opening control associated with time-saving control, frequent jackpot states with fewer prize balls can be avoided, preventing a decline in game interest.

In addition, in the example setting of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 16 (A), the allocation of determination values for the "non-probability variable" jackpot type is the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, so the probability of a non-probability variable jackpot and the probability of a probability variable jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart.

As mentioned above, just as the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "Probable Variable Jackpot C" differs depending on whether the game is the first special chart or the second special chart, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether the game is the first special chart or the second special chart, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A," which has a larger number of rounds, it is set up so that it is easier to determine in the second special chart game than in the first special chart game.

In addition, even in the case of a special game with a second special symbol, a predetermined range of judgment values different from that in the case of a special game with a first special symbol may be assigned to the jackpot types "Probable jackpot B" and "Probable jackpot C." For example, in the case of a special game with a second special symbol, fewer judgment values may be assigned to the jackpot types "Probable jackpot B" and "Probable jackpot C" compared to a special game with a first special symbol. Alternatively, regardless of whether it is a special game with a first special symbol or a second special symbol, the jackpot type may be determined by referencing common table data.

Figure 17 shows the variation patterns in this embodiment. In this embodiment, multiple variation patterns are prepared in advance to correspond to the cases where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" or "reach," respectively, and to correspond to the case where the variable display result is a "jackpot." Note that the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also called a "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is a "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also called a "reach miss variation pattern"). Furthermore, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the miss variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss." The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is called a jackpot variation pattern.

There are two types of jackpot fluctuation patterns and reach fluctuation patterns: a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. Note that in this embodiment, one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Also, in this embodiment, three types of super reach fluctuation patterns are provided: super reach (no pseudo-consecutive hits), super reach (one pseudo-consecutive hit), and super reach (two pseudo-consecutive hits), but the present invention is not limited to this, and four or more types or two or less types of super reach fluctuation patterns may be provided.

In this embodiment, the super reach variation patterns include a variation pattern (PB1-2) in which the variable display result is a jackpot as a super reach (no pseudo-consecutive hit) and a variation pattern (PA2-2) in which the variable display result is a miss; a variation pattern (PB1-3) in which the variable display result is a jackpot as a super reach (one pseudo-consecutive hit) and a variation pattern (PA2-3) in which the variable display result is a miss; and a variation pattern (PB1-4) in which the variable display result is a jackpot as a super reach (two pseudo-consecutive hits) and a variation pattern (PA2-4) in which the variable display result is a miss.

As shown in Figure 17, the special chart fluctuation time for the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach performance of a normal reach is executed in this embodiment is set shorter than that for the super reach fluctuation pattern.

In this embodiment, the variable display result is set to have a higher chance of becoming a "jackpot" in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach, so in the normal reach variation pattern and super reach variation pattern, the longer the special chart variation time, the higher the chance of a jackpot.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern type may be provided, and the type of fluctuation pattern may be determined first from these random number values for determining the fluctuation pattern type, and then the fluctuation pattern belonging to that determined type may be determined.

Figure 18 is an explanatory diagram of the method for determining the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the variation pattern determination table selected varies depending on the display result of the variable display being executed, the number of reserved memories, the game status, etc.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 18, if the variable display result is a non-probable jackpot, jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and using that jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach (no pseudo consecutive effects) jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach (one pseudo consecutive effects) jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-4 (super reach (two pseudo consecutive effects) jackpot fluctuation pattern). More specifically, in jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, PB1-1 is determined 5% of the time, PB1-2 is determined 20% of the time, PB1-3 is determined 35% of the time, and PB1-4 is determined 40% of the time.

Also, if the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot A to C, jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and using that jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach (no pseudo consecutive effects) jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach (one pseudo consecutive effects) jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-4 (super reach (two pseudo consecutive effects) jackpot fluctuation pattern). More specifically, in jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, PB1-2 is determined 10% of the time, PB1-3 is determined 20% of the time, and PB1-4 is determined 70% of the time.

Furthermore, when the game state is a low base state (normal state), the variable display result is a miss, and the number of reserved memories for the special variable chart is one or less, the miss variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern is determined using this miss variation pattern determination table A from PA1-1 (non-reach miss variation pattern without shortening), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo consecutive performance) miss variation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (one pseudo consecutive performance) miss variation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach (two pseudo consecutive performances) miss variation pattern). More specifically, in the miss variation pattern determination table A, PA1-1 is determined 50% of the time, PA2-1 is determined 40% of the time, PA2-2 is determined 5% of the time, PA2-3 is determined 3% of the time, and PA2-4 is determined 2% of the time.

Furthermore, when the game state is a low base state (normal state), the variable display result is a miss, and the number of reserved memories for the special variable chart is two, the miss variation pattern determination table B is selected, and the variation pattern is determined using this miss variation pattern determination table B from PA1-2 (shortened non-reach miss variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo consecutive performance) miss variation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (one pseudo consecutive performance) miss variation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach (two pseudo consecutive performances) miss variation pattern). More specifically, in the miss variation pattern determination table B, PA1-2 is determined 60% of the time, PA2-1 is determined 30% of the time, PA2-2 is determined 5% of the time, PA2-3 is determined 3% of the time, and PA2-4 is determined 2% of the time.

Furthermore, when the game state is a low base state (normal state), the variable display result is a miss, and the number of reserved memories for the special variable chart is three, the miss variation pattern determination table C is selected, and the variation pattern is determined using this miss variation pattern determination table C from PA1-3 (shortened non-reach miss variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo consecutive performance) miss variation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (one pseudo consecutive performance) miss variation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach (two pseudo consecutive performances) miss variation pattern). More specifically, in the miss variation pattern determination table C, PA1-3 is determined 70% of the time, PA2-1 is determined 20% of the time, PA2-2 is determined 5% of the time, PA2-3 is determined 3% of the time, and PA2-4 is determined 2% of the time.

Furthermore, when the game state is a high base state (time-saving state or probability variable state), miss fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, and using this miss fluctuation pattern determination table D, the fluctuation pattern is determined from PA1-3 (shortened non-reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo consecutive performance) miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (one pseudo consecutive performance) miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach (two pseudo consecutive performances) miss fluctuation pattern). More specifically, miss fluctuation pattern determination table C determines PA1-3 80% of the time, PA2-1 10% of the time, PA2-2 5% of the time, PA2-3 3% of the time, and PA2-4 2% of the time.

In this embodiment, an example is shown in which when the variable display result is a jackpot, the variation pattern is determined according to the type of jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The selection rate of one of the multiple jackpot variation patterns (PB1-1 to PB1-4) may be varied, for example, according to the game status, regardless of the jackpot type. In this way, the variable display is performed with a variation pattern appropriate for the game status, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 12 may be a backup RAM, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power supply created on a specified power supply board. In other words, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 will be preserved for a specified period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply discharges and the backup power supply becomes unable to supply power). In particular, at least data corresponding to the game status, i.e., the control status of the game control means (such as a special chart process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid balls should be stored in the backup RAM. Data corresponding to the control status of the game control means is data necessary to restore the control status to before the power outage, etc., based on that data, when power is restored after a power outage, etc. Furthermore, the data corresponding to the control status and the data indicating the number of unpaid balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

This RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 002SG150, as shown in FIG. 19, which serves as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of games on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area 002SG150 shown in FIG. 19 includes a first special symbol reserve memory unit 002SG151A, a second special symbol reserve memory unit 002SG151B, a regular symbol reserve memory unit 002SG151C, a game control flag setting unit 002SG152, a game control timer setting unit 002SG153, a game control counter setting unit 002SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 002SG155.

The first special symbol reserve memory unit 002SG151A stores reserved data for special symbol games (special symbol games using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) in order of winning, in which a game ball has passed (entered) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A, resulting in a start winning (first start winning), but which have not yet started.

The second special symbol reserve memory unit 002SG151B stores reserved data for special symbol games (special symbol games using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) that have not yet started but in which a game ball has passed (entered) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a start winning (second start winning) has occurred, in order of winning.

As an example, the first special chart reserve memory unit 002SG151A associates the reserve number with the order of entry into the first start entry port (the order in which the game balls are detected), and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the variable display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of win, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters), as reserve data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). In addition, the second special chart reserve memory unit 002SG151B associates the reserved number with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game balls) at the second start winning port, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the variable display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of win, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 etc. based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters), as reserved data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

In this way, the reserved data stored in the first special symbol reserved memory unit 002SG151A and the second special symbol reserved memory unit 002SG151B indicates that the execution of a special symbol game using the first special symbol or a special symbol game using the second special symbol is reserved, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will occur based on the variable display results (special symbol display results) in these special symbol games.

In this embodiment, when hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition when the gaming ball passes through (enters) the first start entry port, and hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start entry when the gaming ball passes through (enters) the second start entry port are stored in separate hold memory units in association with hold numbers, the variable display based on the second hold memory information is executed in priority over the variable display based on the first hold information.

The normal symbol reserve memory unit 002SG151C stores reserve information for normal symbol games in which a game ball has been detected by the gate switch 21 but which have not yet been started by the normal symbol display device 20. For example, the normal symbol reserve memory unit 002SG151C associates game balls with reserve numbers in the order in which they are detected by the gate switch 21, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the passage of the game ball, as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 002SG152 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of play on the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 002SG152 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 002SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of games on the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 002SG153 stores data indicating the timer values of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 002SG154 is provided with multiple types of counters for calculating count values used to control the progress of play in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 002SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 002SG154 may be provided with a random counter that counts some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them using software.

The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 002SG154 stores random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, such as numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR4, as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number value is updated periodically or irregularly in accordance with the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software that updates the random count value separately from the update operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or software that updates the random count value by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit 002SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of games on the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 002SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of several types of buffers.

The ROM 121 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 12 stores not only performance control programs but also various data tables used to control performance operations. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting multiple judgment tables prepared so that the performance control CPU 120 can make various judgments, decisions, and settings, as well as pattern data constituting various performance control patterns.

As an example, the ROM 121 stores a presentation control pattern table that contains multiple presentation control patterns that the presentation control CPU 120 uses to control presentation operations by various presentation devices (e.g., the image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, decorative LEDs, presentation models, etc.). The presentation control patterns correspond to various presentation operations executed according to the progress of play on the pachinko gaming machine 1 and are composed of data indicating the control content of those operations. The presentation control pattern table may store, for example, presentation control patterns for when special charts are variable displayed, preview presentation control patterns, and various other presentation control patterns.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 12 has an area for storing various data used to control performance operations, such as a performance control data storage area 002SG190 as shown in Figure 20(A). The performance control data storage area 002SG190 shown in Figure 20(A) includes a performance control flag setting unit 002SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 002SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 002SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 002SG194.

The performance control flag setting unit 002SG191 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated in response to performance operation states, such as the display state of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5, and performance control commands sent from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 002SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 002SG192 is provided with multiple types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 002SG192 stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit 002SG193 is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit 002SG193 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 002SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 002SG194 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of several types of buffers.

In this embodiment, the data constituting the start winning time reception command buffer 002SG194A shown in Figure 20 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting unit 002SG194. The start winning time reception command buffer 002SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum total number of reserved memories for the first special symbol reserved memory (e.g., "4"), and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special symbol being variably displayed. The start winning time reception command buffer 002SG194A also has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum total number of reserved memories for the second special symbol reserved memory (e.g., "4"), and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "2-0") corresponding to the second special symbol being variably displayed. When a start win occurs at the first start win slot or the second start win slot, a set of two commands, a start win slot designation command (first start win slot designation command or second start win slot designation command) and a reserved memory count notification command (first reserved memory count notification command or second reserved memory count notification command), is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The storage areas corresponding to the first special symbol reserved memory and the second special symbol reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 002SG194A have storage areas (entries) reserved for associating these start win slot designation commands and reserved memory count notification commands and storing them separately as the first special symbol reserved memory and the second special symbol reserved memory.

When the start conditions are met and the variable display of the top-level reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") begins, the contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted up one by one, as described below. Furthermore, the contents of buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0," which stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start conditions are met, are cleared during the special drawing hit waiting process, which is executed when the variable display ends.

When a start win occurs in the first start win slot, the performance control CPU 120 stores the command starting from the first empty entry (the entry with the lowest buffer number) corresponding to the first special symbol reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 002SG194A. When a start win occurs in the second start win slot, the CPU 120 stores the command starting from the first empty entry (the entry with the lowest buffer number) corresponding to the second special symbol reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 002SG194A. When a start win occurs, commands from the start win slot designation command to the reserved memory number notification command are sent sequentially. Therefore, when commands are received, the start win slot designation command and the reserved memory number notification command are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the last digits "0" to "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first or second special symbol reserved memory, in that order.

Whenever the variable display of decorative symbols begins, the commands stored in the start winning time receive command buffer 002SG194A shown in Figure 20(B) are deleted from the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that just ended (the entry with buffer number "1-0" or "2-0"), and the contents of the entries corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to begin (the entry with buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") and the contents of the entries after the reserved memory of the variable display that just began are shifted. For example, when the variable display of decorative symbols in the first special symbol reserved memory ends in the storage state shown in Figure 20(B), the commands stored in buffer number "0" are deleted, the commands stored in buffer number "0" are shifted to buffer number "0," the commands stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" are shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "0," and the commands stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3." Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes the area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending memory that is currently being variably displayed.

(operation)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main board 11)
First, we will explain the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts, the game control microcomputer 100 starts up and game control main processing is executed by the CPU 103. Figure 21 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main processing shown in Figure 21, the CPU 103 first disables interrupts (step S1). Next, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). These initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and making the RAM 102 accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are met (step S3). The recovery conditions can be met when the clear signal is off, backup data is available, and the backup RAM is normal. When power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17, for example, is pressed, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery conditions are not met. The backup data only needs to be able to be saved in RAM 102, which serves as backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is determined whether the recovery conditions can be met by checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is met (Step S3; Yes), recovery processing (Step S4) is executed, followed by random number circuit setting processing (Step S8). The recovery processing of Step S4 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored; for example, if a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the special symbol change can be resumed from the state before the power supply was stopped.

Also, if the recovery condition is not met (Step S3: No), an initialization process (Step S6) is performed, followed by a random number circuit setting process (Step S8). The initialization process of Step S6 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and initial values are set in the working area by executing the clearing process.

After executing the random number circuit setting process (step S8), the CPU 103 sets the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time interval (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S9), and enables the interrupt (step S10). Then, a loop process is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), allowing the CPU 103 to periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

After executing this game control main processing, the CPU 103 receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, and then executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 22. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 22 begins, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch processing to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches, such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23, via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, the CPU 103 executes a predetermined main error processing to diagnose abnormalities in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and, if necessary, issue a warning based on the diagnosis results (step S22). After this, the CPU 103 executes a predetermined information output processing to output data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start wins), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the game has entered a probability variable state) to be supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 is able to manage the execution and reservation of special symbol games, control the jackpot gaming state, control the gaming state, and so on.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, it is possible to execute the normal symbol game and manage reserves based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), as well as control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol win." The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reserve display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. Then, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a presentation control command to be sent during each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, the presentation control command that has been set to be sent is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the presentation control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

(Special pattern processing)
Fig. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Fig. 22. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

The start winning determination process detects the occurrence of a start winning, stores pending information in a specified area of RAM 102, and updates the number of pending memories. When a start winning occurs, a random number value is extracted to determine the display result (including the type of jackpot) and variation pattern, and this is stored as pending information. A process may also be executed to predict the display result and variation pattern based on the extracted random number value. After the pending information and number of pending memories are stored, transmission settings are made to send a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the determination results, such as the occurrence of a start winning, the number of pending memories, and the predictive determination. The performance control command for the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 22.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S117 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag stored in RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S117), transmission settings are made to transmit the effect control commands corresponding to each step to the effect control board 12.

The normal special symbol processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). This normal special symbol processing determines whether to start the first or second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. Furthermore, the normal special symbol processing determines (predetermines) whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" and, if so, the type of jackpot, before the display result is derived and displayed, based on a random number value for determining the display result. Furthermore, the normal special symbol processing determines a fixed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) to be displayed in the special symbol game in accordance with the determined display result. The value of the special symbol process flag is then updated to "1," and the normal special symbol processing ends. In this embodiment, the special symbol game using the second special symbol is executed with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol (also known as special symbol 2 priority consumption). Additionally, the order in which game balls enter the first and second starting winning slots may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which the decision value compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern to determine one of several types of fluctuation pattern, based on the results of a pre-determined decision on whether or not the display result will be a "jackpot". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when a fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2", and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special symbol change process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol change process includes processes for making settings to change the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and for measuring the elapsed time since the special symbol began to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special symbol change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special symbol began to change reaches the special symbol change time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol change process ends.

The special symbol stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3." This special symbol stop process includes a setting process to stop the variation of special symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and to stop displaying (derive) the confirmed special symbol that will result in the display of the special symbol. If the display result is a "jackpot," the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4." If the display result is a "miss," the game state is also updated if the game is in a time-saving state or a special probability state and the end of the number-cutting period is confirmed. Once the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

The pre-jackpot opening process in step S114 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "4." This pre-jackpot opening process includes processing to start the execution of a round in the jackpot game state and set the large prize opening to an open state, based on factors such as the display result being "jackpot." When the large prize opening is set to an open state, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door. At this time, the maximum open period for the large prize opening to be set and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set, depending on, for example, the type of jackpot. Once these settings are complete, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "5," and the pre-jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "5." This jackpot opening process includes processes such as measuring the time elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and determining whether it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the large prize opening is to be returned to a closed state, processes such as stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door are executed, and then the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "6," and the jackpot opening process ends.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "6." This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the large prize opening has been executed has reached the set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. If the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "5." However, if the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "7." Once the value of the special symbol process flag has been updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7." This jackpot end process includes processes such as waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation, which serves as a presentation operation to notify players of the end of the jackpot game state, has elapsed, and making various settings to initiate variable rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When these settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0," and the jackpot end process ends.

(Starting winning judgment process)
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the start winning determination process (S101) shown in FIG. 23. In the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the first starting gate switch 22A, which corresponds to the first starting gate formed by the winning ball device 6A, is on (002SGS101). If the first starting gate switch 22A is on (002SGS101; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the first special symbol reserved memory count, which is the number of reserved memories for the special symbol game using the first special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (e.g., "4") (002SGS102). The CPU 103 can determine the number of reserved first symbol memories by, for example, reading the first reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 002SG154. When the number of reserved memories for the first special chart in 002SGS102 is not the upper limit value (002SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 002SG155 is set to "0" (002SGS103).

When the first start opening switch 22A in 002SGS101 is off (002SGS101; N), or when the number of reserved first special symbols in 002SGS102 has reached the upper limit (002SGS102; Y), a determination is made as to whether the second start opening switch 22B, which is provided corresponding to the second start opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, is on (002SGS104) based on a detection signal from the second start opening switch 22B. If the second start opening switch 22B is on (002SGS104; Y), a determination is made as to whether the second special symbol reserved number, which is the number of reserved symbols for the special symbol game using the second special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (e.g., the upper limit of "4") (002SGS105). The CPU 103 can determine the number of reserved second special symbols by, for example, reading the second reserved symbol count value, which is the value stored in the second reserved symbol count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 002SG154. When the second reserved symbol count in 002SGS105 is not the upper limit (002SGS105; N), for example, the value stored in the start buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 002SG155 is set to "2" (002SGS106).

After executing either of the processes 002SGS103 or 002SGS106, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the value stored in the start port buffer, is updated by adding 1 (002SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "0," the first reserved symbol count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2," the second reserved symbol count value is added by 1. Thus, the first reserved symbol count value is updated to increase by 1 when the gaming ball passes (enters) the first start port and the first start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the first special symbol is met. Furthermore, the second reserved symbol count value is updated to increase by 1 when the gaming ball passes (enters) the second start port and the second start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the second special symbol is met. At this time, the total reserved symbol count is also updated to increase by 1 (002SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 002SG154, can be updated to add 1.

After executing the processing of 002SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 002SG154 (002SGS109). The numerical data indicating each extracted random number value and the start port buffer value are stored by being set as reserve information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special symbol reserve memory unit (002SGS110).

The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot," and further to determine the type of jackpot if the variable display result is a "jackpot." The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern, including the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol. By executing the processing of 002SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used to determine the variable display mode, including the variable display result and variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol.

Following the processing of 002SGS110, a setting for sending a start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is made (002SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "0," the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, thereby setting up to send a first start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2," the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, thereby setting up to send a second start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. The start port winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process processing is completed, by executing the command control processing of S27 shown in FIG. 22.

Following the processing of 002SGS111, the CPU 103 performs settings for sending the pending memory count notification command to the performance control board 12, for example by storing the storage address of the pending memory count notification command table in ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer (002SGS113). The pending memory count notification command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example by executing the command control processing of S27 shown in Figure 22 after the special symbol process processing has ended.

After executing the processing of 002SGS113, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "0" (002SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "0" (Y in 002SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (002SGS115), and then processing of 2390SGS104 proceeds. On the other hand, if the start port buffer value is "2" (N in 002SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (002SGS116), and then the start winning processing ends. This ensures that processing based on the detection of both valid start winnings can be completed reliably, even if both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect valid game ball start winnings.

(Normal processing of special patterns)
Figure 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in S110 of Figure 23 as the normal special symbol processing. In the normal special symbol processing shown in Figure 25, the CPU 103 first determines whether the second special symbol reserved memory count is "0" or not (step 002SGS141). The second special symbol reserved memory count is the reserved memory count of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the processing of step 002SGS141, the second reserved memory count value stored in the game control counter setting unit may be read, and it may be determined whether the read value is "0".

When the number of second special symbol reserved memories is other than "0" in step 002SGS141 (step 002SGS141; N), the following reserved data stored in the second special symbol reserved memory unit corresponding to reserved number "0" are read out (step 002SGS142): random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer.

Following the processing of step 002SGS142, the second special symbol reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the second special symbol reserved memory count and the total reserved memory count are updated, and the data in the second special symbol reserved memory unit is updated. Specifically, the reserved data indicating random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "0" in the second special symbol reserved memory unit (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") is shifted up by one entry (step 002SGS143).

Then, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the value stored in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "2" (step 002SGS144), and then the process proceeds to step 002SGS149.

On the other hand, if the number of reserved second special symbols is "0" in step 002SGS141 (step 002SGS141; Y), it is determined whether the number of reserved first special symbols is "0" (step 002SGS145). The number of reserved first special symbols is the number of reserved special symbol games using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the processing of step 002SGS145, the game control counter setting unit reads the first reserved symbol count value stored in the first reserved symbol count counter and determines whether the read value is "0." In this way, the processing of step 002SGS145 is executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is determined to be "0" in step 002SGS141, and determines whether the number of reserved first special symbols is "0." As a result, the special symbol game using the second special symbol is started before the special symbol game using the first special symbol.

Note that the special symbol game using the second special symbol is not limited to being executed with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol; for example, the special symbol game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first or second start winning port and a start winning occurs. In this case, a table may be provided that stores data that can identify the order in which the start winnings occurred, and it may be possible to determine from the stored data whether to start the special symbol game using the first or second special symbol.

When the number of reserved first special symbols stored in step 002SGS145 is other than "0" (step 002SGS145; N), the reserved data stored in the first special symbol reserve memory unit corresponding to reserve number "0" is read out as numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 002SGS146). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer.

Following the processing of step 002SGS146, the first special symbol reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the first special symbol reserved memory count and the total reserved memory count are updated, and the data in the first special symbol reserved memory unit is updated. Specifically, the reserved data indicating random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "0" in the first special symbol reserved memory unit (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted up by one entry (step 002SGS147).

Then, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the value stored in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "0" (step 002SGS148), and the process proceeds to step 002SGS149.

In step 002SGS149, the display result determination table shown in Figure 15 is selected and set as the table to be used for determining whether the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is a "jackpot" or a "miss." Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the determination value assigned to each special symbol display result of "jackpot" or "miss," to determine whether the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" or a "miss" (step 002SGS150). Furthermore, in this step 002SGS150, if the game state at that time is a high probability state (high probability state) in which the high probability flag is on, a "jackpot" is determined if the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result falls within the range of 10,000 to 12,180, which corresponds to the high probability state (high probability state), and a "miss" is determined if it does not fall within that range. Additionally, if the probability flag is off and the game is in a low probability state (low probability, low base state in this feature), if the random number value MR1 used to determine the special chart display result falls within the range of 1 to 219, it is determined to be a "jackpot," and if it does not fall within the range, it is determined to be a "miss."

In this way, in the display result determination table selected in step 002SGS149, different determination values are assigned to a "jackpot" depending on the game state (high probability, low probability) at that time. Therefore, in the processing of step 002SGS150, whether or not the special chart display result is a "jackpot" is determined using different determination data (determination values) depending on whether or not the game state when the variable display of a special chart game or the like is started is a high probability state. When the game state is a high probability state, a "jackpot" is determined (determined) with a higher probability than when the game state is a low probability state.

If step 002SGS150 determines that a jackpot has occurred (step 002SGS150; Y), the jackpot flag is set to ON (step 002SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 16(A) is selected and set as the table to be used to determine one of several jackpot types (step 002SGS153). By referencing the jackpot type determination table thus set, the jackpot type is determined to be one of several types depending on whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer matches one of the determination values assigned to each jackpot type in the jackpot type determination table: "non-variable jackpot," "variable jackpot A," "variable jackpot B," or "variable jackpot C" (step 002SGS154).

By determining the jackpot type in step 002SGS154, the game state to be controlled after the jackpot game state ends—either a time-saving state (low probability, high base state) or a probability variable state (high probability, high base state), which is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state—is determined before the fixed special symbol is derived as a variable display result. Corresponding to the jackpot type thus determined, the determined jackpot type is stored by, for example, setting a jackpot type buffer value, which is the stored value of a jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (step 002SGS155). For example, if the jackpot type is a "non-probability variable jackpot" corresponding to a non-probability variable jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value can be set to "0," if it is a "probability variable A" corresponding to a probability variable jackpot A, "0" if it is a "probability variable B" corresponding to a probability variable jackpot B, "2," and if it is a "probability variable C" corresponding to a probability variable jackpot C, "3." After processing step 002SGS155, proceed to step 002SGS156.

Also, if step 002SGS150 determines that the result is a "miss" (step 002SGS150; N), step 002SGS156 is executed without executing steps 002SGS152 to 002SGS155.

In step 002SGS156, the CPU 103 sets a fixed special symbol in accordance with the pre-determined result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state (whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on), and the determined result of the jackpot type when the jackpot gaming state is set. As an example, in accordance with the pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is a "miss," a special symbol showing the "-" symbol, which is a miss symbol, is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if the special symbol display result is determined to be a "jackpot" in step 002SGS150a, and the jackpot type in step 002SGS154 is "Probable Jackpot A," a special symbol showing the number "7" is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if the jackpot type is "Probable Jackpot B," a special symbol showing the number "5" is set as the fixed special symbol. Additionally, if the jackpot type is a "non-variable jackpot," the special symbol showing the number "3" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Additionally, if the jackpot type is a "variable jackpot C," the special symbol showing the number "0" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Note that these confirmed special symbols are only examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or multiple types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After the confirmed special symbol is set in step 002SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", which corresponds to the variable pattern setting process (step 002SGS157), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated.

If the number of reserved memories for the special symbol game using the first special symbol is "0" in step 002SGS145 (step 002SGS145; Y), a predetermined demo display setting is performed (step 002SGS158), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated. In this demo display setting, it is determined whether or not a performance control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that specifies a demonstration display (demo screen display) by, for example, displaying a predetermined performance image on the image display device 5 has been transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. If the customer waiting demo designation command has already been transmitted, the demo display setting is terminated. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, settings are performed to transmit the customer waiting demo designation command, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

(Major operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, we will explain the main operations of the performance control board 12. When the performance control board 12 receives a supply of power voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of Fig. 26. When the performance control main process shown in Fig. 26 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clearing RAM 122, setting various initial values, and setting registers for the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example, based on the register settings of the CTC. If the timer interrupt flag is off at this time (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed, an interrupt occurs to receive performance control commands from the main board 11. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 turns on. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal turning on, the performance control CPU 120 automatically disables the interrupt. However, if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt disable command (DI command). In response to the interrupt due to the performance control INT signal turning on, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a specified command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, the performance control command is captured from a specified input port included in the I/O 125 that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The captured performance control command is stored in a performance control command reception buffer, for example, provided in RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then enables interrupts and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read effect control commands are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a specified area of RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in RAM 122 may be turned on, so that the effect control process process can confirm which effect control command was received and the content specified by the effect control command. Furthermore, if the effect control command specifies the game status, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game status.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). The performance control process controls the operation of various performance devices, such as the display of performance images in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting of decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, and the driving of the movable bodies 32A and 32B. Furthermore, the control content of performance operations using the various performance devices is judged, determined, and set in accordance with the performance control commands sent from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process of step S76, an effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 is updated by software. Furthermore, after the effect random number value update process (step S77), a demo effect control process (step S78) is executed to execute a demo effect on the pachinko gaming machine 1, a background display update process (step S79) is executed to update the background image displayed on the image display device 5 to another background image, and a menu display process (step S80) is executed to display a menu screen on the image display device 5 in the game standby state. Then, processing returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to step S73.

In the background display update process of this embodiment, one of the following is selected and displayed: a first background image corresponding to the first presentation mode, a second background image corresponding to the second presentation mode, a third background image corresponding to the third presentation mode, and a fourth background image corresponding to the fourth presentation mode. The first and second background images can be displayed when the game state is normal, the third background image can be displayed when the game state is in a low-probability, high-base state, and the fourth background image can be displayed when the game state is in a high-probability, high-base state. Furthermore, the first and second background images are switched when a switching display condition is met, such as when a variable display of SP Reach Hare is executed or when one background image is displayed continuously for a predetermined period of time.

The menu display process not only displays a menu screen on the image display device 5 in the game standby state, but also includes adjusting the volume output from the speakers 8L, 8R and adjusting the light intensity (brightness) of the game effect lamp 9 in response to the player's operation of the push button 31B while the menu screen is displayed.

In the demo performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, set a timer, such as a customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer, until the customer waiting demo performance begins based on receiving a customer waiting demo designation command, and may start the customer waiting demo performance when the timer expires without the variable display starting. If the variable display starts while the customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer is operating or while the customer waiting demo performance is being executed, the customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer may be cleared, the customer waiting demo performance may be interrupted, and the display on the image display device 5 may be switched to a variable display of decorative patterns.

(Performance control process)
27 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 26 as the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 27, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a hold display update process (step S161) to update the hold memory display (first hold display 002SG101 or second hold display 002SG102) in the special symbol hold memory display area 5U of the image display device 5 to a display corresponding to the contents stored in the start winning time reception command buffer 002SG194A, such as a shift display (described later). After the hold display update process is executed, one of the following steps S170 to S175 is selected and executed, for example, depending on the value of the effect process flag stored in RAM 122.

In addition, in step S161, a pre-reading preview setting process may be executed together with the above-mentioned hold display update process, in which judgments, decisions, and settings are made to execute a pre-reading preview performance (such as a performance that changes the display color of the hold display) based on the performance control command sent from the main board 11 at the time of the initial winning.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (confirmed decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various effects such as reach effects and various preview effects will be executed, their mode, and the start timing of execution are determined based on the display result and variation pattern specified by the effect control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) that reflects the determined results is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display effect processing of step S172 is executed when the effect process flag value is "2." During this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, drive the movable bodies 32A and 32B, output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R in response to an instruction (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13, and turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs in response to an instruction (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14. After performing these effect controls, the CPU 120 displays the fixed decorative pattern, which is the result of the display of the decorative pattern, in a static state, for example, in response to reading an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the effect control pattern or receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying the static display of the fixed decorative pattern. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a static state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3" and the variable display effect processing ends.

The special symbol win wait process of step S173 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "3". In this special symbol win wait process, the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether a presentation control command specifying the start of a jackpot game state has been received from the main board 11. When a presentation control command specifying the start of a jackpot game state is received, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4". Furthermore, if a command specifying the start of a jackpot game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving said command has elapsed, the display result in the special symbol game is determined to be a "miss", and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to its initial value of "0". Once the value of the presentation process flag has been updated, the special symbol win wait process ends.

The jackpot presentation processing of step S174 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "4." In this jackpot presentation processing, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern, etc., corresponding to the presentation content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. Furthermore, in the jackpot presentation processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying the end of the jackpot gaming state, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5," which corresponds to the ending presentation processing, and the jackpot presentation processing ends.

The ending presentation process of step S175 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "5." In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the settings. The presentation process flag value is then updated to its initial value of "0," and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Variable display start setting process)
Next, the operation of the performance control CPU 120 will be described. Figure 28 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in Figure 27. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 002SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 002SGS271; Y), for example, the various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special symbol reserve memory in the start winning reception command buffer are shifted up by one buffer number (step 002SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so they are erased.

Furthermore, if the first variable display start command reception flag is OFF in step 002SGS271 (step 002SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second variable display start command reception flag is ON (step 002SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is OFF (step 002SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated. If the second variable display start command reception flag is ON (step 002SGS273; Y), for example, the various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special symbol reserve memory in the start winning time reception command buffer are shifted up by one buffer number (step 002SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

After executing step 002SGS272 or step 002SGS274, the performance control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 002SGS275).

Next, the display result (stopping pattern) of the decorative pattern is determined based on the data stored in the display result specification command storage area (i.e., the received display result specification command) and the variation pattern (step 002SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result specified by the display result specification command, and stores data indicating the determined stopping pattern of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area.

In this embodiment, if the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to a probability variable jackpot A, the presentation control CPU 120 determines, for example, a decorative pattern combination (jackpot pattern) in which three symbols form a "7" as the stopping symbol. Also, if the received variable display result designation command is one of the third to fourth variable display result designation commands corresponding to probability variable jackpot B to probability variable jackpot C, the stopping symbol is determined from multiple combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, decorative pattern combinations such as "111," "333," "555," and "999"). Also, if the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probability variable jackpot, the presentation control CPU 120 determines, for example, a decorative pattern combination in which three symbols form an even number as the stopping symbol.

Furthermore, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command, which corresponds to a non-variable jackpot, the stopping symbol may be determined from multiple combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (e.g., combinations of decorative symbols such as "111," "333," "555," and "999"), just as when the received variable display result designation command is one of the third to fourth variable display result designation commands, which correspond to variable jackpots B to C. In this case, by further sharing the effects during jackpot play and variable display in the variable jackpot state, the player can be drawn to whether the game state is in the variable jackpot state or the time-saving state until the variable display is executed 100 times, and further, whether the time-saving state will end after 100 variable displays or continue until 10,000 variable displays, thereby increasing the player's interest.

Furthermore, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to a miss and the variable display variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern, a decorative pattern combination in which three patterns are not aligned (a miss pattern) is determined as the stopping pattern.Furthermore, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to a miss and the variable display variation pattern is a reach variation pattern, a reach-miss combination in which the left and right patterns are the same but the center pattern is different (a miss pattern) is determined as the stopping pattern.

To determine these stopping symbols, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, extract a random number to determine the stopping symbols, and determine the stopping symbols of the decorative symbols using a stopping symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols are associated with numerical values. In other words, the stopping symbols may be determined by selecting data indicating the combination of decorative symbols that corresponds to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the fluctuation pattern designation command read in step 002SGS275 is a fluctuation pattern designation command for a super reach with pseudo-consecutive wins (fluctuation patterns PA2-3, PA2-4, PB1-3, PB1-4) (step 002SGS277). If the fluctuation pattern designation command read in step 002SGS275 is not a fluctuation pattern designation command for a super reach, that is, if it is a fluctuation pattern designation command for a normal reach (step 002SGS278; N), proceed to step 002SGS383.

If the variation pattern designation command read in step 002SGS275 is a variation pattern designation command for a super reach, the display colors of the stopped patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and right decorative pattern display area 5C that form the reach state are identified from the data indicating the stopped decorative patterns determined in step 002SGS276 and stored in the decorative pattern display result storage area. Then, using the pseudo-repeated repetition count display determination table shown in Figure 59 (C), the display color of the pseudo-repeated repetition count display to be displayed when the first re-variable display begins, that is, the pseudo-repeated repetition count display (e.g., "x2") indicating that two variable displays, including the first variable display, will begin in the variable display, is determined and stored (step 002SGS278).

Next, it is determined whether the variation pattern designation command read in step 002SGS275 is a super reach variation pattern with two pseudo consecutive wins (step 002SGS279). If it is determined that it is a super reach variation pattern with two pseudo consecutive wins (step 002SGS279; Y), the pseudo consecutive win count display determination table shown in Figure 59 (C) is used to determine and store the display color of the pseudo consecutive win count display to be displayed when the second re-variable display begins, that is, the pseudo consecutive win count display (e.g., "x3") indicating that three variable displays, including the first variable display, will begin in the variable display (step 002SGS280).

If step 002SGS279 determines that the variation pattern is not two pseudo consecutive wins, or if step 002SGS280 is executed, a start wait timer is set to start displaying the number of pseudo consecutive wins (step 002SGS281), and the process proceeds to step 002SGS282.

Next, in step 002SGS282, a process table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is selected (step 002SGS282), and the process timer is started (step 002SGS283).

In addition, the process table includes display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, all of which are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbered 1 to N).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L and 8R as performance components, and the operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.)) in accordance with the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1) (step 002SGS284). For example, to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the on/off of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the sound control board 13 to output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (step 002SGS285). A predetermined time is also set to the variable display control timer (step 002SGS286). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms. Each time the predetermined time elapses, the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display status of the left, center, and right decorative and small symbols to VRAM. The display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing the variable display (variation) of the decorative and small symbols. Next, the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable display performance processing (step S172) (step 002SGS287), and the variable display start setting processing ends.

(Decorative designs and small designs)
Next, the decorative symbols and small symbols will be explained based on Figures 29 to 32. Figure 29 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbols and small symbols. Figure 30 shows (A1) and (A2) the first presentation mode, (B1) and (B2) the second presentation mode, (C1) and (C2) the third presentation mode, and (D1) and (D2) the fourth presentation mode. Figure 31 shows (A1) and (A2) the first presentation mode, and (B1) and (B2) the second presentation mode, respectively. Figure 32 shows (C1) and (C2) the third presentation mode, and (D1) and (D2) the fourth presentation mode, respectively, showing the relationship between the variable display area and the decorative symbols. Figure 32 shows (E) the third presentation mode, and (D1) and (D2) the fourth presentation mode, showing the relationship between the variable display area and the decorative symbols.

In addition, in Figure 29, the sizes of the decorative patterns (for low base state), decorative patterns (for high base state), and small patterns are displayed at the ratio when displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, and display area 5S.

As shown in FIG. 29, the decorative symbols (for low base state) displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R when the game state is in the low base state are composed of a number display unit 002SG051 consisting of a circular number base unit (when viewed from the front) and the numbers "0" to "9" displayed on the front of the number base unit, a character display unit 002SG052 displaying 10 characters (not all characters are shown) corresponding to the numbers "0" to "9" in the number display unit 002SG051, an information display unit 002SG053 consisting of a rectangular information base unit (when viewed from the front) and information about the character (for example, in this embodiment, the character's name) displayed on the front of the information base unit, and a roughly rectangular base display unit 002SG054 displayed surrounding the number display unit 002SG051, character display unit 002SG052, and information display unit 002SG053.

In this embodiment, the information display unit 002SG053 displays the name of the character displayed in the character display unit 002SG052, but the present invention is not limited to this. Various information other than the name (for example, the character's nickname, personality, battle level, items owned by the character, etc.) may be displayed as long as it is information about the character displayed in the character display unit 002SG052.

In addition, the decorative symbols (for high base state) displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R when the game state is in the high base state are composed of a number display section 002SG061 consisting of the numbers "0" to "9" and a roughly rectangular base display section 002SG064 that is displayed surrounding the number display section 002SG061. The decorative symbols for the high base state do not have character display sections or information display sections like the decorative symbols for the low base state.

In addition, the display area 5S located in the upper left of the image display device 5 displays the first and second reserved memory counts and the small symbol (fourth symbol) corresponding to the decorative symbol. The small symbol consists of the numbers "0" to "9" displayed in each of the small symbol display areas 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR, and each number corresponds to a decorative symbol. Note that in this embodiment, the numbers on the decorative symbol and the numbers on the small symbol correspond, but not all of the numbers on both symbols necessarily correspond. For example, the numbers on the small symbol may be numbers "1" to "5," which are fewer than the numbers "0" to "9" on the decorative symbol, or they may be symbols or figures that are different from the numbers on the decorative symbol.

Next, we will explain the decorative patterns (for low base state), decorative patterns (for high base state), and small patterns.

<Display time of each symbol> The decorative symbols (for low base state) and decorative symbols (for high base state) are almost always displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R while the image display device 5 is powered on, but they may be erased (not displayed), for example, when an SP reach effect (super reach effect) is executed during variable display, or when a customer waiting demo effect is executed. On the other hand, the small symbols are always displayed in front of the decorative symbols (higher layer) while the image display device 5 is powered on, and continue to be displayed even when the decorative symbols are erased as described above. However, they may be erased when information with a higher display priority than the small symbols (for example, an error message) is displayed.

<Variable display mode of each symbol> In the first presentation mode described below, decorative symbols (for low base state) are variably displayed by a scrolling display that moves linearly from top to bottom across the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In the second presentation mode, decorative symbols are variably displayed by a scrolling display that moves curvedly from the back to the front across the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the third presentation mode described below, decorative symbols (for the high base state) are displayed variably in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R by rotating around an axis of rotation facing up and down, and in the fourth presentation mode, decorative symbols are displayed variably by scrolling in a linear fashion from top to bottom in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Regardless of the game state or presentation mode, the small symbols are displayed variably in each small symbol display area 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR, switching between symbols "0" to "9" (updating symbols).

In a broad sense, the above-mentioned "scrolling display" and "switching display" are both included in "switching display," in which images are switched between displays. However, as described below, a "scrolling display" may refer to an image that is framed in or faded in to the display area, and then framed out or faded out from the display area, thereby updating and displaying multiple images. A distinction may also be made between a "switching display" and an image that is updated and displayed by repeatedly displaying and hiding (erasing), or by rotating, at a predetermined position in the display area, without moving, fading in, or fading out.

<Numeric display section> The decorative design (for low base state) and decorative design (for high base state) have not only numeric display sections 002SG051 and 002SG061, but also character display section 002SG052, information display section 002SG053, and base display section 002SG054, whereas the small design is composed only of a numeric display section.

In addition, the decorative patterns (for low base state) are displayed in the same size in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and in the center decorative pattern display area 5C they are displayed in a size slightly smaller than the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R, creating a sense of depth. On the other hand, the decorative patterns (for high base state) are displayed in the same size in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, and are arranged in a straight line in the left-right direction. The small patterns are displayed in the same size in each small pattern display area 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR.

In addition, in the low base state, the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R are arranged approximately horizontally in the approximate vertical center of the image display device 5, but the middle decorative pattern display area 5C is arranged slightly higher than the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and is therefore arranged slightly higher than the approximate vertical center of the image display device 5. On the other hand, in the high base state, the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged approximately horizontally in the approximate vertical center of the image display device 5. Therefore, the decorative pattern displayed and stopped at the stop position of the middle decorative pattern display area 5C in the high base state is arranged closer to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 than the decorative pattern displayed and stopped at the stop position of the middle decorative pattern display area 5C in the low base state (see Figure 30).

Furthermore, when the size of the number display section 002SG051 of the decorative pattern (for low base state) is used as the standard, the size of the number display section 002SG061 of the decorative pattern (for high base state) is large, and the size of the number display section of the small pattern is small. In other words, the size of the number display section increases in the order of decorative pattern (for high base state), decorative pattern (for low base state), and small pattern (size of number display section: decorative pattern (for high base state) > decorative pattern (for low base state) > small pattern). Furthermore, the overall size of each pattern is also in the same relationship as the number display section.

In this way, in the low base state, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R are made to appear larger, and the decorative patterns in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C are shifted to create a sense of depth and increase interest, while in the high base state, where the average variable display period is short, the decorative patterns are positioned closer to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5, thereby increasing the degree to which the decorative patterns can be recognized (see Figure 30).

The decorative pattern (for low base state), decorative pattern (for high base state), and numerical display portion of the small pattern are each formed as a stereoscopic image (3D image, three-dimensional image). A stereoscopic image is, for example, an image created using 3DCG (a virtual solid is constructed (modeled) using points placed on a three-dimensional coordinate system as vertices, information reproducing the material, etc. is assigned to each surface, and the object is reproduced by illuminating it from an arbitrary light intensity, light source position, etc.). However, it may also be an image that can be viewed in three dimensions when displayed on a three-dimensional display device (for example, an image liquid crystal panel capable of displaying a stereoscopic image (video) consisting of an image for the right eye (R image) and an image for the left eye (L image), a backlight that irradiates planar light from behind the image liquid crystal panel toward the front, and a parallax barrier liquid crystal panel located in front of the image liquid crystal panel at a predetermined distance from the image liquid crystal panel).

Furthermore, among the decorative symbols from "0" to "9," the odd numbers "1, 3, 5, 7, and 9" are probability symbols corresponding to a "probability variable jackpot" that is controlled to a high probability, high base state after the jackpot ends, while the even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, and 8" are normal symbols (non-probability variable symbols) corresponding to a "non-probability variable jackpot" that is controlled to a low probability, high base state after the jackpot ends. Note that even in the case of a probability variable jackpot, the normal symbols may result in a predetermined jackpot combination.

<Character Display> The character display section 002SG052 of the decorative symbol (for low base state) is formed as a non-stereoscopic image (2D image, two-dimensional image). Note that the character display section 002SG052 may also be formed as a stereoscopic image (3D image, three-dimensional image). Furthermore, the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 performs a predetermined action (movement) when the variable display starts or stops, as described below. On the other hand, the decorative symbol (for high base state) and the small symbol do not have a character display section.

<Information Display Unit> The information display unit 002SG053 of the decorative pattern (for low base state) is formed as a non-stereoscopic image (2D image, two-dimensional image). Note that the information display unit 002SG053 may also be formed as a stereoscopic image (3D image, three-dimensional image). The information display unit 002SG053 also displays the "name," which is information about the character displayed in the character display unit 002SG052, and as described below, the "name" is erased when the variable display begins. On the other hand, the decorative pattern (for high base state) and the small pattern do not have an information display unit.

<Base display section> The base display section 002SG054 of the decorative pattern (for low base state) has a decorative section that decorates the character displayed on the front, and is formed as a non-stereoscopic image (2D image, two-dimensional image). Furthermore, the base display section 002SG064 of the decorative pattern (for high base state) is formed as a stereoscopic image (3D image, three-dimensional image). Note that both the base display section 002SG054 and the base display section 002SG064 may be formed as stereoscopic images (3D image, three-dimensional image). Furthermore, when the size of the base display section 002SG054 of the decorative pattern (for low base state) is used as a standard, the size of the base display section 002SG064 of the decorative pattern (for high base state) is larger. On the other hand, no base display section is provided for the small pattern.

<Main Color> The color of the numbers displayed on the number display units 002SG051 and 002SG061 of the decorative symbols (for low base state) and decorative symbols (for high base state) is "blue" for regular symbols consisting of even numbers, and "red" for special symbols consisting of odd numbers. Furthermore, the number base units other than numbers, and base display units 002SG054 and 002SG064, etc., may be the same color as the numbers, or may be displayed in a different color than the numbers.

The characters displayed in the character display section 002SG052 may be configured with their own original colors without being influenced by the main color. Furthermore, the character corresponding to the probability variation pattern is preferably an ally character, for example, when there are separate ally and enemy characters. Alternatively, it is preferable that the ally character be a central character in the story, such as the protagonist of the story or someone closely related to the protagonist.

As mentioned above, when the narrative concept of allies and enemies is applied, preview effects and SP reach effects are generally presented from the perspective of the allies, and if the SP reach effect is structured around allies fighting each other, the player will be notified that a favorable outcome for the allies (such as a jackpot) will occur if the outcome is favorable for the allies, such as the allies defeating the enemies.

Also, the main color with the highest occupancy rate across the entire area of each decorative symbol (for low base state) and decorative symbol (for high base state) may be the same color as the number. Also, while the color used for normal symbols consisting of even numbers is "blue" and the color used for special symbols consisting of odd numbers is "red," they may be different colors.

In addition, in high base states, as described below, the scrolling display is performed at high speed, so the decorative symbols (for low base states) need to be more visible and appealing than the decorative symbols (for low base states). Stop symbol announcements and announcements of when the variation will begin are often performed by incorporating effect displays into the decorative symbols. As a result, decorative symbols (for high base states) are primarily composed of the number display section 002SG061, and are characterized by a larger size ratio than decorative symbols (for low base states) which are composed of a character display section and a number display section.

Although not shown in the present embodiment, the numbers in the decorative design (for the high base state) may be made more flashy in appearance, such as by having more complex movements or a more sophisticated design, than the numbers in the decorative design (for the low base state), in order to enhance the high base state.

On the other hand, the color of the numbers in the small symbols is "yellow" for regular symbols consisting of even numbers and "yellow-green" for special symbols consisting of odd numbers. In this embodiment, the colors are "yellow" for regular symbols consisting of even numbers and "yellow-green" for special symbols consisting of odd numbers, but they may be other colors. Also, numbers that are the same as decorative symbols may be the same color as the decorative symbols.

The design of the small symbols may be a reduced version of the material of the numbers in the decorative symbols in the low base state and high base state, but rather than enhancing the presentation effect through design, it is preferable that the design be simpler than the numbers in the decorative symbols (for example, flat rather than three-dimensional, and with a simple color that is not glossy, etc.) in order to improve visibility for players.

As shown in Figure 30, the presentation control CPU 120 is capable of executing one of the following presentation modes: the first presentation mode (see Figure 30 (A1) (A2)), the second presentation mode (see Figure 30 (B1) (B2)), the third presentation mode (see Figure 30 (C1) (C2)), and the fourth presentation mode (see Figure 30 (D1) (D2)). The first and second presentation modes are presentation modes that can be executed when the game state is controlled to a low-probability, low-base state. The third presentation mode is a presentation mode that can be executed when the game state is controlled to a low-probability, high-base state, and the fourth presentation mode is a presentation mode that can be executed when the game state is controlled to a high-probability, high-base state.

As shown in Figure 30 (A1), in the first presentation mode, decorative symbols for a low base state are displayed in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a first background image 002SG081 depicting a daytime cityscape is displayed as the background image for the decorative symbols. Also, as shown in Figure 30 (A2), the variable display of the decorative symbols is implemented by a scrolling display (first scrolling display) that moves linearly from top to bottom across the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

More specifically, as shown in Figures 31 (A1) and (A2), each decorative symbol is displayed frame-in downward from the top edge of decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R, then moves downward in a straight line, and is displayed frame-out downward from the bottom edge of decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R. Furthermore, when the preceding decorative symbol displayed frame-in (e.g., decorative symbol "3") passes the decorative symbol stopping position set in the vertical center of decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R, the succeeding decorative symbol (e.g., decorative symbol "4") is displayed frame-in and moves downward. That is, as shown in FIG. 31 (A2), while the leading "3" decorative symbol passes its stopping position, the leading "2" decorative symbol and the trailing "4" decorative symbol are not visible, but after the leading "3" decorative symbol passes its stopping position, the leading "3" decorative symbol and the trailing "4" decorative symbol become visible. In this way, the decorative symbols increase in number in the order of "0," "1," "2," "3," etc., returning to "0" after "9," and repeatedly updating the display from "0" to "9." In other words, the decorative symbols are displayed in a loop of "0" to "9" in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, resulting in a scrolling display of the decorative symbols.

In addition, the display area 5S located in the upper left of the screen of the image display device 5 displays the first pending memory count, second pending memory count, and small symbols, while the special symbol pending memory display area 5U and active display area 5F located in the lower part of the screen of the image display device 5 display the first pending display 002SG101 and second pending display 002SG102 corresponding to variable displays whose execution is pending, and the active display 002SG103 corresponding to variable displays that are currently being executed. Note that the first pending memory count, second pending memory count, small symbols, special symbol pending memory display area 5U, and active display area 5F are displayed in common in all presentation modes, and therefore will not be described below.

As shown in Figure 30 (B1), in the second presentation mode, decorative symbols for a low base state are displayed in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a second background image 002SG082 depicting a daytime wilderness landscape is displayed as the background image for the decorative symbols. Also, as shown in Figure 30 (B2), the decorative symbols are displayed in a scrolling display (second scrolling display) that moves in a curved pattern from the back to the front of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In more detail, as shown in Figures 31 (B1) and (B2), the left and right decorative patterns are displayed frame-in from the upper left side of the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the upper right side of the right decorative pattern display area 5R, moving toward the center of the screen, then moving downward and away from the left and right sides of the screen, and are displayed frame-out from the lower left side of the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the lower right side of the right decorative pattern display area 5R toward the side. The center decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed from the back of the screen in the center decorative pattern display area 5C, moving toward the front, and then displayed frame-out.

Furthermore, when a leading decorative symbol (e.g., a "2" decorative symbol) displayed in frame passes the stop position of the decorative symbol set in the vertical center of the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, a trailing decorative symbol (e.g., a "3" decorative symbol) is displayed in frame and moves toward the center of the screen. That is, as shown in FIG. 31 (B2), while the leading "2" decorative symbol passes near the stop position, the leading "2" decorative symbol and the trailing "3" decorative symbol are visible, but after the leading "2" decorative symbol passes the stop position, the trailing "3" decorative symbol and the "4" decorative symbol become visible. In this way, the decorative symbols increase in number from "0," "1," "2," "3," etc., returning to "0" after "9," and the display is updated repeatedly from "0" to "9." In other words, the decorative symbols "0" to "9" are displayed in a loop in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, resulting in a scrolling display of the decorative symbols.

As shown in Figure 30 (C1), in the third presentation mode, decorative symbols for the high base state are displayed in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a third background image 002SG083 depicting an evening cityscape is displayed as the background image for the decorative symbols. Also, as shown in Figure 30 (C2), the decorative symbols are displayed variably in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R by rotating around an axis of rotation pointing in the vertical direction.

In more detail, as shown in Figures 32 (C1) and (C2), the decorative symbols in the third presentation mode have a first surface 5a and a second surface 5b, which is the opposite surface of the first surface 5a, and the preceding decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol "3") is displayed on the first surface 5a. On the other hand, when the first surface 5a faces forward, it is not possible to determine whether the succeeding decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol "4") is displayed on the second surface 5b. In other words, because the base display unit 002SG064 has low transmittance (is opaque), the decorative symbol displayed on the second surface 5b cannot be seen through from the front side (visible from the front side through the decorative symbol).

The decorative symbols are rotatable in one direction (for example, clockwise or counterclockwise when viewed from above), and as they rotate from first surface 5a to second surface 5b, then first surface 5a to second surface 5b, etc., the numbers increase in the order "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., returning to "0" after "9", and then repeatedly updating and displaying numbers from "0" to "9". In other words, the decorative symbols are displayed in a loop of "0" to "9" in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, thereby rotating the decorative symbols.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 32 (C2), when the first surface 5a is rotated by approximately 90 degrees or more from a state facing the front and the second surface 5b is displayed, the second surface 5b displays a decorative pattern (e.g., a decorative pattern "4") subsequent to the decorative pattern (e.g., a decorative pattern "3") displayed on the first surface 5a. Next, although not specifically shown, when the second surface 5b is rotated by approximately 90 degrees or more from a state facing the front and the first surface 5a is displayed, the first surface 5a displays a decorative pattern (e.g., a decorative pattern "5") subsequent to the decorative pattern (e.g., a decorative pattern "4") displayed on the second surface 5b.

In addition, a right-hit notification image 002SG201 consisting of a right arrow and the words "right hit" is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 to encourage the player to perform a right-hit operation, and a time-saving remaining display 002SG202 (in this example, the words "XX times remaining", where XX = 0 to 100) indicating the remaining number of times the time-saving control will be executed is displayed in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

As shown in Figure 30 (D1), in the fourth presentation mode, decorative symbols for the high base state are displayed in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a fourth background image 002SG084 depicting a nighttime cityscape is displayed as the background image for the decorative symbols. Also, as shown in Figure 30 (C2), the decorative symbols are displayed in a scrolling display (third scrolling display) that moves linearly from top to bottom in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

More specifically, as shown in Figures 32 (D1) and (D2), each decorative symbol is displayed frame-in downward from the top edge of decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R, then moves downward in a straight line, and is displayed frame-out downward from the bottom edge of decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R. Furthermore, when the preceding decorative symbol displayed frame-in (e.g., decorative symbol "3") passes the decorative symbol stopping position set in the vertical center of decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R, the succeeding decorative symbol (e.g., decorative symbol "4") is displayed frame-in and moves downward. That is, as shown in FIG. 32 (D1), while the leading "3" decorative symbol passes its stopping position, the leading "2" decorative symbol and the trailing "4" decorative symbol are not visible. However, as shown in FIG. 32 (D2), after the leading "3" decorative symbol passes its stopping position, the leading "3" decorative symbol and the trailing "4" decorative symbol become visible. In this way, the decorative symbols increase in number in the order of "0," "1," "2," "3," etc., returning to "0" after "9," and repeating the increase from "0" to "9." In other words, the decorative symbols are displayed in a loop of "0" to "9" in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, thereby scrolling the decorative symbols.

In addition, a right-hit notification image 002SG201 consisting of a right arrow and the words "right hit" is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 to encourage the player to perform a right-hit operation.

In addition, in the second presentation mode, the name in the information display section 002SG053 of the decorative symbol is always hidden, even when the decorative symbol is stopped. In the third and fourth presentation modes, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner without including the information display section 002SG053. In this way, in the first presentation mode, displaying the information display section 002SG053 draws attention to the character's name, allowing the player to deepen their understanding of the character. Meanwhile, in the second and third presentation modes, keeping the information display section 002SG053 hidden allows players to focus more on the variable display and preview presentations rather than the character. Note that not only the name displayed in the information display section 002SG053, but also the information display section 002SG053 itself may be hidden.

As shown in Figure 32 (E), the decorative symbols and small symbols have different variable display modes. For example, during a period in which decorative symbols are scrolled at high speed, one decorative symbol is displayed frame-in from the top edge of the decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R, and takes a passing period Ta2 before it is displayed frame-out from the bottom edge. In other words, it takes a period Ta2 from when one decorative symbol is displayed until the decorative symbol display is finished. On the other hand, during the period Ta2, the small symbols of a losing combination are switched (updated) and displayed multiple times (for example, five times).

In more detail, if the frame rate (screen display speed) is set to 30 FPS (30 frames of images are displayed per second), 10 frames of images are displayed from the start to the end of the display of one decorative pattern, and this period Ta2 is approximately 0.3 seconds.

Meanwhile, the small symbols of different losing combinations (for example, "635," "175," "461," "532," "913," etc.) are displayed every two frames (period Ta1). In other words, during the period Ta2 from when one decorative symbol is displayed until the decorative symbol display ends, the small symbols of losing combinations are switched five times, each displayed for period Ta1 (period Ta1 < period Ta2). Note that although the small symbols of each losing combination are displayed for period Ta1, this is only for a moment (approximately 0.06 seconds), making it difficult to see visually.

Furthermore, if the performance control CPU 120 decides to stop displaying the confirmed decorative pattern of the losing combination (e.g., "326") based on the determination that the display result of the variable display will be a losing display result, after starting the variable display of the decorative pattern, and before stopping and displaying the confirmed decorative pattern of the losing combination (e.g., "326"), it switches the display so that the small pattern of the losing combination, "326", which is the same as the decorative pattern, is not displayed. This prevents the small pattern of the losing combination from revealing in advance that the decorative pattern of the losing combination will be stopped and displayed.

In addition, when the decorative symbols are scrolled in the first, second, and fourth presentation modes, or rotated in the third presentation mode, the variable display speed changes from low to high when the variable display starts, and changes from high to low when the variable display stops. In other words, the variable display speed is variable, while the small symbols are displayed variably at a constant speed from the start to the end of the variable display.

(Various decorative actions)
Next, various action displays of decorative symbols will be described with reference to Fig. 33. Fig. 33 shows (A) a decorative symbol variation start action, (B) a variation stop action, and (C) a loop action.

As shown in Figures 33(A) to 33(C), the decorative symbols for the low base state move within the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and rotate within the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, to provide a variable display. However, apart from this variable display movement, various actions (operations) can be performed to change the number display portion 002SG051 and character display portion 002SG052 of the decorative symbol.

(Change start action)
As shown in FIG. 33A , when variable display is initiated in the first and second presentation modes, a "variation start action" is executed in the decorative pattern, in which the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 flips its body orientation from left to right. Specifically, in the variation start action A1, the character is in a normal position facing diagonally forward to the right with both hands on their hips; in the variation start action A2, the character is in a position facing forward with both hands raised and spread; and in the variation start action A3, the character is in a position facing diagonally forward to the left with both hands on their hips. For the sake of convenience, only the states of three frames of the variation start actions A1, A2, and A3 are shown here; however, in reality, the character is displayed over several dozen frames within the variation start action period (A1-A3), and a variation start action (movement) is executed in which the character's body orientation changes in the order of diagonally forward to the right (A1), forward (A2), and diagonally forward to the left (A3).

Next, after the character's body faces diagonally forward and left, the decorative symbol moves (rises) a predetermined distance from its stopped position in the opposite direction to the scrolling direction (A4), and then begins to move downward, thereby starting the scrolling display. These change start actions A1 to A4 are executed over a change start action period Tb1 (see Figure 34), from the start of the variable display of the special symbol until the start of the scrolling display of the decorative symbol (the downward movement of the decorative symbol).

For ease of explanation, only four frames of the change start actions A1, A2, A3, and A4 are shown here, but in reality, the change start action (movement) is performed by displaying the character's movements over several dozen frames during the change start action period Tb1, which is until the character's body orientation is reversed.

In this embodiment, the variation start action is exemplified as one in which the character's body orientation is reversed left and right, but the present invention is not limited to this. The variation start action can be changed to other actions, such as changing the character's hair or facial expression, or moving their body. Furthermore, it is sufficient that at least one of the number display unit 002SG051, character display unit 002SG052, information display unit 002SG053, and base display unit 002SG054 that form the decorative pattern takes action. In other words, the variation start action is an action that is executed before the decorative pattern begins to scroll or rotate, and is an action that transitions during scrolling, i.e., a separate action that operates in a manner different from scrolling.

In addition, in the first presentation mode, during the variation start action period Tb1, the character name (character-related information) displayed in the information display section 002SG053 is erased (hidden). In this way, the character name is easy to see when it is displayed statically, but once the scrolling display begins, the character name is hidden, drawing attention to the scrolling display.

Specifically, the variable display period of the special symbols includes a pre-variable display period from when the variable display of the special symbols and small symbols begins until the scrolling display of the decorative symbols begins, and a post-variable display period after the scrolling display of the decorative symbols begins. The character's name (character-related information) displayed on the information display unit 002SG053 is erased after it is displayed during the pre-variable display period, i.e., when the variable start action is being executed, and before the post-variable display period begins, i.e., before the scrolling display of the decorative symbols begins. In this way, by erasing the name during the variable start action period Tb1, i.e., before the scrolling display begins, attention can be drawn to the variable display and preview effects rather than the name.

In addition, in this embodiment, the pre-variable display period is the period from when the variable display of special symbols and small symbols begins until the scrolling display of decorative symbols begins, but the present invention is not limited to this. The pre-variable display period may be the period from when the conditions for starting the variable display are met until the variable display of decorative symbols begins, that is, the period from when a starting winning occurs or when variable display based on reserved memory begins until the scrolling display of decorative symbols begins.

(Fluctuation stop action)
As shown in Figure 33 (B), when the variable display ends in the first and second presentation modes (when the decorative pattern is displayed in a temporary stop), a ``variable stop action'' is executed in the decorative pattern, in which the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 is enlarged.

Specifically, when the scrolling decorative pattern is temporarily stopped at the stop position, the character changes from its normal state, with hands on hips and facing diagonally forward to the right (variation stop action B1), to an enlarged state that extends farther above the base display unit 002SG054 than the normal state (variation stop action B2), and then is reduced in size and restored to its normal state (variation stop action B3).

For ease of explanation, only three frames of the fluctuation stop action B1, B2, and B3 are shown here, but in reality, the fluctuation stop action (movement) is performed by displaying the character in motion over several dozen frames during the fluctuation stop action period Tb2, from when the character is enlarged until it is restored.

In this embodiment, an example of a variation stop action is shown in which a character is enlarged, but the present invention is not limited to this. The variation stop action can be changed to other modes, such as changing the character's hair or facial expression, or moving its body. Furthermore, at least one of the number display unit 002SG051, character display unit 002SG052, information display unit 002SG053, and base display unit 002SG054 that form the decorative pattern may also take action. In other words, a variation stop action is an action that is executed when the scrolling display of the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, and is a separate action from actions that change, such as scrolling or rotating displays.

(Loop action)
As shown in Figure 33 (C), when the variable display ends in the first and second presentation modes (from the time the decorative pattern is temporarily displayed until it is displayed in a stopped state (pattern is confirmed)), the decorative pattern executes a "loop action" in which the character displayed in the character display unit 002SG052 repeatedly shrinks and restores, and the number display unit 002SG051 repeatedly rotates horizontally around a rotation axis facing up and down.

Specifically, in loop action C1, the character places both hands on their hips and faces diagonally forward to the right, with the numeric display unit 002SG051 facing forward in its normal state; in loop action C2, the character is reduced to fit within the pedestal display unit 002SG054, with the numeric display unit 002SG051 rotated approximately 45 degrees to the right; in loop action C3, the reduced character is enlarged and restored, with the numeric display unit 002SG051 facing forward in its normal state; and in loop action C4, the character is reduced to fit within the pedestal display unit 002SG054, with the numeric display unit 002SG051 rotated approximately 45 degrees to the left. In this loop action, loop actions C1, C2, C3, and C4 are executed in order over the loop action period Tb3, and after the loop action period Tb3 ends, the loop action returns to C1, and loop actions C1 to C4 are executed again over the loop action period Tb3. In other words, in the loop action, loop actions C1 to C4 are executed cyclically.

For ease of explanation, only four frames of loop action C1 to C4 are shown here, but in reality, the character is displayed in a reduced size and then restored, and the numeric display unit 002SG051 rotates and restores during loop action period Tb3, during which the character and numeric display unit 002SG051 are displayed over several dozen frames, resulting in a loop action (movement).

In this embodiment, the loop action is exemplified by a form in which the character is displayed in a reduced size and the number display unit 002SG051 rotates, but the present invention is not limited to this. The loop action can be changed to other forms, such as a change in the character's hair or facial expression, or body movement. Furthermore, it is sufficient that at least one of the number display unit 002SG051, character display unit 002SG052, information display unit 002SG053, and base display unit 002SG054, which form the decorative pattern, undergoes an action. In other words, a loop action is an action that is executed from the time the decorative pattern is temporarily displayed in a stopped position until it is displayed as a stopped pattern (pattern confirmation), and is a separate action from the action that changes during scrolling.

(Comparison of various action periods and light emission periods)
Next, various actions of decorative symbols and lamp light emission control will be described with reference to Fig. 34. Fig. 34 (A) is a diagram comparing various actions of decorative symbols and periods of lamp light emission control, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of loop light emission control of lamps.

As shown in Figure 34 (A), the decorative symbol fluctuation start actions A1 to A4 (see Figure 33 (A)) have an execution period, or fluctuation start action period Tb1, of approximately 1.5 seconds (fluctuation start action period Tb1 = approximately 1.5 seconds), and consist of approximately 45 frames of images. Furthermore, the decorative symbol fluctuation stop actions B1 to B3 (see Figure 33 (B)) have an execution period, or fluctuation stop action period Tb2, of approximately 0.8 seconds (fluctuation stop action period Tb2 = approximately 0.8 seconds), and consist of approximately 28 frames of images. Furthermore, the decorative symbol loop actions C1 to C4 (see Figure 33 (C)) have a loop action period Tb3, which is one cycle, of approximately 1.8 seconds (loop action period Tb3 = approximately 1.8 seconds), and consist of approximately 55 frames of images.

Also, as shown in Figure 34 (B), the movable body lamps 9d provided on the movable body 32A provided on the upper part of the image display device 5 and the movable body 32B provided on the lower part of the image display device 5, as well as the main lamp 9a and frame lamp 9b provided on the gaming machine frame 3, emit light based on loop light emission control performed by the performance control CPU 120 when the gaming state is in a low base state.

This loop light emission control, for example, emits light in the order of "white," "blue," and "yellow" over one cycle of loop light emission period Tb4, then returns to "white" after the loop light emission period Tb4 ends, and then emits light in the order of "white," "blue," and "yellow" again during loop light emission period Tb4, and this is repeated cyclically. In other words, with loop light emission control, light emissions of "white," "blue," and "yellow" are executed cyclically.

The loop light emission period Tb4 is longer than the loop action period Tb3 (loop action period Tb3 < loop light emission period Tb4). By doing this, in a low base state, the loop action is repeated to encourage the player to use the variable display of decorative symbols, while in a high base state, where variable display is more easily performed than in a low base state, excessive encouragement of variable display, which could be annoying, is prevented. Furthermore, because the loop action is repeated at a shorter cycle than the loop light emission control, the decorative symbols can be made to stand out in an appropriate way.

In this embodiment, the loop light emission control is exemplified as a form in which "white," "blue," and "yellow" are emitted cyclically, but the present invention is not limited to this. The light emission color and light emission pattern of the lamp in one cycle can be changed in various ways. For example, a light emission pattern in which "white," "blue," and "yellow" are emitted in this order, followed by "yellow," "white," and "blue" in this order may be cyclically emitted, or a light emission pattern in which four or more colors are emitted in sequence may be cyclically emitted.

The various actions of the decorative symbols shown in Figure 34 (A) are executed when the game state is controlled to a low base state and the presentation mode is the first presentation mode or the second presentation mode, but are not executed when the game state is controlled to a high base state and the presentation mode is the third presentation mode or the fourth presentation mode. Furthermore, the loop lighting control of the movable body lamp 9d, main lamp 9a, and frame lamp 9b shown in Figure 34 (B) is executed when the game state is controlled to a low base state and the presentation mode is the first presentation mode or the second presentation mode, but is not executed when the game state is controlled to a high base state and the presentation mode is the third presentation mode or the fourth presentation mode.

(Pending display)
Next, the hold display will be described with reference to Fig. 35. In Fig. 35, (A1) to (A4) and (B1) to (B4) are diagrams for explaining an example of the operation of the hold display.

As shown in Figure 35 (A1), when waiting to play (number of reserved memories "0"), no reserved display is displayed in the special reserved memory display area 5U and active display area 5F located at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5. The special reserved memory display area 5U consists of four display areas, with the first display area from the left corresponding to buffer number "1-1" in the start winning time reception command buffer 002SG194A, the second display area from the left corresponding to buffer number "1-2", the third display area from the left corresponding to buffer number "1-3", and the fourth display area from the left corresponding to buffer number "1-4".

As shown in Figure 35 (A2), when a start win (e.g., the first start win) occurs while waiting to play, the first hold display 002SG101 is displayed in the first display area from the left in the special symbol hold memory display area 5U. Next, the first hold display 002SG101 begins to move diagonally upward to the left (see Figure 35 (A3)), then moves diagonally downward to the left in a parabolic arc toward the active display area 5F, and when it reaches the active display area 5F, it is enlarged and displayed as the active display 002SG103 (see Figure 35 (A4)).

In other words, as shown in Figure 35 (A2), when a start winning occurs, the first pending display 002SG101 is displayed in the special symbol pending memory display area 5U and is not displayed in the active display area 5F, but when the first pending display 002SG101 is displayed in the special symbol pending memory display area 5U based on the occurrence of the first start winning, the variable display of the small symbol begins in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol.

However, although the variable display has begun, as shown in Figure 35 (A4), the first reserved display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left in the special reserved memory display area 5U, has not moved to the active display area 5F and switched to active display 002SG103. In other words, the shift display has not ended. Therefore, if the scrolling display of the decorative pattern begins before the shift display has ended, it will be difficult to tell which first reserved display 002SG101 the scrolling display corresponding to has begun, which could cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

As a result, the first reserved display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left in the special reserved memory display area 5U, is moved to the active display area 5F and displayed, and the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern does not begin until the reserved shift display period ends, during which it is switched to and displayed as active display 002SG103.Then, the aforementioned variable start action is executed, and the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern begins after the reserved shift display period ends.

Next, as shown in Figure 35 (B1), when the decorative pattern is being displayed variably and the number of reserved memories is "1" or more (for example, the number of reserved memories is "2"), the special pattern reserved memory display area 5U located at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5 displays the first reserved display 002SG101 in the first and second display areas from the left, and the active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F.

As shown in Figure 35 (B2), when the variable display corresponding to the active display 002SG103 displayed in the active display area 5F ends, the active display 002SG103 that was displayed in the active display area 5F is erased, and an erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to highlight that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

The erase effect 002SG110 continues to be displayed even after the active display 002SG103 has been erased, and is erased after the next variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left has begun, as shown below. In this way, by not creating a blank period in the presentation between the end of one variable display and the start of the next, it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest of the presentation. Furthermore, the erase effect 002SG110 allows the player to recognize that the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the completed variable display has been erased, and the display of a new active display 002SG103 allows the player to recognize that a new variable display has begun.

Next, when the variable display corresponding to the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left begins, the first hold display 002SG101 begins to move diagonally upward to the left (see Figure 35 (B3)), then moves diagonally downward to the left in a parabolic curve toward the active display area 5F, and by moving from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, it is switched and displayed as active display 002SG103 (see Figure 35 (B4)).

In addition, the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left begins to move horizontally to the left (see Figure 35 (B3)) in conjunction with the movement of the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left, and moves from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see Figure 35 (B4)).

In other words, as shown in Figure 35 (B2), after the active display 002SG103 is erased upon completion of the variable display, the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left has not yet moved to the active display area 5F, as shown in Figure 35 (B3). However, at the point when the moving display of the first pending display 002SG101 begins, the variable display of the small symbol begins in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol.

However, although the variable display has begun, as shown in Figure 35 (B4), the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special reserved memory display area 5U has not yet finished moving (shifting display) to the active display area 5F. Therefore, if the scrolling display of the decorative pattern begins in this state, it will be difficult to tell which first reserved display 002SG101 the scrolling display corresponding to has begun, which could cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

Therefore, until the end of the hold shift display period in which the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special hold memory display area 5U moves to the active display area 5F and is switched to and displayed as active display 002SG103, the aforementioned change start action is executed before the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern begins, and the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern begins after the hold shift display period ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U and the active display area 5F are configured in a common manner across the first to fourth presentation modes, so the shift display shown in FIG. 35 is executed in a common manner across the first to fourth presentation modes. However, for example, if a special symbol reserved memory display area 5U and an active display area 5F corresponding to each presentation mode are provided, it may be possible to execute a shift display in a manner corresponding to each presentation mode.

Also, as shown in FIG. 35, the presentation control CPU 120 executes a shift display that switches the first hold display 002SG101 or the second hold display 002SG102 to the active display 002SG103 in an operating mode (for example, a mode in which the hold display moves in a curved trajectory from the special chart hold memory display area 5U to the active display area 5F) that is common to multiple types of fluctuation patterns (for example, non-reach fluctuation patterns and reach fluctuation patterns, etc.), but it may also be possible to execute shift displays of multiple types of operating modes corresponding to each fluctuation pattern and each presentation mode. It may also be possible to execute shift displays that operate in different modes depending on whether the game state is in a low base state or a high base state.

Furthermore, operating modes common to multiple types of variation patterns in shift display include those in which at least one of multiple elements, such as the display mode, display speed, and shift display period until the pending display is switched to the active display, is common.

In this embodiment, when a start winning occurs, the first hold display 002SG101 (or second hold display 002SG102) is displayed in the first display area from the left of the special symbol hold memory display area 5U, and then the first hold display 002SG101 (or second hold display 002SG102) is moved (shifted) from the special symbol hold memory display area 5U to the active display area 5F. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the number of hold memories is "0", when a start winning occurs, the first hold display 002SG101 (or second hold display 002SG102) is not displayed in the special symbol hold memory display area 5U, and the active display 002SG103 may be displayed directly in the active display area 5F.

In addition, in this embodiment, as the variable display of the special symbol begins, a switching display (shift display) that switches the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the active display is exemplified, in which the first pending display 002SG101 moves non-linearly (e.g., in a mountain-like manner) from the first display area from the left in the special symbol pending memory display area 5U to the active display area 5F. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, the display may move linearly to the left. Furthermore, the switching display (shift display) is not limited to sliding the pending display, but may also temporarily erase the active display 002SG103 displayed in the active display area 5F and the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special symbol pending memory display area 5U, and begin displaying the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the new variable display in the active display area 5F.

(Example of operation of each part when variable display starts)
Next, an example of the operation of each part at the start of variable display will be described with reference to Figs. 36 to 45. Fig. 36 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the first presentation mode. Fig. 37 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols following Fig. 36. Fig. 38 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the second presentation mode. Fig. 39 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols following Fig. 38. Fig. 40 is a diagram showing details of the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in Fig. 38. Fig. 41 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols as Modification 1. Fig. 42 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols following Fig. 41. Fig. 43 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the third presentation mode. Fig. 44 is a diagram for explaining how decorative symbols appear. Fig. 45 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the fourth presentation mode.

Note that in the following diagrams showing the display screen of the image display device 5, diagrams using lines other than solid lines (for example, dashed lines or dotted lines) and arrows without symbols do not represent images displayed on the display screen, but are used to explain the movement of images, etc.

(Example of variable display operation in first presentation mode)
First, an example of the operation of each part when variable display of decorative symbols is started in the first presentation mode will be described with reference to Figures 36 and 37.

Figure 36 (A) shows the state in which, in the first presentation mode, the decorative symbols that were scrolling in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped at their stop positions. Here, the variable display of the special symbols has not yet ended, and the decorative symbols are in a temporarily stopped display state, so the small symbols displayed in display area 5S are being variably displayed. Additionally, the active display area 5F displays the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display, and the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U displays two first reserved displays 002SG101 (first reserved memory count "2").

Next, as shown in Figure 36 (B), when the variable display of the first special symbol ends and the small symbols are displayed in a non-winning combination, the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display that has ended is erased from the active display area 5F, and an erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

As shown in Figure 36 (C), when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left begins, the variable display of the small symbols begins, while the decorative symbol change start action (see Figure 33 (A)) begins in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, right decorative symbol display area 5R, and middle decorative symbol display area, in that order. In addition, a shift display begins in which the two first pending displays 002SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first hold display 002SG101 begins moving diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left in a parabolic arc, moving from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, where it is displayed as active display 002SG103 (see Figure 36(D)). Furthermore, the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left begins to move horizontally (shift display) to the left in conjunction with the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left (see Figure 36(C)), and moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see Figure 36(D)).

Note that the erase effect 002SG110 displayed in Figure 36 (B) will continue to be displayed for a while even after the next variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left has begun.

As shown in Figure 36 (E), when the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends, the decorative pattern actions A1 to A3 displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L end and the upward action A4 begins, and when the upward movement (action A4) ends, downward movement begins and the scrolling display begins, as shown in Figure 36 (F).

Next, as shown in Figure 36 (F), actions A1 to A3 of the decorative pattern displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R end, and upward action A4 begins. When the upward movement (action A4) ends, downward movement begins, and the scrolling display begins, as shown in Figure 36 (G).

Next, as shown in Figure 36 (G), actions A1 to A3 of the decorative symbols displayed in the center decorative symbol display area 5C end, and upward action A4 begins. When the upward movement (action A4) ends, downward movement begins, and scrolling display begins, as shown in Figure 36 (H).

In this way, as the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left begins and the variable display of the small pattern begins, the variable display of the decorative patterns that are displayed in a static state in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, right decorative pattern display area 5R and middle decorative pattern display area begins, but the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R does not begin until the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends.

In other words, once the first pending display 002SG101 has completed moving to the active display area 5F (shift display has ended) and is displayed as active display 002SG103, scrolling display begins, allowing the player to seamlessly recognize that a variable display based on that pending display has begun. Furthermore, from the time the shift display begins with the start of the variable display until the shift display ends, the decorative symbols do not scroll, but a change start action is performed, allowing the player to recognize that a variable display has begun.

In addition, when the scrolling display of the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begins, the scrolling display speed (movement speed) gradually increases from slow to medium to high speed, and the image transmittance (transparency) gradually increases in proportion to the increase in display speed. At high speeds, a fade-out display is executed, with the transmittance reaching nearly 100%. For example, as shown in Figures 36(F) and (G), the decorative pattern in left decorative pattern display area 5L is displayed at low speed immediately after the start of variable display, then at medium speed as shown in Figure 36(H), and then at high speed as shown in Figures 37(I), (J), and (K). As the speed increases, the transmittance also increases, making it extremely difficult to visually discern each decorative pattern at high speeds. Additionally, as shown in Figures 36(G) to 37(K), the decorative patterns in the right decorative pattern display area 5R and the center decorative pattern display area 5R are also displayed at a low speed immediately after variable display begins, then at a medium speed, and then at a high speed, with a fade-out display in which the transparency also increases as the speed increases.

(Example of variable display operation in the second presentation mode)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when variable display of decorative symbols starts in the second presentation mode will be described with reference to Figures 38 and 39.

Figure 38 (A) shows the state in which, in the second presentation mode, the decorative symbols that were scrolling in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped at their rest positions. Here, the variable display of the special symbols has not yet ended, and the decorative symbols are in a temporarily stopped display state, so the small symbols displayed in display area 5S are being variably displayed. In addition, the active display area 5F displays the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display, and the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U displays two first reserved displays 002SG101 (first reserved memory count "2"). In addition, in the second presentation mode, the name in the decorative symbol information display section 002SG053 is always hidden, even when the decorative symbols are stopped.

Next, as shown in Figure 38 (B), when the variable display of the first special symbol ends and the small symbols are displayed in a non-winning combination, the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display that has ended is erased from the active display area 5F, and an erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

As shown in Figure 38 (C), when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left begins, the variable display of the small symbols begins, while the decorative symbol change start action (see Figure 33 (A)) begins in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, right decorative symbol display area 5R, and middle decorative symbol display area, in that order. In addition, a shift display begins in which the two first pending displays 002SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first hold display 002SG101 begins moving diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left in a parabolic arc, moving from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, where it is displayed as active display 002SG103 (see Figure 38(D)). Furthermore, the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left begins to move horizontally (shift display) to the left in conjunction with the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left (see Figure 38(C)), and moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see Figure 38(D)).

Note that the erase effect 002SG110 displayed in Figure 38 (B) will continue to be displayed for a while even after the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left has begun.

As shown in Figure 38 (E), when the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends, the decorative pattern actions A1 to A3 displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L end and the retreating action A4 begins, and when the retreating movement (action A4) to the back of the display screen ends, forward movement begins and the scrolling display begins, as shown in Figure 38 (F).

Next, as shown in Figure 38 (F), actions A1 to A3 of the decorative pattern displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R end, and backward action A4 begins. When the backward movement (action A4) ends, forward movement begins and the scrolling display begins, as shown in Figure 38 (G).

Next, as shown in Figure 38 (G), actions A1 to A3 of the decorative symbols displayed in the center decorative symbol display area 5C end, and backward action A4 begins. When the backward movement (action A4) ends, forward movement begins and scrolling display begins, as shown in Figure 38 (H).

In this way, as the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left begins and the variable display of the small pattern begins, the variable display of the decorative patterns that are displayed in a static state in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, right decorative pattern display area 5R and middle decorative pattern display area begins, but the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R does not begin until the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends.

In other words, once the first pending display 002SG101 has completed moving to the active display area 5F (shift display has ended) and is displayed as active display 002SG103, scrolling display begins, allowing the player to seamlessly recognize that a variable display based on that pending display has begun. Furthermore, from the time the shift display begins with the start of the variable display until the shift display ends, the decorative symbols do not scroll, but a change start action is performed, allowing the player to recognize that a variable display has begun.

Furthermore, when the scrolling display of the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begins, the scrolling display speed (movement speed) gradually increases from slow to medium to high speed, and the transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases in proportion to the increase in display speed. At high speeds, a fade-out display is executed, with the transmittance reaching nearly 100%. For example, as shown in Figures 38(F) and (G), the decorative pattern in left decorative pattern display area 5L is displayed at low speed immediately after the start of variable display, then at medium speed as shown in Figure 38(H), and then at high speed as shown in Figures 39(I), (J), and (K). As the speed increases, the transmittance also increases, making it extremely difficult to visually discern each decorative pattern at high speeds. Additionally, as shown in Figures 38(G) to 39(K), the decorative patterns in the right decorative pattern display area 5R and the center decorative pattern display area 5R are also displayed at a low speed immediately after variable display begins, then at a medium speed, and then at a high speed, and a fade-out display is executed in which the transparency also increases as the speed increases.

In this way, the scrolling display in the second presentation mode is configured to move and disappear while increasing its transmittance (transparency) from the back of the screen to the front. Specifically, as shown in Figures 40(A) and (B), the scrolling display is configured to cause the decorative symbols to move in a curved manner from the back to the front. Therefore, between the time a decorative symbol is displayed in frame-in mode in decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, or 5R and the time it is displayed out of frame, another decorative symbol (e.g., decorative symbol "3") that is positioned so that it partially overlaps with one decorative symbol (e.g., decorative symbol "2") may be visible through decorative symbol "2." At this time, the character in character display section 002SG052 for decorative pattern "3" is displayed, while the number ("3") in number display section 002SG051 becomes difficult to see (or is not displayed), and as shown in Figure 40 (C), the decorative pattern "2" is erased, and then the number ("3") in number display section 002SG051 for decorative pattern "3" is displayed.

In addition, the other decorative pattern "3" located behind the first decorative pattern "2" can be seen through the first decorative pattern "2". In this case, the character in the character display unit 002SG052 of the other decorative pattern "3" located behind is displayed, while the number in the number display unit 002SG051 is not displayed. The decorative pattern "2" is erased before the number for the decorative pattern "3" is displayed. This means that the number "2" of the first decorative pattern and the other decorative pattern "3" do not overlap, preventing the decorative pattern "2" located in the foreground from becoming difficult to see.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 40(A), from the time the decorative symbols are displayed in frame-in mode in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R until they are displayed out of frame mode as shown in Figure 40(C), they move and disappear while increasing their transmittance (transparency). However, at the start of the variable display, as mentioned above, the decorative symbols are faded out in proportion to the increase in display speed, so they move from the back of the screen to the front while increasing their transmittance (transparency) as they fade out in accordance with the display speed. Therefore, from the time the scrolling display starts until the high-speed display begins, it appears as shown in Figures 40(A) to 40(C), but after the fade-out display period ends and the high-speed display begins, it becomes extremely difficult to see the decorative symbols even at the back of the screen.

(Example of operation of variable display as modified example 1)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when variable display of decorative symbols is started as Modification 1 will be described with reference to Figures 41 and 42. In Modification 1, decorative symbols are displayed in a curved scrolling manner as in the second presentation mode, but they move in the opposite direction to the second mode, that is, from the front side of the screen to the back side.

The flow in Figures 41(A) to 41(D) is similar to that in Figures 38(A) to 38(D), so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

As shown in Figure 41 (E), when the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends, the decorative pattern actions A1 to A3 displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L end and backward action A4 begins, and when the forward movement (action A4) toward the front of the display screen ends, backward movement begins and the scrolling display begins, as shown in Figure 41 (F).

Next, as shown in Figure 41 (F), actions A1 to A3 of the decorative pattern displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R end, and forward action A4 begins. When the forward movement (action A4) ends, backward movement begins and the scrolling display begins, as shown in Figure 41 (G).

Next, as shown in Figure 41 (G), actions A1 to A3 of the decorative symbols displayed in the center decorative symbol display area 5C end, and forward action A4 begins. When the forward movement (action A4) ends, backward movement begins and scrolling display begins, as shown in Figure 41 (H).

In this way, as the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left begins and the variable display of the small pattern begins, the variable display of the decorative patterns that are displayed in a static state in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, right decorative pattern display area 5R and middle decorative pattern display area begins, but the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R does not begin until the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends.

In other words, once the first pending display 002SG101 has completed moving to the active display area 5F (shift display has ended) and is displayed as active display 002SG103, scrolling display begins, allowing the player to seamlessly recognize that a variable display based on that pending display has begun. Furthermore, from the time the shift display begins with the start of the variable display until the shift display ends, the decorative symbols do not scroll, but a change start action is performed, allowing the player to recognize that a variable display has begun.

Furthermore, when the scrolling display of the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begins, the scrolling display speed (movement speed) gradually increases from slow to medium to high speed, and the transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases in proportion to the increase in display speed. At high speeds, a fade-out display is executed, with the transmittance reaching nearly 100%. For example, as shown in Figures 41(F) and (G), the decorative pattern in left decorative pattern display area 5L is displayed at low speed immediately after the start of variable display, then at medium speed as shown in Figure 41(H), and then at high speed as shown in Figures 42(I), (J), and (K). As the speed increases, the transmittance also increases, making it extremely difficult to visually discern each decorative pattern at high speeds. Additionally, as shown in Figures 41(G) to 42(K), the decorative patterns in the right decorative pattern display area 5R and the decorative patterns in the center decorative pattern display area 5R are also displayed at a slow speed immediately after variable display begins, then at a medium speed, and then at a high speed, with a fade-out display in which the transparency also increases as the speed increases.

In this way, the scrolling display of variant 1 is designed to move and disappear while increasing its transmittance (transparency) from the front to the back of the screen. Specifically, as shown in Figures 41 (G) and (H), the scrolling display is designed to cause the decorative symbols to move in a curved manner from the front to the back. Therefore, between the time a decorative symbol is framed in and displayed in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R and the time it is framed out, another decorative symbol (e.g., decorative symbol "2") positioned so that it partially overlaps the decorative symbol (e.g., decorative symbol "3") on the back side may become visible through the decorative symbol "3." In this case, the character in character display portion 002SG052 of decorative symbol "2" is displayed, while the number ("2") in number display portion 002SG051 is difficult to see (or is not displayed).

In addition, the other decorative pattern "2" located behind the first decorative pattern "3" can be seen through the first decorative pattern "3". In this case, the character in the character display unit 002SG052 of the other decorative pattern "2" located behind is displayed, while the number in the number display unit 002SG051 is not displayed. The decorative pattern "2" is erased before the number for the decorative pattern "3" is displayed. This means that the number "3" of the first decorative pattern and the other decorative pattern "2" do not overlap and are prevented from making the decorative pattern "3" located in the foreground difficult to see.

In addition, in this variant example 1, the decorative patterns are displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in a frame-in manner, and then disappear as they move with increasing transmittance (transparency). However, at the start of the variable display, as mentioned above, the decorative patterns are displayed in a fade-out manner in proportion to the increase in display speed, so they are moved from the back of the screen to the front while increasing their transmittance (transparency) as they fade out in accordance with the display speed. Therefore, from the start of the scrolling display until the high-speed display begins, it appears as shown in Figures 41(F) to 41(H). However, after the fade-out display period ends and the high-speed display begins, it becomes extremely difficult to see the decorative patterns even at the back of the screen.

(Example of variable display operation in the third presentation mode)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when variable display of decorative symbols starts in the third presentation mode will be described with reference to Figures 43 and 44.

Figure 43 (A) shows the state in which, in the third presentation mode, the decorative symbols that were rotating in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped at their rest positions. Here, the variable display of the special symbols has not yet ended, and the decorative symbols are in a temporarily stopped display state, so the small symbols displayed in display area 5S are being variably displayed. Additionally, the active display area 5F displays the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display, and the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U displays two first reserved displays 002SG101 (first reserved memory count "2"). Additionally, the small symbols and right-hit notification image 002SG201 are displayed superimposed on the front side (upper layer) of the decorative symbols.

Next, as shown in Figure 43 (B), when the variable display of the first special symbol ends and the small symbols are displayed in a non-winning combination, the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display that has ended is erased from the active display area 5F, and an erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

As shown in Figure 43 (C), when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left begins, the variable display of the small symbols begins, but because the high base state is in effect, the decorative symbol variation start action (see Figure 33 (A)) is not performed. In addition, a shift display begins in which the two first pending displays 002SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first hold display 002SG101 begins moving diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left in a parabolic arc, moving from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, where it is displayed as active display 002SG103 (see Figure 43(D)). Furthermore, the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left begins to move horizontally (shift display) to the left in conjunction with the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left (see Figure 43(C)), and moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see Figure 43(D)).

Note that the erase effect 002SG110 displayed in Figure 43 (B) will continue to be displayed for a while even after the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left has begun.

As shown in Figure 43 (F), when the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends, the decorative symbols displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R begin to rotate. In the high base state, the decorative symbols displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R begin to rotate all at once.

In this way, when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left begins, the rotating display of the decorative patterns displayed in a static state in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R begins all at once, but the rotating display of the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R does not begin until the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends.

In other words, once the first pending display 002SG101 has completed moving to the active display area 5F (shift display has ended) and is displayed as active display 002SG103, the rotating display begins, allowing the player to seamlessly recognize that a variable display based on that pending display has begun.

In addition, when the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begin to rotate, the rotation display speed (movement speed) gradually increases from slow to medium to high speed, and the transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases in proportion to the increase in display speed, until at high speeds a fade-out display is executed with the transmittance reaching nearly 100%. For example, as shown in Figures 43(E) and (F), the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed at slow speed immediately after the start of variable display, then at medium speed as shown in Figure 43(G), before reaching high speed as shown in Figure 43(H). As the transmittance increases as the speed increases, it becomes extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern at high speeds.

As shown in Figure 44, the rotating display in the third presentation mode rotates the decorative symbols to repeatedly display them on the first surface 5a and the second surface 5b. The decorative symbols are semi-transparent during the rotating display and become opaque when the rotating display stops. During the rotating display, the number display section 002SG051 on the first surface 5a of the decorative symbols, which are semi-transparent, is displayed, while the number display section 002SG051 on the second surface 5b is not displayed.

For example, as shown in Figure 44 (A), when the decorative pattern is displayed rotating at a slow speed and in a semi-transparent state where the transparency is the first transparency, the decorative pattern displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is such that the number "326" displayed on the first surface 5a can be seen, but the number "437" (to be displayed) displayed on the reverse side, the second surface 5b, is difficult to see.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 44 (B), when the decorative pattern is displayed rotating at a medium speed and in a semi-transparent state where the transmittance is a second transmittance higher than the first transmittance, the decorative pattern displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is such that the number "437" displayed on the second surface 5b is visible, but the number "548" (to be displayed) displayed on the reverse side, the first surface 5a, is difficult to see.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 44 (C), when the decorative patterns are displayed in a semi-transparent state where they are rotated at high speed and have a third transmittance higher than the second transmittance, the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are such that the number "763" displayed on the first surface 5a is difficult to see, while the number "874" (to be displayed) displayed on the reverse, second surface 5b is difficult to see. Note that both the first surface 5a and the second surface 5b are difficult to see during the high-speed rotation display.

In this way, when the decorative pattern is rotated to repeatedly display both the front and back sides of the decorative pattern, the decorative pattern becomes semi-transparent, making it possible to see not only the front side (e.g., first surface 5a) but also the back side (e.g., second surface 5b). However, since the numbers on the front side (e.g., first surface 5a) are displayed while the numbers on the back side (e.g., second surface 5b) are not, the numbers on the front and back sides of the decorative pattern do not overlap, preventing the numbers on the front side from becoming difficult to read. Furthermore, even when the decorative pattern is being displayed in a variable display mode in the high base state, a loop illumination control (see Figure 34(B)) corresponding to the background pattern may be used to repeatedly illuminate the white, blue, and yellow light patterns. This simplifies the control of the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and movable body lamp 9d.

(Example of variable display operation in the fourth presentation mode)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when variable display of decorative symbols starts in the fourth presentation mode will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 45 (A) shows the state in which the decorative symbols that were scrolling in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily displayed at their respective stop positions in the fourth presentation mode. Here, the variable display of the special symbols has not yet ended, and the decorative symbols are temporarily displayed, so the small symbols displayed in the display area 5S are still being displayed. Additionally, the active display area 5F displays the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display, and the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U displays two first reserved displays 002SG101 (first reserved memory count "2"). Additionally, the small symbols and right-hit notification image 002SG201 are displayed superimposed on the front side (upper layer) of the decorative symbols. (See Figure 33 (A))

Next, as shown in Figure 45 (B), when the variable display of the first special symbol ends and the small symbols are displayed in a non-winning combination, the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display that has ended is erased from the active display area 5F, and an erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

As shown in Figure 45 (C), when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left begins, the variable display of the small symbols begins, but because the high base state is in effect, the decorative symbol variation start action (see Figure 33 (A)) is not performed. In addition, a shift display begins in which the two first pending displays 002SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first hold display 002SG101 begins moving diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left in a parabolic arc, moving from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, where it is displayed as active display 002SG103 (see Figure 45(D)). Furthermore, the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left begins to move horizontally (shift display) to the left in conjunction with the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left (see Figure 45(C)), and moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see Figure 45(D)).

Note that the erase effect 002SG110 displayed in Figure 45 (B) will continue to be displayed for a while even after the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left has begun.

As shown in Figure 45 (F), when the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends, the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R begins. In the high base state, the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R begins all at once.

In this way, when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left begins, the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in a static state in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R begins all at once, but the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R does not begin until the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends.

In other words, once the first pending display 002SG101 has completed moving to the active display area 5F (shift display has ended) and is displayed as active display 002SG103, scrolling display begins, allowing the player to seamlessly recognize that a variable display based on that pending display has begun.

In addition, when scrolling display of the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begins, the scrolling display speed (movement speed) gradually increases from slow to medium to fast, and the transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases in proportion to the increase in display speed, until at high speeds a fade-out display is executed where the transmittance reaches nearly 100%. For example, as shown in Figures 45(E) and (F), the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed at slow speed immediately after variable display begins, then at medium speed as shown in Figure 45(G), before reaching high speed as shown in Figure 45(H). As the transmittance increases as the speed increases, it becomes extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern at high speeds.

As explained above, in the low base state, when the effect control CPU 120 is performing a pending shift display in conjunction with the start of variable display, it performs an action to start changing the decorative pattern, and does not start scrolling the decorative pattern until the shift display that switches the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special pending memory display area 5U to active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F is completed.

By doing this, when the variable display of the special symbol begins, a shift display is performed to switch the pending display corresponding to that variable display to an active display, and by performing a variable start action to operate the decorative symbol in a manner different from the moving display while the shift display is in progress, the period required for the shift display can be used effectively. Furthermore, because the variable start action is performed when the shift display is in a high base state, which is more advantageous than a low base state, the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol in the high base state can be made more exciting.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 can execute variable display of decorative patterns based on a variable pattern designation command sent from the main board 11 during the performance control process in step S76, and can perform a common shift display when variable display is executed based on a first type of variable pattern designation command (e.g., a non-reach variable pattern designation command) and when variable display is executed based on a second type of variable pattern designation command (e.g., a reach variable pattern designation command).As a common shift display is performed even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is executed, the number of shift display patterns can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the low base state, the performance control CPU 120 performs an action to start changing the decorative pattern when a pending shift display is being displayed in response to the start of variable display, and does not start scrolling the decorative pattern until the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special chart pending memory display area 5U is switched and displayed as active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F. On the other hand, in the high base state, an example has been given in which the performance control CPU 120 does not perform an action to start changing the decorative pattern when a pending shift display is being displayed in response to the start of variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the high base state, the performance control CPU 120 performs an action to start changing the decorative pattern when a pending shift display is being displayed in response to the start of variable display, and does not start scrolling the decorative pattern until the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special chart pending memory display area 5U is switched and displayed as active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F.

By doing this, when the variable display of the special symbol begins, a shift display is performed to switch the pending display corresponding to that variable display to an active display, and by performing a variable start action to operate the decorative symbol in a manner different from the moving display while the shift display is in progress, the period required for the shift display can be used effectively. Furthermore, because the variable start action is performed when the shift display is in a high base state, which is more advantageous than a low base state, the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol in the high base state can be made more exciting.

Furthermore, even in the high base state, the performance control CPU 120 can execute variable display of decorative symbols based on the variable pattern designation command sent from the main board 11 in the performance control process processing of step S76, and a common shift display can be executed when variable display is executed based on a first type of variable pattern designation command (e.g., a non-reach variable pattern designation command) and when variable display is executed based on a second type of variable pattern designation command (e.g., a reach variable pattern designation command).Since a common shift display is executed even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is executed, the number of shift display patterns can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in Figures 52 and 53, an example is given in which, when the variable display of a special symbol begins, the shift display that switches the reserved display corresponding to the variable display to the active display ends, and then the scrolling display of the decorative symbols displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the order of left, right, and center begins. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as the scrolling display of the decorative symbols displayed in any one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R among the left, right, and center begins when the shift display begins, and then the shift display that switches the reserved display corresponding to the variable display to the active display ends, when the variable display of a special symbol begins, then the scrolling display of the decorative symbols displayed in any one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may begin when the shift display is being performed.

(Example of operation of each part when a symbol stops displaying)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when a pattern stops will be explained based on Fig. 46 to Fig. 50. Fig. 46 is a diagram showing the flow of the stopped display of decorative patterns in the first presentation mode (second presentation mode). Fig. 47 is a diagram showing the flow of the stopped display of decorative patterns following Fig. 46. Fig. 48 (A) to (G) are diagrams showing the flow of the stopped display of decorative patterns when the number of reserved memories is three in the first presentation mode (second presentation mode). Fig. 49 (A) and (B) are diagrams showing the flow of the stopped display of decorative patterns in the fourth presentation mode (third presentation mode).

(Example of the operation of the symbol stop display in the first performance mode [number of reserved memories "2 or less"])
First, an example of the operation of each part when a decorative symbol is displayed in a variable display based on a losing variable pattern when the number of reserved memories is two or less in the first presentation mode will be explained with reference to Figures 46 and 47. Note that the second presentation mode is almost the same as the first presentation mode except for the background image, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

As shown in Figure 46 (A), when decorative patterns are being scrolled at high speed in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, as the timing for each decorative pattern to stop approaches, the display speed of the decorative patterns in left decorative pattern display area 5L, which had been displayed at high speed, first slows down, and a fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, improving the visibility of the decorative patterns (see Figure 46 (B)).

Next, when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the left decorative symbol display area 5L (see Figure 46 (C)), the transparency of the decorative symbol becomes nearly 0% (opaque), the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 enlarges (see Figure 46 (D)), and then a variable stop action (see Figure 33 (B)) is executed to restore it to its original size (see Figure 46 (E)). Then, while the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, a loop action (see Figure 33 (C)) is initiated and is executed repeatedly until the variable display of the special symbol ends.

When the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped, as shown in Figure 46 (F), the display speed of the decorative pattern in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, which had been displayed at high speed, slows down, and a fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, improving the visibility of the decorative pattern (see Figure 46 (F)).

Next, when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the right decorative symbol display area 5R (see Figure 46 (G)), the transparency of the decorative symbol becomes nearly 0% (opaque), the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 enlarges (see Figure 46 (H)), and then a variable stop action (see Figure 33 (B)) is executed to restore it to its original size (see Figure 47 (I)). Then, while the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, a loop action (see Figure 33 (C)) is initiated and is executed repeatedly until the variable display of the special symbol ends.

When the decorative pattern in the right decorative pattern display area 5R is temporarily stopped, as shown in Figure 47(J), the display speed of the decorative pattern in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, which had been displayed at high speed, slows down, and a fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, improving the visibility of the decorative pattern (see Figure 47(K)).

Next, when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the right decorative symbol display area 5R (see Figure 47 (K)), the transparency of the decorative symbol becomes nearly 0% (opaque), the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 enlarges (see Figure 47 (L)), and then a variable stop action (see Figure 33 (B)) is executed to restore it to its original size (see Figure 47 (M)). Then, while the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, a loop action (see Figure 33 (C)) is initiated and is executed repeatedly until the variable display of the special symbol ends.

After that, when the variable display of the special symbol ends, the small symbol is displayed as a static symbol, the loop action of the decorative symbol that was temporarily displayed as a static symbol in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R ends, and the active display 002SG103 is erased (see Figure 47 (M)).

(Example of the operation of the symbol stop display in the first performance mode [number of reserved memories "3"])
Next, an example of the operation of each part when the decorative symbols are displayed in a static state in the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 3 in the first presentation mode will be explained based on Figures 48(A) to 48(G). Note that the second presentation mode is almost the same as the first presentation mode except for the background image, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

As shown in Figure 48 (A), when decorative patterns are being scrolled at high speed in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, as the timing for each decorative pattern to stop approaches, the display speed of the decorative patterns in left decorative pattern display area 5L, which had been displayed at high speed, first slows down, and a fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, improving the visibility of the decorative patterns (see Figure 48 (B)).

Next, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the left decorative pattern display area 5L (see Figure 48 (C)), the transparency of the decorative pattern becomes nearly 0% (opaque), but the variable stop action of the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 (see Figure 33 (B)) is not executed. In addition, after the temporary stop display, the character's loop action (see Figure 33 (C)) is executed.

When the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped, the display speed of the decorative pattern in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, which had been displayed at high speed, slows down, and a fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, improving the visibility of the decorative pattern (see Figure 48 (D)).

Next, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the right decorative pattern display area 5R (see Figure 46 (E)), the transparency of the decorative pattern becomes nearly 0% (opaque), but the variable stop action of the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 (see Figure 33 (B)) is not executed. In addition, after the temporary stop display, the character's loop action (see Figure 33 (C)) is executed.

When the decorative pattern in the right decorative pattern display area 5R is temporarily stopped, the display speed of the decorative pattern in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, which had been displayed at high speed, slows down, and a fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, improving the visibility of the decorative pattern (see Figure 48 (F)).

Next, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the right decorative pattern display area 5R (see Figure 48 (G)), the transparency of the decorative pattern becomes nearly 0% (opaque), but the variable stop action of the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 (see Figure 33 (B)) is not executed. In addition, after the temporary stop display, the character's loop action (see Figure 33 (C)) is executed.

After that, when the variable display of the special symbol ends, the small symbol is displayed as a static symbol, the loop action of the decorative symbol that was temporarily displayed as a static symbol in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R ends, and the active display 002SG103 is erased (see Figure 48 (G)).

(Example of the operation of the stop display of the symbol in the fourth performance mode)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when the decorative symbols are displayed in a static state in the variable display in the fourth presentation mode will be explained based on Figures 49(A) and 49(B). Note that the third presentation mode is almost the same as the fourth presentation mode except for the background image, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

As shown in Figure 49 (A), when decorative patterns are being scrolled at high speed in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, as the timing for each decorative pattern to stop approaching, the display speed of the decorative patterns in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, which were being displayed at high speed, simultaneously slows down, and a fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, improving the visibility of each decorative pattern (see Figure 49 (B)).

The left, center, and right decorative symbols are then simultaneously displayed in a temporary stop state at the stop positions of decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Here, the transparency of the decorative symbols becomes nearly 0% (opaque), but the variable stop action of the character displayed in character display section 002SG052 (see Figure 33 (B)) is not executed. Furthermore, the character's loop action (see Figure 33 (C)) after the temporary stop display is not executed either.

After that, when the variable display of the special symbol ends, the small symbol is displayed as a static symbol, the decorative symbols that were temporarily displayed as static symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed as static symbols, and the active display 002SG103 is erased (see Figure 49 (C)).

In this way, in a low base state, depending on the number of reserved memories (for example, when the number of reserved memories is two or less and a variable display based on an abbreviated variable pattern is executed), the variable stop action adds variety to the movement of the decorative pattern when it is temporarily stopped, enhancing interest. On the other hand, when the number of reserved memories is three in a low base state, or when a high base state where the average variable display period is short and the decorative pattern is difficult to see, and a variable display based on abbreviated variable patterns is executed regardless of the number of reserved memories, the variable stop action is not executed, and the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped while maintaining its size, allowing it to be stopped without impairing its visibility.

In this embodiment, the animation (moving image) data of the various movements of the decorative patterns can be created by combining materials for each period, such as: 1. From the start of the variable display to just before the high-speed variable display, 2. High-speed variable display, 3. Slow variable display to stop of the variable display, and 4. Stopped pattern. However, with regard to 2. High-speed variable display, as shown in Figures 30 (A2), (B2), (C2), and (D2), the transmittance of the decorative patterns is high and they are almost transparent, and while it is possible to see how they are being displayed in a variable manner at high speed, it is extremely difficult to visually determine which decorative patterns have passed by (indicated by arrows in Figures 30 (A2), (B2), (C2), and (D2)). Therefore, even if there is high-speed variable display animation data for each type of decorative pattern (a type that corresponds to which decorative pattern the high-speed variable display starts from), it would not be very meaningful and would only take up space in ROM 121, so it is preferable that common data be used for the high-speed variable display animation data regardless of which decorative pattern the high-speed variable display starts from.

(Background change example)
Next, an example of background change operation will be described with reference to Figures 50 and 51. In Figure 50, (A1) shows the first background image, (A2) shows the first predetermined background image, and (B) shows the background change. Figure 51 shows the flow of background change in the first presentation mode.

As shown in Figure 50, in the first presentation mode, the background image can be switched between a first background image 002SG081 (see Figure 50 (A1)), which shows a daytime cityscape seen from afar, and a first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see Figure 50 (A2)), which shows a daytime cityscape. The background image is switched when a predetermined switching condition is met (for example, when an SP reach miss occurs). In this embodiment, the background image is switched at a predetermined timing in the variable display following an SP reach miss (for example, when the variable display starts).

In this embodiment, an example has been given in which the first presentation mode switches between the first background image 002SG081 and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A, but the present invention is not limited to this. Although not specifically shown, it may be possible to selectively switch between three or more types of background images, including the first background image 002SG081 and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A. Furthermore, the fulfillment of the switching conditions is not limited to the above, and may also be fulfilled when a specific presentation other than SP Reach is executed, when a single background image is displayed continuously for a predetermined period of time, or when a selection is made by the player's operation.

In addition, in this embodiment, the start timing of the switching display is the start timing of the variable display of the decorative symbols, but the present invention is not limited to this and may be any timing during the variable display period, such as before the decorative symbols reach a reach state.

As shown in FIG. 50(B), when switching from first background image 002SG081 to first predetermined background image 002SG081A (or from first predetermined background image 002SG081A to first background image 002SG081), a fade-out display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) of first background image 002SG081, which is displayed at 100% opacity, is gradually increased until it disappears, while a fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) of first predetermined background image 002SG081A, which is hidden at 0% opacity, is gradually decreased. In other words, a cross-fade display is executed in which the fade-out display period A1 of first background image 002SG081 and the fade-in display period B1 of first predetermined background image 002SG081A are synchronized (fade-out display period A1 = fade-in display period B1). The fade-out display period A1 and fade-in display period B1 are, for example, approximately 6 seconds, during which approximately 210 frames of image are displayed.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 51(A), the transmittance (transparency) of the first background image 002SG081 increases over time, making it more difficult to see (see Figure 51(B)), while the transmittance (transparency) of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A, which is displayed in a layer below the first background image 002SG081, decreases, gradually becoming more visible (see Figure 51(C)).

Next, the visibility of the first background image 002SG081 decreases further, while the visibility of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A increases (see Figures 51(D) and (E)). Finally, the transmittance of the first background image 002SG081 reaches 100% and is erased, while the transmittance of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A reaches 0%, making it easily visible (see Figure 51(F)).

In the present embodiment, the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-in display period B1 are synchronized, that is, the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-in display period B1 are the same duration. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only a portion of the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-in display period B1 may overlap, or the fade-in display period B1 may start after the fade-out display period A1 ends.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, an example has been given in which the transmittance always increases at a constant rate when the background image or decorative pattern is faded out, and the transmittance always decreases at a constant rate when the background image or decorative pattern is faded in, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the transmittance when the background image is faded out or faded in is not necessarily limited to increasing or decreasing at a constant rate. For example, the transmittance may increase or decrease slowly in a first period, and then increase or decrease rapidly in a second period.

Furthermore, while this embodiment exemplifies a form in which the background image is switched and displayed in one presentation mode (for example, the first presentation mode or the second presentation mode), the present invention is not limited to this and can also be applied to a form in which the background image is switched from a first background image corresponding to the first presentation mode to a second background image corresponding to the second presentation mode, and to a form in which the fade-out display period of the first background image and the fade-in display period of the second background image are synchronized.

(Example of operation of each part in variable display)
Next, examples of the operation of each part in the variable display in each presentation mode will be described with reference to Figs. 52 to 55. Fig. 52 is a timing chart showing the flow of each part in the variable display in the first presentation mode. Fig. 53 is a timing chart showing the flow of each part in the variable display in the second presentation mode. Fig. 54 is a timing chart showing the flow of each part in the variable display in the third and fourth presentation modes. Fig. 55 is a timing chart showing the state of each part at the start of variable display in (A) the first presentation mode, (B) the second presentation mode, and (C) the third and fourth presentation modes.

(First presentation mode)
As shown in Figure 52, in the first performance mode, when the number of reserved memories is "2" or less and a variable display based on the non-reach miss variable pattern PA1-1 is executed, as the variable display of the special symbol begins, the small symbols are displayed variably at high speed, and the decorative symbols in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the center decorative symbol display area 5C are displayed in this order, and then a scrolling display is started. In addition, a shift display of the reserved display is performed, and after the shift display ends, the scrolling display of the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begins (see Figure 55 (A)).

In addition, the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually accelerate after scrolling begins, becoming faster, and as the speed increases, the transmittance (transparency) also increases in proportion to the increase in speed, causing the decorative patterns to fade out. This fade-out display period A21 is common to all decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Furthermore, if the switching conditions for switching the background image from first background image 002SG081 to first predetermined background image 002SG081A are met at the start of variable display, a fade-out display will begin in which the transmittance (transparency) of first background image 002SG081 gradually increases, while a fade-in display will begin in which the transmittance (transparency) of first predetermined background image 002SG081A gradually decreases until it becomes opaque.

As the stopping timing of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the center decorative pattern display area 5C gradually slow down and are displayed at a slower speed, and the transmittance (transparency) decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, causing them to fade in. This fade-in display period B21 is common to each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Then, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the center decorative pattern display area 5C are temporarily displayed in that order. Furthermore, during the temporary display, a variable stop action is performed, and a loop action is repeatedly executed. After that, when the variable display ends and the small pattern is displayed as a static display, the decorative pattern loop action ends and the pattern is displayed as a static display. After that, a pattern determination period (e.g., 500 ms) has passed, and the next variable display can begin.

The fade-out display period A1, during which the first background image 002SG081 is faded out, is longer than the fade-out display period A21, which is the period from when the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R start scrolling until they begin to be displayed at high speed (fade-out display period A1 > fade-out display period A21).

Furthermore, the fade-in display period B1 during which the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is faded in is longer than the fade-in display period B21, which is the period from when the display speed of the scrolling decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R starts to slow down until they are temporarily stopped (fade-in display period B1 > fade-in display period B21).

In addition, when the variable display of decorative patterns is being executed, the movable body lamp 9d, main lamp 9a, and frame lamp 9b repeatedly emit light in the order of white, blue, and yellow based on loop light emission control (see Figure 34 (B)) corresponding to the background pattern. In addition, background music (BGM) is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

(Second presentation mode)
Next, as shown in Figure 53, in the second performance mode, when the number of reserved memories is "2" or less and a variable display based on the non-reach miss variable pattern PA1-1 is executed, as the variable display of the special symbol begins, the small symbols are displayed variably at high speed, and the decorative symbols in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the center decorative symbol display area 5C are displayed in this order, and then a scrolling display is started. Also, a shift display of the reserved display is performed, and after the shift display ends, the scrolling display of the decorative symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R begins (see Figure 55 (B)).

In addition, the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually accelerate after scrolling begins, becoming faster, and as the speed increases, the transmittance (transparency) also increases in proportion to the increase in speed, causing the decorative patterns to fade out. This fade-out display period A22 is common to all decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Furthermore, if the switching conditions for switching the background image from first background image 002SG081 to first predetermined background image 002SG081A are met at the start of variable display, a fade-out display will begin in which the transmittance (transparency) of first background image 002SG081 gradually increases, while a fade-in display will begin in which the transmittance (transparency) of first predetermined background image 002SG081A gradually decreases until it becomes opaque.

As the stopping timing of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the center decorative pattern display area 5C gradually slow down and are displayed at a slower speed, and the transmittance (transparency) decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, causing them to fade in. This fade-in display period B22 is common to each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Then, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the center decorative pattern display area 5C are temporarily displayed in that order. Furthermore, during the temporary display, a variable stop action is performed, and a loop action is repeatedly executed. After that, when the variable display ends and the small pattern is displayed as a static display, the decorative pattern loop action ends and the pattern is displayed as a static display. After that, a pattern determination period (e.g., 500 ms) has passed, and the next variable display can begin.

The fade-out display period A1 during which the first background image 002SG081 is faded out is longer than the fade-out display period A22 from when the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R start scrolling until they begin displaying at high speed (fade-out display period A1 > fade-out display period A22). In this way, since the shorter the fade-out display, the more abrupt the impression of disappearance. Therefore, for fade-out displays that may be performed at the same time as the variable display of decorative patterns and the background change (for example, at the start of the variable display), the fade-out display of the decorative patterns is performed in a shorter period than the fade-out display of the background image, thereby drawing attention to the start of the variable display of the decorative patterns.

Furthermore, the fade-in display period B1 during which the fade-in display of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is performed is set to be a longer period than the fade-in display period B22 from when the display speed starts to slow down in the scrolling display of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R until the display is temporarily stopped (fade-in display period B1 > fade-in display period B22). In this way, since the shorter the fade-in display, the more abrupt the impression it gives, for fade-in displays that may be performed at the same time as the variable display of the decorative pattern and the background change (for example, when the variable display is stopped), the fade-in display of the decorative pattern is performed in a shorter period of time than the fade-in display of the background, drawing attention to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern.

Furthermore, the fade-out display period A22 when scrolling display is performed in the second presentation mode is longer than the fade-out display period A21 when scrolling display is performed in the first presentation mode (fade-out display period A21 < fade-out display period A22; see Figures 55 (A) and (B)). By doing this, not only is the manner in which the decorative pattern is scrolled differently in the second presentation mode compared to the first presentation mode, but the fade-out display period A22 from the start of the scrolling display until the decorative pattern becomes difficult to see as the display speed increases is longer, allowing the decorative pattern to be noticed for a longer period of time.

In this embodiment, as the variable display of the decorative symbols in the second presentation mode, a second scroll display that moves in a curved manner in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R from the back to the front has been exemplified as a special variable display that differs in appearance from the first scroll display that moves in a linear manner from top to bottom in the first presentation mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special variable display that differs in appearance from the first scroll display is not limited to the above-mentioned one that moves in a curved manner in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R from the back to the front, but may also be a variety of scroll displays, such as one that moves in a curved manner in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R from the front to the back, as described in Variation 1 above, or a scroll display that moves in a linear or curved manner from bottom to top.

Furthermore, the fade-out display periods A21, A22 are different when the non-reach miss variation pattern PA1-1 is determined in the first presentation mode and when the non-reach miss variation pattern PA1-1 is determined in the second presentation mode. By doing this, the fade-out display period is the same despite the different presentation modes, making it difficult for the player to predict that the determined variation pattern is the non-reach miss variation pattern PA1-1, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, the fade-out display period A1 during which the first background image 002SG081 is faded out is different from the fade-out display period A22 from when the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R start scrolling until they begin displaying at high speed. In other words, the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-out display period A22 are not executed (synchronized) at the same time (for example, at the start of the variable display), which prevents it from becoming difficult to notice that the variable display of the decorative pattern has started. In more detail, if the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-out display period A22 were synchronized, the decorative pattern and first background image 002SG081 would disappear together, making it difficult to notice that the variable display of the decorative pattern has started. Therefore, by erasing the decorative pattern first, the decorative pattern can be made to stand out.

Furthermore, the fade-in display period B1 during which the fade-in display of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is performed is different from the fade-in display period B22 from when the display speed starts to slow down in the scrolling display of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R until the display is temporarily stopped. In other words, the fade-in display period B1 and the fade-in display period B21 are not executed (synchronized) at the same time (for example, when the variable display is stopped), which prevents it from becoming difficult to notice that the variable display of the decorative pattern has started. In more detail, if the fade-in display period B1 and the fade-in display period B21 were synchronized, the decorative pattern and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A would appear together, making it difficult to notice that the variable display of the decorative pattern has stopped. Therefore, by making the decorative pattern appear first, the decorative pattern can be made to stand out.

In addition, when the variable display of decorative patterns is being executed, the movable body lamp 9d, main lamp 9a, and frame lamp 9b repeatedly emit light in the order of white, blue, and yellow based on loop light emission control (see Figure 34 (B)) corresponding to the background pattern. In addition, background BGM is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

(Third and fourth performance modes)
Next, as shown in Figure 54, in the third and fourth presentation modes, when a variable display based on the shortened non-reach miss variable pattern PA1-3 is executed, as the variable display of the special symbol starts, the small symbol is displayed variably at high speed, and the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R start rotating or scrolling all at once without any action to start the variation. Also, a shift display of the reserved display is performed, and after the shift display ends, the scrolling display of the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R starts (see Figure 55 (C)).

In addition, the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually accelerate after scrolling display begins, becoming faster, and as the speed increases, the transmittance (transparency) also increases in proportion to the increase in speed, causing the decorative patterns to fade out. This fade-out display period A23 is common to all decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

As the stopping timing of decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually slow down in unison and are displayed at a slower speed, and their transmittance (transparency) decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, causing them to fade in. This fade-in display period B23 is common to all decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

After that, the decorative symbols in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are all displayed statically. In other words, the variable stop action and loop action seen in the first and second presentation modes are not performed, and the variable display ends as is, with the decorative symbols and small symbols displayed statically. After that, a symbol determination period (e.g., 500 ms) has elapsed, and the next variable display can begin.

Furthermore, the fade-out display period A21 when a scrolling display is performed in the first presentation mode is longer than the fade-out display period A23 when a rotating display is performed in the third presentation mode or a scrolling display is performed in the fourth presentation mode, and the fade-out display period A22 when a scrolling display is performed in the second presentation mode is longer than the fade-out display period A21 when a scrolling display is performed in the first presentation mode (fade-out display period A23 < fade-out display period A21 < fade-out display period A22. See Figures 55 (A) to (C)).

In addition, when the variable display of decorative patterns is being executed, the movable lamp 9d, main lamp 9a, and frame lamp 9b emit light in accordance with the output of the rhythm, melody, beat, etc. of the high-bass music based on light emission control corresponding to the high-bass music pattern. In addition, the high-bass music is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

In this embodiment, when variable display of decorative symbols is being executed in the high base state, the movable body lamp 9d, main lamp 9a, and frame lamp 9b are lit in accordance with the output of the rhythm, melody, beat, etc. of the high base music based on light emission control corresponding to the high base music pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Even when variable display of decorative symbols is being executed in the high base state, a light emission pattern of white, blue, and yellow may be repeatedly executed in order based on loop light emission control corresponding to the background pattern (see Figure 34 (B)), and background BGM may be output from speakers 8L and 8R. This simplifies the light emission control of the performance control CPU 120.

(Example of customer waiting demo performance)
Next, the customer waiting demo effect will be described with reference to Figures 56 and 57. Figure 56 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the customer waiting demo effect. Figure 57 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a start winning occurs during the customer waiting demo effect.

As shown in Figure 56, the "waiting for customers demo effect" is an effect that notifies the player that they are in a waiting for customers (waiting to play) state, and is initiated by the effect control CPU 120 when a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed since the reception of the waiting for customers demo designation command output from the main board 11 without the reception of a control command such as a variable display start designation command.

Specifically, although not specifically shown, when the power is turned on, initial operations of movable bodies 32A, 32B, etc. are performed in the initial operation control process, and then menu/volume and light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 002SG480 is displayed (see Figure 56 (A)). Then, when a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed since the power was turned on without any variable display, menu/volume and light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 002SG480 is no longer displayed, customer waiting demo performance image 002SG400 is displayed, and the customer waiting demo performance begins (see Figure 56 (B)).

In the customer waiting demo performance, after displaying moving images sequentially introducing the multiple ally characters (which may include enemy character images) appearing in various performances and the content itself (see Figures 56(B)-(E)), an image of a group of ally characters remains displayed (see Figure 56(F)), while the movable body 32A descends from the origin position to the performance position, and after a predetermined time has passed, it rises back to the origin position (see Figures 56(G)-(H)), and the first background image 002SG081 corresponding to the normal state is displayed as the background image, ending the performance (see Figure 56(I)). When the customer waiting demo performance ends, a menu/volume and light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 002SG480 is displayed (see Figure 56(J)).

If a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed since the customer waiting demo performance ended without any variable display being performed, the customer waiting demo performance will start again. Even after that, the customer waiting demo performance will be performed periodically as long as the standby state continues. The customer waiting demo performance may be performed repeatedly multiple times in the standby state, or may not be performed after being performed a predetermined number of times. The performance format of the customer waiting demo performance as a standby performance is optional and can be changed in various ways.

In addition, during the execution period of the customer waiting demo effect (see Figures 56 (B) to (H)), small symbols are continuously displayed in a static state in the display area 5S, while decorative symbols are hidden in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In this way, by displaying small symbols even when decorative symbols are hidden, the player is made aware that the variable display is in a static state.

We will explain an example of what happens when a starting win occurs while this kind of customer waiting demo effect is being performed.

As shown in Figure 57(A), if the first start winning occurs (the conditions for starting the variable display are met) while the customer waiting demo effect is being executed, the variable display of small symbols will begin in the display area 5S while the customer waiting demo effect image 002SG400 is displayed, as shown in Figure 57(B).

Next, as shown in Figure 57 (C), the customer waiting demo performance image 002SG400 is hidden and the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, and decorative symbols are displayed statically in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The special symbol reserved memory display area 5U and active display area 5F are also displayed, and the first reserved display 002SG101 is displayed in the first display area from the left of the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U. Then, the first reserved display 002SG101 begins to move (shift) from the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U to the active display area 5F, and the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begin to change in the order of left, right, and center.

As shown in Figure 57 (D), when the shift display of the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display area 5F ends, as shown in Figure 57 (E), the decorative patterns in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R move upward in sequence, ending the change start action and starting the scrolling display (see Figure 57 (F)).

In this way, if a start win occurs while the customer waiting demo performance is being performed, the variable display of small symbols begins before the customer waiting demo performance image 002SG400 is hidden, and then the customer waiting demo performance image 002SG400 is hidden and switched to the background image corresponding to the performance mode at that time (here, the first background image 002SG081 corresponding to the first performance mode), after which the decorative symbols are displayed and the scrolling display begins.

In other words, if the scrolling display of the decorative symbols begins while the customer waiting demo effect image 002SG400 is still displayed, it will be difficult for the player to understand that the scrolling display has begun in response to the occurrence of the first start winning. Therefore, by starting the variable display of the small symbols, switching from the customer waiting demo effect image 002SG400 to the first background image 002SG081, and then starting the scrolling display after the shift display of the pending display has ended, the player can be made to recognize that the scrolling display has begun in response to the occurrence of the first start winning. On the other hand, if the customer waiting demo effect image 002SG400 is switched to the first background image 002SG081 and the scrolling display begins after the shift display has ended, there will be a large time lag between the occurrence of the first start winning and the start of the scrolling display. Therefore, the variable display of the small symbols will begin before the customer waiting demo effect image 002SG400 is hidden, ensuring a display that corresponds to the variable display of the decorative symbols.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in Figures 56(A), (I), and (J), when the customer waiting demo performance ends and the decorative symbols are displayed frozen in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, if the first or second performance mode is selected, a loop action (see Figure 33(C)) of the frozen decorative symbols is executed, and loop lighting control (see Figure 34(B)) is executed for the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and movable body lamp 9d. On the other hand, if the third or fourth performance mode is selected, the loop action (see Figure 33(C)) of the frozen decorative symbols is not executed, and lighting control is executed for the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and movable body lamp 9d in accordance with the rhythm, melody, beat, etc. of the high-bass music.

In this way, in a low base state, the decorative symbol loop action is repeatedly executed at a shorter cycle than the loop light emission control, drawing attention to the decorative symbol, thereby encouraging the variable display of the decorative symbol, and thus encouraging the player to resume playing. Meanwhile, in a high base state, neither the decorative symbol loop action nor the loop light emission control is executed, drawing attention to the fact that a high base effect (third or fourth effect mode) is being performed. The decorative symbol loop action does not need to be executed in the first or second effect mode, and the decorative symbol loop action may be executed in the third or fourth effect mode.

Furthermore, the decorative pattern loop action is not executed while the variable display is stopped in the high base state because it is unlikely that a player will end play in the high base state, and it is more likely that they will simply leave their seat. Therefore, there is no need to appeal to the player to take a seat just because the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in an inoperable state without a variable display, and appealing with the loop action prevents other players from accidentally sitting down.

In addition, the "loop action" in this embodiment focuses solely on "movement," but for example, the decorative pattern does not change position, sway, or deform, but may instead remain stationary while a highlight moves across the decorative pattern, creating a sparkling animation.

In addition, in this embodiment, the third background image 002SG083, the fourth background image 002SG084, and effect images (not shown) such as character images displayed as background images in the high base state may be animated in time with the high base music, or by moving the background images at a predetermined speed. In this case, as described above, while the variable display is stopped in the high base state, the decorative pattern loop action is not executed, but the animation display of the third background image 002SG083 and the fourth background image 002SG084 may continue.

(Example of pseudo consecutive announcement)
Next, an example of the operation of the pseudo consecutive win notification will be described with reference to Figures 58 and 59. Figure 58 is a diagram showing the flow of the pseudo consecutive win notification. Figure 59 shows (A) an example of the pseudo consecutive win count display and symbol color, (B) a diagram showing the types of pseudo consecutive win count display and symbol color, and (C) a diagram showing a pseudo consecutive win count display color determination table.

As shown in Figure 58, the "pseudo consecutive announcement" is a presentation that teases whether or not the decorative symbols will resume variable display after a temporary stop is displayed at a predetermined timing between the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols and the display result being derived and displayed, in other words, whether or not a single variable display will be made to appear as multiple variable displays.

As shown in Figure 59 (A), the pseudo consecutive prediction can be implemented in two ways: a "pseudo consecutive 1 pattern" in which the initial variable display and one re-variable display result in a total of two variable display times, and a "pseudo consecutive 2 pattern" in which the initial variable display and two re-variable displays result in a total of three variable display times. If the Super Reach (pseudo consecutive 1) variable pattern is selected, the "pseudo consecutive 1 pattern" is executed, and if the Super Reach (pseudo consecutive 2) variable pattern is selected, the "pseudo consecutive 2 pattern" is executed. Note that the probability of winning is higher with the "pseudo consecutive 2 pattern" than with the "pseudo consecutive 1 pattern."

Specifically, as shown in Figure 58 (A), when a variable display that executes a pseudo consecutive prediction is initiated, a decorative pattern is temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L at a timing when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the variable display was initiated. Next, a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, entering a reach state (see Figure 58 (B)), and then a pseudo consecutive decorative pattern with the word "NEXT!" displayed on its surface is decelerated and displayed just before its stop position in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C (see Figure 58 (C)).

After that, in the case of a variable display in which a pseudo consecutive prediction is executed, a pseudo consecutive decorative symbol is temporarily displayed at the stop position in the center decorative symbol display area 5C (see FIG. 58(D)), and a pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212 of "x2" is displayed above the center decorative symbol display area 5C, indicating that the first re-variable display will begin, i.e., the second variable display will begin (see FIG. 58(F)), and variable display of decorative symbols will resume in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, center decorative symbol display area 5C, and right decorative symbol display area 5R (see FIG. 58(G)). Note that in the case of a variable display in which a pseudo consecutive prediction is not executed, the pseudo consecutive symbol passes the stop position in the center decorative symbol display area 5C, and decorative symbols with a number one larger than the temporarily displayed decorative symbol are temporarily displayed in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C, and a losing variable display result is displayed (see FIG. 58(E)).

After the variable display of decorative symbols resumes in Figure 58 (G), in the case of a pseudo-consecutive prediction of a "pseudo-consecutive one-time pattern," after a predetermined time has elapsed, the decorative symbol that was variably displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily displayed in a stopped state (see Figure 58 (L)), and a decorative symbol with the same number as the decorative symbol temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, resulting in a reach mode (see Figure 58 (M)), and the performance develops into an SP reach effect.

Furthermore, after the variable display of decorative symbols resumes in Figure 58 (G), in the case of a pseudo-consecutive prediction of a "pseudo-double-consecutive pattern," a decorative symbol is temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, and then a decorative symbol with the same number as the decorative symbol temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, thereby returning to a reach state, after which a pseudo-consecutive decorative symbol with the word "NEXT!" displayed on its surface is decelerated and displayed just before its stop position in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C (see Figure 58 (H)).

Next, the pseudo consecutive decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C (see Figure 58 (I)), and the pseudo consecutive number of times display 002SG213, which reads "x3," is displayed above the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, indicating that the second re-variable display will begin, i.e., the third variable display will begin (see Figure 58 (J)). After that, the variable display of the decorative patterns resumes in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, middle decorative pattern display area 5C, and right decorative pattern display area 5R (see Figure 58 (K)).

After that, the decorative pattern that was variably displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed (see Figure 58 (L)), and a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, resulting in a reach mode (see Figure 58 (M)), and the SP reach performance develops.

The pseudo consecutive announcement includes an introductory part that teases whether or not the variable display will resume (see Figures 58 (A)-(C), (G), (J), (K), (L)), and a result announcement part that notifies the result of whether or not the variable display has resumed (see Figures 58 (D)-(F), (H), (I), (M)).

As shown in Figure 59 (B1), during the pseudo consecutive win preview, when the variable display resumes after the pseudo consecutive win decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the center decorative symbol display area 5C, a pseudo consecutive win count display is displayed that indicates the number of times the variable display has resumed. Specifically, a pseudo consecutive win count display 002SG212 (see Figures 58 (F) (G)) of "x2" is displayed, indicating that the first variable win re-display will begin, i.e., the second variable win display will begin, and a pseudo consecutive win count display 002SG213 (see Figures 58 (J) (K)) of "x3" is displayed, indicating that the second variable win re-display will begin, i.e., the third variable win display will begin.

The pseudo consecutive win count display 002SG212 shown in FIG. 59 (B1) and the pseudo consecutive win count display 002SG213 shown in FIG. 59 (B2) are sometimes displayed in blue and sometimes displayed in red. Also, as explained in FIG. 29, even-numbered regular symbols are displayed in blue, and odd-numbered special symbols are displayed in red. The display color of such pseudo consecutive win count displays is determined using the pseudo consecutive win count display color determination table shown in FIG. 59 (C) in steps 002SGS278 and 002SGS280 of the variable display count setting process explained in FIG. 28.

Specifically, when determining the display color of the pseudo consecutive win count display 002SG212 in steps 002SGS278 and 002SGS280, if the variable display result is a "probable jackpot," a display color that is not the same as the symbol color of the decorative symbol determined in step 002SGS276 (for example, symbol color is blue and pseudo consecutive win count display color is red/symbol color is red and pseudo consecutive win count display color is blue) is determined 10% of the time, and a display color that is the same as the symbol color of the decorative symbol determined in step 002SGS276 (for example, symbol color and pseudo consecutive win count display color are blue/symbol color and pseudo consecutive win count display color are red) is determined 90% of the time.

Also, when the variable display result is a "non-probable jackpot," a display color that is not the same as the pattern color of the decorative pattern determined in step 002SGS276 (for example, pattern color is blue and pseudo consecutive number of times display color is red/pattern color is red and pseudo consecutive number of times display color is blue) is determined 30% of the time, and a display color that is the same as the pattern color of the decorative pattern determined in step 002SGS276 (for example, pattern color and pseudo consecutive number of times display color are blue/pattern color and pseudo consecutive number of times display color are red) is determined 70% of the time.

Also, when the variable display result is a "miss," a display color that is not the same as the pattern color of the decorative pattern determined in step 002SGS276 (for example, pattern color is blue and pseudo-consecutive number display color is red/pattern color is red and pseudo-consecutive number display color is blue) is determined 90% of the time, and a display color that is the same as the pattern color of the decorative pattern determined in step 002SGS276 (for example, pattern color and pseudo-consecutive number display color are blue/pattern color and pseudo-consecutive number display color are red) is determined 10% of the time.

In this way, in the pseudo consecutive win prediction, there are cases where the temporarily stopped decorative symbols and the pseudo consecutive win count display have a first combination of different colors, and cases where the temporarily stopped decorative symbols and the pseudo consecutive win count display have a second combination of the same color, and the probability of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state is higher when the variable display is resumed with the second combination than when the variable display is resumed with the first combination in the pseudo consecutive win prediction.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a jackpot and a normal pattern (blue) is determined as the stopping pattern in step 002SGS276, the rate at which the same color, blue, is determined as the pseudo-consecutive number display for the first pseudo-consecutive run and the second pseudo-consecutive run is higher than the rate at which the non-same color, red, is determined. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a miss and a normal pattern (blue) is determined as the stopping pattern in step 002SGS276, the rate at which the same color, blue, is determined as the pseudo-consecutive number display for the first pseudo-consecutive run and the second pseudo-consecutive run is lower than the rate at which the non-same color, red, is determined.

Furthermore, when the variable display result is a jackpot and a probability variable pattern (red) is determined as the stopping pattern in step 002SGS276, the probability that the same color red will be determined as the pseudo-consecutive number display for the first pseudo-consecutive run and the second pseudo-consecutive run is higher than the probability that the non-identical color blue will be determined. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a miss and a probability variable pattern (red) is determined as the stopping pattern in step 002SGS276, the probability that the same color red will be determined as the pseudo-consecutive number display for the first pseudo-consecutive run and the second pseudo-consecutive run is lower than the probability that the non-identical color blue will be determined.

Furthermore, when the variable display result is a jackpot and a normal pattern ("2", blue) is determined as the stopping pattern in step 002SGS276 (see FIG. 59 (B1)), for the first pseudo-consecutive spin in which pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG212 is "x2", the second combination ("x2", blue) in which the temporarily stopped decorative pattern and the pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG212 have the same number and display color, blue, is determined more frequently than the first combination ("x2", red) in which the temporarily stopped decorative pattern and the pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG212 have the same number but a different display color, red.

Furthermore, for the second pseudo-consecutive spin in which the pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG213 shows "x3", the third combination ("x3", blue), in which the decorative symbol displayed as a temporary stop and the number on the pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG212 are different but the display color is the same type, blue, is determined more frequently than the fourth combination ("x3", red), in which the decorative symbol displayed as a temporary stop and the number on the pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG213 are different, both in color and red.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss and the normal symbol ("2", blue) is determined as the stopping symbol in step 002SGS276, the probability that the same color, blue, will be determined as the pseudo-consecutive number display for the first pseudo-consecutive run and the second pseudo-consecutive run is lower than the probability that the non-same color, red, will be determined.

If the variable display result is a jackpot, and a probability variable symbol ("3", red) is determined as the stopping symbol in step 002SGS276, for the first pseudo-consecutive spin in which pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG212 is "x2", the third combination ("x2", red) in which the decorative symbol displayed as a temporary stop and the number in pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG212 are different but the display color is the same type, red, is determined more frequently than the fourth combination ("x2", blue) in which the decorative symbol displayed as a temporary stop and the number in pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG212 are different in color, blue.

Furthermore, for the second pseudo-consecutive spin in which the pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG213 shows "x3", the second combination ("x3", red), in which the decorative symbol displayed as a temporary stop and the number and display color of the pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG212 are the same type, is determined more frequently than the first combination ("x3", blue), in which the decorative symbol displayed as a temporary stop and the number of the pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG212 are the same type but the display color is different, blue.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, and a normal pattern ("3", blue) is determined as the stopping pattern in step 002SGS276, the probability that the same color, blue, will be determined as the pseudo-consecutive number display for the first pseudo-consecutive run and the second pseudo-consecutive run will be lower than the probability that a non-identical color, red, will be determined.

In this way, the pseudo consecutive prediction can result in a first combination in which the numbers of the decorative symbols displayed in the temporary stop mode and the numbers of the pseudo consecutive number displays 002SG212 and 002SG213 are the same type, but the display colors of the decorative symbols displayed in the temporary stop mode and the pseudo consecutive number display are different, or a second combination in which both the numbers and display colors of the decorative symbols displayed in the temporary stop mode and the pseudo consecutive number display are the same type. This means that the probability of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state is higher when the variable display is resumed in the second combination than when the variable display is resumed in the first combination during the pseudo consecutive prediction. This allows players to focus not only on whether or not the pseudo consecutive prediction is executed, but also, if executed, on the combination of the numbers of the decorative symbols displayed in the temporary stop mode and the numbers and colors of the pseudo consecutive number displays 002SG212 and 002SG213, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in the pseudo consecutive prediction, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state is higher when a super reach fluctuation pattern of two pseudo consecutive wins is determined as the fluctuation pattern than when a super reach fluctuation pattern of one pseudo consecutive win is determined. Therefore, by making it more likely that the jackpot gaming state will be controlled when the decorative symbol provisionally stopped in the second pseudo consecutive win and the number and display color of the pseudo consecutive win count display are the same type of second combination than when the decorative symbol provisionally stopped in the first pseudo consecutive win and the number and display color of the pseudo consecutive win count display are the same type of second combination, it is possible to draw more attention to the number of pseudo consecutive wins and the number and display color of the pseudo consecutive win count display.

Furthermore, if the decorative symbol displayed as a temporary stop and the number and display color of the pseudo-consecutive number display during the second pseudo-consecutive match are both of the same type of second combination, the decorative symbol will become a probability variable symbol, so the probability of being controlled to a probability variable jackpot gaming state may be higher if a super reach fluctuation pattern of two pseudo-consecutive matches is determined as the fluctuation pattern than if a super reach fluctuation pattern of one pseudo-consecutive match is determined.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display color of the pseudo-consecutive win count display is determined from among multiple colors depending on the number of decorative symbols temporarily displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display color of the pseudo-consecutive win count display may be a display color that is predetermined for each pseudo-consecutive win count.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display format of the pseudo consecutive number displays 002SG212 and 002SG213 is exemplified as "x2" or "x3", but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo consecutive number display can be changed to various formats as long as the number of pseudo consecutive numbers can be specified. For example, it can be displayed in various formats such as "nth consecutive number" (n is an integer of 2 or more), "nth time", "nth re-variation", etc.

In this embodiment, in the pseudo-consecutive prediction, the numbers on the decorative symbol displayed in the temporary stop and the numbers on the pseudo-consecutive count display are the same type and color in two cases: when the decorative symbol displayed in the temporary stop is a normal symbol ("2", blue) and the pseudo-consecutive count display 002SG212 ("x2", blue), and when the decorative symbol displayed in the temporary stop is a normal symbol ("3", red) and the pseudo-consecutive count display 002SG213 (x3, red). However, other patterns are also possible, such as when the decorative symbol displayed in the temporary stop is a normal symbol ("4", green) and the pseudo-consecutive count display (x4, green). The color of the numbers on the decorative symbol, the color of the numbers on the pseudo-consecutive count display, and the number of pseudo-consecutive times can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in this embodiment, even when the number of the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the pseudo consecutive win prediction is a number other than "2" or "3" corresponding to the number in the pseudo consecutive win count display, a decision is made as to whether or not the pseudo consecutive win count display color will be the same color as the number of the decorative pattern temporarily displayed, and the expectation level is higher if the same color is decided than if a different color is decided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the number of the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the pseudo consecutive win prediction is a number other than "2" or "3" corresponding to the number in the pseudo consecutive win count display, the pseudo consecutive win count display color may not be decided, but may be uniformly decided to be a predetermined display color (for example, white, etc.).

In addition, in this embodiment, in the pseudo consecutive prediction, a decorative symbol with the same number as the decorative symbol temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, entering a reach state, and then a pseudo consecutive decorative symbol with the word "NEXT!" displayed on its surface is temporarily displayed in a stopped position in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C, thereby starting a re-variable display. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode of the pseudo consecutive decorative symbol can be changed in various ways. Furthermore, after a decorative symbol with a different number than the decorative symbol temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, the re-variable display may also be started by a decorative symbol temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L or the right decorative symbol display area 5R, or a pseudo consecutive decorative symbol, being temporarily displayed in a stopped position in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C.

The decorative symbols provisionally displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R during the pseudo consecutive prediction do not necessarily have to be the same as the final decorative symbols that are displayed when the variable display ends. For example, after a regular symbol is provisionally displayed during the first pseudo consecutive, a special symbol may be displayed during the second pseudo consecutive, i.e., a symbol different from the symbol displayed during the first pseudo consecutive. Furthermore, the number of pseudo consecutive times is not limited to two, and three or more pseudo consecutive times (re-variable display) may be possible.

(Example of reach effect operation)
Next, an example of the operation of the reach effect will be described with reference to Figures 60 to 62. Figure 60 is a diagram showing the flow of the reach effect. Figure 61 is a diagram showing the flow of the reach effect following Figure 60. Figure 62 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of each part in the reach effect. Note that, although an example of the operation of the reach effect in the first effect mode will be described below, similar reach effects may also be executable in the second to fourth effect modes.

As shown in Figure 60 (A), when a variable display based on a normal reach variable pattern or a super reach variable pattern is initiated, a decorative symbol is temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the variable display began (see Figure 60 (B)). Next, a decorative symbol with the same number as the decorative symbol temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined reach mode, and the reach effect begins (see Figure 60 (C)). At this time, decorative symbols are displayed at high speed in the center decorative symbol display area 5C. In addition, the movable body lamps 9d of movable bodies 32A and 32B are illuminated based on the loop light emission control described above (see Figure 34 (B)).

Note that Figures 60(B) and (C) illustrate a form in which the decorative symbols are temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and then the right decorative symbol display area 5R, but the present invention is not limited to this, and decorative symbols may be temporarily displayed simultaneously in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R.

As shown in Figure 60 (D), when the reach effect begins, the decorative symbols temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the right decorative symbol display area 5R are enlarged, and the reach line suggestion image, reach line effect display 002SG250, is displayed superimposed on the decorative symbol (which is nearly transparent and invisible) currently being variably displayed in the center decorative symbol display area 5C, thereby starting the reach line suggestion effect. The reach line effect display 002SG250 is a display that emphasizes the reach line connecting the decorative symbols temporarily displayed at the stop positions in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and is a display that suggests that the decorative symbol in the center decorative symbol display area 5C will be displayed stationary on the reach line.

In Figure 60 (D), the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and right decorative symbol display area 5R are not just enlarged as in the variable stop action described above, but rather the number display section 002SG051, character display section 002SG052, information display section 002SG053, and base display section 002SG054 that form the decorative symbol are all enlarged at the same ratio. In this way, by enlarging the display in a manner different from when the variable display is stopped, it can be recognized that the variable display has not stopped, but has entered a reach mode.

As shown in Figure 60(D), when the reach performance begins, the reach line effect display 002SG250 is displayed small near the stop position in the center decorative pattern display area 5C, superimposed on the decorative pattern being variably displayed, and then gradually extends linearly toward the stop positions (left and right) of the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R (see Figure 60(E)). After reaching the left and right edges of the display screen (see Figure 60(F)), the display changes so that the vertical dimensions expand (see Figure 60(G)), and the transmittance (transparency) gradually increases through a fade-out display (see Figure 60(H)), and finally disappears and is no longer displayed (see Figure 61(I)).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 60 (F), in the reach line suggestion performance, it is possible to change the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 (enlarge the display), and when the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 is being changed, the movable body lamps 9d of the movable bodies 32A, 32B arranged on the periphery (nearby) of the display screen of the image display device 5 are turned off, making the periphery of the display screen darker than usual, thereby making the reach line effect display 002SG250 stand out more.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 60(D), after the decorative patterns temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R are enlarged and displayed, the left decorative pattern begins to move to the left and the right decorative pattern begins to move to the right, i.e., in directions away from each other (see Figure 60(E)). Furthermore, while moving away from each other, they rotate a predetermined angle around a rotation axis facing up and down (see Figure 60(F)), and when they reach the furthest position on the left and right of the display screen, the movement and rotational display ends and they are temporarily displayed (see Figure 60(G)).

Then, as shown in Figure 60 (H), the left and right decorative patterns that were displayed enlarged in the separated positions on the left and right are reduced in size and rotated while moving from the separated positions toward the decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, and are restored to their normal display positions.

Then, as shown in Figure 61 (I), when the decorative symbols are restored to the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R and the reach line effect display 002SG250 is erased and no longer displayed, the decorative symbols that were variably displayed in the center decorative symbol display area 5C gradually decrease in scroll display speed and transmittance (transparency) as they fade in (see Figures 61 (J) to (K)), until the transmittance of the decorative symbols finally becomes 0% (opaque) and they are displayed scrolling at a slow speed (see Figure 61 (L)).

As shown in FIG. 62, when executing a reach line suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 can execute an enlarged display that enlarges the decorative symbols temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and a separating display that separates the decorative symbols after executing the enlarged display.The second period te1 from the start to the end of the separating display is longer than the first period td1 from the start to the end of the enlarged display (td1<te1), allowing the player to recognize the decorative symbols that form the reach state.

Furthermore, the period td2 from the start of the enlarged display to the end of the enlarged display is longer than the period tf1 until the enlarged decorative symbol is restored to its original state (td2<tf1), so the player can be made aware of the decorative symbol that forms the reach state, and when restored, it can be quickly reduced in size to prepare for the next performance.

In addition, when the decorative patterns temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R are enlarged, the left-right dimension of the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, which focuses attention on which decorative pattern will be displayed in a stopped state, narrows, making it difficult to see the variable display of the decorative patterns. Therefore, by performing a moving display that separates the left and right decorative patterns, the left and right decorative patterns that have reached a reach state are highlighted by the enlarged display, and then attention is quickly drawn to the decorative pattern in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C.

Furthermore, the reach line effect display 002SG250 has been exemplified as being displayed immediately after the decorative symbols are temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the right decorative symbol display area 5R, resulting in a reach state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may also be displayed at the same time as the reach state is reached.

In addition, the movable body lamp 9d is shown as being turned off when the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 changes after the decorative symbols are temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the right decorative symbol display area 5R and the reach line effect display 002SG250 is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this and the lamp may be turned off simultaneously with the display of the reach line effect display 002SG250. Furthermore, instead of being turned off, the lamp may be made less bright than when the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 is changing.

In addition, in this embodiment, the movable body lamp 9d built into the movable bodies 32A and 32B located above and below the image display device 5 is used as the specific light-emitting means that is turned off when the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 is changing. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The specific light-emitting means is not limited to lamps located on movable bodies that can operate as described above, as long as they are located around the image display device 5. For example, it may be multiple board-side lamps, including an attacca lamp 9c, located on the gaming board, or a main lamp 9a or frame lamp 9b located on the gaming machine frame 3. In particular, if the lamp is located near the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the display screen of the image display device 5, turning it off can make the reach line effect display 002SG250 stand out.

Furthermore, after the reach line effect display 002SG250 is executed, the transmittance (transparency) of the decorative pattern being variably displayed in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C is set to the second transmittance F2, which is lower than the first transmittance F1 before the reach line effect display 002SG250 was executed, after the reach line effect display 002SG250 has been erased from the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, so that the decorative pattern being variably displayed in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C does not interfere with the display of the reach line effect display 002SG250.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example is given in which the transparency of the decorative pattern in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C gradually decreases (fade-in display) after the reach line effect display 002SG250 is removed from the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, but the present invention is not limited to this. The reach line effect display 002SG250 may change to the second transparency F2 almost simultaneously when it is removed from the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, or the reach line effect display 002SG250 may change to the second transparency F2 after a predetermined time has elapsed after it is removed from the middle decorative pattern display area 5C.

(Example of SP reach effect)
Next, an example of operation of the SP reach effect will be described with reference to Figures 63 to 65. Figure 63 is a diagram showing the flow of the SP reach effect. Figure 64 is a diagram showing the flow of the SP reach effect following Figure 63. Figure 65 is a diagram showing an example of operation of each part in the SP reach effect.

As shown in FIG. 63(A), in the variable display of the Super Reach fluctuation pattern when controlled to a low base state, after the Reach state described in FIG. 60(C) is reached, the Reach title display 002SG070 indicating the type of SP Reach effect is displayed, thereby announcing the Reach title, and an SP Reach effect (e.g., a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) begins as an indication effect to notify whether or not the game state is controlled to a jackpot (see FIGS. 63(B) and (C)). In the SP Reach effect, a fifth background image 002SG085 depicting space corresponding to the SP Reach effect is displayed, which is an image different from the first background image 002SG081 and second background image 002SG082, which are normal background images. Note that the fifth background image 002SG085 may be an image with a different appearance depending on the type of SP Reach effect.

Next, from the time the battle is decided until the specified valid operation period has elapsed, an operation prompt display 002SG071 consisting of the text "PRESS!!" encouraging the operation of the push button 31B, and a button display 002SG072 imitating the push button 31B are displayed (see Figure 63 (D)).

When operation of the push button 31B is detected within the valid operation period, or when the valid operation period has elapsed without any operation being detected, the operation prompt display 002SG071 and button display 002SG072 are hidden and the game ends. If the variable display result is a jackpot, the movable body lamp 9d lights up in a specified light color, the movable body 32B rises from the origin position to the effect position, the effect display 002SG073 highlighting the movable body 32B is displayed, and a specified effect sound is output, indicating that the game has been controlled to a jackpot gaming state (see Figure 63 (E)).

Next, after a result display (not shown) is displayed indicating that the ally character has won the battle against the enemy character, the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP reach effect is displayed as the background image, and the combination of symbols that confirms a jackpot (for example, "222") is displayed temporarily (see Figure 63 (F)).

As shown in Figure 63 (G), as the SP reach effect ends, the fifth background image 002SG085 disappears and the first background image 002SG081 appears, and while the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, the combination of symbols that confirm a jackpot (e.g., "222") is displayed temporarily. After that, a character 002SG074 appears holding a lit ignition device, frames in from the bottom right side of the display screen, and then runs to the left, igniting the number display portions 002SG051 of the decorative symbols that are temporarily displayed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (see Figure 63 (H)).

As shown in Figure 65(A), specific image 002SG075, which depicts a flame displayed by igniting a predetermined position on the periphery of the number display section 002SG051 of each symbol, increases along the periphery of the number display section 002SG051 and is displayed near the numbers on the number display section 002SG051, as shown in Figures 65(B)-(D). Furthermore, as shown in the enlarged view in Figure 65(D), the flame image that constitutes specific image 002SG075 is displayed in a loop with three different images (specific image 002SG075A, specific image 002SG075B, and specific image 002SG075C), giving the appearance of a flickering flame. Finally, specific image 002SG075 disappears, the small symbols and decorative symbols are statically displayed, and the jackpot result is derived and displayed (see Figure 63(J)).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, the movable body 32B does not rise from the origin position to the performance position, and a result notification display 002SG078 indicating that the ally character has lost the battle with the enemy character is displayed (see Figure 63 (K)). After that, when the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP reach performance is displayed as the background image in the notification performance, a miss confirmed pattern combination (for example, "232") that is not a jackpot combination is displayed temporarily (see Figure 63 (L)).

Then, as shown in Figure 63 (M), as the notification effect (SP reach effect) ends, the fifth background image 002SG085 disappears and the first background image 002SG081 appears, and while the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, the winning combination (e.g., "232") is temporarily displayed. After that, the small symbols and decorative symbols are displayed statically without the specific image 002SG075 being displayed, and the losing display result is derived and displayed (see Figure 63 (N)).

Furthermore, in the variable display of the Super Reach fluctuation pattern when controlled to a high base state, after a notification effect is produced to notify players that they have been controlled to a jackpot game state (see Figure 63 (E)), a result display (not shown) is displayed indicating that the ally character has won the battle against the enemy character, and then, when the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP Reach effect is displayed as the background image in the notification effect, a combination of symbols that confirms a jackpot (for example, "222") is displayed in a provisionally stopped state (see Figure 64 (O)).

Then, as shown in Figure 64 (P), as the notification effect (SP reach effect) ends, the fifth background image 002SG085 is hidden and the fourth background image 002SG084 is displayed, and while the fourth background image 002SG084 is displayed, the jackpot confirmation symbol combination (e.g., "222") is temporarily displayed. After that, the decorative symbols are displayed statically without the specific image 002SG075 being displayed, and the jackpot display result is derived and displayed (see Figure 64 (Q)).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, the movable body 32B does not rise from the origin position to the presentation position, and a result notification display 002SG078 indicating that the ally character has lost the battle with the enemy character is displayed (see Figure 63 (K)). After that, when the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP reach presentation is displayed as the background image in the notification presentation, a miss confirmed pattern combination (for example, "232") that is not a jackpot combination is displayed temporarily (see Figure 64 (R)).

Then, as shown in Figure 64 (S), as the notification effect (SP reach effect) ends, the fifth background image 002SG085 is hidden and the fourth background image 002SG084 is displayed, and while the fourth background image 002SG084 is displayed, the winning combination (e.g., "232") is temporarily displayed. After that, the small symbols and decorative symbols are displayed temporarily without displaying the specific image 002SG075, and the losing display result is derived and displayed (see Figure 64 (T)).

In this way, in a low base state, the specific image 002SG075 is displayed in motion relative to the number display portion 002SG051 of the jackpot confirmation decorative symbol that is displayed after the notification effect has ended, thereby enhancing the presentation effect and creating excitement (see Figures 63 (H) and (I)). However, in a high base state where the average variable display period is short, the specific image 002SG075 is not displayed in motion relative to the number display portion 002SG051 of the decorative symbol that is displayed after the notification effect has ended (see Figure 64 (S)), thereby giving the variable display a sense of speed.

In this embodiment, in a low base state, the specific image 002SG075 showing a flame is displayed in close proximity to the number display portion 002SG051 of the jackpot confirmation decorative pattern combination displayed after the SP reach performance ends. However, the specific image is not limited to the specific image 002SG075 showing a flame as described above, and images other than flames (for example, light, water, effects, characters, items, etc.) may also be applied.

In addition, the dynamic display of a specific image may not only refer to the flickering flame as described above, but may also include the specific image rotating around the numeric display unit 002SG051, or changing in shape or display color.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example has been given in which character 002SG074 acts on each decorative pattern that is temporarily displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, thereby causing specific image 002SG075 to be displayed in motion around number display unit 002SG051. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific image may be displayed without character 002SG074 acting on each decorative pattern that is temporarily displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R.

(Variation 2)
Next, a second modification of the present invention will be described with reference to Fig. 66. In Fig. 66, (A1) to (A7) are diagrams showing the second modification of the present invention.

In the above embodiment, the variable stop action enlarges the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped at the stop position in the decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, or 5R. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the decorative symbol may be displayed moving in the opposite direction after passing the stop position in the decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, or 5R, and then returning to the stop position.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 66 (A1) and (A2), the decorative pattern moves gradually downward in the direction of the white arrow while decelerating towards the stopping position, and when it reaches the stopping position and is displayed as temporarily stopped (see Figure 66 (A3)), the base display unit 002SG054 and information display unit 002SG053 remain displayed as temporarily stopped at the stopping position, while the number display unit 002SG051 and character display unit 002SG052 continue to move downward past the stopping position.

At this time, the distance L2 traveled by the numeric display unit 002SG051 from the time it passes the stop position until it is displayed as temporarily stopped is greater than the distance L1 traveled by the character display unit 002SG052 from the time it passes the stop position until it is displayed as temporarily stopped (L1 < L2).

After that, having passed the stop position, the numeric display unit 002SG051 and character display unit 002SG052 each move upward, and while character display unit 002SG052 is displayed temporarily stopped at the stop position (see FIG. 66 (A5)), character display unit 002SG052 passes the stop position again and moves upward (see FIG. 66 (A6)). In this way, the movement distance L3 from when numeric display unit 002SG051 passes upward through the stop position to when it is displayed temporarily stopped is smaller than the movement distance L2 from when numeric display unit 002SG051 passes downward through the stop position to when it is displayed temporarily stopped (L3 < L2). Finally, numeric display unit 002SG051 moves downward and is displayed temporarily stopped at the stop position (see FIG. 66 (A7)).

In addition, in Figure 66 (A6), the action in which only the character display part 002SG052 passes through the stopping position and moves upward is an upward action that differs in form from the fluctuation start action A4 shown in Figure 33 (A), and therefore allows the difference from the fluctuation start action to be recognized.

In this way, when the decorative pattern reaches the stopping position, rather than being displayed as temporarily stopped at the exact moment it reaches the stopping position, at least some of the multiple seed display parts that make up the decorative pattern are displayed as if they have passed the stopping position, then moved to the opposite side and returned to the stopping position. This makes it appear as if some of the display parts have passed by with force, adding a sense of realism.

Furthermore, by temporarily stopping the first display unit (e.g., base display unit 002SG054 and information display unit 002SG053) among the multiple display units at a stop position while having the other second display units (e.g., number display unit 002SG051 and character display unit 002SG052) pass through the stop position, movement can be imparted without making the stop position unclear. Furthermore, by varying the movement distances passed by one of the second display units, number display unit 002SG051, and the other, character display unit 002SG052, it is possible to display movement that matches the size and appearance of the display units.

(Variation 3)
Next, a third modification of the present invention will be described with reference to Fig. 67. Fig. 67 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing the third modification of the present invention.

In the above embodiment, when a decorative symbol is temporarily displayed at a stop position in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the first presentation mode, the decorative symbols before and after the decorative symbol temporarily displayed at that stop position are not temporarily displayed, as shown in Figure 31 (A2). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in a variable display based on a miss variation pattern, as shown in Figure 67 (B), when one of the decorative symbols (e.g., decorative symbol "3") is temporarily displayed at a stop position, some of the decorative symbols before and after it (e.g., decorative symbol "2", decorative symbol "4") may also be temporarily displayed.

When one of the decorative symbols that was variably displayed (for example, decorative symbol "3") is temporarily stopped at the stop position (see Figures 67(A) and (B)), if a variable stopping action is performed (see Figures 67(C) and (D)), it is preferable that the variable stopping action is performed on the decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped at the stop position, and that the variable stopping action is not performed on decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped in areas other than the stop position.

By doing this, when a losing combination, which is a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a losing display result, is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols, the decorative symbols tentatively displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily enlarged, thereby drawing the player's attention to the decorative symbols tentatively displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and keeping the player's gaze on the area where the decorative symbols are displayed, even when a losing combination that would not normally make sense to the player is derived. Furthermore, when the decorative symbols tentatively displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are enlarged, decorative symbols that are not located in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are not enlarged, allowing the player's gaze to be focused on the decorative symbols tentatively displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and also reducing the load on display control.

In addition, since loop light emission control continues even when the decorative symbols temporarily displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are enlarged (see Figures 52 and 53), control of the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and movable body lamp 9d can be simplified. Furthermore, if multiple valid stop positions are set, a variable stop action may be executed for the decorative symbols temporarily displayed at each valid stop position.

(Other Modifications)
Furthermore, when the variable display mode becomes a reach mode and then develops into an SP reach performance, only the number display unit 002SG051 may be moved to a predetermined position on the display screen where the SP reach performance is displayed (for example, the upper left or right side of the display screen) by a specific action including a first predetermined action in which the left and right decorative patterns that form the reach mode move toward the front side of the display screen and a second predetermined action in which the decorative patterns move toward the back side of the display screen, and in this case, it is preferable that the moving speed of the decorative patterns is faster in the second predetermined action than in the first predetermined action.

In addition, when the variable display is stopped, the decorative pattern is displayed in the number display section 002SG051 and the information display section 002SG053. When the variable display starts, the number display section 002SG051 may be able to execute a number variable start action that is different from the scrolling display, and the information display section 002SG053 may also be able to execute an information display variable start action in conjunction with the number variable start action of the number display section 002SG051. In this case, the information display variable start action may end before the number variable start action ends, causing the information display section 002SG053 to be erased.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention are also included in the present invention.

For example, in the above embodiment, an example was given in which either the first or second presentation mode can be executed in a low base state, the third presentation mode can be executed in a low-probability high base state, and the fourth presentation mode can be executed in a high-probability high base state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more presentation modes may be executable in a low base state, or three or more presentation modes may be executable in a high base state.

In addition, the above embodiment illustrates a form in which a first scrolling display in the vertical direction is executed in the first presentation mode, a second scrolling display that curves and moves from the back to the front in the second presentation mode, a rotating display in the third presentation mode, and a third scrolling display in the vertical direction in the fourth presentation mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the manner in which the decorative patterns are variable displayed in each presentation mode can be modified in various ways.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a form in which a jackpot game state is applied as an example of an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and advantageous states may also be a time-saving state, a probability variable state, a small jackpot game state, etc.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example is given in which the normal state is a low-probability, low-base state, and the special states, which are more likely to execute variable display than the normal state and have a shorter average variable display period, are a low-probability, high-base state and a high-probability, low-base state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the normal state may be a low-probability state, and the special state may be a high-probability state.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the game states are a normal state (low base state), a time-saving state (low probability high base state), and a probability variable state (high probability high base state), and an example is given of applying the present invention to a pachinko game machine 1 that can be controlled to the time-saving state or the probability variable state at the end of a jackpot game.However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention may also be applied to pachinko game machines that can be controlled to the time-saving state based on the variable display result being displayed as a specific result, which is part of the case where the variable display result is not a miss in a low probability state, or that can be controlled to the time-saving state based on the variable display being executed a predetermined number of times without being controlled to the advantageous state in a low probability state after the end of an advantageous state or RAM clear (cold start of pachinko game machine 1). In this case, for example, the time-saving state controlled after a jackpot game can be called time-saving state A, the time-saving state controlled after the end of an advantageous state or in a low-probability state after RAM clearing (a cold start of the pachinko gaming machine 1) based on the execution of a predetermined number of variable displays without being controlled to an advantageous state can be called time-saving state B, and the time-saving state controlled based on the variable display result being displayed as a specific result in some cases where the variable display result is not a miss in a low-probability state can be called time-saving state C.

Furthermore, in a pachinko gaming machine that can be controlled to enter the time-saving state C described above, multiple types of variable display results that can result in winning the time-saving state C may be provided, and the number of variable displays for which time-saving control is performed may be varied depending on the type of variable display result that results in winning the time-saving state C.

In addition, in the above embodiment, spherical gaming balls (pachinko balls) were used as an example of gaming media, but this is not limited to spherical gaming media and may also be non-spherical gaming media such as medals.

In addition, while the above embodiment applies to a pachinko gaming machine as an example of a gaming machine, the present invention can also be applied to slot machines in which, for example, a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using gaming value, one game ends when a variable display result is output to a variable display device that can variably display multiple types of individually identifiable symbols, and a prize can be awarded depending on the variable display result output to the variable display device. In the case of slot machines, the normal state corresponds to the non-AT state, the advantageous state corresponds to the big bonus, regular bonus, or assist time (AT), and the special state corresponds to assist time (AT), etc.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to enclosed gaming machines that enclose gaming media and award points based on winning, as well as slot machines. Furthermore, a gaming machine capable of playing games is one that at least allows games to be played, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, and can also be a general gaming machine.

1 ... Pachinko gaming machine 4A ... First special symbol display device 4B ... Second special symbol display device 11 ... Main board 12 ... Performance control board 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101 ... ROM
102...RAM
103...CPU
104, 104A, 104B ... random number circuit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can variably display identification information including first identification information and second identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
The display of the identification information can be variably performed based on a plurality of types of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern,
In a presentation mode including a first presentation mode and a second presentation mode , a plurality of types of background images including a first background image and a second background image can be switched and displayed;
In the first presentation mode, when the background image is switched from the first background image corresponding to the first presentation mode to the second background image corresponding to the first presentation mode , a background fade-out display is executed in which the transparency of the first background image corresponding to the first presentation mode is gradually increased, and a background fade-in display is executed in which the transparency of the second background image corresponding to the first presentation mode is gradually decreased,
In the second presentation mode, when the background image is switched from the first background image corresponding to the second presentation mode to the second background image corresponding to the second presentation mode, a background fade-out display is executed in which the transparency of the first background image corresponding to the second presentation mode is gradually increased, and a background fade-in display is executed in which the transparency of the second background image corresponding to the second presentation mode is gradually decreased,
In the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode,
the region in which the identification information is variably displayed includes at least a first region and a second region;
when starting the variable display of the identification information, starting the variable display of the first identification information in the first area and starting the variable display of the second identification information in the second area;
a first identification information fade-out display can be performed by gradually increasing the transparency of the first identification information in the first area when variable display of the first identification information is started, and a second identification information fade-out display can be performed by gradually increasing the transparency of the second identification information in the second area when variable display of the second identification information is started,
When terminating the variable display of the identification information, the variable display of the first identification information is slowed down in the first area, and the variable display of the second identification information is slowed down in the second area;
a first identification information fade-in display can be performed in which the transparency of the first identification information is gradually decreased in the first area when the variable display of the first identification information is slowed down, and a second identification information fade-in display can be performed in which the transparency of the second identification information is gradually decreased in the second area when the variable display of the second identification information is slowed down,
At least one of the fade-in display of the first identification information in the first presentation mode or the fade-in display of the second identification information in the first presentation mode and the fade-in display of the background in the first presentation mode can be executed at a specific timing ,
At least one of the fade-in display of the first identification information in the second presentation mode or the fade-in display of the second identification information in the second presentation mode and the fade-in display of the background in the second presentation mode can be executed at a predetermined timing,
The length of the execution period of the fade-in display of the first identification information in the first presentation mode and the length of the execution period of the fade-in display of the second identification information in the first presentation mode are the same,
The length of the execution period of the fade-in display of the first identification information in the second presentation mode and the length of the execution period of the fade-in display of the second identification information in the second presentation mode are the same,
a duration of the background fade-in display in the first presentation mode is longer than a duration of the first identification information fade-in display in the first presentation mode and a duration of the second identification information fade-in display in the first presentation mode;
a duration of the background fade-in display in the second presentation mode is longer than a duration of the first identification information fade-in display in the second presentation mode and a duration of the second identification information fade-in display in the second presentation mode;
When the specific identification information is variably displayed in the predetermined variable display pattern, the fade-out display of the first identification information in the first presentation mode and the fade-out display of the second identification information in the first presentation mode can be executed over a first execution period,
When the specific identification information is variably displayed in the predetermined variable display pattern, the fade-out display of the first identification information in the second presentation mode and the fade-out display of the second identification information in the second presentation mode can be executed over a second execution period different from the first execution period,
A predetermined number of pending displays corresponding to variable displays that have not yet started can be updated and displayed up to an upper limit.
the identification information includes a character representation,
As the variable display of the identification information, a scroll action and a pre-start action in which the character display moves before the start of the scroll action can be executed,
The pre-start action is executed after the pending display is updated.
A gaming machine characterized by: